YUTAKI S SERIES

Service Manual

RWM-(H)FSN3E Indoor units

RAS-H(V)RNME-AF Outdoor units
RAS-HVRN2 Outdoor unit
Contents

Contents

General Information
1
Unit installation
2
Piping work and refrigerant charge
3
Electrical wiring
4
Control system
5
User interface
6
Optional functions
7
Commissioning
8
Electrical checks of the main parts
9
Spare parts
10
Servicing
11
Troubleshooting
12

3
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 Index

Index

1. General information........................................................................................................ 1
1.1  General information..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1  General notes................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2  Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.3  Environtment-friendly units............................................................................................................................... 3

1.2  Applied symbols........................................................................................................................................... 4

1.3  Product guide.............................................................................................................................................. 5

1.3.1  Classification of indoor unit models.................................................................................................................. 5
1.3.2  Classification of outdoor unit models................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.3  Classification of Domestic Hot Water Tank accessory..................................................................................... 6
1.3.4  Product guide: indoor unit................................................................................................................................ 6
1.3.5  Product guide: outdoor unit.............................................................................................................................. 7
1.3.6  Accessory code list........................................................................................................................................... 7

2. Unit installation.............................................................................................................. 11
2.1  Outdoor unit installation............................................................................................................................. 12
2.1.1  Initial check..................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1.2  Transportation of outdoor unit........................................................................................................................ 13
2.1.3  Center of gravity............................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1.4  Factory-supplied accessories for RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF............................................................................. 15
2.1.5  Installation space............................................................................................................................................ 16
2.1.8  Installation place provision............................................................................................................................. 26
2.1.9  Optional parts and installation........................................................................................................................ 29

2.2  Indoor unit installation................................................................................................................................ 48

2.2.1  Selection of the installation location............................................................................................................... 48
2.2.2  Wall mounting procedure............................................................................................................................... 49
2.2.3  Cover assembly.............................................................................................................................................. 50
2.2.4  Drain pan assembly........................................................................................................................................ 51
2.2.5  Service space................................................................................................................................................. 51

2.3  DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank............................................................................................................ 52

2.3.1  Name of parts................................................................................................................................................. 52
2.3.2  Unit installation............................................................................................................................................... 53
2.3.3  Selection procedure for DHWT units.............................................................................................................. 53
2.3.4  Working space................................................................................................................................................ 53

V
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 Index

3. Piping work and refrigerant charge............................................................................. 55

3.1  Refrigerant and water pipe work................................................................................................................ 56
3.1.1  General notes before performing pipe work................................................................................................... 56
3.1.2  Suspension of refrigerant and water pipes..................................................................................................... 56
3.1.3  Pipe work and connection.............................................................................................................................. 57

3.2  Water pipe work and connection............................................................................................................... 67

3.2.1  General notes................................................................................................................................................. 67
3.2.2  Water piping connection................................................................................................................................. 68
3.2.3  Draining pipe work.......................................................................................................................................... 69
3.2.4  Circuit water filling-in...................................................................................................................................... 69
3.2.5  Water flow adjustment.................................................................................................................................... 69

3.3  Pressure charts......................................................................................................................................... 71

3.4  DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank............................................................................................................ 73

3.4.1  Hydraulic circuit.............................................................................................................................................. 73
3.4.2  Pressure drop................................................................................................................................................. 74

4. Electrical wiring............................................................................................................. 75
4.1  Unit electrical wiring and connection......................................................................................................... 76
4.1.1  General check................................................................................................................................................ 76
4.1.2  Electrical connection of outdoor unit.............................................................................................................. 77
4.1.3  Electrical connection of indoor unit................................................................................................................. 79

4.2  Setting of DIP switches and RSW switches............................................................................................... 87

4.2.1  Outdoor unit.................................................................................................................................................... 87
4.2.2  Indoor unit...................................................................................................................................................... 90

4.3  Common wiring.......................................................................................................................................... 97

4.3.1  Electrical wiring between outdoor and indoor unit.......................................................................................... 97
4.3.2  Wire sizes....................................................................................................................................................... 98

4.4  DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank............................................................................................................ 99

4.5  Electrical Wiring Diagrams...................................................................................................................... 106

4.5.1  Electrical wiring diagram for indoor unit....................................................................................................... 106
4.5.2  Electrical wiring diagram for outdoor unit..................................................................................................... 108

5. Control system............................................................................................................ 113

5.1  Device control system............................................................................................................................. 114

5.2  Printed circuit board................................................................................................................................. 115

5.2.1  Indoor unit.....................................................................................................................................................115
5.2.2  Outdoor unit...................................................................................................................................................116

VI
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 Index

5.3  Safety protection and control device....................................................................................................... 118

5.3.1  Indoor unit.....................................................................................................................................................118
5.3.2  Outdoor unit...................................................................................................................................................118

5.4  Standard control functions....................................................................................................................... 119

5.4.1  Indoor Unit.....................................................................................................................................................119

6. LCD user’s interface................................................................................................... 179

6.1  Description of the hardware..................................................................................................................... 180
6.1.1  Button definitions.......................................................................................................................................... 180

6.2  Comprehensive view............................................................................................................................... 180

6.3  Description of the icons........................................................................................................................... 182

6.4  Controller configuration........................................................................................................................... 184

6.5  Unit configuration..................................................................................................................................... 185

6.5.1  Operation display......................................................................................................................................... 185
6.5.2  Space heating configuration......................................................................................................................... 186
6.5.3  Space cooling configuration......................................................................................................................... 188
6.5.4  DHW............................................................................................................................................................. 190

6.6  Installer access........................................................................................................................................ 193

6.6.1  Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................... 194
6.6.2  System configuration.................................................................................................................................... 196

7. Optional functions....................................................................................................... 201

7.1  Indoor unit................................................................................................................................................202
7.1.1  Floor screed drying function (circuits 1 & 2)................................................................................................. 202
7.1.2  Automatic summer switch-off....................................................................................................................... 203
7.1.3  Pump and valve seizure protection.............................................................................................................. 204
7.1.4  DHW anti-legionella protection function....................................................................................................... 204
7.1.5  Tariff input (electrical tariff input)................................................................................................................... 205
7.1.6  Electrical heater or boiler emergency mode................................................................................................. 206
7.1.7  Step heater for 3-phase imbalance option................................................................................................... 207
7.1.8  Hydraulic separator combination.................................................................................................................. 207
7.1.9  Secondary outdoor sensor accessory.......................................................................................................... 207
7.1.10  Indoor external output signals.................................................................................................................... 208

7.2  Outdoor units...........................................................................................................................................209

7.2.1  Available ports.............................................................................................................................................. 209
7.2.2  Configuration.................................................................................................................................................211
7.2.3  Description of optional output signals........................................................................................................... 213

VII
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 Index

8. Commissioning............................................................................................................ 215
8.1  Preliminary check.................................................................................................................................... 216
8.1.1  Checking the unit.......................................................................................................................................... 216
8.1.2  Electrical checking........................................................................................................................................ 216
8.1.3  Hydraulic circuit checking............................................................................................................................. 216
8.1.4  Checking the Refrigerant circuit................................................................................................................... 217

8.2  Commissioning procedure....................................................................................................................... 217

8.3  Indoor unit test run................................................................................................................................... 218

8.4  Outdoor unit test run................................................................................................................................ 219

9. Electrical checks of the main parts........................................................................... 221

9.1  Inverter....................................................................................................................................................222
9.1.1  Specifications of inverter.............................................................................................................................. 222
9.1.2  Inverter time chart........................................................................................................................................ 224
9.1.3  Protective function........................................................................................................................................ 225
9.1.4  Overload control........................................................................................................................................... 226

9.2  Thermistor................................................................................................................................................227

9.3  Electronic expansion valve...................................................................................................................... 230

9.3.1  Electronic expansion valve for the outdoor unit............................................................................................ 230
9.3.2  Electronic expansion valve for the indoor unit.............................................................................................. 231

9.4  High pressure protection device.............................................................................................................. 232

9.5  Noise filter (NF)....................................................................................................................................... 233

9.5.1  Noise filter for 1~.......................................................................................................................................... 233
9.5.2  Noise filter for 3N~....................................................................................................................................... 234

9.6  Capacitor (CB1, CB2).............................................................................................................................. 234

9.7  Reactor (DCL).........................................................................................................................................235

9.7.1  Reactor (DCL) for 1~ . ................................................................................................................................. 235
9.7.2  Reactor (DCL) for 3N~ ................................................................................................................................ 235

9.8  Scroll compressor.................................................................................................................................... 236

10. Spare parts................................................................................................................. 237

10.1  Outdoor units......................................................................................................................................... 238
10.1.1  RAS-2HVRN2............................................................................................................................................. 238
10.1.2  RAS-3HVRNME-AF................................................................................................................................... 240
10.1.3  RAS-(4-6)HVRNME-AF.............................................................................................................................. 243
10.1.4  RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF................................................................................................................................ 246
10.1.5  RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF.............................................................................................................................. 249

10.2  Indoor units............................................................................................................................................252

VIII
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 Index

11. Servicing.................................................................................................................... 257

11.1  Outdoor unit...........................................................................................................................................258
11.1.1  RAS-2HVRN2............................................................................................................................................. 258
11.1.2  RAS-3HVRNME-AF.................................................................................................................................... 265
11.1.3  RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF............................................................................................................................ 276
11.1.4  RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF............................................................................................................................... 292

11.2  Indoor unit..............................................................................................................................................308

11.2.1  Removing service cover............................................................................................................................. 308
11.2.2  Replacing electrical components................................................................................................................ 309
11.2.3  Replacing hydraulic components................................................................................................................ 314
11.2.4  Replacing refrigerant parts......................................................................................................................... 322

12. Troubleshooting........................................................................................................ 327

12.1  Troubleshooting procedure.................................................................................................................... 328
12.1.1  Alarm code................................................................................................................................................. 328
12.1.2  Troubleshooting by alarm code.................................................................................................................. 331
12.1.3  Troubleshooting in check mode.................................................................................................................. 398
12.1.4  Troubleshooting using the 7 segment display (outdoor unit)...................................................................... 399
12.1.5  Procedure of checking other main parts..................................................................................................... 405

IX
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

1. General information

Index 1
1.1. General information.................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1. General notes............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2. Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.3. Environtment-friendly units........................................................................................................................... 3

1.2. Applied symbols....................................................................................................................................... 4

1.3. Product guide........................................................................................................................................... 5

1.3.1. Classification of indoor unit models.............................................................................................................. 5
1.3.2. Classification of outdoor unit models............................................................................................................ 5
1.3.3. Classification of Domestic Hot Water Tank accessory.................................................................................. 6
1.3.4. Product guide: indoor unit............................................................................................................................. 6
1.3.5. Product guide: outdoor unit.......................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.6. Accessory code list....................................................................................................................................... 7

1
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

1.1  General information

1.1.1  General notes

No part of this publication may be reproduced, copied, filed or transmitted in any shape or form without the permission of
HITACHI Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A.
Within the policy of continuous improvement of its products, HITACHI Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A. reserves the
right to make changes at any time without prior notification and without being compelled to introducing them into products
subsequently sold. This document may therefore have been subject to amendments during the life of the product.
HITACHI makes every effort to offer correct, up-to-date documentation. Despite this, printing errors cannot be controlled by
HITACHI and are not its responsibility.
As a result, some of the images or data used to illustrate this document may not refer to specific models. No claims will be
accepted based on the data, illustrations and descriptions included in this manual.
No type of modification must be made to the equipment without prior, written authorisation from the manufacturer.

1.1.2  Introduction

Yutaki S indoor unit has two different ranges:

-- Heating and cooling version (RWM-(2.0-10.0)FSN3E)
-- Heating only version (RWM-(2.0-10.0)HFSN3E).
All the information in this manual, related to cooling operation, only applies to heating and cooling version (RWM-(2.0-10.0)
FSN3E).
The HITACHI’s YUTAKI S system is a heating and cooling solution for the home with high energy efficiency. The system
consists of an outdoor unit (Inverter heat pump) and an indoor unit hydraulic module. The heat pump absorbs/sends heat
from/to the outside, and transfers it to the water circuit through the indoor unit hydraulic module.
YUTAKI S can be used both in winter time and in summer time, integrating heating and cooling systems, creating an air-
conditioned system and using just one energy source, the electricity.

 
For winter time

With the aim of reducing energy expenditure, there is a clear trend in the market to use medium and low temperature hea-
ting systems. Technological advances and improvements in insulation in the home enable to use of low temperature water
to heat homes. This results in more comfort and greater energy efficiency.
YUTAKI S meets the necessary conditions to provide this type of application, fulfilling user’s needs.
The heat pump extracts the heat present in the air, increases its refrigerant temperature and transmits it to the water circuit
by means of indoor unit plate heat exchanger, where the heat is taken to radiators/(fan-coils), underfloor heating compo-
nents or both (2nd temperature area).
As well as increased efficiency and reduced CO2 emissions due to the extraction of free heat from the outside air, the sys-
tem also boasts proven reliability and minimum maintenance. YUTAKI S provides a comfortable atmosphere all year long,
even in the coldest climates by means of the following system configuration possibilities:
• Mono-valent system: This is the most popular configuration. The air to water heat pump is sized to provide 80% of the
heating requirements on the coldest day of the year. An auxiliary electric heater (inside the unit) is used to provide the
additional heating required on cold days. This option usually results in an ideal balance between installation costs and
future energy consumption, as proven by its popularity in colder climates than ours, such as Sweden and Norway.
• Mono-energy system: The air to water heat pump is sized to provide 100% of the heating requirements on the coldest
day the year.

• Alternating Bi-valent system: For installations with an existing heating system by boiler and when is needed to heat the
supplied water temperature to the circuit up to high temperatures (80ºC), the boiler can be configured to alternate with
the air to water heat pump.

2
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

 
For summer time

YUTAKI S system can be also used as cooling system for combination with fan-coils, refreshing floor or both (2nd tem-
perature area).
For fan-coils: It is possible to cool the water up to 5ºC.

1
For refreshing floor: It is possible to cool the water up to temperatures between 16 and 22ºC.

 
Domestic Hot Water (DHW) production

YUTAKI S also gives the option of sanitary hot water production, allowing the user to benefit from the heat pump’s high
efficiency and achieve hot water up to 70ºC. This is made possible by a Domestic Hot Water Tank accessory supplied by
HITACHI, which is heated in the heat pump at temperatures below 60ºC, using water pre-heated. An electric heater inte-
grated at the top of the stainless steel tank, increases the temperature in accordance with the user’s needs.

 
Additional combinations

YUTAKI S system can be used for the following additional combinations:

Solar combination for DHW

YUTAKI S system can be combined with solar panel.
The solar combination will enable to heat up the DHW by means of the sun. The solar combination is designed to transfer
the heat from the solar panels (sun radiation) to the heat exchanger of DHW tank.

Swimming pool operation

For summer sesion period, YUTAKI S can be used to heat up the swimming pool water temperature up to a value between
24 and 33ºC.

1.1.3  Environtment-friendly units

The new HITACHI’s YUTAKI S series uses environmentally-friendly R410A gas refrigerant, and the RoHS and Green Dot
regulations are applied throughout the manufacturing and installation process to reflect HITACHI’s awareness of environ-
mental respect and commitment.
R410A is totally environmentally-friendly since it does not contain any substances that damage the ozone layer:
ODP (ozone depleting product) =0.
HITACHI’s YUTAKI S series are very efficient and allow significant energy savings compared with conventional systems.
This energy efficiency means less production of CO2, which causes the greenhouse effect.

3
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

1.2  Applied symbols

During normal air conditioning system design work or unit installation, greater attention must be paid in certain situations
requiring particular care in order to avoid damage to the unit, the installation or the building or property.
Situations that jeopardise the safety of those in the surrounding area or that put the unit itself at risk will be clearly indicated
in this manual.
To indicate these situations, a series of special symbols will be used to clearly identify these situations.
Pay close attention to these symbols and to the messages following them, as your safety and that of others depends on it.

DANGER
• The text following this symbol contains information and instructions relating directly to your safety and phy-
sical wellbeing.
• Not taking these instructions into account could lead to serious, very serious or even fatal injuries to you and
others in the proximities of the unit.
In the texts following the danger symbol you can also find information on safe procedures during unit installation.

CAUTION
• The text following this symbol contains information and instructions relating directly to your safety and phy-
sical wellbeing.
• Not taking these instructions into account could lead to minor injuries to you and others in the proximities of
the unit.
• Not taking these instructions into account could lead to unit damage.
In the texts following the caution symbol you can also find information on safe procedures during unit installation.

NOTE
• The text following this symbol contains information or instructions that may be of use or that require a more
thorough explanation.
• Instructions regarding inspections to be made on unit parts or systems may also be included.

4
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

1.3  Product guide

1.3.1  Classification of indoor unit models
Unit type (indoor unit water module)
Position-separating hyphen (fixed)
Compressor power (HP): 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0.
H: Only heating unit
System Free
1
R410A refrigerant
Series
E: Made in Europe
RWM - X.X X FS N 3 E

1.3.2  Classification of outdoor unit models

 
RAS-HVRN2
Unit type (outdoor unit)
Position-separating hyphen (fixed)
Compressor power (HP): 2.
Heat pump
V: Single phase unit (1~ 230V 50Hz)
-: Three phase unit (3N~ 400V 50Hz)
Inverter system
R410A refrigerant
Series
-: Made in Japan
RAS - X H X R N 2 X

 
RAS-H(V)RNME-AF
Unit type (outdoor unit)
Position-separating hyphen (fixed)
Compressor power (HP): 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10.
Heat pump
V: Single phase unit (1~ 230V 50Hz)
-: Three phase unit (3N~ 400V 50Hz)
Inverter system
R410A refrigerant
IVX series
E: Made in Europe
YUTAKI S
RAS - X H X R N M E -AF

1.3.3  Classification of Domestic Hot Water Tank accessory

Unit type: Domestic Hot Water Tank
Capacity (L) 200-300 Litres
Tank type: E=Enamelled
S=Stainless
Position-separating hyphen (fixed)
2.5 kW Electrical Heater
Series
E = Made in Europe
DHWT XXX X - H 1 E

5
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

1.3.4  Product guide: indoor unit

RWM-FSN3E indoor units

1~ 3N~
Unit Code Unit Code

RWM-2.0FSN3E 7E474003 - -

RWM-3.0FSN3E 7E474005 - -

RWM-4.0FSN3E 7E474107 RWM-4.0FSN3E 7E474107

RWM-5.0FSN3E 7E474108 RWM-5.0FSN3E 7E474108

RWM-6.0FSN3E 7E474109 RWM-6.0FSN3E 7E474109

- - RWM-8.0FSN3E 7E474110

- - RWM-10.0FSN3E 7E474111

RWM-HFSN3E indoor units

1~ 3N~
Unit Code Unit Code

RWM-2.0HFSN3E 7E474016 - -

RWM-3.0HFSN3E 7E474018 - -

RWM-4.0HFSN3E 7E474120 RWM-4.0HFSN3E 7E474120

RWM-5.0HFSN3E 7E474121 RWM-5.0HFSN3E 7E474121

RWM-6.0HFSN3E 7E474122 RWM-6.0HFSN3E 7E474122

- - RWM-8.0HFSN3E 7E474123

- - RWM-10.0HFSN3E 7E474124

6
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

1.3.5  Product guide: outdoor unit

RAS-H(V)RNME-AF outdoor units

RAS-HVRNME-AF units RAS-HRNME-AF units

1
1~ 3N~

Unit Code Unit Code

RAS-2HVRN2 60288093 - -

RAS-3HVRNME-AF 7E300018 - -

RAS-4HVRNME-AF 7E300020 RAS-4HRNME-AF 7E300120

RAS-5HVRNME-AF 7E300021 RAS-5HRNME-AF 7E300121

RAS-6HVRNME-AF 7E300022 RAS-6HRNME-AF 7E300122

- - RAS-8HRNME-AF 7E317110

- - RAS-10HRNME-AF 7E317111

1.3.6  Accessory code list

 
Room Thermostats

Accessory Name Code Figure

ON/OFF Thermostat
ATW-RTU-01 7E543000
(Receiver + Room Thermostat)

“Intelligent” Thermostat
ATW-RTU-02 7E549900
(Receiver + Room Thermostat)

2nd temperature Thermostat

ATW-RTU-03 (Only Room Thermostat) 7E549901
*Only for “Intelligent” Thermostat application

7
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 1  General information

 
Other accessories

Accessory Name Code Figure

ATW-HSK-01 7E549905
Hydraulic separator
(BDHM1) (BDHM1)

ATW-3WV-01 7E549906
3-way valve
(VID3V1) (VID3V1)

ATW-AQT-01 7E549907
Aquastat
(ASMSH1) (ASMSH1)

ATW-2KT-01 7E549904
2nd temperature kit
(CDH2Z1) (CDH2Z1)

NEW Mixing valve motor 7E549912

ATW-MVM-01

Drain pan kit

ATW-DPK-01 7E549902
(For RWM-(2.0-6.0)FSN3E)

Drain pan kit

NEW (For RWM-(8.0/10.0)FSN3E)
7E549903
ATW-DPK-02

Auxilliary output signal box

ATW-AOS-01 7E549910
(Relay board for additional output signals)

Ambient temperature sensor

ATW-2OS-01 7E549909
(2nd outdoor temperature sensor)

Water temperature sensor

ATW-WTS-02 7E549911
(2nd temperature control, boiler combination)

ATW-SPS-01 Swimming pool sensor 7E549908

8
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
1  General information

Accessory Name Code Figure

Water temperature sensor

ATW-WTS-02Y 9E500004
(for Domestic Hot Water Tank)

DHWT200E-2.5H1E Domestic Hot Water Tank Enamelled (200 L.) 70544000 1

DHWT300E-2.5H1E Domestic Hot Water Tank Enamelled (300 L.) 70544001

DHWT200S-2.5H1E Domestic Hot Water Tank Stainless (200 L.) 70544100

DHWT300S-2.5H1E Domestic Hot Water Tank Stainless (300 L.) 70544101

Permanent cathode protection for enamelled tank

DHWT-CP-01 70544900
(200 L.)

Permanent cathode protection for enamelled tank

DHWT-CP-03 70544903
(300 L.)

Permanent cathode protection for stainless tank

DHWT-CP-02 70544901
(200 L.)

Permanent cathode protection for stainless tank

DHWT-CP-04 70544904
(300 L.)

DHWT-SWG-01 Security valve 70544902

9
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2. Unit installation

Index

2.1. Outdoor unit installation......................................................................................................................... 10

2.1.1. Initial check................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1.2.
2.1.3.
Transportation of outdoor unit.....................................................................................................................11
Center of gravity......................................................................................................................................... 12
2
2.1.4. Factory-supplied accessories for RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF.......................................................................... 13
2.1.5. Installation space........................................................................................................................................ 14
2.1.6. Installation place provision......................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.7. Optional parts and installation.................................................................................................................... 27

2.2. Indoor unit installation............................................................................................................................ 46

2.2.1. Selection of the installation location........................................................................................................... 46
2.2.2. Wall mounting procedure............................................................................................................................ 47
2.2.3. Cover assembly.......................................................................................................................................... 48
2.2.4. Drain pan assembly.................................................................................................................................... 49
2.2.5. Service space............................................................................................................................................. 49

2.3. DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank......................................................................................................... 50

2.3.1. Name of parts............................................................................................................................................. 50
2.3.2. Unit installation........................................................................................................................................... 51
2.3.3. Selection procedure for DHWT units.......................................................................................................... 51
2.3.4. Working space............................................................................................................................................ 51

11
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1  Outdoor unit installation

2.1.1  Initial check

C aution
• Install the outdoor unit with sufficient clearance around it for operation and maintenance as shown in the next
pages.
• Install the outdoor unit where good ventilation is available.
• Do not install the outdoor unit where exists a high level of oil mist, salty air or sulphurous atmosphere.
• Install the outdoor unit as far as practical (being at least 3 meters) from electromagnetic wave radiator, such
as medical equipment.
• Keep clearance between units of more than 50 mm, and avoid obstacles that could hamper air intake, when
installing more than one unit together.
• Install the outdoor unit in the shade or not exposed to direct sunshine or direct radiation from high tempera-
ture heat source.
• Do not install the outdoor unit in a place where a seasonal wind directly blows into the outdoor fan.
• For cleaning, use non-inflammable and nontoxic cleaning liquid. Use of inflammable agent may cause explo-
sion or fire.
• Work with sufficient ventilation, for working in an enclosed space could cause oxygen deficiency. Toxic gas
may be produced when cleaning agent is heated to high temperature by, e.g., being exposed to fire.
• Cleaning liquid shall be collected after cleaning.
• Pay attention not to clamp cables when attaching the service cover to avoid electric shock or fire.
• Check the foundation to be flat, leveled and strongly enough.
• Install the unit in a restricted area not accessible by the general public.
• Aluminium fins have very sharp edges. Pay attention to the fins in order to avoid injury.
• Do not install the indoor units in a flammable environment to avoid a fire or an explosion.
• Do not install the indoor units, outdoor unit, within approximately 3 meters from strong electromagnetic wave
radiators, such as medical equipment.
• Do not install the indoor units in a machinery shop or kitchen, where vapor from oil or mist flows to the indoor
units. In the worst case, the oil damages the plastic parts of the indoor unit.
• This appliances are not intended for use by people (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or men-
tal capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision and instruction
concerning the use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.
• Turn OFF all power switches before maintenance is performed.
• Do not start the cleaning procedures before 5 minutes of the stop of the unit.

12
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1.2  Transportation of outdoor unit

D anger
Do not put any foreign material into the outdoor unit and check to ensure that none exists in the outdoor unit
before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire or failure will occur.

 
Hanging method

2
When hanging the unit, ensure the balance of the unit, check safety and lift it up smoothly. Do not remove any packing
materials and hang the unit under packing condition with two ropes, as shown in the figure.

RAS-2HVRN2 RAS-(4-10)H(V)RNME-AF

RAS-3HVRNME-AF
Over 60º
Wire rope
Over 60º
Wire rope 0.7 to 1.0 m
0.7 to 1.0 m

Do not remove the plastic band Do not remove the plastic band
or the corrugate paper frame or the corrugate paper frame

Pass the wire ropes through

each lifting hole in the wooden Pass the wire ropes
base as shown through each lifting
hole in the wooden
base as shown

C aution
• Lift the outdoor unit in its factory packaging with 2 wire ropes.
• For safety reasons ensure that the outdoor unit is lifted smoothly and does not lean.
• Do not attach lifting equipment to the plastic band or the corrugated paper frame, because of the ropes will
slip or break the materials.
• Ensure that the exterior of the unit is adequately protected with cloth or paper.

13
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1.3  Center of gravity

 
Hanging method

When hanging the unit ensure the balance of the unit check safety and lift it up smoothly. Do not remove any packing
materials and hang the unit under packing condition with two ropes as shown below. At leat two persons are needed to
move the unit.

1
a. 515 mm
RAS-2HVRN2 b. 180 mm
h
h. 275 mm

a b

1
a. 590 mm
RAS-3HVRNME-AF b. 185 mm
h. 370 mm h

a b

1
a. 615 mm
RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF b. 190 mm
h. 570 mm h

a b

1
a. 690 mm
RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF b. 200 mm
h. 620 mm
h

a b

1 Center of gravity

14
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1.4  Factory-supplied accessories for RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF

Make sure that the following accessories are packed with the unit.

NOTE
If any of these accessories are not packed with the unit please contact your dealer.

Accessory Appearance Quantity

Gasket 1 2
Pipe flange for refrigerant gas piping 1

Ring core 1

Cable tie 1

Compressed sheet 1

15
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1.5  Installation space

-- RAS-2HVRN2

Blocked in Inlet Side

Upper Side Open
Single Installation Multiple Installation (Two units or more)

Pipe Cover Pipe Cover

Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover Allow 250 mm of space between units. Leave open both right and
side. left sides.

Pipe Cover Pipe Cover

Be sure to use the fan direction guide.

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Leave open both right
and left sides. Allow 250 mm of service space between units. Leave open both
right and left sides. When subject to direct sunlight on the back wall
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover ensure the length marked with . be 400 or greater.
side.
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
Upper Side Blocked
Single Installation Multiple Installation (Two units or more)

Pipe Cover
Pipe Cover

Fifteen mm of space is acceptable for one of the lateral sides. Allow 250 mm of service space between units. Leave open both
right and left sides.
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover
side. Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Leave open both right Be sure to use the fan direction guide.
and left sides. Allow 250 mm of service space between units. Leave open both
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover right and left sides. Serial installation allowed up to two units.
side. Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.

16
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Blocked in Inlet Side

The length A is as show in the following table:

L A
0<L=1/2H 500 or greater
1/2H<L≤H 1000 or greater

When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H.

Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed.

Outlet Side Blocked

Upper Side Open
2
Single Installation Multiple Installation (Two units or more)

Pipe Cover Pipe Cover

Allow 250 mm of service space between units. Both right and left
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
sides shall be open.

Pipe Cover

Pipe Cover

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Leave open both right and Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 250 mm of service
left sides. space between units. Serial installation allowed up to two units.
Leave open both right and left sides.
The length A is as show in the following table: The length A is as show in the following table:

L A L A
0<L=1/2H 100 or greater 0<L=1/2H 150 or greater
1/2H<L≤H 200 or greater 1/2H<L≤H 250 or greater

When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H. When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H.
Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed.

17
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Lateral Side Blocked

Upper Side Open
Single Installation

Pipe Cover
Pipe Cover

Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover

Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
side.
Upper Side Blocked

Pipe Cover

Pipe Cover

Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover

Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
side.

18
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Single Installation Multiple Installation

Blocked in Inlet Side

Pipe Cover
Pipe Cover

Allow 250 mm of service space between units. Serial sideways

2
installation allowed up to two units.
Close the part A not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to
avoid the drain water from upper unit falling on the lower unit. Leave open both right and left sides. Close the part A not to allow
the outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water from upper
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side. unit falling on the lower unit.
Allow 400 mm of service space above the top board. Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
Allow 400 mm of service space above the top board.
Outlet Side Blocked

Pipe Cover Pipe Cover

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 250 mm of service

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Close the part A not to space between units. Serial side way installation allowed but
allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water from leave open both right and left sides. Close the part A not to allow
upper unit falling on the lower unit. the outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water from upper
unit falling on the lower unit.
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
Allow 400 mm of service space above the top board.
Allow 400 mm of service space above the top board.

Multiple Installation in Multiple Rows

Ensure 250 mm or more of the side space on the pipe cover side.
Allow 400 mm of service space above the top board.
The length A is as show in the following table:

L A
0<L=1/2H 150 or greater
1/2H<L≤H 250 or greater

When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H. Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Be sure to use the fan
direction guide in order to ensure the length marked with ..

NOTE
• All units are in (mm).
• Do not stack more than two units in height.
• Close gap (*) to avoid recirculating discharge air flow.

19
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF

Blocked in Inlet Side

Upper Side Open
Single Installation Multiple Installation (Two units or more)

100 mm or more of the side space is acceptable on the service cover Allow 100 mm of space between units. Leave open both right and left
side. Dimensions in ( ) shows numbers especially for IVX 4-10 HP. 150 sides.
or more (200 or more) of the back space is acceptable when the right
and left sides are open. Dimensions in ( ) shows numbers especially for IVX 4-10 HP.

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 100 mm of space

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Leave open both right and between units. Leave open both right and left sides.
left sides. When subject to direct sunlight on the back wall ensure the length
marked with . be 500 or greater.
Upper Side Blocked
Single Installation Multiple Installation (Two units or more)

100 mm or more of the side space is acceptable on the service Allow 100 mm of space between units. Leave open both right and
cover side. left sides.
Dimensions in ( ) shows numbers especially for IVX 4-10 HP. Dimensions in ( ) shows numbers especially for IVX 4-10 HP.

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 100 mm of space

Be sure to use the fan direction guide.
between units. Leave open both right and left sides.
Leave open both right and left sides.
Serial installation allowed up to two units.

20
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Blocked in Inlet Side

The length A is as shown in the following table:

L A
0 < L ≤ 1/2H 600 or greater
1/2H < L≤ H 1200 or greater

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 100 mm of space between units. Leave open both right and left sides. Serial installation
allowed up to two units.

Outlet Side Blocked

Upper Side Open 2
Single Installation Multiple Installation (Two units or more)

Allow 100 mm of space between units. Both right and left sides
shall be open.

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 100 mm of space

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Leave open both right and
between units. Serial installation allowed up to two units. Leave
left sides.
open both right and left sides.
The length A is as shown in the following table: The length A is as shown in the following table:

L A L A
0 < L ≤ 1/2H ≤ 200 0 < L ≤ 1/2H ≤ 250
1/2H < L≤ H ≤ 300 1/2H < L≤ H ≤ 350

When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H. When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H.
Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed.

21
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Lateral Side Blocked

Upper Side Open
Single Installation

Upper Side Blocked

Stack installation (allowed up to 2 Units)

Upper Side Open
Single Installation Multiple Installation

Allow 100 mm of space between units. Serial sideways installa-

Close the part A not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to tion allowed up to two units. Leave open both right and left sides.
avoid the drain water from upper unit falling on the lower unit. Close the part A not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to
avoid the drain water from upper unit falling on the lower unit.
Upper Side Blocked
Single Installation Multiple Installation

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 100 mm of space

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Close the part A not to between units. Serial side way installation allowed. but leave
allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water from open both right and left sides. Close the part A not to allow the
upper unit falling on the lower unit. outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water from upper
unit falling on the lower unit.

22
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Multiple Installation in Multiple Rows

Serial Installation in Multiple Rows (E.g. Rooftop)

Allow approx. 100 mm of space from the side unit. Leave open
both right and left sides.
The length A is as shown in the following table:

L A
0 < L ≤ 1/2H ≤ 200
1/2H < L≤ H ≤ 300
2
NOTE
When L > H use a base for outdoor unit to make L = H. Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Be
sure to use the fan direction guide in order to ensure the length marked with ..

23
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF

Single
Singleinstallation
Single
Single
installation
installation
Single installation
Single installation
installation
Single installation Single installation
Single
Single
Single installation
installation
Single
installation installation
Around
Around side
Aroundsides
Around
Around
Single
Single are
sidesare
sides open
are open
sides
are
open
installation
Around
installation
Around sides
Around open
are
areopen
sides
sidesare
areopen
open open Around
Around sides
Around
Around
Around
sidessides
are
sides
are
sides
Around
Around areare
open
open
sides
Around open
with
open
are
sides
arewith
sidesopen
with
are with
obstacles obstacles
obstacles
open
are with above
obstacles
open
with
open obstacles
withabove
above
obstacles
with above
above
obstacles
above
obstacles above
above
Around
Around
Around
Single
Single sides
sides
Around
Single
sides are
are
installation are
open open
sides are open
installation
installationopen Around
Around
Around sidessides
sides
Around
are are
areopen
openopen
sides arewith
with
with obstacles
open
obstacles
obstacleswithaboveabove
above
obstacles above
Single
Single installation
installation
Around
Around sidessides are open
are open Around
Around sidessides are open
are open with with obstacles
obstacles aboveabove
Around
Around Around
sides
sides
are sides
are
open
Around
Aroundopen areare
sides
sides open
areopen
open Around
Around Around
sides
sides
are
Aroundsides
are
open
Around open are
with
sides
sides open
with with
obstacles
are
areobstacles
open
open obstacles
above
with
withabove above
obstacles
obstaclesabove
above

Around
Around
Around sides
Around
Around
sides
sides are
sides
are
Around
Around closed
sides
are
closed
sides
Around
are closed closed
are
areclosed
sides
sides are
areclosed
closed
closed
Around
Around
Around sidessides
sides
Around are
areclosed
are closed
closed
sides are closed
Around
Around sidessides are closed
are closed
Around
Around Around
sides
sides
are sides
are
Aroundclosed
Around closed
sidesareare
sides closed
areclosed
closed

Around
Aroundsides
Around
Around
sidesare
sides
are
Around
Around open
sides
are
open
sides
Around with
open
are
sides
are
sides obstacles
with
open
with
areobstacles
open
are with
open
with
open above
obstacles
obstacles
withabove
above
obstacles
with above
obstacles
above
obstacles above
above
AroundAround
sides
Around
Around sidessides
are
sides open
Around are
areopen
are openopen
with
sides arewith
with
with obstacles
obstacles
open above
obstacles
obstacleswithaboveabove
above
obstacles above
Around
Around sidessides are open
are open with with obstacles
obstacles aboveabove
Around
Around Around
sides
sides
are
Aroundsides
are
open
Around open
sidesare
with
sides open
with with
obstacles
are
areobstacles
open
open obstacles
above
with
withabove above
obstacles
obstaclesabove
above

Multiple
Multipleinstallation
Multiple
Multiple
installation
installation
Multiple installation
Multiple installation
installation
Multiple installation
Multiple
Multiple
Multiple installation
installation
Multiple
installation installation
Around
Aroundsides
Around
Around
sides
Multiple
Multiple are
sides
areopen
sides
are
open
open
are
installation
Around
installation
Around sides
Around sides
are
sidesopen
are
areopen
open open Multiple installation
Around
Around
Around
Multiple
Multiple sides
sides
Around
Multiple
sides are
installation are
areopen
installationopen open
sides are open
installation
Around sides Multiple
Around
Around sidessides open installation
Multiple
are are open
are open
installation
Around
Around Around
sides
sides
are sides
are
open
Around
Aroundopen areare
sides
sides open
areopen
open

Around
Aroundsides
Around
Around
sidesare
sides
are
Around
Around open
sides
are
open
sides
Around with
open
are
sides
are
sides obstacles
with
open
with
areobstacles
open
are with
open
with
open above
obstacles
obstacles
withabove
above
obstacles
with above
obstacles
above
obstacles Multi-Row
above
aboveMulti-Row
Multi-Row
Multi-Row
Multi-Row
Multi-Row
Multi-Row
Around
Around
Around sidessides
sides
Around
are are
areopen
openopen
sides arewith
with
with obstacles
open
obstacles
obstacleswithaboveabove
above
obstacles Multi-Row
Multi-Row
aboveMulti-Row Multi-Row
AroundAround
Around sides
sides sides
areare
openarewith
open open
with with obstacles
obstacles
obstacles aboveaboveabove Multi-Row
Multi-Row
Multi-Row
Around
Around Around
sides
sides
are
Aroundsides
are
open
Around open
sidesare
with
sides open
with with
obstacles
are
areobstacles
open
open obstacles
above
with
withabove above
obstacles
obstaclesaboveMulti-Row
above Multi-Row
Multi-RowMulti-Row
Multi-Row

NOTE
• All units are in mm. • In this situation ensure that the base is closed and
• Do not stack more than two units in the height. does not allow the airflow to short circuit.
• If L is larger than H mount the units on a base so • In each case install the outdoor unit so that the dis-
that H is equal or greater than L. charge flow is not short-circuited.
• When the installation dimension results the one
-- H: Unit height (1650 mm) + base concret height.
marked with an (*) mount the air flow guide
L A B
0 < L ≤ 1/2 H 600 or more 300 or more
1/2H < L ≤ H — —

24
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Stack installation (allowed up to 2 Units)

Single Installation Multiple Installation
Blocked in Inlet Side

2
Allow 100 mm of space between units. Serial sideways installa-
Close the part A not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to tion allowed up to two units. Leave open both right and left sides.
avoid the drain water from upper unit falling on the lower unit. Close the part A not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to
avoid the drain water from upper unit falling on the lower unit
Outlet Side Blocked

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Allow 100mm of space

Be sure to use the fan direction guide. Close the part A not to
between units. Serial sideway installation allowed. but leave
allow the outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water
open both right and left sides. Close the part A not to allow the
from upper unit falling on the lower unit.
outlet air bypassed. Install to avoid the drain water from upper
unit falling on the lower unit.
Multiple Installation in Multiple Rows
Serial Installation in Multiple Rows (E.g. Rooftop)

Allow approx. 100 mm of space from the side unit.

Leave open both right and left sides.

The length A is as shown in the following table:

H
L L A

0<L≤1/2H ≤200

1/2H<L≤H ≤300

N ote
When L > H, use a base for outdoor unit to make L ≤ H. Close the base not to allow the outlet air bypassed. Be
sure to use the fan direction guide in order to ensure the length marked with .

• Do not stack more than two units in height.

25
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1.8  Installation place provision

 
Concrete foundation

1 When installing the outdoor unit, fix the unit by anchor bolts.
Air flow direction Base of
outdoor unit

Nut
Special washer
(Accessory)
* M10 (RAS-2HVRN2, RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF)
Max. 21 mm **

Anchor bolt M12 (RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF)

M12 *
** < 17 mm (RAS-2HVRN2)
Filled mortar
< 21 mm (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)

Fix the outdoor unit to the anchor bolts by special washer.

Please, refer to the following figure regarding the location of fixing holes:

RAS-2HVRN2 RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

M10 Hole for anchor bolt (Ø12) Pipe cover
2-16x33 Slot

25
420
470
(mm)
Anchor bolt
Front side M10
Ø16 Hole for 100 100 *170
(Ø12.5 hole)

25
anchor bolt 265 570 265
(M12)

N ote
*: Space for downward piping.
Example of fixing outdoor unit by anchor bolts.
Max. 21mm *
(After cut "A)

A
Cut this portion when this
type of anchor bolt is used.
If not, it is difficult to remove
the service cover.
* < 17 mm (RAS-2HVRN2)
Concrete Anchor bolt < 21 mm (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)
2 Fix the outdoor unit firmly so that declining, making noise, and falling down by strong wind or earthquake is avoided.
Fixing plate (field-supplied) Both sides on the unit
fixing can be possible.

When the vibration measures

116

are necessary, add vibration

proof rubber. (Field-supplied)
Model A B
75 RAS-2HVRN2
529
RAS-3HVRNME-AF 116
A

RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF 1109
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF 1173 110

26
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

3 During the heating or defrosting operations, drain water is discharged from the unit.
When installing the unit, the location with good drainage should be selected, or establish the drainage.
It is recommended not to install the unit at high place such as on a roof or a veranda, because the water may drip from the
unit.
If the unit installation at high place is not avoidable, the drain water should be treated surely by installing additional drain
pan. (Especially in water, the drain water may be frozen and cause of injury by slipping.)

4 In case of the drain piping is necessary for the outdoor unit, use the drain-kit (DBS-26 or DBS-26L: Optional Parts).
RAS-2HVRN2
Drain hole (30x80)
RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF

Drain hole (4-Ø24)

Drain hole (Ø26)
Drain boss (optional part)
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF
Air inlet Drain hole
(3-Ø24)
2
69 224 239 Attaching position 68 396 165 360

66
84 348
93.5 140

127 73
Front side Drain hole (2-Ø26)
Drain hole (3-30x80) (Air discharge side) (Drain boss attaching position)

5 The whole base of the outdoor unit should be installed on a foundation or frame. When using vibration-proof material,
it should also be positioned in the same place.
When installing the outdoor unit on a field supplied frame, use metal plates to adjust the frame width for stable installation
as shown in the figure below.

INCORRECT CORRECT

A A
Outdoor unit base width
Outdoor unit base width

Outdoor unit is Outdoor unit is

unstable stable

Frame Metal plate

Frame

60mm
100 mm or more
Frame width
(Field supplied) Metal plate

Model A
RAS-2HVRN2 57
RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF 70
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF 100

Recommended metal plate size (Field supplied)

• Material: Hot-rolled mild steel plate (SPHC)
• Plate thickness: 4.5 T

Model B C
2- Long hole
RAS-2HVRN2 320 (460)
RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF 410 (550)
B
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF 420 (560)
C

27
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

 
Suspended unit

1 Suspend the unit as the drawing indicates. Wall bracket (*)

2 Ensure that wall can resist the Outdoor unit weight indi-
cated in specification label plate.
3 It is recommended to select each foot support to bear
the full weight of the unit (in order to consider stress
Anchor Bolts (*)
fatigue applied when unit is working too).

(*) Field supplied

C aution
Pay attention to the following for installation:
• Installation shall ensure that outdoor unit will not incline, vibrate, make noise or fall down by a blast of wind
or in an earthquake. Calculate quake-resistance strength to ensure that installation is strong enough against
falling. Fix the unit with wires (field supplied) when installing in a location without walls or windbreak and likely
exposed to a blast of wind.
• To use a vibration-proof mat, fix four places to the front and back.

 
Installing location where the unit will be exposed to strong wind.

Follow the instructions below to install on the rooftop or a

location without surrounding buildings, where strong wind is
expected against the product.

1 Choose a location where the outlet or inlet side of the

product will not be exposed to strong wind.
2 When the outlet is exposed to strong wind:
Direct strong wind may cause lack of air flow and adver-
sely affect to the operation.

C aution
Excessive strong wind against the outdoor unit outlet may cause inverse rotation and damage the fan and mo-
tor.

28
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.1.9  Optional parts and installation

 
RAS-2HVRN2

Air flow guide, wind guard and snow protection hood

Optional parts Model

Air flow guide AG-264
Wind guard WSP-264
Air outlet ASG-NP80F
Zinc Plate Air inlet of rear side
Air inlet of side face
ASG-NP56B
ASG-NP56L
2
Air outlet ASG-NP80FS2
Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP63B52
Snow protection
hood
Stainless plate
(NSSC180)
Air inlet of side face ASG-NP63LS2
1 Air flow guide
2 Wind guard
3 Snow protection hood

 
Air flow guide

Model AG-264
Quantity 1 per unit
Air discharge
Upward (downward) left & right
direction
Material Weather proof polypropylene resin
1
Color Gray
Weight 1.4 kg
Fixing screw
4x [M5 (SUS) x 12]+4x [M5 (SUS) x 30] 2
Accessories Installation manual 1

Self-screw 2x [M4 x 13]

“Wind Guard” or “Snow protection hood” is not

Installation
available to install with air flow guide. (“Guard
restriction
net” is available to be installed together.)
1 Mounting dimension
2 Air flow guide

Attaching example of air flow guide

• Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
• The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4 3.1 N.m)
• Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

CAUTION
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

29
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Locations of fixing holes

The holes Location shall be made by using self-screws (M4x13)

and later shall be used SUS screw (M5x12) for fixing air flow
guide. 1
1 Outdoor Unit
2 Hole (4 locations)

One flow guide installation

1 Air discharge grille

2 Air flow 1 3
4
3 Outdoor unit
4 M5 fixing screw x4 (Accessories)
2
5 Air flow guide

5 4

Service space (In case of upward air discharge)

• In case of right and left sides air discharge enough space for
air discharge is required.
• The downward air discharge is also available. In such case
install the base under the unit to secure enough space for 1
air discharge.
2
• In case of serial units installation air discharge should be 3
4
upward.
1 Min.150 mm
2 Outdoor unit
3 Air flow guide
4 Passage side

30
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

 
Wind guard

Specifications

Model WSP-264
Quantity 1 per unit
Material Galvanized sheet metal + baked painting
Color UTOPIA Beige
Weight 4.0 kg
1

2
Fixing screw x 4 [M5 (SUS) x 30]- Unit
Accessories Fixing Screw x 10 [M5 (SUS) x 12]- Wind Ward
Installation manual 2

Installation “Guard net” “Air flow guide” or “Snow protection

restriction hood” is not available to install with Wind guard

1 4-6x10 Long Hole

2 5 (Both Sides) - M5 Screw (attachement)

Attaching example of air wind guard

• Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
• The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4 3.1 N.m)
• Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

CAUTION
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

Two windguard covers installation

1 Air discharge grille

2 Outdoor unit
3 M5 fixing screw x4 (Accessories) 1 2

1 3

Service space

• Both sides of the outdoor unit should be open.

• No obstacles should be placed in the air discharge side.
1 Min.150 mm
1
2 Outdoor unit
3 Wind guard
2

31
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

 
Snow protection hood

Air discharge hood

Nº Part name Quantity

1 Right side plate 1 3 4
2 Left side plate 1
3 Front panel 1
4 Fixing screw (Accessories)
5
5 Hole for safety wire rope to prevent overturning

1
2

Rear suction hood

Nº Part name Quantity

1 Right side plate 1
2 Left side plate 1
3 Upper front panel (Upside) 1
4 Upper front panel (Downside). 1
5 Hole for safety wire rope to prevent overturning
6 Fixing screw (Accessories)

Left suction hood

Nº Part name Quantity

1 Right side plate 1
3
2 Left side plate 1 2
3 Upper front panel (Upside) 1
4 Upper front panel (Downside). 1
1

32
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

Attaching example of snow protection hood

A B C
2 1

4
1 2

2
3

1 1 1 5
1

1. Fixing screw (accessories)

2. Air inlet hood
3. Wire rope (optional for over turning protection)
4. Air discharge hood
5. Outdoor unit
A. Rear side
B. Left side
C Front side

NOTE
The holes locations marked with a mark shall be made by using sel screw (M4X13) and later shall be used SUS
Screw for fixing protection hood.

Specifications of snow protection hood

Product name Air discharge hood Rear suction hood Left suction hood
Model ASG-NP80F ASG-NP80FS2 ASG-NP56B ASG-NP63BS2 ASG-NP56L ASG-NP63LS2
Quantity 1 per unit
Bonderized Bonderized Bonderized
steel sheet Stainless steel sheet Stainless steel sheet Stainless
Material
(NSSC180) (NSSC180) (NSSC180)
Iron Iron Iron
Gray Gray Gray
Color (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or — (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or — (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or —
approximation) approximation) approximation)
Weight 3 kg 6 kg 3 kg
Assembling Knockingdown parts (assembled at field)
Components Hood For air discharge part x 1 For rear side air intake x 1 For left side air intake x 1
Unit fixing
4 (M5x12 tapping screw) 5 (M5x12 tapping screw) 4 (M5x12 tapping screw)
screw
Hood
fixing 6 (M5x12 14 (M5x12 10 (M5x12
6 (M5x14) 14 (M5x14) 10 (M5x14)
screw tapping screw) tapping screw) tapping screw)
(SUS)
Self-screw 2 (M4x13) 2 (M4x13) 2 (M4x13)
Installation manual
Installation with “Guard net”
Installation restriction Installation with “Guard net” is not available
“Wind guard” or is not available
Safety wire rope for overturning
ASG-SW20A
prevention (optional parts)

33
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

 
RAS-3HVRNME-AF

Air flow guide, wind guard and snow protection hood

Optional parts Model Air flow guide Wind Guard

Air flow guide AG-335A

Wind guard WSP-335A

Air outlet ASG-NP335F

Zinc plate Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP80B

Air inlet of side face ASG-NP80L

Snow protection Snow protection hood
hood Air outlet ASG-NP335FS2
Stainless plate
Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP160BS2
(SUS304)
Air inlet of side face ASG-NP160LS2

• Air flow guide

-- Specifications

Model AG-335A (mm)

Quantity 1 per unit

Upward (downward), left
Air discharge direction Mounting dimension
& right
Weather proof polypropyle-
Material
ne resin
Color Gray
Weight 1.9 kg
Fixing screw x 4 [M5
Mounting dimension

Accessories (SUS) x 20]

Air flow
Installation manual guide

“Wind Guard” or “Snow

protection hood” is not
available to install with air
Installation restriction
flow guide. (“Guard net”
is available to be installed
together.)

-- Attaching example of air flow guide

ŠŠ Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
ŠŠ The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4~3.1Nm).
ŠŠ Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

caution
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille, it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

34
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- One flow guide installation -- Service space (In case of upward air discharge)
ŠŠ In case of right and left sides air discharge,
M5 fixing screw x4
(Accessories)
enough space for air discharge is required.
Outdoor unit ŠŠ The downward air discharge is also available. In
Air discharge such case, install the base under the unit to secu-
grille
re enough space for air discharge.
ŠŠ In case of serial units installation, air discharge
should be upward.
Air flow

2
Air flow guide
Outdoor unit
Air flow guide
Passage side

• Wind guard

-- Specifications

Model WSP-335A
Quantity 1 per unit
Galvanized sheet metal + baked
Material
painting
Color Gray (1.0Y8.5/0.5)
Weight 5.5 kg (Mounting dimension)
4xØ7
Fixing screw x 4 [M5 (SUS) x 12] Air flow
Accessories
Installation manual
(Mounting dimension)

Air flow Air flow

“Guard net”, “Air flow guide” or

Installation restriction “Snow protection hood” is not avai-
lable to install with Wind guard

Air flow

-- Attaching example of air wind guard

ŠŠ Attach the wind ward to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
ŠŠ The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4~3.1Nm)
ŠŠ Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

C aution
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille, it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

35
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- One windguard cover installation -- Service space

M5 fixing screw x4
ŠŠ Both sides of the outdoor unit should be open.
Air discharge grille
(Accessories)
ŠŠ No obstacles should be placed in the air dischar-
ge side.

Outdoor unit
Wind guard
Air discharge grille Outdoor unit Wind guard

• Snow protection hood

-- Air discharge hood

No. Part name Qty. 

 Right side plate 1
 Left side plate 1

 Front panel 1
 Stay 4

Fixing screw
(Accessories)
Ø8
Hole for safety wire rope
to prevent overturning

4xØ7

 

-- Rear suction hood

No. Part name Qty. Fixing screw

 Right side plate 1 (Accessories)

 Left side plate 1

Upper front panel 
 1
(Upside)

Upper front panel

 1
(Downside) Ø8
Hole for safety wire
rope to prevent
overturning

 

36
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- Left suction hood

No. Part name Qty.

Fixing hole x 2
 Right side plate 1 

 Left side plate 1  Enlarged view of A

 (Fixing Hole)

Fixing screw

2
(Accessories)
 Front panel (Upside) 1


 Front panel (Downside) 1

-- Attaching example of snow protection hood

Fixing screw
Fixing screw
(Accessories)
(Accessories)
Rear suction Left suction
hood hood
Air discharge
Wire rope
hood
(Optional. For
overturning
protection) Air discharge grille Fixing screw
(Accessories)
Left side Fixing screw Front side
(Accessories)

Fixing screw
(Accessories)

Outdoor unit Rear side

37
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- Specifications of snow protection hood

Product name Air discharge hood Rear suction hood Left suction hood
Model ASG-NP335F ASG-NP335FS2 ASG-NP80B ASG-NP160BS2 ASG-NP80L ASG-NP160LS2
Quantity 2 per unit 1 per unit
Bonderized Bonderized Bonderized
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Material steel sheet steel sheet steel sheet
(NSSC 180) (NSSC 180) (NSSC 180)
Iron Iron Iron

Gray Gray Gray

(1.0Y8.5/0.5 (1.0Y8.5/0.5 (1.0Y8.5/0.5
Color - -
or approxima- or approxi- or approxi-
tion) mation) mation)
Weight 3 kg 14 kg 8 kg
Assembling Knockingdown parts (assembled at field)
For rear side air intake x 1
Components Hood For air discharge part x 1 For left side air intake x 1
(Upper side x 1, lowe side x 1)
Unit Fixing
4 (M5x12 tapping screw) 5 (M5x14 tapping screw) 6 (M5x12 tapping screw)
screw
Unit Fixing 12 (M5x12 10 (M5x12
6 (M5x12 tap-
screw 6 (M5x14) tapping 12 (M5x14) tapping 10 (M5x14)
ping screw)
(SUS) screw) screw)
Installation manual

Installation with “Guard net” or

Installation restriction Installation with “Guard net” is not available
“Wind guard” is not available

Safety wire rope for over-

turning prevention (optional ASG-SW20A
parts)

 
RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF

Air flow guide, wind guard and snow protection hood

Optional parts Model Air flow guide Snow protection hood

Air flow guide AG-335A x 2
Wind guard WSP-335A x 2
Air outlet ASG-NP335F x 2
Zinc plate Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP280B
Air inlet of side face ASG-NP280L

Air outlet ASG-NP335FS2 x 2 Wind guard

Snow
protection
hood Stainless plate
(NSSC 180) Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP280BS2

Air inlet of side face ASG-NP280LS2

38
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

• Air flow guide

-- Specifications

Model AG-335A
View from A
Quantity 2 per unit
Mounting dimension
Air discharge direction Upward (downward), left & right
Weather proof polypropylene
Material
resin
Color
Weight
Gray
1.9 kg 2

Mounting dimension
Fixing screw x 4 [M5 (SUS) x 20]
Accessories Air flow guide
Installation manual

“Wind Guard” or “Snow protec-

tion hood” is not available to ins-
Installation restriction tall with air flow guide. (“Guard
net” is available to be installed
together.)

-- Attaching example of air flow guide

ŠŠ Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
ŠŠ The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4~3.1N.m)
ŠŠ Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

C aution
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille, it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

-- Two windbreak covers installation -- Service space (In case of upward air discharge)

Outdoor unit
ŠŠ In case of right and left sides air discharge,
M5 fixing screw x4 enough space for air discharge is required.
Air discharge (Accessories)
grille ŠŠ The downward air discharge is also available. In
Air flow such case, install the base under the unit to se-
cure enough space for air discharge.
ŠŠ In case of serial units installation, air discharge
Air flow guide should be upward.
(*)
Air flow

Air flow guide (*)

M5 fixing screw x4 Outdoor unit
(Accessories) Air flow guide
(*) Air flow direction of both air flow guides should be the same Passage side

39
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

• Wind guard
-- Specifications

Model WSP-335A
Quantity 2 per unit
Galvanized sheet metal + baked
Material
painting
Color Gray (1.oY8.5/0.5)
(Mounting dimension)
Weight 5.5 kg
Air flow
Fixing screw x 4 [M5 (SUS) x 12]
Accessories
Installation manual

(Mounting dimension)
Air flow Air flow

“Guard net”, “Air flow guide” or

Installation restriction “Snow protection hood” is not
available to install with Wind guard

Air flow

-- Attaching example of air wind guard

ŠŠ Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
ŠŠ The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille (Screw tightening torque 2.4~3.1N.m).
ŠŠ Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

C aution
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille, it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

-- Two windguard covers installation -- Service space

Outdoor unit ŠŠ Both sides of the outdoor unit should be open.
Air discharge grille M5 fixing screw x4 ŠŠ No obstacles should be placed in the air dis-
(Accessories)
charge side.

Wind guard

Outdoor unit

Wind guard
Wind guard

Air discharge grille

40
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

• Snow protection hood

-- Air discharge hood

No. Part name Qty.


 Right side plate 1

Left side plate 1 


 Front panel 1

2
Fixing screw

(500)

623
(Accessories)
Hole for safety wire rope
to prevent overturning

 Stay 4 

-- Rear suction hood

No. Part name Qty.

 Right side plate 1


Fixing screw
(Accessories)

 Left side plate 1

Hole for safety wire
rope to prevent
overturning


Upper front panel
 1
(Upside)
 

Upper front panel

 1
(Downside)

-- Left suction hood

No. Part name Qty.

 Right side plate 1

Fixing hole x 2 
 Left side plate 1
Front panel 
 1
(Upside) 
Enlarged view of A (Fixing hole)

Fixing screw 
(Accessories)
Front panel
 1
(Downside)

41
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

-- Attaching example of snow protection hood

Left suction
hood
Fixing screw
(Accessories)
Fixing screw Air discharge
(Accessories) hood

Rear suction hood

Fixing screw Upper side Air discharge
(Accessories) grille

Wire rope Air discharge

Front side (Optional. For over- hood
turning protection)

Air discharge grille

Rear suction hood
Lower side Left side

Fixing screw
(Accessories)

Fixing screw
(Accessories)

Rear side

-- Specifications of snow protection hood

Product name Air discharge hood Rear suction hood Left suction hood
Model ASG-NP335F ASG-NP335FS2 ASG-NP280B ASG-NP280BS2 ASG-NP280L ASG-NP280LS2
Quantity 2 per unit 1 per unit
Bonderized Bonderized Bonderized
steel sheet Stainless steel sheet Stainless steel sheet Stainless
Material
(NSSC 180) (NSSC 180) (NSSC 180)
Iron Iron Iron
Gray Gray Gray
Color (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or - (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or -
approximation) approximation) approximation)
Weight 3 kg 14 kg 8 kg
Assembling Knockingdown parts (assembled at field)
For rear side air intake x 1
Components Hood For air discharge part x 1 For left side air intake x 1
(Upper side x 1, lowe side x 1)
Fixing
4 (M5x12 tapping screw) 11 (M5x14 tapping screw) 8 (M5x12 tapping screw)
screw
Fixing
6 (M5x14 24 (M5x14 12 (M5x12
screw 6 (M5x14) 24 (M5x14) 12 (M5x14)
tapping screw) tapping screw) tapping screw)
(SUS)
Installation manual
Installation with “Guard net”, “Wind
Installation restriction guard” or “Air flow guide” is not Installation with “Guard net” is not available
available
Safety wire rope for
overturning prevention ASG-SW20A
(optional parts)

42
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

 
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

Air flow guide wind guard and snow protection hood

Optional parts Model

Air flow guide AG-335A x 2 1 2
Wind guard WSP-335A x 2
Air outlet ASG-NP335F x 2
Zinc plate Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP335B

2
Air inlet of side face ASG-NP335L
Air outlet ASG-NP335FS2 x 2
Air inlet of rear side ASG-NP335BS2 3
Snow protection
hood
Strainless
plate
(SUS304)
Air inlet of side face ASG-NP335LS2

1 Air flow guide

2 Wind guard
3 Snow protection hood

Air flow guide

• Specifications

Model AG-335A
Quantity 2 per unit
Air discharge
Upward (downward) left & right
direction 1
Material Weather proof polypropylene resin
Color Gray
Weight 1.9 kg
Fixing screw x 4 [M5 (SUS) x 20]
Accessories
Installation manual 2
1

“Wind guard” or “Snow protection hood” is not

Installation
available to install with air flow guide. (“Guard
restriction
net” is available to be installed together.)

1 Mounting dimension
2 Air flow guide

• Attaching example of air flow guide

-- Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
-- The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4 3.1 N.m)
-- Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

CAUTION
• If the air guide is installed without discharge grille it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

43
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

• Two flow guides installation

1 Air discharge grille

2 Air flow 4
3 Air flow guide (see the note) 5
4 Outdoor Unit 1
5 M5 fixing screw x4 (Accessories)
2

NOTE 3
Air flow direction of both air flow guides should be the
same. 2

3
5

• Service space (In case of upward air discharge)

-- In case of right and left sides air discharge enough space

for air discharge is required.
-- The downward air discharge is also available. In such
case install the base under the unit to secure enough 1
space for air discharge.
2
-- In case of serial units installation air discharge should be 3
4
upward.
1 Min. 200 mm
2 Outdoor unit
3 Air flow guide
4 Passage side

Wind guard
• Specifications

Model WSP-335A
Quantity 2 per unit
Galvanized sheet metal +
Material
baked painting
Color Gray (1.0Y8.5/0.5)
Weight 5.5 kg 1
3
Fixing screw x 4 2
Accessories [M5 (SUS) x 12]
Installation manual
2

“Guard net” “Air flow guide” or

“Snow protection hood” is not
Installation restriction
available to install with Wind
guard

1 Mounting dimension
2 Air flow

• Attaching example of air wind guard

-- Attach the air flow guide to the air discharge grille with four (4) screws (supplied).
-- The fixing holes are located at 4 positions on the grille. (Screw tightening torque 2.4 3.1 N.m)
-- Do not remove the air discharge grille for air flow guide installation.

44
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

CAUTION
If the air guide is installed without discharge grille it may cause injury due to rotating fan.

• Two windguard covers installation

1 Air discharge grille 3

2 Wind guard 1 4
3 Outdoor unit
4 M5 fixing screw x4 (Accessories)

2
2
2

• Service space

-- Both sides of the outdoor unit should be open.

-- No obstacles should be placed in the air discharge side.
1 Min. 200 mm 1
2 Outdoor unit
3 Wind guard 2

Snow protection hood

• Air discharge hood

Nº Part name Quantity

3
1 Right side plate 1 4

2 Left side plate 1

3 Front panel 1
5 6
4 Stay 4
5 Fixing screw (Accessories)
2
6 Hole for safety wire rope to prevent overturning
1

• Rear suction hood

Nº Part name Quantity 270

888
1 Right side plate 1 250 868
4
60

2 Left side plate 1

5
3 Upper front panel (Downside) 1
4 Upper front panel (Upside) 1 6
320

5 Fixing screw (Accessories)

6 Hole for safety wire rope to prevent overturning
320

2 1

45
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

• Left suction hood

316 250
Nº Part name Quantity
5 230
1 Right side plate 1 A
A
3
2 Left side plate 1
3 Front panel (upside) 1

347
4 Front side (downside) 1
2
5 Fixing hole x 2

330
1

6 Fixing screw (Accessories)

4

1587
330
6

330
A 7

8.5
R

235
296 Ø15

• Attaching example of snow protection hood

1100

2 390
2 5
8
3
2 6

4 5
A

6
7
2 B
1650

1. Left suction hood A. Front side

2. Fixing screw (Accessories) B. Left side
3. Rear suction hood Upper side C. Rear side
4. Wire rope (Optional. For overturning protection)
5. Air discharge hood
6. Air discharge grille
7. Rear suction hood Lower side
8. Outdoor unit

46
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

• Specifications of snow protection hood

Product name Air discharge hood Rear suction hood Left suction hood
Model ASG-NP335F ASG-NP335FS2 ASG-NP335B ASG-NP335BS2 ASG-NP335L ASG-NP335LS2
Quantity 2 per unit 1 per unit
Bonderized Bonderized Bonderized
steel sheet Stainless steel sheet Stainless steel sheet Stainless
Material
(NSSC180) (NSSC180) (NSSC180)
Iron Iron Iron
Gray Gray Gray
Color (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or — (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or — (1.0Y8.5/0.5 or

2
—
approximation) approximation) approximation)
Weight 3 kg 14 kg 8 kg
Assembling Knockingdown parts (assembled at field)
For rear side air intake x 1
Components Hood For air discherge part x 1 For left side air intake x 1
(Upper side x 1 lowe side x 1)
Fixing screw 4x(M5x12 l tapping screw) 10x (M5x14 l tapping screw) 8x (M5x12 l tapping screw)
Fixing screw 6x (M5x12 l 24x (M5x14 l 14x (M5x12
6x (M5x14 l) 24x (M5x14l) 14x (M5x14)
(SUS) tapping screw) tapping screw) tapping screw)
Installation manual
Installation with “Guard net”
Installation restriction “Wind guard” or “Air flow guide” Installation with “Guard net” is not available
is not available
Safety wire rope for
overturning prevention ASG-SW20A
(optional parts)

47
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.2  Indoor unit installation

2.2.1  Selection of the installation location

The indoor unit of the split-type air to water must be installed following these basic requirements:
• Install the unit in a no-frost enviroment.
• The unit is prepared to be wall mounted (wall bracket is factory supplied), so make sure that selected wall is flat and is
made of a non-combustible surface, strong enough for supporting the indoor unit weight.
• Be sure to maintain the recommended servicing space for future unit servicing and guarantee enough air circulation
around the unit.
• Keep water draining provisions. The safety valve and the air purge are provided with a drain pipe which are located at
the bottom side of the unit.
• If the event of a cooling installation, a drain pan (supplied as an accessory) will be installed. The installer is responsible
for proper installation and draining.

C aution
• Do not install the indoor units where electromagnetic waves are directly radiated to the electrical box.
• Install the indoor units and components as far as possible (at least 3 meters) from all sources of electromag-
netic wave radiation.
• Install noise filter when the power supply emits harmful noises.
• To avoid fire or explosion, do not install the indoor unit in a flammable environment.
• The air to water heat pump must be installed by a service technician. The installation must comply with local
and European regulations.

Handling of the indoor unit

• Place the packaged unit as close as possible to its final installation location in order to prevent any damage during
transportation.
• The indoor unit is supplied in a cardboard box fixed to the wood base by straps. Cut the straps and remove the card-
board box in an upward motion.
• The indoor unit is fixed to the wood base by bolts. Before accessing those bolts, the front cover of the unit must be
removed. Open the user’s interface cover, unscrew two fixing screws (check the figure below) and remove the front
cover of the unit following the instructions.

RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E RWM-(8.0/10.0)(H)FSN3E

• Two persons are required to carry and mount the unit to its final location. Check the figure above for proper handling
when lifting the unit to the wall.

48
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.2.2  Wall mounting procedure

• Step : Fix the wall support to the wall using appropriate plugs and screws. Make sure that the wall support is com-
pletely levelled.
• Step : Hang the indoor unit on the wall support (two persons are required in order to lift the unit. The unit’s weight is
approximately 60 kg (RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E) and 85 kg (RWM-(8.0/10.0)(H)FSN3E))
• Step : Fix the indoor unit at the bottom side using appropriate plugs and screws. To do so, the unit is equipped with
two holes at the bottom outer edges of the back plate frame (there are two additional holes on the upper outer edges
of the back plate frame for in which the Wall Support cannot be installed).

2
RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E

486 (wall fixing holes)

808.5 (wall fixing holes)

840 (wall fixing holes)

RWM-(8.0/10.0)(H)FSN3E

636 (wall fixing holes)

840 (wall fixing holes)

808.5 (wall fixing holes)

49
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.2.3  Cover assembly

N ote
This operation should be performed upon completion of the unit’s pipe work.
• Step : Place the Unit’s Cover at same level of the wall mounted unit by taking it from the bottom side (one person can
perform this operation, during this operation it is possible to rest the Cover on the Electrical Box).

• Step : Place the Right side Cover Holes over the Back Plate Hooks (x2 locations) with the help of the external marks
indicated by “>”).
• Step : When the Right side is centred, repeat the operation on the Left side. Put the Left side Cover Holes into the
Back Plate frame Hooks (x2 locations) with the help of the external marks indicated by “>”).

• Step : Once the 4 hooks are placed into their corresponding cover hooks, lower the cover to the end of the hooks.
• Step : For the final placement of the cover, open the LCD service cover and screw the two screws with the nylon
washers between the screw and the cover.
• Step : Finally, close the user’s interface service cover.

50
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.2.4  Drain pan assembly

N ote
If there is a cooling installation a drain pan must be installed. Hitachi’s drain pan accessory is supplied by re-
quest:

Name Code For models

ATW-DPK-01 7E549902 RWM-(2.0-6.0)FSN3E

2
ATW-DPK-02 7E549903 RWM-(8.0/10.0)FSN3E

Drain pipe assembly is recommended only after completion of the pipe work, following assembly instructions
included with the accessory.

Make sure to avoid dew outside the drain pan when installing it on the pipes, and maintain level in order to pre-
vent drain pan overflow.

2.2.5  Service space

• Install the indoor unit with sufficient clearance around it to provide good conditions for electrical cables, Water and
refrigerant piping connections installation and maintenance.
• Minimum recommended space:

N ote
H= 1200mm ~ 1500mm. Recommended unit height for proper access to the control panel (LCD user’s interface).
h= 350mm: Minimum unit height for installing the shutdown valves and the first bending pipe line.

51
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.3  DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank

2.3.1  Name of parts

 
DHWT(200/300)S-2.5H1E

Ref. Qty. Name

 1 Inspection aperture

 1 HSW storage tank

 1 External covering

 1 Top cover

 1 Thermal insulation

 1 Control panel

 1 Electrical Heater

 1 Heating coil

 1 Sensor probe

 1 DHWT sensor

 
DHWT(200/300)E-2.5H1E

Ref. Qty. Name

 1 Inspection aperture

 1 HSW storage tank

10
 1 External covering

 1 Top cover
11
 1 Thermal insulation

 1 Control panel

 1 Electrical Heater

 1 Heating coil

 1 Sensor probe

Cathodic protection
 1
(anode)

 1 DHWT sensor

52
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 2  Unit installation

2.3.2  Unit installation

Transport the products as close as possible to the installation location before unpacking. Check the contents of the pac-
kage:

• DHWT Model
• Installation and Operation Manual & Documents

2.3.3  Selection procedure for DHWT units

2
N ote
• DHWT appliance is intended to be installed in an indoor place.
• DHWT installation must be done by professional installers.
• Install the DHWT with sufficient clearance around it for operation and maintenance as shown in the following
figures.
• Install the DHWT where good ventilation is available. Do not install the DHWT where there is a high level of oil
mist, salty air or sulphurous atmosphere.
• When installing some device next to DHWT, keep clearance between DHWT and any other obstacle of more
than 500 mm.

C aution
• Insufficient ventilation can cause oxygen deficiency.
• Working with no sufficient ventilation, in an enclosed space, should cause can produce toxic gas, especially
when cleaning agent is heated to high temperature by, e.g., being exposed to fire.
• Do not install DHWT near any flammable substance.

2.3.4  Working space

• Check that DHWT are installed vertically.
• For cleaning, use no flammable and no toxic cleaning liquid. The use of flammable agents should cause explosion or
fire.
• Cleaning liquid shall be collected after cleaning.
• Pay attention do not trap cables when closing the electrical box cover. It could cause a electric shock.

53
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3. Piping work and refrigerant charge

Index

3.1. Refrigerant and water pipe work............................................................................................................ 36

3.1.1. General notes before performing pipe work............................................................................................... 36
3.1.2. Suspension of refrigerant and water pipes................................................................................................. 36
3.1.3. Pipe work and connection.......................................................................................................................... 37

3.2. Water pipe work and connection............................................................................................................ 47

3.2.1. General notes............................................................................................................................................. 47
3.2.2. Water piping connection............................................................................................................................. 48
3.2.3. Draining pipe work...................................................................................................................................... 49
3.2.4. Circuit water filling-in.................................................................................................................................. 49
3.2.5. Water flow adjustment................................................................................................................................ 49

3.3. Pressure charts...................................................................................................................................... 51

3.4. DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank......................................................................................................... 53

3.4.1. Hydraulic circuit.......................................................................................................................................... 53
3.4.2. Pressure drop............................................................................................................................................. 54

55
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.1  Refrigerant and water pipe work

3.1.1  General notes before performing pipe work

1 Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes.

2 Select the piping size with the correct thickness and correct material able to withstand sufficient pressure.
3 Select clean copper pipes. Make sure that there is no dust or moisture inside the pipes. Blow the inside of the pipes
with oxygen free nitrogen to remove any dust and foreign materials before connecting them.

N ote
A system with no moisture or oil contamination will give maximum performance and lifecycle compared to that
of a poorly prepared system. Take particular care to ensure that all copper piping is clean and dry internally.
There is no refrigerant in the cycle of the indoor unit.

C aution
Cap the end of the pipe when pipe is to be inserted through a wall hole.
Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe.

If piping installation is not completed until next day or over a longer period of time, braze off the ends of the piping and char-
ge with oxygen free nitrogen through a Schrader valve type access fitting to prevent moisture and particle contamination.
Do not use insulation material that contains NH3, as it can damage copper pipe material and become a source of future
leakage.
Completely insulate both refrigerant gas piping and liquid piping between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
If not insulated, in cooling mode and high ambient humidity conditions, dew will appear on the piping surface.
Refrigerant circuit and Water circuit must be performed and inspected by a licensed technician and must comply with all
relevant European and national regulations.

3.1.2  Suspension of refrigerant and water pipes

Suspend the refrigerant and water piping at certain points and prevent the refrigerant and water piping from being in direct
contact with the building: walls, ceilings, etc…
If there is direct contact between pipes, abnormal sound may occur due to the vibration of the piping. Pay special attention
in cases of short piping lengths.

1~15m

Fire-Proof Section
Treatment

Indoor unit

56
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

Do not fix the refrigerant and water pipes directly with the metal fittings (refrigerant piping may expand and contract). Some
examples for suspension method are shown below.

For Suspending For piping along For instant installation

Heavies the wall work

3.1.3  Pipe work and connection

 
Outdoor unit

Piping connection
1 The pipes can be connected from any of the following four directions: front, rear, bottom or right side, when facing the
3
outdoor unit.

• RAS-2HVRN2

No. Description
1 Rear side piping
2 Pipe cover
3 Stop valve
4 Connecting piping
5 Liquid
6 Gas
A Direction to remove pipe cover

• RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF

No. Part
1 Rear side piping cover
2 Rear side piping work (Knock-out hole)
3 Right side piping work (Knock-out hole)
4 Bottom side piping work (Piping cover)
1
5 Front side piping work (Knock-out hole)
6 Front side piping cover

6 3

57
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

No. Part
A Push down the cover slowly
B Rear cover
C Front side piping cover A
D Rear side piping cover

B
Make holes in the piping cover or cabinet for taking the pipes out.
Take the piping cover away from the unit, and make holes by cut-
ting along the guideline at the rear of the cover or punching it with a
driver. Remove the burr with a cutter.
D

NOTE
Hold the cover with a hand at the same time while removing the screws as the cover may fall down.

• For the front and side piping

No. Part 1
1 Front piping hole
2 Side piping hole
2

To use racking or conduit tubes, check the size and remove the stiped parts, following the slit.

NOTE
Place insulation (field supplied) to protect cables and pipes from being damaged by plate edges.

58
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

For the downward piping

2
No. Part
3
1 Liquid piping
2 Wiring 1
3 Gas piping 4
4 Knock-out hole
5 Bottom base

NOTE
The wiring must not be in contact directly with the pipes. 5

For the rear side piping

3
1
No. Part
1 Rear cover

NOTE
Remove the rear pipe cover under the rear cover and remove the
stipped part following the slit.

2 Mount the piping cover in order to avoid water entering into the unit. Seal the holes where pipes and wires are inserted,
by using an insulation (field-supplied).
3 If the field-supplied piping is connected with stop valves directly, it is recommended to use a tube bender.
4 Check that the stop valves are closed completely before connecting pipes.
5 Connect the field supplied refrigerant pipes to the indoor unit and outdoor unit. Apply the oil thinly at the seat flare nut
and pipe before tightening.
The required tightening torque is as follows:
Pipe Size Tightening Torque (Nm)
Ø 6.35 mm 20
Ø 9.53 mm 40
Ø 12.7 mm 60
Ø 15.88 mm 80
Ø 25.4 mm 100

6 After connecting the refrigerant piping, seal the open space between knockout hole and refrigerant pipes by using the
insulation material.

No. Part
A Insulation material.
B Field supplied

NOTE
Remove the rear pipe cover under the rear cover and remove the
stipped part following the slit.

59
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

7 Operation of stop valve should be performed according to the figure.

Closed before shipment

No. Description Remarks

B1 2
1 Cap —
2 Allen wrench Hex 4/5/10 mm A 10
3 Refrigerant Piping Field supplied
4 Cap — 9
5 Refrigerant Pressure To outdoor unit
6 Seat Surface Fully closed position
D 8
7 Check Joint Only the charging those can be connected
7
8 Cap —
9 O-Ring Rubber 6 5 C 4 3
Open – Counterclockwise
10 Spindle valve
Close – Clockwise

Tighten torque (Nm)

Valve type / Model A B C D
Liquid valve 2-6HP 7-9 34-42 34-42 14-18
Gas valve 2-6HP 9-11 34-42 68-82 14-18
8HP 7-9 37 40 16
Liquid valve
10-12HP 7-9 37 60 16
Gas valve 8-12HP 9-11 49 53-75 9.8

• Outdoor unit stop valve

No. Part
1 Stop valve
2 Flare nut
A
Do not apply two spanners at this position.
A
If applied, leakage will occur 1

CAUTION
• At the test run, fully open the spindle. If not fully opened, the de-
vices will be damaged. 2
• Do not attempt to turn service valve rod beyond its stop.
• Do not loosen the stop ring. If the stop ring is loosened, it is dan-
gerous since the spindle will hop out.
• Do not apply force to the spindle valve at the end of opening
(5 Nm or smaller). The back seat construction.

60
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

Evacuation and refrigerant charge

-- Connect the gauge manifold using charging hoses with a vacuum pump or a nitrogen cylinder to the check joints of
the liquid line and the gas line stop valve.
-- Check for any gas leakage at the flare nut connection, by using nitrogen gas to increase the pressure at 4.15 MPa
for outdoor units inside of the field-supplied piping.
-- Operate the vacuum pump for 1 to 2 hours until the pressure decreases lower than a pressure of 756 mmHg in
vacuum.
-- For charging refrigerant, connect the gauge manifold using charging hoses with a refrigerant charging cylinder to
the check joint of the liquid line stop valve.
-- Charge the proper quantity of refrigerant according to the piping length (Calculate the quantity of the refrigerant
charge).
-- Fully open the gas line stop valve, and slightly open the liquid line stop valve.

3
-- Charge refrigerant by opening the gauge manifold valve.
-- Charge the required refrigerant within the difference range of ±0.5 kg by operating the system in cooling.
-- Fully open the liquid line stop valve after completing refrigerant charge.
-- Continue cooling operation for more than 10 minutes to circulate the refrigerant.
-- See the example below.

No. Description
1 Gas line
2 Thermal insulation
Cover the flare nut and union of the piping connection
3
with thermal insulation
4 Liquid line
5 Liquid stop valve
6 Gas stop valve
Nitrogen tank. For air thight test & nitrogen blow during
7
brazing
8 Vacuum cylinder
9 Manifold gauge
10 Outdoor unit

Refrigerant piping length

The refrigerant piping between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit should be designed using the following chart.
Keep the design point within the area of the chart, which is showing the applicable height difference according to piping
length.

Height difference
Total length between outdoor unit
(m)
and each indoor unit.

When outdoor
unit is installed
higher than
indoor unit

Setting
before
shipment
When outdoor
unit is installed
lower than indo-
or unit

61
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

Item (2-10)HP

Actual piping length 30

Maximum piping length (L)
Equivalent piping length 40

Maximum height difference between indoor and Outdoor unit higher than indoor unit 30
outdoor unit (H) Indoor unit higher than outdoor unit 20

Refrigerant piping size

Piping connection size of outdoor unit & indoor unit

Pipe size Pipe size

Outdoor unit Indoor Unit
Gas pipe Liquid pipe Gas pipe Liquid pipe

RAS-2HVRN2 Ø 12.7 (1/2”)(1*) Ø 6.35 (1/4”) RWM-2.0FSN3E Ø 15.88 (5/8”)(1*) Ø 6.35 (1/4”)

RAS-3HVRNME-AF Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”) RWM-3.0FSN3E Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”)

RAS-4H(V)RNME-AF Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”) RWM-4.0FSN3E Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”)

RAS-5H(V)RNME-AF Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”) RWM-5.0FSN3E Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”)

RAS-6H(V)RNME-AF Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”) RWM-6.0FSN3E Ø 15.88 (5/8”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”)

RAS-8HRNME-AF Ø 25.4 (1”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”) RWM-8.0FSN3E Ø 25.4 (1”) Ø 9.53 (3/8”)

RAS-10HRNME-AF Ø 25.4 (1”) Ø 12.7 (1/2”) RWM-10.0FSN3E Ø 25.4 (1”) Ø 12.7 (1/2”)

NOTE
(1*): 2HP system only (RAS-2HVRN2 + RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E). If using different piping size for outdoor unit and in-
door unit, a pipe adapter will be required: (Ø12.7 → Ø15.88).
The pipe adapter is factory supplied with the outdoor unit.

Connecting flare adapter (only for RAS-2HVRN2)

No. Description 1
2
3
1 Liquid line
2 Flare nut (Accessories) 4
3 Pipe (Accessories)
4 Indoor unit 7
5 Flare adapter (Accessories)
6 Gas line
7 Pipe (Field supplied) 6
5
The piping sizes for indoor unit and outdoor unit are different. Attach the flare adapter (accessories) at the indoor piping
union part.
Use the adequate flare adapter as follows:

Flare adapter
Indoor unit
Gas pipe Liquid pipe
Big size
2.0 HP —
(Ø15.88→Ø12.70)

62
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

Drain discharging boss

When the base of the outdoor unit is temporarily used as a drain receiver and the drain water in it is discharged, this drain
boss is used to connect the drain piping.

Model Applicable Model

DBS-12L RAS-2HVRN2
DBS-26 RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF

• Connection procedure
1 Insert the rubber cap into the drain boss up to the extruded portions.
2 Insert the boss into the unit base and turn approximately 40 degree counterclockwise.
3 The outer diameter section of the drain boss is 32 mm.
4 A drain pipe should be field-supplied.

NOTE
3
• Do not use this drain boss set in a cold area, because the drain water may freeze.
• This drain boss may not be sufficient to collect drain water. If collecting a big amount of drain water should
be necessary, provide a drain-pan bigger than the unit base supplied one, and install it under the unit with
drainage.

• RAS-2HVRN2
Bottom base view

1
2
No. Description
1 Drain hole 2
2 Plastic cap A
3 Drain pipe
1
A Push
2
3

• RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF
Bottom base view

No. Description
1 Drain pipe
2 Extruded portion
3 Drain boss
4 Rubber cap
1
5 Drain hole of base
1
2
5
3

63
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

 
Indoor unit

Before performing the pipe work and pipe connections, the unit cover must be removed (follow chapter Indoor Unit Insta-
llation in reverse).

Piping location
Refere to the figure below detailing the location of the refrigerant pipes, dimensions and connection sizes.

N ote
There is a label behind the pipes indicating its circuit connection.

RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E RWM-(8.0/10.0)(H)FSN3E

Refrigerant Refrigerant
liquid piping liquid piping
Refrigerant Refrigerant gas piping Refrigerant Refrigerant gas piping
Water inlet/outlet pipe Water inlet/outlet pipe
liquid piping liquid piping
Refrigerant gas Refrigerant gas
Water in piping Water in piping
Water out Water out

Refrigerant Pipe Connections

-- The indoor unit is set up to be connected the liquid pipe by Flare Nut (factory supplied). Perform the indicated pipe
work by maintaining the dimensions indicated in the following tables.

64
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

• Dimensions of the flared pipe

Units: mm (inch)

Nominal External
AØ +0/-0.4
diameter diameter

(1/4) 6.35 9.1

(3/8) 9.53 13.2

(1/2) 12.7 16.6

(5/8) 15.88 19.7

3
• Thickness of the copper pipes
Units: mm (inch)

Nominal External
Thickness
diameter diameter
(1/4) 6.35 0.80

(3/8) 9.53 0.80

(1/2) 12.7 0.80

(5/8) 15.88 1.00

• Dimensions of the flare nut

Units: mm (inch)

Nominal External
B
diameter diameter

(1/4) 6.35 17

(3/8) 9.53 22

(1/2) 12.7 26

(5/8) 15.88 29

• Flare nuts tightening torque

Always use two wrenches or fix spanners when tightening the Flare Nuts on the refrigerent pipes.
If any failure occurs during this process the result could be pipe damage or refrigerant leak.
Unit: N.m

Pipe size Tightening torque

Ø 6.35 mm 20

Ø 9.53 mm 40

Ø 12.7 mm 60

Ø 15.88 mm 80

65
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

Brazing work

C aution
• Use nitrogen gas for blowing during pipe brazing. If oxygen, acetylene or fluorocarbon gas is used, it will cau-
se an explosion or poisonous gas.
• A rust coating will appear inside of tubes if no nitrogen gas blowing is performed during brazing work. This
film will be flecked off after operation and will circulate in the circuit, resulting in clogged expansion valves,
etc, and the compressor will be affected.
• Use a reducer valve when nitrogen gas blowing is performed during brazing. The gas pressure should be
maintained within 0.03 to 0.05 MPa. If excessively high pressure is applied to a pipe, it will cause an explosion.

Copper pipe size Ød1 Gap a

+0.08 +0.1 0.33
Ø6.35 Ø6.5 6
-0.08 0 0.07
+0.08 +0.1 0.35
Ø9.53 Ø9.7 8
-0.08 0 0.09
+0.08 +0.1 0.38
Ø12.7 Ø12.9 8
-0.08 0 0.19
+0.09 +0.1 0.41
Ø15.88 Ø16.1 8
-0.09 0 0.13
+0.09 +0.1 0.44
Ø19.05 Ø19.3 10
-0.09 0 0.16
+0.09 +0.1 0.39
Ø22.22 Ø22.42 10
-0.09 0 0.11
+0.12 +0.1 0.42
Ø25.4 Ø25.6 12
-0.12 0 0.08

A basic brazing method is shown below.

No. Description
1 Pre-heat the outer tube for better flowing of the filler metal
2 Heat inner side tube evenly
3 Rubber plug
4 Packless valve
5 High pressure hose
6 0.03 to 0.05 MPa (0.3 to 0.5 Kg/cm2 G)
7 Reducer valve: open this valve only when the gas is needed
8 Nitrogen gas flow 0.05 m3/h or smaller

66
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.2  Water pipe work and connection

3.2.1  General notes
• Install the factory supplied Shutdown Valves for connecting the Water Inlet / Outlet pipes as close as possible to the
Indoor Unit, in order to minimise flow resistance and, if necessary, for water flow regulation.
• It is advisable to use flexible joints after the Shutdown Valve for the water Inlet / Outlet piping to prevent the transmis-
sion of vibrations.
• Proper Water pipe inspection should be performed after piping work to assure there is no water leakage in the circuit.
Fill in the water circuit (refer to Circuit Water Filling-in chapter) and open inlet and outlet Shutdown Valves.
• The Indoor Unit is equipped with an air purger (factory supplied) at the highest location of the Indoor Unit (Electric
Heater top). If this location is not the highest of the water installation, air might be trapped inside the water pipes, which
could cause system malfunction. In that case additional air purgers are provided (field supplied) to ensure no air enters

3
the water circuit.
• It is advisable to insulate the water pipes, joints and connection in order to avoid heat loss.
• When the unit is stopped during shutdown periods and the ambient temperature is very low, the water in the pipes and
the circulating pump may freeze, thus damaging the pipes and the water pump. In order to prevent this, the unit has a
self-protection mechanism which should be activated (refer to Available optional functions chapter).

caution
When connecting the water piping to the indoor unit, it is necessary to install 500mm of flexible water piping
from the indoor unit, in order to avoid metal expansion problems due to temperature. After these 500mm install
copper Piping.

N ote
The maximum piping length depends on the maximum pressure availability in the water outlet pipe. Please
check the pump curves.

67
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.2.2  Water piping connection

 
Piping location and connection size

The unit is factory supplied with two shutdown valves to be connected to the water inlet / outlet pipe. By using these shut-
down valves it is very practical to connect the indoor unit to the heating system by using flexible joints just bellow the valves
(G 1-1/4” connection).
Refer to the figure bellow detailing the location of the Water Pipes location, dimensions and Connection sizes.

N ote
There is a label behind the pipes indicating its circuit connection.

RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E RWM-(8.0/10.0)(H)FSN3E

Water
inlet Water Refrigerant Refrigerant Water
outlet gas pipe liquid pipe inlet Water Refrigerant Refrigerant
outlet gas pipe liquid pipe

Shutdown valve

(factory supplied)

Flare Nut G 1”

(to the unit) Pressure port G 3/8” (male) or Drain port

(for installation commissioning)

G 1-1/4” (male) (to the installation)

68
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.2.3  Draining pipe work

Connect the drain pipe coming from the safety valve (located with the water IN/OUT pipes) to the general draining system.

N ote
The safety valve will be activated when water pressure reaches 3 bars.

• Two draining ports are provided with the factory supplied shutdown valves, and a draining cap on the expansion vessel
to drain the water from the indoor unit in case of servicing. In that situation, connect the appropriate drain pipe in order
to avoid any water coming into contact with electrical parts.
• If there is a cooling intallation, a drain pipe must be installed (refer to Unit Installation chapter). The drain pipe on the
drain pan must be connected to the general Draining System (following assembly instruction included with accessory).
The Drain Pipe size is ø25mm (outer dimension).
3
caution
Drain taps must be provided at all low points of the installation to permit complete drainage of the circuit during
servicing.
Do not drain the water circuit when the system is operating. There will be a blast of water which will cause da-
mage.

3.2.4  Circuit water filling-in

• The Installation will be filled in through a shutdown valve (field supplied) which must be connected to the water circuit
between the indoor unit and the heating circuit.
• It is necessary to install a Check Valve (non-return valve) at the water filling in point. The Check Valve acts as a safety
device to protect the installation against back pressure, back flow and back syphonage of non-potable water into drin-
king water supply net. The Check Valve should be field supplied.
• Charge the water circuit until reaching a water pressure of 1.7~2.0 bar (1.8 bar recommended).
• Fill in the circuit with water (from the drinking water supply net). The heating installation water must comply with EN di-
rective 98/83 EC. Non-sanitary controlled water is not recommended (for example, water from wells, rivers, lakes, etc.).

caution
The maximum water pressure is 3 bar (Safety Valve nominal opening pressure).
Make sure that all field supplied components installed in the piping circuit can withstand the water pressure.
The unit is only to be used in a closed water circuit.
An automatic air vent is provided inside the indoor unit. Additional air vents will be provided at all high points of
the circuit. The air vents should be located at points which are easily accessible for servicing. Check that the air
vent is not tightened too much so that automatic release of air in the water circuit remains possible.
The internal Air Pressure of the Expansion Vessel tank will be addapted to the water Volume of the final insta-
llation (factory supplied with 1 bar. of internal Air Pressure). Refer to the Technical Catalogue data for Expansion
Vessel tank Air Pressure compensation.

3.2.5  Water flow adjustment

In every installation the Circuit’s water flow must be adjusted according to its particular internal Pressure Lost. In addition to
this, the circuit should be set according to Heating circuit (Heating Floor, Radiators, Fan Coils) and its corresponding water
outlet temperature. The procedure for adjusting the water flow is described below:
• 1st., measurement of Pressure Lost
• 2nd., check the Pump Performance Curves
• 3rd., selection of the Pump Speed
• 4th., adjustment of the water flow

69
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

 
Pressure Lost calculation

The indoor unit is factory supplied with two Shutdown Valves which are provided with a Pressure Port. The object of these
Pressure Ports, is to offer the installer a quick connection to read the Lost Pressure in the circuit when commissioning.
Plug in a differential Manometer to the Pressure Ports and open the inlet / outlet ports (1*).
The Pressure Lost is calculated from the pressure difference between the value of the inlet and the outlet water pressure.

N ote
(1*)
If there is no having a Differential Manometer, it is possible to do this operation with just one std. Manometer
(it is advisable to use the same Manometer in order to avoid reading mistakes from different devices because of
different tolerances or adjustment).

 
Check the Pump Performance Curves

Refer to the Pump Performance Curves to calculate the circuit’s Water Flow depending on the actual Pressure Drop and
the Heating Circuit type (Heating Floor, Radiators, Fan Coils).

 
Selection of the Pump Speed

The indoor unit pump should be adjusted according to Pressure Lost of the circuits and the calculated Water Flow. The
pump speed selector switch is located on the pump’s Terminal Box.

View from A

Pump speed selector

Speed indications:
Speed 1 (Low)

Speed 2 (Medium)

Speed 3 (High)

N ote
The Pumps are factory supplied on speed 3 (High)

 
Water flow adjustment

The Water Flow should be adjusted by closing one of the main Shutdown Valves until the pressure matches the Pump
Performance Curves.
Finally, the differential Manometer should be removed once the Pressure Port Valves are closed.

70
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.3  Pressure charts

 
RWM-(2.0-10.0)(H)FSN3E

RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E RWM-3.0(H)FSN3E

V3

Static pressure
Static pressure

V3
V2

V1
V2
3

Water flow Water flow

RWM-4.0(H)FSN3E RWM-5.0(H)FSN3E

V3 V3
V2
Static pressure

Static pressure

V2

V1
V1

Water flow Water flow

N ote
V: Pump motor speed (V1: Low, V2: Medium, V3: High)

71
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

RWM-6.0(H)FSN3E RWM-8.0(H)FSN3E

V2 V3
V2 V3
Static pressure

Static pressure
V1

V1

Water flow Water flow

RWM-10.0(H)FSN3E

V3

V2
Static pressure

V1

Water flow

N ote
V: Pump motor speed (V1: Low, V2: Medium, V3: High)

72
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.4  DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank

3.4.1  Hydraulic circuit

When Piping connections are performed:

1 Connect all pipes as close as possible to the unit, so that disconnection can be easily performed when required.
2 It is recommended to use flexible joints for the piping of water inlet and outlet, so vibration will not be transmitted.
3 Whenever possible, sluice valves should be installed for water piping, in order to minimise flow resistance and to main-
tain sufficient water flow.
4 It is recommended to apply ball valves in both water pipe connections to make easier any maintenance work.
5 Proper inspection should be performed to check for leaking parts inside and outside the system, by completely opening
the hot water inlet and outlet valves to the water condenser.
6 This DHWT must be fully air purged to avoid heating elements radiating the tank case without water.

3
7 Apply thermal insulation on the hydraulic system pipes in order to avoid accidental injure due to excessive heat on
piping surfaces and also to avoid heat losses.
8 When the unit is stopped during shutdown periods and the ambient temperature is very low, it is possible that the water
in the pipes and in the circulating pump freeze, thus damaging the pipes and the water pump. In order to prevent this,
during shutdown periods it is useful to empty the water from the installation.

N ote
Check periodically:
• Water flow and pressure
• Water leakage’s
• Fixing points tightening
• Inlet and outlet connection pipes must be 1G”

DHWT(200/300)(E/S)-2.5H1E

Ref. Name
H.S.W.

 Sanitary safety valve unit

Recirculation  Non-return valve

 Heating coil

 Recirculation pump

Input
 Shutoff cock

Return  Drain

Mains water
 Drain valve
input

73
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 3  Piping work and
refrigerant charge

3.4.2  Pressure drop

DHWT(200/300)E-2.5H1E DHWT(200/300)S-2.5H1E
500 500

200 200

100 100

mbar
mbar

50 50

20 20

10 10
5 5
0.2 0.5 2 5 0.2 0.5 2 5
0 1 10 3
Cp= m /h 0 1 10 Cp= m3/h

 
General standard for hydraulic installation
-- The safety valve unit will fitted at the sanitary water installation.
-- A pressure reducer must be placed in the DHWT installation. The nominal pressure of the safety unit will be 8 bar.
-- When the main pressure is more than 6 bar a pressure reducer should be installed.
-- The water discharge during heating (expansion) is normal. The volume of this discharge can be up to 3% of the
storage tank’s capacity.
-- The pressure regulator device must be working regularly , depending on the quality of water, in order to remove the
lime’s deposits and verify that it is not blockade.
-- A water leakage in the pressure protection device can exist. The discharge pipe should be always open to the at-
mosphere, free of frost and in continuous slope to the down side.
-- Dielectric bushes must be fitted at the input and output sanitary water and at the tank circuit connections.
-- Emptying the DHWT: Close the main inlet water valve and open the relief valve of the security water group.

Ref Name

 Main inlet water

 DHWT inlet connection

 Security valve and manual empty

 Emptying connection

 Check valve

 Close valve

74
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4. Electrical wiring

Index

4.1. Unit electrical wiring and connection...................................................................................................... 48

4.1.1. General check............................................................................................................................................ 48
4.1.2. Electrical connection of outdoor unit........................................................................................................... 49
4.1.3. Electrical connection of indoor unit............................................................................................................. 51

4.2. Setting of DIP switches and RSW switches........................................................................................... 59

4.2.1. Outdoor unit................................................................................................................................................ 59

4
4.2.2. Indoor unit................................................................................................................................................... 62

4.3. Common wiring...................................................................................................................................... 69

4.3.1. Electrical wiring between outdoor and indoor unit...................................................................................... 69
4.3.2. Wire sizes................................................................................................................................................... 70

4.4. DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank......................................................................................................... 71

4.5. Electrical Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................................................... 78

4.5.1. Electrical wiring diagram for indoor unit...................................................................................................... 78
4.5.2. Electrical wiring diagram for outdoor unit................................................................................................... 80

75
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.1  Unit electrical wiring and connection

4.1.1  General check

1 Ensure that the field-supplied electrical components (mains power switches, circuit breakers, wires, connectors and
wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data indicated. Make sure that they comply
with national and regional electrical codes.
2 Following the Council Directive 2004/108/EC(89/336/EEC), relating to electromagnetic compatibility, next table indica-
tes:
Maximum permissible system impedance Zmax at the interface point of the user’s supply, in accordance with
EN61000-3-11.

Outdoor unit Zmax (Ω) Indoor unit Zmax (Ω)

RAS-2HVRN2 - RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E(1~) -
RAS-3HVRNME-AF - RWM-3.0(H)FSN3E(1~) -
RAS-4HVRNME-AF 0.41 RWM-4.0(H)FSN3E(1~)(*) 0.24
RAS-5HVRNME-AF 0.29 RWM-5.0(H)FSN3E(1~)(*) 0.24
RAS-6HVRNME-AF 0.29 RWM-6.0(H)FSN3E(1~)(*) 0.24
RAS-4HRNME-AF - RWM-8.0(H)FSN3E(3N~) -
RAS-5HRNME-AF - RWM-10.0(H)FSN3E(3N~) -
RAS-6HRNME-AF -
RAS-8HRNME-AF -
RAS-10HRNME-AF -

N ote
(*) In case of indoor unit three phases connection, Zmax is not considered.

3 Harmonics situation of each model regarding IEC 61000-3-2 and IEC 61000-3-12 is as follows:

Models situation regarding IEC 61000-3-2 Ssc “xx”

Models
and IEC 61000-3-12 Ssc “xx” (KVA)
RAS-2HVRN2 (*)
RAS-3HVRNME-AF
Equipment complying with IEC 61000-3-2 RAS-4HRNME-AF (*)
-
(professional use (*)) RAS-5HRNME-AF (*)
RAS-6HRNME-AF (*)
RAS-8HRNME-AF (*)

RAS-4HVRNME-AF
Equipment complying with IEC 61000-3-12 RAS-5HVRNME-AF -
RAS-6HVRNME-AF

Installation restrictions may be applied by

RAS-10HRNME-AF -
supply authorities in relation to harmonics

4 Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +/-10% of the rated voltage.
5 Check to ensure that power supply has an impedance low enough to warranty not reduce the starting voltage more
than 85% of the rated voltage.
6 Check to ensure that the ground wire is connected.
7 Connect a fuse of specified capacity.

D anger
• Check to ensure that screws for terminal block are tightly tightened.
• Do not connect of adjust any wiring or connections unless the main power switch is OFF.
• Check that the earth wire is securely connected, tagged and locked in accordance with national and local
codes.

76
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

caution
• Check to ensure that the indoor pump and the outdoor fan have stopped before electrical wiring work or pe-
riodical check is performed.
• Protect the wires, drain pipe, electrical parts, from rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats may da-
mage unprotected parts, and at the worst, a fire will occur.
• Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to
protect the product from any condensed water and insects.
• Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the indoor unit.
• Lead the wires through the knockout hole in the side cover when using conduit.
• Electrical wiring must comply with national and local codes. Contact your local authority in regards to stan-
dards, rules, regulations, etc.
• Check that the ground wire is securely connected.

N ote
• Check and test to ensure that if there is more than one source of power supply, that all are turned OFF.
• Be sure to use a dedicated power supply. Never use a power supply shared by another appliance.

4.1.2  Electrical connection of outdoor unit

4
The correct electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit is shown below:
1 Using the appropriate cable, connect the power circuit to the appropiate terminals as shown on the wiring label and
the illustration below. In case of RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF, insert the power source cables L1, L2, L3, and N (for 380-
415V 50Hz), and the earth cable into a ring core (two turns), and fix the cables by using the band (accessory). Do not
insert the cables from a different sides into the ring core.
Wire

Wire
Wire Wire

2 Connect the power source cables L1 and N (for 230V 50Hz) or L1, L2, L3 to the terminal board, and N (for 400V
50Hz) and the earth conductor to the earthing screw in the electrical box base plate.

RAS-2HVRN2 RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF

PCB

Earth
terminal

Side cover

Power
wires
Transmission
wires Earth terminal Power wires Transmission
wires

77
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

Power
wires

Band

Earth
Ring core

Earth Power Transmission Transmitting Power source cable

terminal wires cable Earth cable
wires

3 C
onnect the transmission wires between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit to the terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal
board.

1~ 230V 50Hz 3N~ 400V 50Hz

Transmission wires (5 V)
Transmission wires (5 V)
Power supply AC 230 V

Power supply AC 400 V

4 Fix the cable with the clamp supplied in the Electrical Box to ensure strain relief.
5 When routing out cable, make sure that it does not obstruct mounting of the outdoor service cover.

Earth screw Rear cover

Wiring Method Wiring method with clamp

Keep a distance between each wiring 1 Insert the wires into the cord clamp and clamp
terminal and attach insulation tape or
them as shown in the figure.
sleeve as shown in the figure.
2 Perform wiring so that wires do not touch the
compressor, refrigerant pipes or edge of the
covers.

Make a loop of wires so that disconnecting the wirings

for replacing the parts is not required.
Fasten the wires so that wires do not touch the high
Tape or sleeve temperature compressor and the other parts.
Earth wire

Control cable Power supply cable

78
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.1.3  Electrical connection of indoor unit

 
Wiring connection

The correct electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit is shown below:
1 Using the appropriate cable, connect the power circuit to the appropiatre terminals as shown on the wiring label and
the illustration bellow.

Power terminals

Power supply: 1~ 230V 50Hz

4
Power supply: 3N~ 400V 50Hz

Earth Terminal

Power wires Transmission wires

caution
Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit for the indoor unit. Never use a power circuit shared by another
appliance (Outdoor unit).

2 Using the appropiate cables, connect the power source cables L1 and N (for 230V 50Hz) or L1, L2, L3 and N (for
400V 50Hz) and the ground cable to the earthing screw in the electrical box base plate.
3 Connect the transmission wires between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit to the terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal
board 2 (TB2).
4 Fix the cable with the clamp supplied in the Electrical Box to ensure strain relief.
5 When routing out cable, make sure that it does not obstruct mounting of the outdoor service cover.

Rear cover
Wiring method
Keep a distance between each
wiring terminal and attach insulation
tape or sleeve as shown in the
figure.

Tape or sleeve

Earth screw

Wiring method with clamp

1. Insert the wires into the cord

clamp and clamp them as shown in
the figure.

2. Perform wiring so that wires do not

touch the refrigerant pipes or edge of
the covers.
Control cable
caution
Earth wire Do not use a solderless terminal when
a single wire is used. If used, it causes
Power supply cable abnormal heating at the caulking
portion of the terminal. If a single wire
is used, connect the wire directly as
shown in the figure.

79
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Terminal board connections

Mark Part name Description

TERMINAL BOARD 1 (TB1)
N
AC 230V
L1 The mains power supply connection (230/400VAC) is wired to
AC 400V
L2 terminals T,L1,L2,L3, N.
-
L3
TERMINAL BOARD 2 (TB2)
1 Indoor/Outdoor commu- The H-LINK transmission between outdoor unit and indoor unit is
2 tation cables wired to terminals 1-2.
3 Opentherm communica- Only for Intelligent Room thermostat accessory: The receiver is
4 tion cables connected to the polarity-free terminals A/B.
The air to water heat pump system has been designed to allow
5 the connection of a remote thermostat to effectively control your
Optional ON/OFF Room home’s temperature. Depending on the room temperature, the ther-
thermostat mostat will turn the air to water heat pump system ON and OFF.
6 You will also be able to program the on and off times and achieve
intelligent consumption levels.
Terminal Line common for swimming pool, tariff switch or solar
7 L Common
input accessory.
Only for swimming pool installations: It is necessary to connect an
8 Swimming pool input external input to the air to water heat pump to provide signal when
Water pump of Swimming pool is ON.
If a tariff–switching device is provided by the electricity utility, it can
9 Tariff switch input
be used to prevent the heat pump switching ON.
10 Solar input Available input for Solar combination with Domestic Hot Water Tank.
Domestic Hot Water The air to water heat pump can be used to heat DHW. This output
11
valve will be on when DHW is activated.
12 N common Neutral terminal common for accessory devices.
The air to water heat pump can be use to heat Swimming pool.
13 Swimming pool valve
This output will be on when Swimming pool is activated.
14 Earth Connection Terminal earth connection for accessories.
15 Mixing valve close
When a mixing system is required for a second temperature con-
16 Mixing valve open
trol, these two outputs are necessary to control de mixing valve.
17 N Common
When there is a second temperature application, a secondary
18 Water Pump 2 (WP2)
pump is the circulating pump for the secondary heating loop.
19 When there is a hydraulic separator or buffer tank, additional Water
Water Pump 3 (WP3)
20 pump (WP3) is needed.
21 The boiler can be used when the heat pump cannot achieve the
Boiler output
22 required temperature itself.
23 If DHW Storage tank contains an electric heater, the air to water
Electrical Heater DHW
heat pump can enable it if the heat pump cannot achieve the requi-
24 Output
red DHW temperature itself.
25
Solar output Output for solar combination with Domestic Hot Water Tank.
26
The DHW sensor is used to control the domestic hot water storage
27 DHW thermistor
tank.
28 Common thermistor Common terminal for thermistor.
Water outlet boiler
29 Water sensor for boiler combination.
(THMwo3)
30 Water outlet C2 thermis- The sensor is used for the second temperature control and should
31 tor (THMwo2) be positioned after the mixing valve and the circulation pump.
32(+) Second ambient The sensor is used for the second ambient temperature control
33(-) thermistor and should be positioned outside.
34(+) Swimming pool The sensor is used for the swiming pool temperature control and
35(-) thermistor should be positioned inside plate HEX of swimming pool.

80
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Terminal board detailed connection

Main power supply (TB1)

The mains power connection is wired to Terminal Board 1 (TB1) as follows:
Power supply: 1~ 230V 50Hz

Power supply: 3N~ 400V 50Hz

Indoor/Outdoor commutation cables (TB2)

The transmission is wired to terminals 1-2.
4
The H-LINK II wiring system requires only two transmission cables that connect to the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.

Indoor unit
1 2

1 2 Outdoor unit

Room thermostat configuration

There are two different room thermostat types as accessory.

• Optional intelligent room thermostat (TB2) (ATW-RTU-02)

Only for Intelligent Room thermostat accessory: The receiver is connected to the polarity-free terminals 3/4.
The Room Unit and RF Receiver are already configured to communicate with each other. If the Room Unit or RF Recei-
ver is replaced or added additional second temperature circuit thermostat, it is necessary to use the RF binding procedu-
re (See binding procedure chapter)

3 4

RF
Receiver

• Optional ON/OFF room thermostat (TB2) (ATW-RTU-01)

The heat pump system has been designed to allow the connection of a remote ON/OFF thermostat to effectively control
your home’s temperature. Depending on the room temperature, the thermostat will turn the unit system ON or OFF.
• If no thermostat is installed
Terminals 4 and 5 of the Board terminal are jumped. If no remote thermostat is installed, the operating condition for the
unit (Thermo ON/OFF) will be controlled by the “water calculation” control system.

5 6

81
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

• Installation of the AF-RTU-01 Thermostat (Hitachi part)

Remove jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the Terminal Board 2 and connect the thermostat receiver as shown in the
following image:

5 6 5 6 RF Receiver

Thermostat requirements:
-- Power supply: 230V AC.
-- Contact voltage: 230V.

N ote
• If intelligent room thermostat is selected, optional ON/OFF thermostat has no effect.
• Set the configuration in the user control. See LCD User interface configuration for more information.

Swimming pool Input (TB2)

It is necessary to connect an external input to the Heat pump to provide a signal with Swimming pool’s Water pump is
ON.
L

7 8 Swimming
pool station

Water Pump
swimming pool

Tariff switch input (TB2)

If a tariff-switching device (load shedding management) is provided by the electricity utility, it can be used to prevent the
heat pump switching ON.
L

7 9 Tariff-switching
device

Tariff device

Solar input (TB2)

The solar pump station will have an auxiliary contact that closes when the solar pump station’s pump contact is operated.
This contact will provide 230 V to the input of the indoor unit, and prevent domestic water heating by the heat pump and/
or booster heater during solar heating.

L N R N 1 2 7 10

L
L N

Solar pump station

82
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

domestic hot water valve (TB2)

The unit can be used to heat DHW. The signal is used for the 3-way motorized diverting valve and provide position con-
trol of supply water flow (flow for space heating when no signal, and flow for DHW when signal is ON).

N L

12 11
DHWT 3WV
L
L(a)

N
N(b)

Using the appropriate cable, connect valve cable as shown in previous diagram.
Valve requirements:
-- Power supply: 230V AC 50Hz.
-- Maximum running current: 100mA
4
caution
Only 3-way type valve can be connected:
• Spring return 2-wire type 3-way valve: The 3-way valve should be fitted when normally working (not power
into the valve).
• If using SPST 3-wire valve, HITACHI is not responsible for its operation.

Swimming pool valve (TB2)

The unit can be used to heat Swimming pool. The signal is used for the 3-way motorized diverting valve and to provide posi-
tion control of supply water flow (flow for space heating when no signal, and flow for swimming pool when signal is ON).

N L

12 13
SWP 3WV
L(a)L
M

N
N(b)

Using the appropriate cable, connect valve cable as shown in previous diagram.
Valve requirements:
-- Power supply: 230V AC 50Hz.
-- Maximum running current: 100mA

caution
Only 3-way type valve can be connected:
• Spring return 2-wire type 3-way valve: the 3-way valve should be fitted when normally working (not power
into the valve).
• If using SPST 3-wire valve, HITACHI is not responsible for its operation.

83
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

Mixing valve for 2nd circuit control (tb2)

In a mixing system (for second temperature level), the mixing valve is controlled to maintain the required supply tempera-
ture.

L N L Item Name Description

15 Left Close
15 17 16
Vmix
17 Neutral Neutral
R-3
16 Right Open
N-2 M
L-1

Using the appropriate cable, connect valve cable as shown in previous diagram.
Valve requirements:
-- Power supply: 230V AC 50Hz.
-- Maximum running current: 100mA

Water pump 2 for 2nd circuit control (tb2)

In case of second circuit installation (second temperature level), the secondary pump is the circulating pump for the se-
cond heating circuit.

N L

17 18 WP2
Secondary
water pump

Using the appropriate cable, connect pump cable as shown in previous diagram.
Pump requirements:
-- Power supply 230V AC 50Hz.
-- Maximum running current: 500mA (In case of high water pump consumption, install an auxiliary relay).

Water pump 3 for hydraulic separator system (TB2)

When the boiler is configured with the heat pump or needs an additional pump for the system, a hydraulic separator or
buffer tank must be used to ensure proper hydraulic balancing. Additional Water pump (WP3) is needed.

19 20

Water
pump

Using the appropriate cable, connect pump cable as shown in previous diagram.
Pump requirements:
-- Power supply. 230Vac 50Hz.
-- Maximum running current: 500mA (In case of high water pump consumption, install an auxiliary relay).

84
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

Boiler output (TB2)

The boiler can be used when the heat pump cannot achieve the required temperature itself.
This output is activated when Boiler demands it.

21 22 Boiler

Boiler input

electrical heater dhwt output (TB2)

If DHW Storage tank contains an electric heater, the Air to water heat pump can enable it if the heat pump cannot achie-
ve the required DHW temperature itself.

4
23 24 EH DHWT

Electrical heater input

N ote
For the HITACHI Domestic Hot Water Tank (DHW200/300(E/S)-2.5H1E) the Terminal connections will be terminals
3 and 4.

Solar output (tb2)

When solar mode is enabled by the heat pump and the temperature in the solar panel rises above the water temperature
in the domestic hot water tank, Heat pump outputs will be switched ON.

25 26

- Option 1: Auxiliary water pump
- Option 2: Solar 3-way valve

85
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

thermistors
-- The DHW sensor (THMDHW) is used to control the domestic hot water storage tank.
-- Water sensor (THMWO3) for hydraulic separator or buffer tank and boiler combination.
-- The mixed supply sensor (THMWO2) is used in systems with a mixing valve and should be positioned after the
mixing valve and the circulation pump on the second circuit.
-- 2nd ambient sensor (THMAMB2) is used when the heatpump is located in a position not suitable for this measura-
ment
-- Swimming pool sensor (THMSWP) is used for the swimming pool-temperature control and should be positioned
inside plate HEX of swimming pool.

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

+ - + -
THMDHWT THMwo3 THMwo2 THMamb2 THMswp

N ote
2nd Ambient sensor and swimming pool temperature uses a sensor with 4-20mA transceiver, The 4-20mA sig-
nal is polarity-sensitive. You must connect the wires as shown.

86
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.2  Setting of DIP switches and RSW switches

4.2.1  Outdoor unit

 
Location of DIP switches and RSW switches

The PCB (see the electrical wiring diagram - plane a) in the outdoor unit is operated with different dip switches, rotary
switches and push switches.
Position switches at the PCB:

RAS-2HVRN2
RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF
PCB1 PCB2

SEG1

DSW6
DSW1
LED2 PSW2
SW1
PSW1 PSW3
DSW4

4
DSW3 RSW
LED1
DSW2
LED3 

JP6
JP1
DSW5

N ote
• The mark “■” indicates the position of dips switches.
• No mark “■” indicates pin position is not affecting.
• The figures show the settings before shipment or after selection.

caution
Before setting dips switches, first turn the power source off and then set the position of the dips switches. In
case of setting the switches without turning the power source off, the contents of the setting are invalid.

 
Function of the of DIP switches and RSW switches

DSW1: Test Run

Function Setting position

Setting before shipment

1234

Test run for cooling

1234

Test run for heating

1234

Forced stop of compressor (1)

The compressor is OFF during this operation. 1234

N ote
• It is possible to select the cancellation of the outdoor hot start control by pushing both PSW1 & PSW3 simul-
taneously during 3 seconds.
• This operation is reset once the compressor is in Thermo-ON mode.
• During the test run operation the units will operate continuously during 2 hours without Thermo-OFF and the
3-minute guard for compressor protection will be effective.

87
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

DSW2: Piping length/selection function

Function Setting position

Setting before shipment

1234 56

5 m < Lt
1234 56
Piping length
5 m < Lt < 30 m
1234 56

Cancellation of outdoor hot start control.

(Not recommended, only available for special testing cases) 1234 56

Cancellation of outdoor air temperature control. (No change)

1234 56

Optional function selection setting

(set by PSW) 1234 56

External input/output selection signals (set by PSW)

1234 56

caution
The cancellation of the outdoor hot start control configuration could damage the compressor if it is usually
used. In that case the unit warranty will be void.

N ote
Only for RAS-2HVRN2 units:
In case of using DHWT and Heat in summer operation, DSW2 pin 4 needs to be on.

DSW3: Capacity setting

Unit Setting position Unit Setting position

RAS-2HVRN2 RAS-4HRNME-AF
1234 56 1234 56

RAS-3HVRNME -AF RAS-5HRNME -AF

1234 56 1234 56

RAS-4HVRNME -AF RAS-6HRNME -AF

1234 56 1234 56

RAS-5HVRNME -AF RAS-8HRNME -AF

1234 56 1234 56

RAS-6HVRNME-AF RAS-10HRNME-AF
1234 56 1234 56

88
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

DSW4/RSW1: Refrigerant cycle setting (No change)

Setting position (DSW4) Setting position (RSW1)

Setting for tens Setting for units

(second digit) 1234 56 (first digit)

Rotary switches’ positions (RSW1) are set by inserting a screw driver into the groove.

DSW5: Transmission setting of end terminal resistance

Before shipment, No. 1 pin of DSW5 is set at ON.

Function Setting position

Setting before shipment

12

DSW6: Power source setting/individual operation

4
Setting position
Function
2HP 3HP (4/5/6)HP (8/10)HP
230V
-
(setting before shipment) 12 12 12

400V
- -
(setting before shipment) 12 12

 
Jumpers

Jumper lead setting (JP1~6)

Setting before shipment:

JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6

1 0 0 1 1 1

0 = Open; 1 = Short circuit

The function selection using the jumper lead setting is shown in the table below.

Setting Function Details

JP1 (*) Not used -
JP2 Not used -
JP3 Not used -
JP4 Not used -
JP5 Not used -
JP6 Not used -

(*) Only for RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

 
LED’s indication

LED Indication
This LED indicates the transmission status between the
LED1 Red
indoor unit and the RCS
This LED indicates the transmission status between the
LED2 Yellow
indoor unit and the outdoor unit
LED3 Green Power source for the PCB

89
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.2.2  Indoor unit

 
Location of DIP switches and RSW switches

Below are the dip switch positions:

Upper side shows

unit status

Lower side shows

unit status 2

Status indication. Press

PSW2 more than 3 seconds
to change the status display
mode

N ote
• The mark “■” indicates the dip switches positions.
• No mark “■” indicates pin position is not affected.
• The figures show the settings before shipment or after selection.
• “Not used” means that the pin must not be changed. A malfunction might occur if changed.

caution
Before setting dip switches, first turn the power supply OFF and then set the position of dip switches. If the
switches are set without turning the power supply OFF, the contents of the setting are invalid.

90
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Functions of dip switches and rotary switches

DSW1: Not used

DSW2: Unit capacity setting

RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E

RWM-3.0(H)FSN3E

RWM-4.0(H)FSN3E

RWM-5.0(H)FSN3E
4
RWM-6.0(H)FSN3E

RWM-8.0(H)FSN3E

RWM-10.0(H)FSN3E

DSW3: Additional settings

Setting before shipment

N.A (not used)

N.A (not used)

1-step heater for 3-phase unit

N.A. (Not used)

91
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

DSW4: Additional setting

Setting before shipment

7 8

Optional functions enabled

7 8

Heater Forced OFF

7 8

N.A. (Not used)

7 8

Standard / ECO water pump operation

7 8

Emergency operation heater

7 8

Cooling operation
7 8

Outdoor sensor accessory

7 8

N.A (not used)

7 8

N ote
Never activate Heater Forced OFF and Emergency operation heater at the same time.

caution
Never turn all DSW4 dip switch pins ON. If this happens, the software of the unit will be removed.

DSW5: Internal configuration

Not used

DSW6: Internal configuration

Not used

DSW7: Internal configuration

Not used

DSW8: Internal configuration

Not used

DSW9: Internal configuration

Not used

92
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

RSW1 & RSW2: Refrigerant cycle setting

Refrigerant cycle setting:

RSW1: Ten digits
RSW2: Unit digits

RSW3 & RSW4: Indoor unit address setting

Refrigerant cycle setting:

RSW3: Ten digits
RSW4: Unit digits

 
Led indications

LED1: Pump operation

Status LED1
4
Pump operation ON ON

Power supply OFF OFF

LED2: System heater operation

Status LED2

System Heater or Boiler operation ON

System Heater or Boiler operation OFF

LED3: HSW Heater operation

Status LED3

HSW Heater operation ON ON

HSW Heater operation OFF OFF

LED4: Operation status indication

Status LED4

Thermo OFF OFF

Thermo ON ON

93
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

LED5: Power supply indication

Status LED5

Supply ON ON

Supply OFF OFF

LED6: Alarm indication

Status LED5

Alarm ON ON (flick)

Alarm OFF OFF

LED7: Not used

LED8: H-Link transmission indication

 
Operation display (seven-segments PCB)

Operation display at normal operation

-- Segment display:

Segment Display
Upper Lower
(2 char) (3 char)
Unit OFF oF

Cooling – Demand OFF 5t

Cooling – Thermo OFF Co of

Cooling – Thermo ON on

Heating – Demand OFF 5t

Heating – Thermo OFF of

hE
Heating – Thermo ON on

Heating – Boiler ON bo

Hot Sanitary Water – Thermo OFF oF

hS
Hot Sanitary Water – Thermo ON on

Swimming Pool – Thermo OFF oF

sP
Swimming Pool – Thermo ON on

Alarm AL Alarm code

Test Run Heating/Cooling t(h/c) --

Tariff function enabled HE/Co tAr

94
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

Check indicator
-- Combination of checking switches (▲: PSW2▼: PSW1) displays the three indications shown below:

▲: PSW2 ▼: PSW1 Function name Detail of display

Water temps,
○ Check indicator
cycle temps, etc

○: Press for more than 3 sec

Press PSW2 for more than 3 sec.

Normal Display

Check
indicator

4
Press PSW2 for more than 3 sec.

When there is no entry for 1 hour

ŠŠ Check indicator mode

Switches to this mode to display the temperature that the microcomputer detects, etc. when PSW2 is pressed
more than three seconds.
Operation and display Details:
Check indication

This section shows an example of “check indication”

Co Temperature is displayed with the number rounded up to
the nearest whole number. Fix the minus sign to the box
on the left.

Press PSW2 for more than 3 sec.

In Cold water inlet temperature

<Example of 12ºC
12

PSW2 PSW1

0t Cold water outlet temperature

<Example of 12ºC
35

PSW2 PSW1
… …

95
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
4  Electrical wiring

ŠŠ Summary table of “Check indication”

Code Display Data display Description

th BBB Heat water Temperature Setting (ºC)

tC BBB Cold Water Temperature Setting (ºC)

in BBB Water Inlet Temperature (THMWI) (ºC)

ot BBB Water outlet Temperature (THMWO) (ºC)

oi BBB Water outlet Temperature HP (THMWOHP) (ºC)

o2 BBB Water outlet Temperature Circuit 2 (THMWO2) (ºC)

ob BBB Water outlet Temperature Boiler (THMWO3)

oh BBB Water outlet Temperature DHW (THMDHW) (ºC)

oS BBB Swimming pool Temperature (THMSWP) (ºC)

tA BBB Outdoor Unit Ambient Temperature (THM7) (ºC)

tA. BBB Second ambient Temperature (THMAMB2) (ºC)

tI BBB Outdoor Unit Average Ambient Temperature (ºC)

tG BBB Gas Temperature (THMG) (ºC)

tL BBB Liquid Temperature (THML) (ºC)

td BBB Compressor top Temperature (THM9) (ºC)

ts BBB Evaporation gas Temperature (THM8) (ºC)

df 888 Defrosting

d1 888 Cause of stoppage

h1 BBB Inverter Operation frequency (Hz)

ei BBB Indoor Expansion valve opening (%)

Eo BBB Outdoor Expansion valve opening

p1 BBB Compressor running current (A)

d1 BBB Digital inputs

do BBB Digital outputs

ou BBB Refrigerant Cycle Address

iu BBB Indoor Unit Address

no BBB ROM Nº

Cd BBB Capacity Code (Hp x 8)

Co BBB Outdoor capacity Cope (Hp x 8)

Indoor & Outdoor Unit Capacity Code

Capacity Code
2HP 14
3HP 22
4HP 32
5HP 40
6HP 48
8HP 64
10HP 80

96
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.3  Common wiring

caution
All the field wiring and electrical components must comply with local codes.

4.3.1  Electrical wiring between outdoor and indoor unit

-- Connect the electrical wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit, as shown in the next diagram.
-- Follow the local codes and regulations when performing the electrical wiring.
-- Use twist pair wires (more than 0.75 mm²) for operation wiring between outdoor unit and indoor unit.
-- Use 2-core wires for the operating line (Do not use wire with more than 3 cores).
-- Use shielded wires for intermediate wiring to protect the units from noise obstacle and sizing in compliance with
local codes.
-- In the event that a conduit tube for field-wiring is not used, fix rubber bushes to the panel with adhesive.
-- All the field wiring and equipment must comply with local and international codes.

C aution
4
Pay attention to the connection of the operating line. Incorrect connection may cause PCB failure.

Operating Line
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit (Twisted shielded pair
RAS-2HVRN2
RAS-3~6HVRNME-AF RAS-4~6HVRNME-AF cable or shielded pair
Operating Line RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF cable)
RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF DC5V (Non-Pole Trans-
(Twisted shielded pair cable or shielded pair mission, H-LINK system)
cable)DC5V (Non-Pole Transmission, H-LINK
system)

IndoorIndoor
unit Unit IndoorIndoor
unit Unit
RWM-(2.0-6.0)FSN3E
RWM-3~6FSN3E RWM-(4.0-10.0)FSN3E
RWM-4~6FSN3E

TB : Terminal Board
CB : Circuit Breaker
ELB : Earth Leakage Breaker
: Internal Wiring
: Field Wiring
: Field-Supplied
1,2 : Outdoor-Indoor connection

N ote

The power supply must be connected to the outdoor unit and indoor unit separately.

97
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.3.2  Wire sizes

• Recommended minimum sizes for field provided wires

Max. Power supply Required Transmiting Required Actuator Required

Model Power supply Current cable size number Cable Size number cable size number
(A) of wires of wires of wires
EN60335-1 EN60335-1 EN60335-1
RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E 16 4.0 mm²
1~ 230V 50Hz 2 + GND
RWM-3.0(H)FSN3E 16 4.0 mm²
RWM-4.0(H)FSN3E 32/11 6.0/2.5 mm²
1~ 230V 50Hz 2 + GND /
RWM-5.0(H)FSN3E 32/11 6.0/2.5 mm²
3N~ 400V 50Hz 4 + GND
RWM-6.0(H)FSN3E 32/11 6.0/2.5 mm²
RWM-8.0(H)FSN3E 17 4.0 mm²
3N~ 400V 50Hz 4 + GND
RWM-10.0(H)FSN3E 17 4.0 mm²
RAS-2HVRN2 11 2.5 mm² 2+
RAS-3HVRNME-AF 14 4.0 mm² 0.75 mm2 (*Shielded 0.75 mm2 2 + GND
RAS-4HVRNME-AF 1~ 230V 50Hz 18 4.0 mm² 2 + GND cable)
RAS-5HVRNME-AF 26 6.0 mm²
RAS-6HVRNME-AF 26 6.0 mm²
RAS-4HRNME-AF 7 2.5 mm²
RAS-5HRNME-AF 11 4.0 mm²
RAS-6HRNME-AF 3N~400V 50 Hz 13 4.0 mm² 4 + GND
RAS-8HRNME-AF 13 4.0 mm²
RAS-10HRNME-AF 17 4.0 mm²

N ote
GND: Ground wire

• Types of switches
Select the main switches in accordance with the following table:
Max. Current ELB
Model Power supply CB (A)
(A) (no. of poles/A/mA)
RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E 16 20
1~230V 50Hz 2/40/30
RWM-3.0(H)FSN3E 16 20
RWM-4.0(H)FSN3E 32/11 32/15
1~230V 50Hz
RWM-5.0(H)FSN3E 32/11 32/15 2/40/30 - 4/40/30
3N~400V 50Hz
RWM-6.0(H)FSN3E 32/11 32/15
RWM-8.0(H)FSN3E 17 20
3N~400V 50Hz 4/40/30
RWM-10.0(H)FSN3E 17 20
RAS-2HVRN2 11 16
RAS-3HVRNME-AF 14 25
RAS-4HVRNME-AF 1~230V 50Hz 18 25 2/40/30
RAS-5HVRNME-AF 26 32
RAS-6HVRNME-AF 26 32
RAS-4HRNME-AF 7 15
RAS-5HRNME-AF 11 20
RAS-6HRNME-AF 3N~400V 50 Hz 13 20 4/40/30
RAS-8HRNME-AF 13,2 20
RAS-10HRNME-AF 17,1 25

N ote
CB: Circuit Breaker
ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker

98
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.4  DHWT - Domestic Hot Water Tank

 
General check

1 Ensure that the field-supplied electrical components (mains power switches, circuit breakers, wires, connectors and
wire terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical data indicated. Make sure that they comply
with national and regional electrical codes.
2 Electrical connection must be done by professional installer.
3 Check to ensure that the power supply voltage is within +/-10% of the rated voltage.
4 Make ensure that power supply has an impedance low enough to warranty not reduce the starting voltage more than
85% of the rated voltage.
5 Check that the earth wire is securely connected, tagged and locked in accordance with national and local codes.
6 Connect a fuse of specified capacity.
7 Check periodically the electrical connection tightening.

D anger
Electrical hazard. Can cause serious injuries or death.
4
• Do not connect or adjust any wiring or connections unless the main power switch is OFF.
• Make sure that all the power sources are switched OFF.
• Check that the earth wire is securely connected, tagged and locked in accordance with national and local
codes.
• Check and test to ensure that if there is more than one source of power supply, that all are turned OFF.
• Check to ensure that the screws of the terminal block are tightly tightened.
Crash hazard. Can cause serious injuries or death.
• Check to ensure that Yutaki fans are stopped before electrical wiring work or periodical check is performed.

caution
Damage to wires. Risk of fire.
• Protect the wires, drain pipe and electrical parts from water, rats or other small animals. If not protected, rats
may damage unprotected parts.
• Wrap the accessory packing around the wires, and plug the wiring connection hole with the seal material to
protect the product from any condensed water and insects.
• Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside the unit.
• Electrical wiring must comply with national and local codes. Contact your local authority in regards to stan-
dards, rules, regulations, etc.
• Check that the ground wire is securely connected.

99
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Electrical wiring connection

The electrical wiring connection between DHWT and Yutaki system is as follows:
Customer connection:

Power supply:
Electric heater DHWT Sensor DHWT
1~ 230V 50Hz

Pump con-
nection

 
Wire size
• Recommended minimum size for field provided wires:

Power supply EH control Sensor cable

Maximum cable size cable size size
Model Power supply
current (A)
EN60335-1 EN60335-1 EN60335-1

DHWT 1~ 230V 50Hz 15 2.5 mm² 1.0 mm2 0.75 mm2

• Type of switches:
Select the main switches in accordance with the following table:

Maximum current ELB

Model Power supply CB (A)
(A) (nº of poles/A/mA)

DHWT 1~ 230V 50Hz 15 20 2/40/30

N ote
• CB: Circuit Breaker
• ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker
• Follow local codes and regulations when selecting field wires, Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Breakers
• Use the wires which are not lighter than de ordinary polychloroprene sheated flexible cord (code designation
H05RN-F).Electrical wiring connection diagram

100
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Electrical wiring connection diagram

Power cable Control cable

(To system control unit)

Main switch

Ref. Name
WT Regulating and Safety thermostat
Re Auxiliary Relay
SW1 Operating Mode switch
R 123 Electrical Heater
LD1 LED1: POWER ON
LD2 LED2: AUTO MODE ON
LD3 LED3: Electrical Heater Manual
TB Terminal Board
L/N/T Power supply
3/4 Control Heater Input
5/6 Electrical Heater Connection

101
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Internal wiring

Internal Wiring Connection

Power cable

Control EH cable
Sensor DHWT cable

Detail D

 
Cathodic protection

2 1-4

2 8
+
9 3
10 -
5
Anode-Control

3 OK

Test

7 6

In order to protect the inside of the vessel from corrosion all the enamelled DHWT can be equipped whit a cathodic pro-
tection unit, comprising magnesium sacrifice anodes, charge gauges and wiring of connection.
It basically comprises a magnesium anode (1) mounted on the storage tank’s connection plate (2), connected to the ex-
ternal anode load measured (3) which allow to know the anode consumption rate without having to dismantle it.

102
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

The electrical connection of the load measured (3) to the anode (1), is made through the wiring of connection (6):
-- To the anode: U shaped terminal M10 (4)
-- To the load measured: female Faston terminal 2.8 (10)
The electrical connection of the load measured (3) to the earth, is made through the wiring of connection (7):
-- To earth: U shaped terminal M10 (5)
-- To the load measured: female Faston terminal 6.3 (10)

caution
• Check the magnesium anode load periodically by pushing the button. If the gauge is in the red zone, the
magnesium anode must be replaced.
• Do not install the permanent cathode protection and the cathodic protection together.

 
Titanium protection accessory

4 2 5 1 6
4
9
10
3
11
7
8

All the Hitachi DHWT can be equipped with the permanent cathode protection system which is totally automatic and
maintenance free.
It basically comprises a titanium anode (1) mounted on the storage tank’s connection plate (2) and connected to a poten-
tiostat (3) which automatically regulates the input current to the anode, constantly measuring the potential of the storage
tank), through the leads (4).Wiring the anode to the potentiostat by means of leads (4) is carried out in the following way:
-- To the anode: connection (5), female Faston terminal.
-- To earth: connection (6), U shaped terminal.
-- To the potentiostat: connections at (9) and (10), pins (7) and (8) respectively.

N ote
• Use original wires only. To avoid any risk of corrosion due to reverse polarity do not lengthen nor shorten
the wires.
• Use a socket base near to the storage heater for this purpose.The protective anode starts comes into opera-
tion when the storage heater is full of water. When there is no water the control pilot light (11) lights up red
and blinks on and off.
• lf the pilot light (11) is green, this shows that the storage heater is receiving a protective current. lf the pilot
light is not on or lights up red and blinks, check the connections, contacts and mains supply. lf this anomaly
continues, contact the fitter or our Customer Technical Service Department.
• In the case of vertically installed storage heaters from which water is not going to be extracted for periods of
more than 3 months, we recommend fitting an automatic purger at the DHW outlet.
• lf the storage heater is installed horizontally, we recommend the extraction of water at least once every 3
months.
• The potentiostat (3) and connecting wires (4) must not be disconnected, except when the storage heater is
emptied.
• Do not disconnect the protection system during periods of absense (holidays, etc.).
• Occasionally check that the pilot light is working correctly (11).

103
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
Electric heater

The electric heater is made of Incoloy alloy 825 and complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
It comprises a flange that holds three U-Shaped heating elements for 2.5kw power resistances.

Replace electric heater

The steps to be followed are:
1 Totally disconnect the unit from the main power supply.
2 With the help of a tool remove the heater to be replaced. Be careful not to damage the enamel surface in case of
enamelled tanks.
3 Insert the new heater in the same position as the old one.
4 Connect again and plug into the main power supply.

Safety measures
Before any intervention, totally disconnect the DHWT from the main power supply. All the connections circuits must be
disconnected.
Installation, configuration, start up and maintenance of heating elements must be carried out by an authorised electrical
fitter. All standards and regulations must be observed.
The user is responsible of ensuring that the essential requirements of the European Low Voltage Directive are respected.
Electric heating elements generates high temperatures. Precautions should be taken to protect goods and persons from
accidental burns during the operation and after the equipment has been disconnected or installed.
Note minimum cable section: Resistances of 2.5kW recommended cable: H05SJ-K accordance with UNE 21027, and will
have at least 2.5mm² section.
The tanks must be with a DHWT temperature control thermostat and an all-pole limiter thermostat (the setting of these
two components must be compatible with the design parameters of storage tanks). The sensors must always be located
at a higher level than the electric heater element.
We recommend installing appropriate safety devices (temperature safety device, safety level for heating liquids by natu-
ral convection, flow safety device for liquids in circulation, etc.).

104
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
4  Electrical wiring

DHWT(200/300)S-2.5H1E Ref. Name

 Flange

 Heater

 Seal
To earth terminal of the control panel
To the top flange  Washers
To terminal 5 and 6 of the control panel
 Screws

 Studs

 Nuts

 Metal protective casing

 Screws M6

 Panel


4
Screws M4

 Wires

 Earth Wire

DHWT(200/300)E-2.5H1E
Ref. Name
To earth terminal of the control panel
To the top flange
 Flange

To terminal 5 and 6 of the control panel

 Heater

 Seal

 Nuts

 Nylon bushing

 Nylon washers

Heater connection  Metalic washers

 Metal protective casing

 Screws M6

 Panel

 Screws M4

 Wires

 Earth Wire

105
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.5  Electrical Wiring Diagrams

4.5.1  Electrical wiring diagram for indoor unit

 
RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E

106
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
RWM-(8.0/10)(H)FSN3E

107
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

4.5.2  Electrical wiring diagram for outdoor unit

 
RAS-2HVRN2

108
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
  
4  Electrical wiring

109
RAS-3HVRNME-AF

Mark Name of Parts Remarks

MC Motor (for Compressor)
MOF1 Motor (for Fan)

SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012

EF1 Power Fuse
CMC Magnetic Contactor (for Compressor)
RVR Magnetic 4 Way Valve
MV Electrical Expansion Valve
TB1,2 Terminal Board
TF1 Transformer
PCB1 Printed Circuit Board
EFR1 Fuse
Y 52C Aux.Relay (For Compressor,Magnetic Contactor) DC Coil
Y 21 Aux.Relay(For Magnetic 4 Way Valve) DC Coil
Y 20A Aux.Relay(For Magnetic Valve) DC Coil
Y CH Aux.Relay(For C Heater) DC Coil
THM7 Thermistor (for Outdoor Air)
THM8 Thermistor (for Piping)
THM9 Thermistor (for Comp. Top)
PSH High Pressure Switch(for Protection)
PSC High Pressure Switch(for Control)
W Surface DCL Reactor
DIP-IPM Inverter Module
RY1

DIP-IPM R NF1~3 Noise Filter

+

JP12
U R116 R115
HY-200-101

Surface V DCL1
JP11
CMC
DM1

Surface ~ ~ DM2
J1
D15

Electrical Box PSW1 Switch(Forced Defrosting) On PWB

C112
-

+ - RY2
Z1
C108
R65

JP6
17B35740A

JP4
PV051-1

S PSW2 Switch(Checking) On PWB

JP5
R66

SEG1 DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE

SK1
R1
Q203

R112

U W CN5A CN14 CN15 R111

R67

PCN10 PCN13 PCN9 PCN8 L12 N2 CP20

R89

R2
C33
CP21

R3
Lot No.

DM3
~ ~ R96
CP14
QN2

R117
PCB1

PCN7
QN1
PSW3 Switch(Checking) On PWB
CP19

DCL2
JP2
R28

ON
Y52C + T -
R48
QP1
R29

DSW6 R46 R118

+
R27

1 2
Q204

Y20A
CP22

Back Side of

+
F
C110

ON

PCN6
JP3

JP1

V LED2 1 2 3 4
DSW1 Y21
JP8

Surface U JP14
DSW1 Switch(Test Run) On PWB
CP28
LED201
RD ê‘

PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 NF 1 CN4 WH

CN1 WH

+
+
SW1 1 1
D13
JP7

+
YCH
R110

THM9
R7
R40
R39

D25
C44

8
CP13

D21
D20
D22
D18
D24

PCN5
RSW1
R59

R35
BK
R53

IC9
CP1
CP3

CP27
D8
D3

PCN401
1
D12
D11
D23

ON ON TP1
5

IC5
1
4

78
D19

23
R58

456
1

R54
91
CP2
C40

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
CP23

C25 R34
DSW2 Switch(Auxiliary Option Setting) On PWB
Q201
C24

THM8
0 R93
IC6

PC209
21

5
8
R26

R43

+
CP5
R303

DSW3 DSW4
C50

CP29
R304

CP26
R86

CP25

ON LED1
RD
R22

C51

+
1 2 3 4 5 6 C52
R109

CP18

DSW2

PCN2
60
41

IC8
CP24

PC208
1

THM7
8
R17

CN207
R113
CB3

61
40
R114
C30
26

1
C104

IC1

R211 PC207

Switch(Outdoor Capacity Setting) On PWB

4
5

DSW3
CP4

+
ZD5

R18
R16

C4
X1

CN2
C38
C39
C2

Q202
R20

CN206

C203
80
R25

C12

EFS1
EFR1
21

+
C47
W
1
R214
1
20

WH
C206
R210

LED3 PCN1
ZD4

CP11
CP8

C6
CP30

CN11 JP10

CN6
CP6
CP9

CN2

ON
D7

CN8
DSW4 Switch(Refrigerant Cycle Setting) On PWB
CP12
C5

V
DSW1

1 2 3
CP7

1 2
CP10

GN
R24
R23

R87
R88
C11

ON

OFF
YE

C102
C53
LED202

DSW5 R15
CB2

CP15
ZD3

DCL C101
U
IC4
D6

C54
G
D5

DSW5 Switch On PWB

I

R14
C10

R30 R301
22

D2
C21
ZD2

NF 3
HT2

PC204

BL
ê¬
R13
C55
C100

TF1
C105

C202
1

DSW6 Switch (Power Source Setting) On PWB

PC206

JP9
L1
C109
CB1

CN204
PC205

TB1
1
HT1

1
C16

D14
Z2

PC201
C19

D9
C208

CP17

IC3
PC202

S PCN202 PCN201
SW1 Switch(Transmission Changeover) On PWB
C17

RD
CN203

CN202 CN201 WH
C D 1 RD 1 WH
R205

PC203

D10
1
1

CMC
BK
C201

1 1
CP16

1 1 1 1

0V 220V 240V
CH Crankcase Heater
EF 1 L11 N1
L2
L1 N
1 2 DS 1,2 Inserting Type Connector
FUSE NF 2
CAPACITY G
50A Ground
4
 4  Electrical wiring

 
RAS-(4-6)HVRNME-AF

110
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 4  Electrical wiring

 
RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF

111
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
  
Connector for 220V

Connector for 240V

4  Electrical wiring

112
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012

Mark Part Name
CA Capacitor
CS1. 2
CB1. 2 Capacitor
CH Crankcase heater
CMC1 Contactor for compressor motor
DCL Reactor
DS 1. 2 I. F Connector
DM Diode module
Electrical Control Box
DSW1~6 Dip switch on PCB1
EF1. 2 Fuse
IPM Inverter system power module
MC1 Motor for compressor
MOF1. 2 Motor for outdoor fan
MV1 Micro-computer control expansion valve
NF1~6 Noise filter
PCB1~5 Printed circuit board
Electrical Control Box
Plane c Plane d PSC. PSL Pressure switch for control
PSH High pressure switch for protection
d Plane a Plane b PSW1~3 Push switch on PCB1
RS1. 2 Resistor for starting
c R1. 2 Resistor
b RVR Reversing valve relay
SVA1. A2
Solenoid valve for hot gas bypass
SVF
a TB1. 2 Terminal board
TF1 Transformer
THM Thermistor for fin temperature
THM 7~9 Thermistor
ZNR Surge absorber
 5  Control system

5. Control system

Index

5.1. Device control system............................................................................................................................ 86

5.2. Printed circuit board............................................................................................................................... 87

5.2.1. Indoor unit................................................................................................................................................... 87
5.2.2. Outdoor unit................................................................................................................................................ 88

5.3. Safety protection and control device...................................................................................................... 90

5.3.1. Indoor unit................................................................................................................................................... 90
5.3.2. Outdoor unit................................................................................................................................................ 90

5.4. Standard control functions..................................................................................................................... 91

5
5.4.1. Indoor Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 91

113
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

5.1  Device control system

The figure below shows the outline of the control system.

Wireless remote Wireless remote

control switch control switch 2

Multiple signals
Wireless
transmission circuit Suction gas pressure sensor Single signals
Thermistor for water inlet (Receiver)
Thermistor for water outlet Discharge gas pressure sensor
Operation signals
Thermistor for water outlet 2 Thermistor for outdoor temperature
Thermistor for water outlet 3 Discharge gas thermistor
Thermistor for heating evaporation temperature
Thermistor for water outlet HP
Transmission circuit PSC
Thermistor for water swimmingpool (Opentherm)
Liquid refrigerant thermistor Power source
Gas refrigerant thermistor

Protection circuit
A+D conversion circuit
A+D conversion
LCD User Interface
circuit

Inverter power
section

Transmission
Transmission
YUTAKI S unit PCB

circuit
Circuit Outdoor unit MCU Inverter
control MCU

Electrical control expansion Relay drive

Inputs drive circuit Electrical control
valve drive circuit circuit Relay drive Inverter control for
expansion valve
circuit fan MCU
drive circuit
CT1
MC

LWPSS ON/OFF
SOLin SWPin TARIFF in 52P THe
WFS THERM
MV MOF2
MV1 MV2
Option signals Protections

CH1 MOF1 RVR SVA

SF Outdoor unit
3WV 3WV MIX
AR1 AR2 DHW SWP VALV WP1 WP2 WP3

Indoor unit Solar EH BC Wireless

DHW transmission circuit

Wireless remote
control switch

Symbol Name Symbol Name

AR1,2 Heater steps control LWPS Low water pressure switch
3WV DHW 3-way valve for Domestic Hot Water Tank output WFS Water flow switch
3WV SWP 3-way valve for swimming pool output ON/OFF
ON / OFF Room thermostat input (accessory)
MIX VALV Mixing valve for second temperature control THERM
WP1,2,3 Water pumps (primary, secondary, buffer tank) MV1,2 Electronic expansion valves
Solar Solar output (accessory) CH1 Crankcase heater
EH DHW Electrical heater Domestic Hot Water tank output MOF1,2 Motor (for outdoor fan)
BC Boiler combination output RVR 4-way valve
SOLin Solar input (accessory) SVA SF Solenoid valve
CT1 Current transformer
SWPin Swimming pool input
MC Compressor magnetic contactor
TARIFFin Electrical tariff input
PSC Pressure switch for control
52P Water pump auxiliary contactor
THe Electrical heater thermostat protection

114
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

5.2  Printed circuit board

5.2.1  Indoor unit
• PCB Drawing
PCB1 PCB2

Connector Indications
PCB1
Name Connector Nº

5
Power supply PCN1
Power supply 2 PCN2
Power Transformer power supply (230v) PCN3A,B
Transformer power supply (24v) CN10A,B
LCD Power supply CN15
Pro- Low Water Pressure & Water Flow control PCN10
tection Pump feedback PCN4
Device Heater protection (Thermostat cut-out) PCN5
Switch indication
PCB1
Name Connector No. Trans- H-Link communication CN1
Not used DSW1 mission PCB1-PCB2 communication CN2,5,6,9
Capacity Setting DSW2 Swimming pool water thermistor or 2nd
A/D Input CN4
Additional setting DSW3 ambient temperature
Additional setting DSW4 Heater step 1 PCN7
Not used DSW5 Heater step 2 PCN8
H-link (transmission) DSW6 Room thermostat (ON/OFF) PCN6
Operation Additional setting DSW7 Swimming pool input PCN10
/ Display
RSW1 External Electrical Tariff input PCN10
Refrigerant unit address
RSW2 Input / Solar input PCN7
Output 3-way valve swimming pool output PCN8
RSW3
Indoor unit address
RSW4 3-way valve DHW output PCN8
Checking Mode (Forward) PSW1 Mixing valve second temperature PCN 9 / 12
Checking Mode (Back) PSW2 Secondary pump output (WP2) PCN9
Secondary pump output (WP3) PCN9
LED indication
PCB1 PCB2
Name Connector No.
Pump Actuator PCN1
7-segment SEG1,2,3,4,5
Boiler signal PCN2
Water Pump operation LED1 Actuator
Electrical heater DHW signal PCN3
Heater or Boiler operation LED2
Solar signal PCN4
DHW Heater operation LED3
Gas Thermistor (THMg) CN12
Thermo ON/OFF operation LED4
LEDS Liquid Thermistor (THMl) CN11
Power supply in the unit LED5
Water outlet Thermistor (THMwo) CN13
Alarm (Flickering with 1
LED6 Water inlet Thermistor (THMwi) CN9
sec interval) A/D Input
Not used LED7 Water sanitary tank thermistor (THMDHW) CN10
H-Link transmission LED8 Water Boiler control thermistor (THMwo3) CN15
Water 2nd temperature thermistor
CN16
(THMwo2)

115
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

5.2.2  Outdoor unit

 
RAS-2HVRN2

PCB1 LED indication

LED1 Red Power source for the PCB
LED2 Green This LED indicates the inverter transmission status
This LED indicates the transmission status
LED3 Yellow
between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit
LED351 Red For inspection
LED353 Red For inspection

PCB2 LED indication

LED1 Red
LED2 Red
These LEDS indicate the cause of unit stoppages
LED3 Red
LED4 Red

Connector indication
PCN5 CH Crankcase heater of compressor (oil)
PCN6 RVR Reversing valve relay
PCN13 PSC Pressure switch control
PCN401 PSH High pressure switch protection
THM7 AIR Outdoor air temperature thermistor
THM8 PIPE Pipe temperature thermistor
THM9 COMP Compressor temperature thermistor
THM10 — —
CN1 — Input function
CN2 — Demand input
CN5A MV Micro electronic expansion valve
CN7 — Output function
CN8 H-LINK Transmission from outdoor unit to indoor unit
CN17 — Transmission to PCB2
CN21 — Transmission to PCB1
CN22 — Transmission to IPM
CN24 MOF Motor for outdoor fan
CN25 — For inspection
CN26 — For inspection
CN27 — For inspection
CN28 — For inspection
CN301 — Transmission to PCB1

Switch indication
DSW1 Test run
DSW2 Piping length
DSW3 Capacity
DSW4 Ref. cycle number
DSW5 End terminal resistance
DSW6 Optional function
RSW1 Ref. cycle number
PSW1 Manual defrost operation switch. The defrost option is manually available under the forced defrost area
PSW2 Available optional function. Setting can be selected using the
PSW3 7-segment display
PSW351 The inverter micro-computer checking

116
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF

Connector indication Switch indication

PCN1 Fuse DSW1
Test run
(PCB1)
PCN2 PCB1 connection from outdoor to indoor unit
DSW2 Piping length and selection function

5
PCN5 Crankcase heater of compressor (oil)
DSW3 Capacity code
PCN6 Output optional function
DSW4/
PCN7 Output optional function Refrigerant cycle number
RSW1
PCN8 Pressure switch protection
DSW5 End terminal resistor
PCN9 Compressor contactor
DSW6 Power source setting
PCN13 Pressure switch control
THM7 Outdoor air temperature thermistor LED indication
THM8 Pipe temperature thermistor This LED indicates the transmission status bet-
LED1 Red
THM9 Compressor temperature thermistor ween the indoor unit and the RCS
CN2 Current transformer This LED indicates the transmission status bet-
LED2 Yellow
ween the indoor unit and the outdoor unit
CN5A Micro electronic expansion valve
LED3 Green Power source for the PCB
CN8 Transmission from outdoor to indoor unit
CN14 Transmission between PCB1 and ISPM
EFS1, 2 Power protection

NOTE
• The mark “” indicates position of dips switches. Figures show setting before shipment or after selection.
• Not mark “” indicates pin position is not affecting.

CAUTION
• Before setting dips switches, firstly turn off power source and set the position of the dips switches. If the swit-
ches are set without turning off the power source, the contents of the setting are invalid.

117
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

5.3  Safety protection and control device

5.3.1  Indoor unit

MODEL RWM-(2.0/3.0)(H)FSN3E RWM-(4.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E RWM-(8.0/10.0)(H)FSN3E

For Electric Heater
Manual reset, Non-adjustable (one per unit)
Surface Thermostat
75ºC±5%
Non-reset (needs to be replaced), Non-adjustable (one per unit)
Thermal fuse
110ºC +0 -5%
Fuse capacity 6A 12A 16A
For Water circulation
Low water pressure switch Automatic reset
Open 1 bar
Close 1.5 bar
High water pressure 3 bar
Low water flow switch Automatic reset
Open 12 l/min ±15 % contact opens with decreasing flow
Pump feedback Input ON when relay ON
For water temperature
High temperature protection +5ºC of Maximum water temperature (Heating mode)
Freeze temperature protection -3ºC of minimum water temperature (Cooling mode) (Only for RWM-(2.0-10.0)FSN3E)
For refrigerant temperature
Freeze temperature protection Tl<-20ºC (for 30 seconds)
For the control circuit
Fuse capacity 5A (Inside PCB)
For the water pump
Fuse capacity 3.15A

5.3.2  Outdoor unit

RAS- RAS- RAS- RAS- RAS-

MODEL
2HVRN2 3HVRNME-AF 4H(V)RNME-AF (5/6)H(V)RNME-AF (8/10)RNME-AF
High pressure switch Automatic reset, non-adjustable
For -0.05
Cut-out 4.15 -0.15
compressor MPa
Cut-out 3.20±0.15
1~ 230V 50Hz 25 40 40 50 -
Fuse A
3N~ 400V 50Hz - - 2x20 2x20 40
For control
CCP timer setting Non adjustable
min
time 3
For condenser fan motor
Automatic reset, non-adjustable (each one for each motor)
Internal thermostat
DC Cut-out - - - - 120±5
Cut-out ºC - - - - 150±5
AC
Cut-in - - - - 96±15
For control circuit 5 (PCB1 and PCB5)
A 3 5
Fuse capacity on PCB 10 (PCB3)

118
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

5.4  Standard control functions

5.4.1  Indoor Unit

 
Space heating

Main heating configuration

Available system configuration is as follows:

Configuration 1: Direct Circuit

High temperature Low temperature

(45~60 ºC) (30~35 ºC)

Aux Heater
5
Plate HEX
Exp vessel

The unit is connectable to only one circuit demand, either high temperature (i.e., radiator or fan coils) or low temperature
(radiant floor).
In addition, the unit can be combined with Sanitary tank (with solar kit extension) and with swimming pool.

NOTE
For more information refer to respective chapters.

Water temperature target depends on actual water outlet temperature and calculations by the selected setting mode.

119
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Configuration 2: Direct and mixing circuit (two levels of water outlet temperature)
Zone 2: Low temperature
(30~35 ºC)

Zone 1: High temperature

(50~60 ºC)

Second temperature
control
Secondary
water pump
Aux Heater
Motorized
3way valve

Exp vessel
Plate HEX
Hydraulic
Separator

When the YUTAKI S is connected to two different heating circuits, circuit 1 will be direct (high temperature for radiator
operation) and circuit 2 will be a mixing circuit in order to have a second temperature control using mixing valve (low tem-
perature for floor heating operation). Additionally, a motorized valve can be added in order to close direct circuit when not
in use (see Optional functions chapter). The floor heating loops (circuit 2) require a lower temperature than with fan coils
(circuit 1). To get these two water temperature levels, a mixing station is required (see Available accessories). This mixing
station is controlled using the indoor unit by means of a mixing valve and additional water sensor.
The unit can always be combined with Sanitary tank (with solar kit extension) and with swimming pool.
Water temperature target depends on the maximum heating supply set-points (Target area 1, target area 2).

• Selecting space heating configuration

Available system configuration will be set using water type for space heating operation:

CODE REF Description Default Value

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-004 WTh1 Water Calculation Heating C1 (None; OTCpoints; OTCgradient; Fix) OTCgradient
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-104 WTh2 Water Calculation Heating C2 (None; OTCpoints; OTCgradient; Fix) None

For information on how to create settings, refer to User interface chapter.

Space heating activation conditions

• Space heating mode is activated by any of following events:
-- Space Heating mode selected by user (User interface RUN/STOP button) and
-- Space Heating mode activated by external thermostat signal (ATW-RTU-01) (Installation Option 1) or Space Hea-
ting mode activated by intelligent thermostat (ATW-RTU-02) (Installation Option 2).
• Space heating mode is disabled if:
-- Domestic Hot Water operation mode is in load condition.
-- No-load condition is active (all of the activation events are inactive).

120
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Water temperature set-point

Each of the 2 water circuits will have an independent water set-point.
Water circuit set-point configuration can be set as follows:

CODE REF Description Default Value

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-004 WTh1 Water Calculation Heating C1 (None; OTCpoints; OTCgradient; Fix) OTCgradient
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-104 WTh2 Water Calculation Heating C2 (None; OTCpoints; OTCgradient; Fix) None

For information about how to create settings, refer to User interface chapter.
Where:
• None
-- Heating circuit is disabled
• OTC Points
-- Water target is selected by an Outside Temperature Compensated (OTC) control that is defined by 4 different points
(Minimum and maximum water outlet temperatures vs. Minimum and maximum outdoor ambient temperatures).
• OTC Gradient

5
-- Water target is selected by an Outside Temperature compensated (OTC) control that is defined by a different gra-
dient of the curve. The initial point of the curve is always 20ºC-20ºC (Water outlet target 20ºC at outdoor ambient
temperature of 20ºC).
• Fix
-- Water target value is defined by a fixed temperature set by the user.

Ambient temperature calculation for water temperature compensation calculation

In order to avoid problems with sudden temperature changes an average ambient temperature will be used for ambient
temperature instead of direct value.
The average time will be 2 hours.

121
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

OTC Points: Outside temperature compensated (OTC) control by points

OTC Points system will use average outdoor ambient temperature in order to get the water temperature set-point.
Water set-point will be determined using the following rule:

Water temperature set-point ºC

(44) Tshnl

(20) Tshnh

Tahnl (-20) Tahnh (20) Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

Where:
TshnL: Temperature setting at low ambient temperature
TshnH: Temperature setting at high ambient temperature
TahnL: Low ambient temperature
TahnH: High ambient temperature
n: water circuit number (n= 1 or 2)

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-005 Tah1l Low ambient Tº C1 -20 -20~6 1 ºC
3-006 Tah1h High ambient Tº C1 20 7~25 1 ºC
3-007 Tsh1l Set-point at low ambient Tº C1 44 (3-012)~(3-011) 1 ºC
3-008 Tsh1h Set-point at high ambient Tº C1 20 (3-012)~(3-011) 1 ºC
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-105 Tah2l Low ambient Tº C2 -20 -20~6 1 ºC
3-106 Tah2h High ambient Tº C2 20 7~25 1 ºC
3-107 Tsh2l Set-point at low ambient Tº C2 44 (3-112)~(3-111) 1 ºC
3-108 Tsh2h Set-point at high ambient Tº C2 20 (3-112)~(3-111) 1 ºC

N ote S
• Default values are the same for both circuits in order to prevent high temperature in the Heating floor circuit,
• Default value corresponds to Water Rule = 0.6 (Radiant Floor).
• Parameters (3-0(1)12)~(3-0(1)11) are defined by Maximum and minimum water outlet temperatures selected by
installer.

CAUTION
• It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure no unwanted situation occurs (for example: water temperature
setting too high into floor heating)
• Be aware that the water set-point for circuit 2 will always be lower than water calculation for circuit 1.
• When only circuit 1 is heating, circuit 2 will be fed with water at temperature equal to circuit 1’s target water.

122
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

OTC Gradient: Outside temperature compensated (OTC) control by gradient

Water target is selected by an Outside Temperature compensated (OTC) control that is defined by a different gradient of
the curve. The initial point of the curve is always 20ºC-20ºC (Water outlet target 20ºC at outdoor ambient temperature of
20ºC).
The gradient of the heating curve describes the relation between the change in the supply temperature and the change in
outside temperature.

Gradient Water Outlet Target

0.2 -0,2 x Text + 24
0.3 -0,3 x Text + 26
0.4 -0,4 x Text + 28
0.5 -0,5 x Text + 30
0.6 -0,6 x Text + 32
0.7 -0,7 x Text + 34
Supply water temperature (ºC)

0.8 -0,8 x Text + 36

0.9 -0,9 x Text + 38
1.0 -1,0 x Text + 40
1.1 -1,1 x Text + 42
1.2 -1,2 x Text + 44

5
1.3 -1,3 x Text + 46
1.4 -1,4 x Text + 48
1.5 -1,5 x Text + 50
1.6 -1,6 x Text + 52
1.7 -1,7 x Text + 54
1.8 -1,8 x Text + 56
1.9 -1,9 x Text + 58
2.0 -2,0 x Text + 60
2.1 -2.1x Text + 62
2.2 -2.2x Text + 64
Outside temperature (ºC)

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-009 OTCh1 Gradient C1 0.6 0.2~2.2 0.1 -
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-109 OTCh2 Gradient C2 0.6 0.2~2.2 0.1 -

N otes
• Default values are the same for both circuits in order to prevent high temperature in the Heating floor circuit,
• Default value corresponds to Water Rule = 0.6 (Radiant Floor).

CAUTION
• It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure no unwanted situation occurs (for example: water temperature
setting too high into floor heating)
• Be aware that the water set-point for circuit 2 will always be lower than water calculation for circuit 1.
• When only circuit 1 is heating, circuit 2 will be fed with water at temperature equal to circuit 1’s target water.
Example:
3-009 (OTC1) = 1.1
Text (Outdoor temperature) = 0ºC à water outlet target = -1.1x 0 +42 = 42ºC

123
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Fixed water temperature set-point

Outdoor ambient temperature has no effect on this setting. The user will select a fixed water outlet temperature setpoint.

Water temperature setpoint ºC

TFn

Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

Where:
TFn: Fixed temperature setting
n: heating circuit number (n= 1 or 2)

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-010 TF1 Fixed Tº C1 40 (3-012)~(3-011) 1 ºC
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-110 TF2 Fixed Tº C2 40 (3-112)~(3-111) 1 ºC

N otes
• Default values are same for both circuits in order to prevent high temperature in the Heating floor circuit.
• Parameters (3-0(1)12)~(3-0(1)11) are defined by Maximum and Minimum water outlet temperatures selected by
installer.
• Water outlet temperature will depend on unit’s operational range.

CAUTION
• It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure no unwanted situation occurs (for example: water temperature
setting too high into floor heating).
• Be aware that the water set-point for circuit 2 will always be lower than water calculation for circuit 1.
• When only circuit 1 is heating, circuit 2 will be fed with water at temperature equal to circuit 1’s target water.

124
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Second water temperature control

The mixing valve is controlled to maintain the second heating supply temperature at the second heating temperature
set-point. The mixing valve position is calculated with a proportional integral action (P+I) control algorithm based on the
difference between the heating supply set-point and the heating supply temperature.
Zone 2: Low temperature (30~35 ºC)

Second temperature
control

Secondary
To YUTAKI S water pump
system control
Motorized
3way valve

Zone 1
system
Hydraulic
Separator
5
To YUTAKI S system

The system control then decides how much to open or close the mixing valve to achieve the desired position for the valve.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-133 PB Proportional band of mixing valve 6.0K -0.2~20 0.2 ºC
3-134 IRF Integral reset factor of mixing valve 2.5 0.0~20 0.1 %
3-135 RTV Running time factor of mixing valve 140 10~500 10 sec

N ote
Heating and cooling operation have same values.

125
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Selection of heating circuit minimum/maximum temperature limits by Installer

The installer will limit the Space Heating Temperature Set-point in order to prevent excessively high or low temperatures
in the space heating.

Water outlet temperature set-point ºC

Maximum water temperature

Tmaxhn

Tminhn

Minimum water temperature

Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

Temperature Limit values:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-011 Tmaxh1 Maximum supply Tº 60 35~60 (*)(**) 1 ºC
3-012 Tminh1 Minimum supply Tº 20 20~34 1 ºC
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-111 Tmaxh2 Maximum supply Tº 60 35~60 (*)(**) 1 ºC
3-112 Tminh2 Minimum supply Tº 20 20~34 1 ºC

N ote
(*) 55ºC for RWM-2.0FNS3E
(**) 80ºC when boiler combination

CAUTION
Temperature limits have priority over all other temperature set-point modifications (Room Thermos-
tat, User Selection, etc.), and maximum water temp is limited by unit’s operational range.
Note that water temperature can reach up to 5ºC higher than maximum water temperature by installer
before Thermo OFF condition.
Try to set a minimum of 2 degrees difference between setting temperature (3-(0/1)04) and maximum
supply temperature by installer.

126
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Space cooling

Water circuit configuration

N ote
The air to water heat pump is pre-configurated to work only in heating mode. In order to allow the cooling mode, it
is necessary to perform a dip-switch setting and install the drain pan accessory. In the case, all the cooling mode
uses for the unit will be permitted and the LCD user’s interface cooling configuration will appear.
In case of heating istallation working also in cooling operation, the responsability of correct system functioning
will be of the installer.
The configuration examples given below are only for illustration purposes.

• Main cooling configuration

Configuration 1: Direct Circuit

Low temperature Medium tempera-

(5~12 ºC) ture (16~21 ºC)

5
Aux Heater
Plate HEX
Exp vessel

The unit is connectable to only one circuit demand, either low temperature (i.e., fan coils) or medium temperature (refres-
hing floor).
In addition, the unit can be combined with Sanitary tank (with solar kit extension) and with swimming pool.
Water temperature target depends on actual water outlet temperature and calculations by outside temperature compensa-
tion (for refreshing floor application) or a fixed water temperature setting (fan coils cooling).

127
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Configuration 2: Direct and mixing circuit (two levels of water outlet temperature)

Zone 2: Medium temperature

(16~21 ºC)

Zone 1: Low temperature

(5~12 ºC)

Second temperature
control
Secondary
water pump
Aux Heater
Motorized
3way valve

Plate HEX
Exp vessel
Hydraulic
Separator

When the YUTAKI S is connected to two different cooling circuits, circuit 1 will be direct (low temperature for fanoils ope-
ration (12~5ºC)) and circuit 2 will be a mixing circuit in order to have a second temperature control using mixing valve
(medium temperature for floor refreshing operation (16~22ºC)). Additionally, a motorized valve can be added in order to
close direct circuit when not in use (see Optional functions chapter).
The unit can always be combined with Sanitary tank (with solar kit extension) and with swimming pool.
Water temperature target depends on the maximum cooling supply set-points (Target area 1, target area 2).

N ote
In case of Radiator and Refreshing floor installation, Radiators valve will be closed and disabled by user and the
system only works for refreshing floor. (See Optional functions chapter).

• Selecting space cooling configuration

Available system configuration will be set using water type for space cooling operation:

CODE REF Description Default Value

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-004 WTc1 Water Calculation Cooling C1 (None; OTCpoints; Fix) Fix
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-104 WTh2 Water Calculation Cooling C2 (None; OTCpoints; Fix) None

N ote
By default, YUTAKI S will be configured for only one circuit (Direct circuit) and fixed water temperature setting.

128
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Space cooling general control conditions

If “Water Type heating” reads “None” (disabled), then all space control cooling is disabled.
Space Cooling mode is activated by any of the following events:
-- Space Cooling mode selected by user (YUTAKI S LCD controller) and
-- Space Cooling mode activated by external thermostat signal (ATW-RTU-01) (Installation Option 1) or
-- Space Cooling mode activated by intelligent thermostat (ATW-RTU-02) (Installation Option 2)
Space Cooling mode is disabled if:
-- DHW operation mode is in DHW priority AND DHW is in load condition
-- No-load condition is active (all of the activation events are inactive).

Water temperature set-point

Each of the 2 water circuits will have an independent water set-point.
Water circuit set-point configuration can be set as follows:

CODE REF Description Default Value

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-004 WTc1 Water Calculation Cooling C1 (Note; OTCpoints; Fix) Fix

3-104 WTh2
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
Water Calculation Cooling C2 (Note; OTCpoints; Fix) None 5
Where:
None: Cooling circuit is disabled.
OTC Points: Water target is selected by an Outside Temperature Compensated (OTC) control that is defined by 4
different points (Minimum and maximum water outlet temperatures vs. Minimum and maximum outdoor ambient
temperatures).
Fix: Water target value is defined by a fixed temperature set by the user.

129
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Outside temperature compensated (OTC) control for refreshing floor

The weather-dependent set-point field settings define the parameters for weather-dependent operation of the unit. When
weather-dependent operation is active the water temperature is determined automatically depending on the outdoor tem-
perature: higher outdoor temperatures will result in colder water and vice versa.
Water Outlet temperature set-point ºC

Tsnhc

Tsrnlc

Tanlc Tanhc Outdoor ambient temperature ºC

Where:
Tsnhc: Temperature setting for max water temperature at low ambient temperature cooling
Tsnlc: Temperature setting for min water temperature at high ambient temperature cooling
Tanlc: Low ambient temperature setting for max water temperature cooling
Tanhc: High ambient temperature setting for min water temperature cooling
n: water circuit number (n= 1 or 2)

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-014 Ta1lc Low ambient Tº C1 23 17~30 1 ºC
3-015 Ta1hc High ambient Tº C1 32 31~45 1 ºC
3-016 Ts1lc Set-point at low ambient Tº C1 22 (3-020)~(3019) 1 ºC
3-017 Ts1hc Set-point at high ambient Tº C1 16 (3-020)~(3019) 1 ºC
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-114 Ta2lc Low ambient Tº C2 23 17~30 1 ºC
3-115 Ta2hc High ambient Tº C1 32 31~45 1 ºC
3-116 Ts2lc Set-point at low ambient Tº C2 22 (3-120)~(3119) 1 ºC
3-117 Ts2hc Set-point at high ambient Tº C2 16 (3-120)~(3119) 1 ºC

N ote S
• Default values are the same for both circuits in order to prevent low temperatures in the Refreshing floor cir-
cuit.
• Parameters (3-0(1)20)~(30(1)19) are defined by Maximum and minimum water outlet temperatures selected by
installer.

caution
• It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure no unwanted situation occurs (for example: water temperature
setting too low into floor refreshing).
• Be aware that the water set-point for circuit 2 will always be higher than water calculation for circuit 1.

130
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Fixed water temperature setting

OTC has no effect on this setting. The user will select a fixed water outlet temperature between 5ºC and 21ºC using the
user interface (LCD Controller).

Outlet temperature set-point ºC

TFn

Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

Where:
TFn: Fixed water temperature setting.
n: heating circuit number (n= 1 or 2).

CODE REF Description Default Value

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
Range Steps Units
5
3-018 TF1 Fixed Tº C1 19 (3-020)~ (3019) 1 ºC
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-118 TF2 Fixed Tº C2 19 (3-120)~ (3119) 1 ºC

N ote S
• Default values are same for both circuits in order to prevent low temperature in the Refreshing floor circuit.
• Parameters (3-0(1)20)~(30(1)19) are defined by Maximum and minimum water outlet temperature selected by
installer (See bellow).

caution
• It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure no unwanted situation occurs (for example: water temperature
setting too low into floor refreshing).
• Be aware that the water set-point for circuit 2 will always be higher than water calculation for circuit 1.

131
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Second water temperature control

The mixing valve is controlled to maintain the second cooling supply temperature at the second cooling temperature set-
point. The mixing valve position is calculated with a proportional integral action (P+I) control algorithm based on the diffe-
rence between the cooling supply set-point and the cooling supply temperature.
Zone 2: High temperature (16~21 ºC)

Second temperature
control

Secondary
To YUTAKI S water pump
system control
Motorized
3way valve

Zone 1
system
Hydraulic
Separator
To YUTAKI S
system

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-133 PB Proportional band of mixing valve 6.0K -0.2~20 0.2 ºC
3-134 IRF Integral reset factor of mixing valve 2.5 0.0~20 0.1 %
3-135 RTV Running time factor of mixing valve 140 10~500 10 sec

N ote
Heating and cooling have same values.

132
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Selection of cooling circuit minimum/maximum temperature limits by Installer

The maximum temperature limit can be used, for example, to prevent low temperatures from reaching floor-refreshing
systems. The minimum temperature limit can be used when a minimum level of cooling in the cooling circuit is desired.

Water Outlet temperature set-point ºC

Tsn
Maximum water temperature
Tmaxcn

Tmincn
Minimum water temperature

5
Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1 (Direct circuit)
3-019 Tmaxc1 Maximum supply Tº C1 22 19~22 1 ºC
3-020 Tminc1 Minimum supply Tº C1 16 5~18 1 ºC
CIRCUIT 2 (Mixed circuit)
3-119 Tmaxc2 Maximum supply Tº C2 22 19~22 1 ºC
3-120 Tminc2 Minimum supply Tº C2 16 5~18 1 ºC

caution
Temperature limits have priority over all other temperature set-point modifications (Room Thermostat, User Se-
lection, etc.), and minimum water temp is limited by YUTAKI S operational range.
Note that water temperature can reach up to 3ºC lower than minimum water temperature by installer before Ther-
mo OFF condition.
Try to set a minimum of 2 degrees difference between setting temperature (3-(0/1)04) and minimum supply tem-
perature by installer.

133
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Room Thermostat control

YUTAKI S unit can be used with two different Room Thermostats available as accessories:
-- ON/OFF Thermostat (ATW-RTU-01)
-- Intelligent Room Thermostat (with Opentherm communication) (ATW-RTU-02) with extension room thermostat for
second circuit (ATW-RTU-03)
Thermostat Type is selected using the parameter list on user interface:

CODE REF Description Default Value

Room thermostat type
3-002 RTT RTT ( ON/OFF, Intelligent) ON/OFF

ON/OFF Thermostat (accessory ATW-RTU-01)

When the ON/OFF Room Thermostat temperature setting is higher than room ambient temperature, Room Thermostat
communicates with RF Receiver in order to close relay signal and Thermo ON Condition must be applied.

Unit

ON/OFF Thermostat

Receiver

Wireless

Thermostat

Thermostat Receiver Unit status Pump status (ECO)

Demand Closed relay signal between terminals 5-6 Thermo ON unit Pump runs
No demand Open relay signal between terminals 5-6 Thermo OFF unit Pump stops after overrun time *

N ote
For more information on how to work water pumps, see chapter on Water pump control.

134
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• Minimum on time and ON/OFF time cycle

In order to reduce Thermo ON/OFF Cycles per hour, there are two additional functions for ON/OFF Thermostat.
These two functions are:
a. Minimum ON Time: When Thermostat is demanded, a minimum ON time will be applied (including when demand
is OFF)
b. Minimum OFF Time: When Thermostat is demanded, a minimum OFF time will be applied.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-030 Ron Minimum ON Time 6 0~15 1 min
3-031 Roff Minimum OFF Time 6 0~15 1 min

1 Request
Thermostat demand (by
ON/OFF Thermostat)
0 No request

1 Operation
Unit Thermo ON/OFF
0 No operation 5
3-030 3-031
Time

135
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Intelligent room thermostat (accessory ATW-RTU-02/03)

When an intelligent room thermostat is installed (as accessory), the unit and Room Thermostat communicate by means of
the receiver and Opentherm communication.
Room thermostat sends the actual room temperature and room temperature setting to the unit.

Unit

Intelligent Thermostat
Thermostat Zone 1

Wireless Receiver
Thermostat Zone 2

Wireless

• Room set-point effect (Only heating operation)

The room temperature will modify the water set-point of the Outside Temperature Compensated (OTC) control (both OTC
Points and OTC Gradient) system.
At different times of the day, according to the time programme in the Room Unit, the room temperature set-point will cause
a shift of the heating curve down to reflect the change in desired room temperature. The change in supply set-point due to
the room set-point is dependent on the value of the outside temperature and the selected heating calculation.
Resulting Water Temperature Set-Point will be:
Ttwo = Ttwo OTC + 2 x DTroom

Where:
Ttwo: Resulting Water Set-Point
Ttwo OTCn: Water Set-Point as calculated by OTCn.
DTroom: Room Temperature Offset = RS – RD.
RS = Room set-point; RD = Room default temperature condition (20ºC)
Example:
Default OTC: Ttwo OTC = -1.3 x Ta + 43.2
Text (outside temperature) = 0ºC
Ttwo OTC = -1.3x 0 +43.2 = 43.2ºC
RS = 18ºC
RD: Better condition 20ºC.
Ttwo = function ( OTC + (Room temperature set-point offset) x2)
Ttwo = function ( OTC + (Room set-point - default room temperature condition (20ºC) x2)
Ttwo = function ( OTC + (( 18- 20 ) x2 )
Ttwo = 43.2 + (-4ºC) à Ttwo = 39.2ºC

136
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

In this case, for a 2K change in room set-point, the supply is changed by 4K.

20 ºC (default room
Outlet temperature set-point ºC temperature condi-
tion) OTC offset x2
18ºC (room set-point)

-04

Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

N ote
5
Room set-point factor has no effect on setting fixed temperature operation.

• Room temperature compensation (Only heating operation)

If room compensation is enabled, the calculated supply set-point is adjusted based on the difference between room tem-
perature and room set-point in order to reduce room error. The amount of room effect can be adjusted using the room
temperature compensation factor setting. To increase or decrease the amount of room compensation, adjust the room
compensation factor. A higher value will give more priority to the room temperature error, and a lower value will mean the
controller follows the selected heating curve more closely.
If a Room Unit is not bound (RF binding) to heating circuit 1 or 2, the room temperature compensation function is disabled.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

CIRCUIT 1
3-003 Rfact1 Compensation factor C1 2 0~5 1 -
CIRCUIT 2
3-103 Rfact2 Compensation factor C2 2 0~5 1 -

Note:
No disable room compensation function, set 3-0(1)03 to 0.

137
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

New water temperature set-point is calculated as follows:

Ttwo = Ttwo OTC + Rfactn x ( RS - RT)
Where:
Ttwo: Resulting Water Set-Point
Ttwo OTCn: Water Set-Point as calculated by OTCn.
Rfactn: Room compensation factor (Default 2)
RS: Room set point
RT: Room temperature
Example:
Ttwo OTC = -1.3 x Ta + 43.2
Text (outside temperature) = 0ºC
Ttwo OTC = -1.3x 0 +43.2 = 43.2ºC
RS = 20ºC
RT = 23ºC
RFactn= 2 (Default value)
Ttwo = function (OTC + RFactn x (Room set-point – Room temperature)
Ttwo = function (OTC + 2x (20 – 23)
Ttwo = 43.2 + (-6ºC) à Ttwo = 37.2ºC

23ºC (RT)
Outlet temperature set-point ºC
OTC offset x2
20ºC (RS)

-06

Outdoor ambient temperature (ºC)

N ote
Room set-point factor has no effect on setting fixed temperature operation.

138
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• Thermo OFF condition by room thermostat

If Room Temperature Roff is higher (heating operation) or lower (cooling operation) than Room Temperature set-point, it
must also be set to THERMO OFF (Compressor OFF, Heater OFF,…) and water pump must be turned OFF after over-run
time (if ECO Pump is selected).

-- Heating application:
If Room Temperature > Room Set-point temperature + Roff à Thermo OFF by Indoor temperature
If Room Temperature < Room Set-point temperature à Thermo ON by Indoor temperature

N ote
In case of multiple Room Thermostats: Thermo OFF occurs when all Thermostats are fulfilled.

-- Cooling application
If Room Temperature < Room Set-point temperature - Roff à Thermo OFF by Indoor temperature
If Room Temperature > Room Set-point temperature à Thermo ON by Indoor temperature

N ote
In case of multiple Room Thermostats: Thermo OFF occurs when all Thermostats are fulfilled. 5
CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units
3-032 Roff Room Thermo OFF 3 0~5 1 ºC

• Unit OFF status by room thermostat (Heating and cooling application)

If Room Temperature setting is 5ºC or 10ºC. (by pressing OFF button (5ºC) or Holidays button (10ºC) on User Thermostat),
the heating or cooling space selected will be turned OFF. When both User Thermostats are in question, the entire heating
or cooling space will be in the Unit OFF position.

139
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Circuit water pumps

Main water pump for heating or cooling circuit application

• Pump configuration (Standard & Economy function)

Pump control can be set to standard or Economy mode. This configuration is set using DSW4 pin 5.
When pin is OFF, pump will be in standard operation and pump always be in operation when space heating or cooling is
enabled, but when space heating or cooling is disabled using the LCD user interface or Thermostat OFF (intelligent ther-
mostat only), pump must be switched OFF and only switched ON by Domestic Hot water request.

1 Request
Heat Demand
by Thermostat
0 No request

1 Enabled
Space Heating/
Cooling status
0 Disabled

1 Run
Water Pump

0 Stop

Time

When pin is ON, pump will be in ECONOMY operation. Economy operation allows pump to stop when system is stopped
by demand OFF in room thermostat.

1 Request
Heat Demand by
Thermostat
0 No request

1 Enabled
Space Heating/
Cooling status
0 Disabled

1 Run
Water Pump
0 Stop

Time

140
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• Overrun pump delay

All pumps are no longer required; operation must continue at least until pump overrun time has passed since end of re-
quirement.

1 Request
Heat Demand by
Thermostat
0 No request

1 Run
Water Pump

0 Stop

7-001
Time

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

7-001 POVRT Pump 1 overrun time 10 10~120 5 min

• Recirculation option (Only for economy mode) 5

When recirculation option is enabled, pumps will operate regularly when they are stopped by Room thermostat Demand
OFF condition.

0 Request
Heat Demand by
Thermostat
1 No request

0 Run
Water Pump

1 Stop

7-002
Time
7-001 7-003

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

7-002 PRCOFF Pump recirculation time OFF 45 10~120 5 min
7-003 PRCON Pump recirculation time ON 10 10~120 5 min

N ote
If 7-002 & 7-003 is 0, the Re-circulation Option has no effect.

141
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Pump seizure protection

The pump seizure protection function helps to prevent these components from sticking during long periods of inactivity.
Every week the components will be run for a short period.
Pumps are switched on for 1 minute.

1
Heat Demand
by Thermostat
0

1
Space Heating/
Cooling status

Water Pump
1

WEEK 1 WEEK 2
Time

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
8-002 SeizPr Seizure Protection Status Disabled - -
Enabled
8-010 Oplnt Operation Day Mon Mon~Sun - Day
8-011 StTim Start Time (00~24) 01:00 (00~24) - Time

These Installer parameters control the optional seizure function. They are used to enable seizure protection and set its
activation time. When this happens, follow these instructions:
• Make sure mixing valves are fully opened and then fullyclosed (time depends on runtime parameter).
• Diverting valves are switched on for 1 minute.
• Pumps are switched on for 1 minute.

142
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Auxiliary electric heater for space heating

All units are delivered with an integrated electric heater for additional heating capacity during cold outdoor temperatures.
The electrical heater also can be used for emergency operation in case of outdoor unit malfunction. The electrical heater
is available for a heating capacity of 3,6 and 9 kW, depending on unit capacity selected.
Electric Heater will only operate if unit is in Space Heating mode. It will always be disabled in any other mode (Hot Sanitary
Water, Swimming Pool and Cooling mode).
Electric Heater will only operate when Heating Accessory is set to Heater or Heater + Boiler. In the case of Heater + Boiler
it will never operate with both at the same time. The decision as to how to operate will be made considering ambient tem-
perature.

Model Heater Capacity Heater steps Electrical Heater nominal voltage

RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E 3kW 3 steps (1/2/3kW) 1x230V
RWM-3.0(H)FSN3E 3kW 3 steps (1/2/3kW) 1x230V
RWM-4.0(H)FSN3E 6kW 3 steps (2/4/6kW) 1x230V or 3x400V
RWM-5.0(H)FSN3E 6kW 3 steps (2/4/6kW) 1x230V or 3x400V
RWM-6.0(H)FSN3E 6kW 3 steps (2/4/6kW) 1x230V or 3x400V
RWM-8.0(H)FSN3E 9kW 3 steps (3/6/9kW) 3x400V
RWM-10.0(H)FSN3E 9kW 3 steps (3/6/9kW) 3x400V

5
User Variables:

CODE REF Description Default Value

5-000 HS Complementary Heating = (Only HP; Heater; Boiler; Heater + Boiler) Only HP

• Heater bivalent point

Heater will only be enabled when:
Outdoor Ambient Temperature > Electrical heater Bivalent Point (5-006).
CAP (kW)

r-SSPP33
ter-
pacitityy
Heate SP2
Heater-
ump ca
H P21
eater-S
Heeaatt pp
HHea
H
HHe
eaat
tDDe
emma
annd
d
Heat
Heat pump
Pump Heat Pump
pump
only

Text
Ta (ºC)(ºC)
-20
-20 5-006]
[[5-006] 20
20

User Variable:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

5-006 EHb Electrical Heater Bivalent Point 0 -20~20 1 ºC

• Heater step control

Load Factor determines the desired heating supplied by heater. Load factor is calculated by a P+I function ranging from 0
to 100%. Actual heater output will be translated from percentage to a 3-step output using hysteresis system.

Power
Steps
(2/3) HP (4-6) HP (8/10) HP
1 1kW 2kW 3kW
2 2kW 4kW 6kW
3 3kW 6kW 9kW

143
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• Heater wait time

If Water set-point (Ttwo) ≤ Maximum Heat Pump Operation, Electric Heater will be only allowed to operate when more than
electrical heater waiting time (5-005) Wait Time has passed since Heat Pump was started.

When Water set-point (Ttwo) > Maximum Heat Pump Operation or when heater needs to operate in emergency mode,
Electric Heater may be operated regardless of Wait time.

1 Request
Heat Demand by
Thermostat
0 No request

1 Request
Heater Demand
[5-006 ]
0 No request

1 ON
Heater Output
5-005
0 OFF

Time

User Variable:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

5-005 WTEH Wait time for electric Heater 30 0~90 1 min

Heater inter-stage steps control

After each step increase, further step increases are prohibited during ISWT to avoid hunting. Step decrease does not have
this limitation. Since sampling time is 1 minute, at least 1 minute needs to pass between any step changes.
In any of the following conditions step will be forced to 0. This change will occur regardless of maximum 1-step change
and user defined delay:

1 No request
Heater Demand
0 Request

3 Step 3
2 Step 2
Heater Output 1 Step 1
0 OFF

5-005 5-004 5-004 5-004 5-004

User variables:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

5-004 ISWT Inter-Stage Wait time 5 0~10 1 min

144
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Heater for emergency mode

When user allows emergency mode (DSW4-4 ON), heater may operate in said mode. This configuration
allows also Hot Sanitary Water emergency operation.

N ote
For more information refer to chapter Optional functions.

 
Boiler combination for space heating

Boiler operation
Boiler will only operate if unit is in Space Heating or Hot Sanitary Water modes. It will always be disabled in any other mode
(Swimming Pool and Cooling mode).
Unless otherwise stated, all procedures in this chapter will only affect operation when performing Space Heating. Boiler
operation during Hot Sanitary Water operation will be explained in its own sub-heading below.

High temperature Low temperature

(60 ºC) (35 ºC)

Boiler

Boiler
signal

Boiler will only operate when Heating Accessory is set to Boiler or Heater + Boiler. Boiler and Heater can never work at the
same time. The decision as to how to operate is based on ambient temperature and is explained in “Use Boiler + Heater”
below.
System protection will always have priority over boiler operation wherever it applies.
User Variables:

CODE REF Description Default Value

5-000 HS Complementary Heating = (Only HP, Heater, Boiler, Heater + Boiler) Only HP

caution
The boiler is configured as alternating with the heat pump. A hydraulic separator or buffer tank must be used
to ensure proper hydraulic balancing. Additional Water pump (WP3) and water sensor (Two3) are necessary for
boiler combination control.

145
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

User variables:

CODE REF Description Default Value

Automately enabled when boiler complementary hea-
6-000 hsb Hydraulic Separator = ( Disabled, Enabled)
ting selected

caution
• Be sure that the boiler and the integration of the boiler with the YUTAKI S system is in accordance with relevant
European and national regulations.
• HITACHI can not be held responsible for incorrect or unsafe situations in the boiler system.
• Make sure that return water to the YUTAKI S heat exchanger never exceeds more than 57ºC.
• Make sure that the non-return valves (field supplied) are correctly installed in the system as shown in the
illustration above.

• Boiler bivalent point

Unit should be sized to operate mainly in heat pump mode. Given that capacity is reduced with temperature, it may be
desirable for the unit to use boiler accessory only when ambient temperature is low.
Boiler will only be enabled when:
Outdoor Ambient Temperature > Bivalent outdoor temperature for boiler (6-007)

CAP (kW)
H
Heeaat De
t De
mmanadn acpitaycity
p cpacpa
d um
t tpupm
HHeeaa

Boiler
Boiler Heat Pump
Heat pump
only
only

Ta
Text (ºC)
-20
-20
6-007]
[[6-007] 20
20

User Variable:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

6-007 BB Bivalent outdoor temperature for Boiler -5 -20~20 1 ºC

146
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Target temperature
• Space heating
Being a parallel system (either Heat Pump or Boiler), water setting will be the same as the water set-point for Heat pump
without outdoor unit temperature restrictions but with restrictions of Maximum water temperature by installer.
• DHW heating
Water set-point for DHW is defined to 80 ºC.
• Conditions for enabling and disabling boiler.
-- Conditions for Enabling
Unit will enable boiler operation if all the following conditions are met.
1 Heating operation selected (Space Heating or DHW)
2 Boiler or Boiler+ Heater complementary heating selected
3 Ambient temperature < Boiler Bivalent point (6-007) (-5ºC Default) more than (Waiting time for boiler) (6-006)
4 Water temperature (Two3) ≤ Water Temperature target (Ttwo) - Supply set point control offset (4ºC default) (6-001)
-- Conditions for Disabling
Unit will not enable boiler operation in any of the following conditions are met:
1 Demand OFF by Room Thermostat
2 Ambient temperature > Boiler Bivalent point (6-007) more than 10 minutes.

5
User variables:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

6-001 kscob Supply set-point control offset 4.0ºC 0 ~10 1 ºC
6-006 WTBO Waiting time for boiler 30 min 1 ~90 1 min

• Conditions for THERMO ON/OFF Boiler:

-- Conditions for Thermo ON Enabling:
1 Water temperature (Two3) < Water temperature setting (Ttwo) - Supply set point offset (4ºC Default)
2 Room thermostat in demand ON.
-- Conditions for Thermo OFF:
When any of Conditions a, b, or c are fulfilled.
a. Measured outlet temp value (Two3) ≥ Water temperature target + 5ºC.
b. Outlet water temp (Two3) = Max water range temp by installer (1&2 (3-(0)(1)11)) + 2ºC.
c. Thermo OFF by Room Thermostat.

N ote
Complementary disabling functions for the boiler itself:
In any of the following conditions step will be forced to 0 (boiler off):
• Boiler is disabled by user or thermo OFF by itselfs
• There is an alarm related to boiler

147
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Boiler minimum and maximum times

Boiler can only be stopped after minimum ON time has passed (6-004).
Boiler can only be started after minimum OFF time has passed (6-005).
1 Request
Heat Demand by
Thermostat
0
No request

1 Request
Boiler demand

0
No request

1 OFF
Boiler output 6-006 6-004 6-005
0 ON
Time

User Variables:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

6-004 Bon Boiler minimum ON time 2 min 1 ~ 30 1 min
6-005 Boff Boiler minimum OFF time 5 min 1 ~ 30 1 min

N ote
Maximum water temperature of the installer have priority against Boiler minimum ON Time.

Emergency mode
When user allows emergency mode (DSW4-4 ON), boiler may operate in said mode.
In the case of Heater + Boiler combination, Boiler has priority.

N ote
For more information refer to Optional functions chapter.

148
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Use of boiler + electric heater

When using Boiler + Heater, unit normally operates in heat pump, and the heater supplies the extra heating necessary.
Heater till certain extreme outdoor temperature and Boiler will only operate when temperature is too low for Heat Pump
and Heater.
-- Heater and boiler bivalent point
Heat Pump and Heater enabled if:
ŠŠ Ambient Temperature (Bivalent outdoor temperature for Heater) (5-006)
Heat Pump and Heater disabled and Boiler enabled if:
ŠŠ Ambient Temperature (Bivalent outdoor temperature for Boiler) (6-007)
CAP (kW)

Heeaat tDD
H city
emem
anadnd pp
mm cacpacpitay
Heeaattppuu
Heater
Heater

Only
Only Heat
Heat Pump Heat pump
Heat Pump

5
pump
Boiler
Boiler only
only

Text (ºC)
-20
-20 [6-007]
[6-007] [5-006]
[5-006] 20Ta
20

N ote
• Boiler operation is only for bivalent system (alternating operation, parallel connected).
• In the Heating + Boiler configuration, system control sets Boiler outdoor bivalent point at 5ºC below Heater
outdoor bivalent point. It will auto-increase (5-006) in order to maintain the 5ºC difference.

149
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Domestic Hot Water (DHW)

An optional domestic hot water tank can be connected to the YUTAKI S Indoor unit. The domestic hot water tank is availa-
ble in four models: 200 or 300 liters, enamelled or stainless, with integrated electrical Heater (See available accessories).
Refer to the domestic hot water tank installation manual for more details.
Sanitary water will only operate if it is enabled from LCD user interface:

CODE REF Description Default Value

3-121 DHWs DHW status (Disabled; Enabled) Disabled

If there is any sanitary water operation being performed and DHW status is changed from Enabled to Disabled, the current
sanitary water operation will be stopped.

Priority
Sanitary Operation has priority over all other operation modes unless otherwise noted.
The following constraints apply:
• When Sanitary Water requires Heat Pump operation, no other modes can require heat pump operation.
• If Sanitary Water does not require Heat Pump operation, it is stopped or works with heater only; there is no restriction
on the other operation modes.

Sanitary water modes (Standard / High demand)

DHW loading has two different modes, STANDARD Mode and HIGH DEMAND Mode.
• STANDARD Mode: The domestic hot water tank will start heating when water temperature in tank is low enough for
Heat Pump to be started.
• HIGH DEMAND Mode: The domestic hot water tank will start heating when differential is higher than TDHWON. Only the
water tank heater will start unless water temperature in tank goes below Heat Pump starting temperature. (Not availa-
ble for boiler combination)
DHW Modes will be selected using LCD User interface:

CODE REF Description Default Value

3-021 DHWm DHW Mode (Standard Usage; High Demand) Standard usage

Domestic hot water temperature setting (TDHWS)

Sanitary Water operation (both Heater and Heat Pump) will be stopped when:
• TDHW > TDHWS
Where:
Tdhw: Domestic Hot water temperature
Tdhws: Domestic Hot water setting temperature

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-022 TDHWS DHW Tº set-point 45 35~(3-122) 1 ºC

150
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Maximum set-point selected by Installer

In order to avoid excessively hot water in the tank, there is an additional function that allows the installer to set a maximum
temperature.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-122 TDHWMAX DHW maximum set-point Tº 55 40~70 1 ºC

N ote
Antilegionella function has no effect.

High demand mode differential (TDHWON)

Sanitary Water Heater will start when following conditions are met:
• System is set to HIGH DEMAND Mode
Other functions may cause Sanitary Water Heater to start regardless of this control. For example, Sanitary Water Heater
may be started by Electric Heater Wait time.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

5
3-023 TDHWON DHW differential 6 2~15 1 ºC

T (ºC)

TDHWS

TDHW
TDHWON

Time

TDHW: Water temperature in DHW (ºC) (by THMDHW sensor)

TDHWS: Water temperature setting in DHW (ºC)
TDHWON: Domestic hot water differential (temperature drop that starts DHW)

151
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Heat pump operation for DHW (THPON & THPOFF)

During Heat Pump operation for DHW, sanitary water tank is heated using heating water circuit.
Since there is no sensor inside the heating circuit for sanitary water tank, water outlet temperature is used to control sani-
tary tank heating.
Heat pump operation for sanitary water starts when TDHW is lower than THPSTART.
Heat pump operation for sanitary water stops when TDHW is greater than THPSTOP. After this stoppage, unit should continue
heating sanitary water tank by means of sanitary tank electric heater until stoppage conditions are met.

T (ºC)

TDHWS
THPMAX
THPOFF
THPSTOP Heater Operation

THPON
Heat Pump Operation
THPSTART

TDHW

Time

Example of temperature settings:

Case 1 Case 2

TDHWS > THPMAX TDHWS < THPMAX

TºC TºC

70 TDHWS

60 THPMAX 60 THPWTS
THPOFF
54 THPSTOP
52 TDHWS = THPSTOP
THPON
44 THPSTART THPON
42 THPSTART

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-024 THPOFF HP OFF Tº differential 6 2~10 1 ºC
3-025 THPON HP ON Tº differential 10 2~16 1 ºC

THPMAX: Maximum water outlet by Heat Pump.

152
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Working example using STANDARD DEMAND mode and default values except TDHWS set Case 1.

T (ºC) At this point

consider that load
TDHWS =70ºC
is bigger than
heater capacity
THPMAX = 60ºC
THPSTOP = 54ºC
THPSTART = 44ºC

TDHW

HP Operation Time

Heater Operation

N ote
This example does not consider the possible constraints due to timing between changes.

Maximum / Minimum DHW loading time (TDHWMAX / TDHWMIN)

5
This function controls the minimum and maximum times that Sanitary Water can operate using Heat Pump mode. Heater
operation is not affected by it.
Heat Pump will not stop if:
-- Heat Pump Operation Time < TDHWMIN
Stoppage by TDHWS (Domestic Hot Water Temperature Setting) has priority over this timer, so it may stop the system regar-
dless of Heat Pump Operation Time.
Heat pump will stop when:
-- Heat Pump Operation Time > TDHWMAX
When Heat Pump is stopped by this function, Sanitary Water will continue working by Heater or boiler.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-026 TDHWMIN DHW minimum time 10 0~15 1 min
3-027 TDHWMAX DHW maximum time 45 2~150 1 min

1 Request
Hot water
request No request
0

1 ON
DHW operation
0 OFF

Time
3-026
3-027

N ote
Manual stop has priority above Minimum operation time.

153
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

DHW second cycle wait time

This defines the minimum time between two consecutive domestic hot water heat pump cycles.
Sanitary Water will not start if:
-- Sanitary Water Off Time < CDHW (3-028)
Heater Start-Up by TDHWON (High Demand Differential) is not limited by this function.
Sanitary Water start-up by THPON & THPOFF is limited and therefore the Sanitary Water mode, including heater, will not start
at all by means of this function when timer has not passed.
Sanitary Water Off Time starts being counted after last Sanitary Water Heat Pump operation.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-028 CDHW Cycle DHW time 1 0~24 1 hour

Hot water 1 Request

request
0 No request

1 ON
DHW operation
0 OFF

Time
3-026
3-027 3-028

DHW electric heater wait time

If Heat Pump cannot offer sufficient capacity it will be necessary to start Heater in order to supply additional capacity.
Heater will start if:
-- Heat Pump DHW Operation Time > DHWEH (3-029)
Heat Pump will not stop if heat pump stoppage conditions are not met. For example, stoppage by TDHWMAX control or THPOFF.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-029 DHWEH EH wait time 45 0~60 1 min

1 Request
Hot water
request
0 No request

1 ON
DHW operation

0 OFF

1 ON
Heater operation

0 OFF

Time

3-029

154
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Space heating priority temperature

If Space Heating Priority function is enabled, Heat Pump operation by Sanitary mode will stop if:
-- Text (ambient temperature) < SHPT (3-031).
When Heat Pump operation is stopped by this function it will continue working using Heater operation if stoppage condi-
tions for heater are not met.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-030 SHPTs Space priority 0 2~1 1 OFF/ON
3-031 SHPT Space priority Tº -5 -20~0 1 ºC

1 ON
Heating
0 OFF
Continue with Heater
(if necessary) Request
1
DHW
operation
0 No request

Release condition
SHPT (-5ºC)
Time
5

DHW heating by timer

A DHW Time program is provided inside the unit (through LCD Controller). Sanitary Water operation may be enabled or
disabled by this timer.

N ote
For more information, refer to User interface chapter.

Using boiler for DHW

The boiler may also be used to raise the temperature of the DHW if the Heat Pump is not able to reach the DHW set-point
by itself. The boiler will only start after BWTt has passed since heat pump operation.
However, if DHW Setting temperature is higher than THPOFF unit will operate with boiler regardless of BWTt (6-009) since it
is considered that heat pump cannot supply sufficient capacity.
Using boiler for DHW only applies if the selected complementary heating is Boiler or Heater + Boiler.
If boiler use for DHW is not desired, set boiler wait time parameter to 0.
User Variable:

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

6-009 BWTt Boiler wait time for DHW 45 0~120 5 min

155
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Swimming pool

When the swimming pool operation is required, the swimming pool pump starts to operate given the swimming pool pump
feedback. In this situation, the 3-way valve of the DHWT is not activated and the 3-way valve for the swimming pool chan-
ges its normal position diverting to the swimming pool heat exchanger, allowing to heat the swimming pool water tempe-
rature to a comfortable value.

HITACHI DHWT Accessory

Space Heating & Cooling

Space Heating
& Cooling

Zone Swimming Pool (Last priority)

3 way valve
Field supply
Swimming
3 way valve
Field supply Pool

Swimming Pool Function will only be enabled if:

-- It is enabled by user interface
-- Heat Pump is turned OFF (or Thermo OFF) by any other system.
-- Swimming pool is enabled by swimming pump feedback.
Swimming Pool will start if:
-- Swimming Pool Temperature < SWPS (3-033) -1ºC
Swimming Pool will stop if:
-- Swimming Pool Temperature > SWPS +1ºC
Remember that unit cannot start in Swimming Pool mode if Swimming Pool Pump feedback is not active.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled –
3-032 SWP Swimming pool status Disabled - -
Enabled
3-033 SWPs Swimming pool Tº set-point 24 24~33 1 ºC

N ote
For swimming pool combination it is needed a special swimming pool sensor, see available accessories.

156
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Solar combination

Concept
The solar combination will enable you to heat up your domestic water by means of the sun whenever the sun is available.
The solar kit is designed to transfer the heat from the solar panels to the domestic hot water tank’s heat exchanger and is
to be installed in the YUTAKI S system as shown in the scheme below:
Option 1
The solar panels gather heat from
Field Supply the sun. When the temperature of the
Solar
Pump &
Control
glycol solution in the solar panel rises
Solar Panel
HITACHI DHWT Accessory
above the water temperature in the
Sensor Solar 2
(Field supply) domestic hot water tank, the pumps
from the solar pump station and the
Solar Pump feed back

Solar Kit Accessory

solar kit begin operating in order to
Sensor Solar 1
transfer the heat to the domestic hot
(Field Supplied)
(Field Supply) YUTAKI S Connection
DHWT Connection
water tank’s heat exchanger
Solar Connection

Aux Heater Solar Connection

Plate HEX

Exp Vessel

DHWT Connection YUTAKI S Connection

5
Option 2
The solar panels gather heat from
Field Supply the sun. When the temperature of the
3wv SOLAR
To solar
glycol solution in the solar panel rises
Solar
Pump &
Control combination options
Solar Panel (space heating / above the water temperature in the
DHWT Accessory (field supply) swimming pool /...)
domestic hot water tank, solar pump
Sensor Solar 2
(Field supply)

station’s pump is switched ON and

Solar Pump feed back

the solar kit’s 3-way valve is diverted

Sensor Solar 1
(Field Supply) to the Sanitary Tank. At the same time
the DHW’s 3-way valve is switched
OFF and the heat pump continues
Aux Heater
working to heat the space (if neces-
sary).
Plate HEX

Exp Vessel

To HP
combination options
(space heating /
swimming pool /...)
3wv DHWT

157
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Solar installation requirements

• Electrical connection
The solar pump station have an auxiliary contact that closes when the operation station it is working to heat the domestic
hot water tank operated.

L N R N 1 2 7 10 Terminal Board

L N

Solar Pump station YUTAKI S Unit

When solar mode is enabled by the heat pump and the temperature of the glycol solution in the solar panel has risen above
the water temperature in the domestic hot water tank, one of the HP’s outputs will be switched ON (terminals 25/26).

25 26 Terminal Board

Auxiliary water pump

for Option 1
Solar 3-way valve for
Option 2

YUTAKI S Unit

Solar station control

If the solar pump station has an ON/OFF/AUTO function, make sure to put it on the AUTO function. This means that the
pump will switch ON automatically when the solar panel temperature rises sufficiently above the domestic hot water tank
temperature and switch OFF automatically when the difference between the solar panel and the domestic hot water tank
temperature becomes too low.
When the temperature of the solar panel reaches 10°C* higher than the domestic hot water tank temperature, the pump of
the solar pump station and the pump of the solar kit will start operation.

Description Ideally Value Remarks

Solar delta T 10 Depending on solar station

When the temperature of the solar panel becomes lower than the domestic hot water tank temperature, the pumps from
the solar pump station and the solar kit will stop operating.

158
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Setting the solar status

This default setting can be changed, so that at all times, when solar heat becomes available, domestic water heating by
the heat pump will be (if busy) interrupted and taken over by the sun.

CODE Description Default Value

10-001 Solar status (Disabled, Enabled) Disabled

Solar enabling/disabling conditions

• Solar start conditions
When all of Conditions a, b, c, d, are fulfilled.
a. Solar status enabled by user
b. Solar energy available through solar pump station (Input Terminal 10 enabled)
c. TDHW < TDHWS - TDHWON
Where:
TDHW = Domestic Hot Water Tank temperature (ºC)
TDHWS = Domestic Hot Water Tank temperature setting (ºC) (Default 45ºC)
TDHWON = Domestic hot water differential ºC (temperature drop that starts DHW) (Default 10ºC)
TDHWMAX = Domestic Hot Water tank maximum supply temperature (ºC) (Default 70 ºC)
If conditions are fulfilled, heating DHW by Heat Pump will be switched OFF, and heating will be done by solar station
5
through YUTAKI S’s auxiliary output signal. If TDHW > TDHWMAX solar station cannot heat DHW by tank at maximum allowed
temperature and YUTAKI S’s auxiliary output will be switched OFF.

• Solar stop conditions

When any of Conditions e, f, g, h is fulfilled.

d. Solar status disabled by user

e. Solar energy not available through solar pump station (Input Terminal 10 disabled)
f. TDHW > TDHWS
g. TDHW > TDHWMAX

N ote
When heating DHW by solar power, DHW Timer has no effect.

159
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Maximum time solar heating for DHW

In some high demand cases this function controls the maximum time that Sanitary Water can operate using Solar power
alone. Heater operation is not affected by it.
Solar power will be stopped when:
-- Solar Operation Time > TDHWMSOL
When Solar is stopped by this function, Sanitary Water will continue working by Heat Pump or heater (depending on water
condition).
If the DHW is banned by Timer or Tariff function, Sanitary tank will stop.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-126 TDHWMSOL DHW SOLAR maximum time 60 30~240 1 min

Hot water
request

DHW
heating by
solar

DHW
heating by
HP/EH

DHW
heating

TDHWSMAX Time

When TDHWTMSOL passed, wait Maximum DHW Time (defeault 45 min) from MAXIMUM / MINIMUM DHW LOADING TIME
(TDHWMAX / TDHWMIN) water control chapter, for next solar mode.

Hot water
request

DHWT
heating by
solar

DHWT
heating by
HP/EH
DHW blocked by timer

DHWT
heating

TDHWTSMAX TDHWTMAX TDHWTSMAX Time

160
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Room Thermostat Unit installation and configuration (as accessory)

Description
The Room Unit communicates with the RF Receiver on an 868MHz ON/OFF Intelligent
Radio Frequency (RF) band to control the Yutaki S system. Neither (ATW-RUT-01) (ATW-RTU-02/03)
product will communicate with other RF products that use different
frequencies or communication protocols.

N ote
The RF link between the Room Unit and RF Receiver in system packs is pre-configured at the factory and therefore
these components SHOULD be installed at the same site. This makes the installation process fast and easy, but
if products from individual system packs are separated, or mixed with other pre-configured system packs during
installations please refer to section Binding / Rebinding Procedure to bind the desired units together and allow them
to communicate with each other.

Installation Information
As these products communicate using RF technology special care must be taken during installation. The location of the
5
RF components as well as the building structure may influence performance of the RF system. To assure system reliability,
please review and apply the information given below.
Within a typical residential building the two products should communicate reliably within a 30m range. It is important to take
into consideration that walls and ceilings will reduce the RF signal. The strength of the RF signal reaching the RF Receiver
depends on the number of walls and ceilings separating it from the Room Unit, as well as the building construction - the
diagram below illustrates an example of typical signal strength reduction. Walls and ceilings reinforced with steel or plas-
terboard walls lined with metal foil reduce the RF signal significantly more.
Once a position is selected for the Room Unit this can be checked using the RF Communication Test mode as described
in section Locating the Room Unit. If the position is unsuitable the RF Receiver will not respond and an alternative position
for the Room Unit must be selected.

= Signal Strength

Wall Wall Wall

Ceiling

Max. Signal Length 30 metres

Typical example of Building Fabric Signal losses

161
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

 
Installing the Programmable thermostat

Please follow the illustrations and information below in sequence to install the RF Receiver and Room Unit correctly. To
enable special features and see what other system options are available refer to section Installer Mode.

Installing the ON/OFF Receiver (ATW-RTU-01)

The receiver box is a RF device. For the best performance ins-

tall in an open space. Leave at least 30cm distance from any
 metal objects including wall boxes and boiler housing.
Do not mount on metal wall boxes.

 N ote
The receiver box contains no user serviceable parts. It
should be opened and installed by qualified installer only.

caution

Electrostatic sensitive device! Do not touch the circuit
board.

Step 1: Remove the jumper

Remove
the jumper
N ote 56
All wiring must be in accordance with IEE regulations. Indoor unit
Yutaki S

 Step 2: YUTAKI S Wiring

caution
Observe ambient temperature and current limits (see the
RF Receiver wiring label)

56
Indoor unit
Yutaki S

a. b. c. d.


> 7mm Ø

max. 2.5mm²
< 7mm Ø

162
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Installing Intelligent Receiver (ATW-RTU-02)

Please follow the illustrations and information below in sequence to install the RF Receiver and Room Unit correctly. To
enable special features and see what other system options are available refer to section Installer Mode.

N ote
The RF Receiver contains no user serviceable parts. It should be opened and installed by qualified installer only.

caution
Static electricity. Malfunction. Do not touch the circuit board.

5


max. 30m. 2 x 0.5mm2 ; 2 x 0.8mm2

RF Receiver

Unit


3-4

The RF Receiver can be connected to other Open therm appliances. For the correct wiring connections refer to
the installation manual of the Open therm device.

N ote
• All wiring must be in accordance with IEE regulations.
• Observe ambient temperature and current limits (see the RF Receiver wiring label).

163
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Installing the Room Unit (ATW-RTU-01/02/03)

• Power Up
-- Installing the Batteries:
a. Lift up the front cover of the Room Unit to reveal the battery cover and product controls.
b. Remove the battery cover by pressing down and sliding out.
c. Insert the 2 x AA LR6 Alkaline Batteries supplied with the Room Unit, ensuring the correct orientation.
d. After a short pause the Room Unit will display information on the screen and is now ready for use.
e. Replace the battery cover by sliding it firmly back into the front of the Room Unit.
ŠŠ Setting the Date and Time:
a. Press the button to begin setting the date. When you set the date for the first time
after the batteries are inserted, the display will show: Press the or buttons to set
the current day of the month (e.g. d 01 = 1st day of the month) then press the green
button to confirm.

b. Press the or buttons to set the current month of the year (e.g. m 01 = January)
then press the green button to confirm.

c. Press the or buttons to set the current year (e.g. yr 07 = 2007) then press the
green button to confirm. The date is now stored and the Day Indicator will be displa-
yed under the current day of the week (e.g. 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, etc.)

d. Use the or buttons to set the correct time then press the green button to con-
firm. Each press of the buttons will change the time by one minute and holding them down
will change the time slowly at first and get progressively quicker.
AM

N ote
If this mode is entered accidentally then press the , or buttons to exit.

164
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

RF Communication check (test mode) (ON/OFF Thermostat) (ATW-RTU-01)

To check the RF communication, hold the Room Unit about 2-3 metres from the installed RF Receiver. Set the Room Unit
to off by pressing the button. then press the and buttons together with the button for 3 seconds. The unit will
display ‘tESt’ and it will send test signals to the RF Receiver. If the test signals are received the LED on the RF Receiver,
will flash between 1 and 5 times. Flashing the green LED on every 5 seconds (relay output will remain off) for a maximum
of 10 minutes. When the green LED flashes on every 5 seconds proceed to the next step.

N ote
If the green LED is not switched at specified intervals, the red LED is flashing or if you are installing a replacement
RF Receiver or Room Thermostat, follow the procedures described in section Binding / Rebinding Procedure.

RF Communication check (test mode) (Intelligent Thermostat) (ATW-RTU-02/03)

To check the RF communication, hold the Room Unit about 2-3 metres from the installed RF Receiver. Set the Room Unit
to off by pressing the button. then press the and buttons together with the button for 3 seconds. The unit will
display “test” and it will send test signals to the RF Receiver. If the test signals are received the LED on the RF Receiver
will flash between 1 and 5 times. The number of flashes indicates the strength of the radio signal. The higher the number
of flashes, the stronger the signal is.

N ote

5
If the LED does not flash or if you are installing a replacement RF Receiver or Room Unit, follow the procedures
described in section Binding / Rebinding Procedure.

Locating the Room Unit

While still in the Test Mode, as described in section above the Room Unit should be located taking the following into con-
sideration and reviewing the illustrations below:
1 Find a suitable location where the signal transmission is reliable. Reliable transmission is indicated when the RF Re-
ceiver is flashing the green LED every 5 seconds.

N ote
The RF Receiver will be off.

2 Install the Room Unit EITHER on the wall using the wall bracket OR attach the optional table stand as shown in below.
3 Exit the Test Mode by pressing the or button.
Wall bracket Table stand

• The Room Unit should be installed in an open space for best performance as it is a radio frequency device.
• Leave at least 30cm distance from any metal objects including wall boxes and at least 1 metre from any other elec-
trical equipment eg. radio, TV, PC etc.
• Do not mount onto metal wall boxes.
• It is recommended that the RF Receiver is fully installed.

165
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Communication loss (Only Intelligent thermostat) (ATW-RTU-02/03)

In the event of an RF communications loss, the LED on the RF Receiver will indicate which type of fault has occurred.
• If there is a communications fault between the RF Receiver and the Room Unit, then the LED on the RF Receiver will
flash red for 0.1 sec ON every three seconds.
• If there is a fault in communications between the boiler or System Controller, then the LED on the RF Receiver will flash
3 times quickly and then be off for three seconds.
• If there is more than one Room Unit installed, as in multi-zone systems for example, and communications is lost with
one zone, then the red LED on the RF Receiver will flash two times quickly and then be off for two seconds.
• If there is more than one Room Unit installed, as in multi-zone systems for example, and communications is lost with
both zones, then the red LED on the RF Receiver will flash once for 0.1 sec ON, and 0.9 sec OFF.
Once the faulty device has been identified, replace as necessary and follow the re-binding procedure as described in sec-
tion Binding / Rebinding Procedure.

Installer Mode
Installer Mode is used to alter the system settings for specific applications, to use the special features of the Room Unit in
a different way or to alter the factory preset parameters. Parameters are divided into two groups:
-- Category 1 parameters – Room Unit Setup
-- Category 2 parameters – System Setup
These are all listed in section Installer Parameters Table.
• Entering Installer Mode

 Press the button.

Press and hold the button and the PROGRAM & buttons together. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

MANAUTO

1..6
2

2 1

 The unit will display the first parameter of installer parameter group cate-
gory 1 (from Parameter n.1 to n.19) as shown

 Press the or to change factory setting.

The display will flash indicating that a change has been made.

 Press the green button to confirm the change.

The display will stop flashing.

 Press button to go to the next parameter.

 Press the button to go to Installer parameter group category 2 ( ) (from

Parameter n.4 to n.14).

 To exit the installer mode press the or buttons.

166
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Fail-Safe Mode Setup (ON/OFF Thermostat) (ATW-RTU-01)

The fail-safe mode defines the RF Receiver box output relay status if the RF communication is lost (e.g. when the Room
Unit stops communicating due to discharged batteries).
The factory setting keeps the relay permanently off when the communication is lost.

Fail-Safe mode setup (Intelligent thermostat) (ATW-RTU-02/03)

The fail-safe mode defines the system status if the RF communication is lost (e.g. when the Room Unit stops communi-
cating due to discharged batteries). If the system is a direct (radiator one), then the factory setting will make the system
revert to a set point of 10°C for frost protection. If indirect loops are added, the system will continue to operate at the last
communicated setpoint.

Using the Room Unit for Specific Applications (ON/OFF Thermostat) (ATW-RTU-01)
The Room Unit is a versatile controller that can be used to control many different applications. Some of the system pa-
rameters within the Room Unit menu will not apply. Please also note other changes to the setting of the optimisation and
proportional band settings as shown in the tables of the section Installer Parameters Table.

N ote
In order for the Room Unit to send the heating demand signal to the RF Receiver, it is essential that the Category 2
parameter 8:Su is set to the correct value. Failure to do this will mean that the heating system will not respond to
changes in the setpoint on the Room Unit. Under these circumstances the system will operate with no input from
the Room Unit and may not therefore provide adequate temperature control.
5
Using the Special Features of the Room Unit

Special
Description Enable/Disable
Feature
This product can be used for heating or cooling applica-
Heating tions. If you select cooling mode the control algorithm and
or Cooling factory default program will be modified. You can indepen- To enable: Set parameter 4:HC (category 2) to 1.
Operation dently modify the heating and cooling profile (Only
ON/OFF thermostat)
Summer/ This feature moves time automatically on the last Sunday
Winter Auto of March and the last Sunday of October. The feature is To enable: Set parameter 3:tC (category 1) to 1.
time change factory enabled.
If the Room Unit is located in a particularly hot/cold loca-
tion for reliable signal transmission reasons then the mea-
Temperature Set parameter 12: tO (category 1) to the required offset
sured/displayed temperature can be adjusted by +/- 3°C.
Offset value.
This is useful if the homeowner wants the reading to match
another appliance temperature display.

The normal upper temperature limit of 35°C can be redu- Set parameter 6: uL (category 1) to the desired upper
Upper/Lower limit.
ced to 21°C to save the homeowner energy. The normal
Temperature
lower limit of 5°C can be increased up to 21°C to protect Set parameter 7: LL (category 1) to the desired lower
Limit
inhabitants from cold. limit.

167
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Using the Room Unit for specific applications (Intelligent thermostat) (ATW-RTU-02/03)
The Room Unit is a versatile controller that can be used to control many different applications. Please note that when
the Room Unit is installed in conjunction with a System Controller, the functionality will differ to that when installed with a
standard boiler system. Most of the functions shown below will be controlled by the System Controller and be set within its
parameters. Therefore, some of the system parameters within the Room Unit menu will not apply. Please also note other
changes to the setting of the optimisation and proportional band settings as shown in the the next tables.

Installer Parameters Table

• Category 1 - Room Unit Settings

Parameter
Parameter Factory Default Setting Optional Setting
No.
Category 1 Parameters – Room Unit Settings
Display Description Display Description
AM-PM / 24hr Dis-
1:CL 24 24 hr clock display format 12 12 hr – AM/PM clock display format
play
Time / Temp profile set to factory Time / Temperature are as programmed
Reset Time/ Temp default
2:rP 1 0
Program Changes to 0 when one of the
time/temp profiles are changed To restore the factory profile set to 1
Auto Summer/Win- Auto Summer/Winter Time Auto Summer/Winter Time Change
3:tC 1 0
ter Time Change Change Enabled Disabled
LCD Backlighting 5:bL 1 Backlighting Enable 0 Backlighting Disabled
21 to
Upper Temp Limit 6:uL 35 35°C Upper Temp. Limit 21°C to 34°C adjustment in 1°C steps
34
Lower Temp Limit 7:LL 5 5°C Lower Temp. Limit 5 to 21 6°C to 21°C adjustment in 1°C steps
Optimisation 8:OP 0 Optimisation Disabled 1 Optimisation Enabled
Temperature Offset 12:tO 0 No temperature offset -3 to +3 -3°C to +3°C adjustment in 0.1°C steps
Proportional Band 1.6 to 1.6°C to 3.0°C adjustment in 0.1°C
13:Pb 1.5 Proportional band of 1.5 degrees
Width 3.0 steps
All settings at factory defaults Settings are as modified above
Reset Parameters
19:FS 1 Changes to 0 when one of the 0
to Factory Defaults
parameter is changed To restore the factory profile set to 1

N ote
Remember to always press the green button to confirm that you want to store your new Installer Set-Up set-
ting. To exit the Installer Mode press the or button.

168
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• Category 2 - System Settings

N ote
To ensure correct heat pump system operation, parameter 8:Su must be set correctly.

Parameter
Parameter Factory Default Setting Optional Setting
No.
Category 2 Parameters – System Settings (press the button to access this category)
Heat/Cool selection enable
4:HC 0 Disabled 1 Enabled
/ disable
Room Temperature Sensor Programmer and room
8:Su 0 1 Only Intelligent Thermostat
Use compensation unit
0 to
Maximum Flow Setpoint 11:uF 55 55°C Maximum Flow Temp. 0°C to 99°C adjustment in 1°C steps (N.A.)
99
0 to
Minimum Flow Setpoint 12:LF 15 15°C Minimum Flow Temp. 0°C to 50°C adjustment in 1°C steps (N.A.)
50
0 to
Mixing Value Run Time 13:Ar 150 150 seconds 0 to 240 sec. adjustment in 1sec steps (N.A.)
240
0 to
Pump Overrun Run Time 14:Pr 15 15 minutes 0 to 99 mins adjustment in 1min steps (N.A.)
99

N ote
Remember to always press the green button to confirm that you want to store your new Installer Set-Up set-
5
ting. To exit the Installer Mode press the or button.

Binding / Rebinding Procedure (ON/OFF Thermostat) (ATW-RTU-01)

The binding operation described below is required if:
• Any of the system components (Room Unit or RF Receiver) are replaced.
• The RF Receiver has incorrect or no binding data stored (e.g. when pre-bound system pack components have been
mismatched).

N ote
During the binding procedure keep approximately 1m distance between the Room Unit and the RF Receiver.
To bind/rebind:
1 Hold button on RF Receiver for 15 seconds. LED will flash red 0.1 sec ON, and 0.9 sec OFF
2 Hold button on RF Receiver for 5 seconds. LED will flash red for 0.5 sec ON, and 0.5 sec OFF.
3 Press the button on the Room Unit
4 Hold , and buttons for 2 seconds. Display will show “InSt CO”. The boiler and RF signal icons will be displayed.
5 Press the green button.
6 When Red LED on the RF Receiver goes off, the devices are bound.
7 If binding is unsuccessful, then the LED will stay on. In this case, move the Room Unit and repeat the procedure from
the beginning.
8 The LED on the RF Receiver will flash green every 10 seconds to indicate that the device is live.
9 Now go to Section Installing the Programmable thermostat to setup the system.

169
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Binding/Rebinding Procedure (Intelligent thermostat) (ATW-RTU-02/03)

Binding is a necessary process in order to link the room thermostat with the wireless receiver and assign them to the co-
rresponding circuit on the YUTAKI S controller.
Make sure the room thermostats are shut down before starting the binding process. They must be in the Off position.

First, reset the wireless receiver by holding down the button for BINDING CIRCUIT 1
15 seconds. This will erase the receiver’s current configuration.
Next, prepare the wireless receiver to link it to the room thermos-
tat and unit. Press and hold the receiver button for 5 seconds. CANCEL START
Next, select the circuit to be linked inside the binding zone. Af-
ter selecting between the two circuits the following window will
appear.

BINDING CIRCUIT 1

Pressing start will begin the binding mode in the room unit. It will
blink each second during the specified binding time. When bin- BINDING WITH CIRCUIT 1
ding is finished a success message will appear.
CANCEL

BINDING CIRCUIT 1
Next, activate binding mode on the room thermostat. Refer to the
thermostat manual for instructions. After activation, confirm by
pressing the OK button.
BINDING COMPLETE
After that, if binding is completed, the following message will
appear on the YUTAKI S controller. ACCEPT

If binding fails, the “BINDING FAILURE” error message will appear.

170
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

N ote
The same process applies to circuit 2 when selected on the menu.

In summary, the binding process for intelligent thermostat follows the steps below:
-- Ensure that thermostats are in the off position.
-- Press the button on the receiver for 15 seconds in order to remove the current configuration.
-- Press the button on the receiver for 5 seconds.
-- Select the circuit to be linked on the binding menu. Press the start button on the screen.
-- Start the binding mode on the thermostat. Refer to its instruction manual.
-- Press Ok button on the thermostat to confirm binding.
-- The display will show a confirmation message. If the binding is not confirmed for 30 seconds, an error message will
appear.

N ote
Be carefull because if the power supply is stopped on the remote thermostat or his receiver, it will keep the last

5
temperatures, room setting and room temperature. This values will be send if user change the setting on the remo-
te control, if user do not change the setting value, the communication will send again the last value in a maximum
period of one hour.

171
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Room Unit
• Description
The Hitachi programmable wireless Room Unit is designed to control your heating system efficiently, providing comfortable
temperatures when you are at home and energy savings when you are away. The following instructions explain how to
program and use the Room Unit to provide the most home comfort at the least cost.

• Features
-- Ergonomic user interface featuring an ‘OK-button’.
-- Large LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) Screen with backlight.
-- 7-day heating / cooling program to match your lifestyle, whilst maximising energy savings.
-- 6 independent temperature levels per day (from 5°C to 35°C).
-- Holiday button saves energy by letting you reduce the temperature for 1 to 99 days.
-- Built-in Memory holds the user program indefinitely.

• Controls Layout
1 2 3 4 5
16 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7
15 OFFMAN
AUTO

14

13
8
PROGRAM 1..6

12
9

11
10

 LCD Screen  Temperature Display  Green OK Button  Program Buttons

 Battery Low Indicator  Temperature Change Buttons  Battery Compartment  Copy Day Button
 Time Display  Temperature Enquiry Button  Battery Cover  Set Date/Day Button
 Day Indicator  Operating Mode Buttons  Holiday Function Button  Time Change Buttons

172
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

This section shows you how to setup and run the Room Unit in 3 simple steps:
STEP 1: Installing the Batteries

N ote
Please follow the instructions in this section only if the Room Unit screen is blank (no symbols or digits are dis-
played). If the room temperature is already displayed move on to Step 2: Setting the Day and Time.

-- To install the Batteries:

a. Lift up the front cover of the Room Unit to reveal the battery cover and product controls.
b. Remove the battery cover by pressing down and sliding out.
c. Insert the 2 x AA LR6 Alkaline Batteries supplied with the Room Unit, ensuring the correct orientation (see Controls
Layout).
d. After a short pause the Room Unit will display information on the screen and is now ready for use.
e. Replace the battery cover by sliding it firmly back into the front of the Room Unit.

STEP 2: Setting the Date and Time

-- To set the Date and Time:

5
a. Press the button to begin setting the date.
b. Press the or buttons to set the current day of the month (e.g. d01 = 1st day of the month) then press the
green button to confirm.
c. Press the or buttons to set the current month of the year (e.g. m01 = January) then press the green
button to confirm.
d. Press the or buttons to set the current year (e.g. yr08 = 2008) then press the green button to confirm.
The date is now stored and the Day Indicator will be displayed under the current day of the week (e.g. 1 = Monday,
2 = Tuesday, etc.)
e. Use the or buttons to set the correct time then press the green button to confirm. Each press of the
buttons will change the time by one minute and holding them down will change the time slowly at first and get pro-
gressively quicker.

N ote
If this mode is entered accidentally then press the , or buttons to exit.

STEP 3: Running the Built-in Heating Program

The Room Unit is now ready for operation. Press the button and the built-in heating program will start running.

N ote
The built-in heating program has been designed to provide normal comfort requirements, but if you want to cus-
tomise the settings please see the next section Programming the Room Unit.

173
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

Programming the Room Unit (Heating)

-- The Built-in Heating Program
The built-in heating program has 6 temperature level changes per day that can be set between 3.00 am and 2.50 am the fo-
llowing day - allowing you to maintain the evening temperature after midnight. Each temperature level can be set between
5°C and 35°C, and adjusted in 0.5°C increments. The factory default program for heating is as follows.

Period 1 2 3 4 5 6
Monday to Friday
Time 6:30 8:00 12:00 14:00 18:00 22:30
(Day 1 to 5)
Temperature 21°C 18°C 21°C 18°C 21°C 18°C

Period 1 2 3 4 5 6
Saturday & Sunday
Time 8:00 10:00 12:00 14:00 18:00 23:00
(Day 6 & 7)
Temperature 21°C 21°C 21°C 21°C 21°C 18°C

-- Reviewing the Heating Program

To review or edit the heating program use the PROGRAM or buttons to navigate between the 6 individual program-
ming periods for that day. Use the button to step through each day of the week, so the complete 7 day heating program
can be reviewed or edited.
-- Modifying the Heating Program
ŠŠ To change the heating program:
a. Press either of the PROGRAM or buttons to enter the programming 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mode. The time / temperature settings for period 1 on Monday (Day 1) will
be flashing as shown. The active period is highlighted by a flashing squa-
re around the numbers at the bottom of the screen and the selected day is
shown with the day indicator.
b. To adjust the period start time use the or buttons, the ‘OK?’ indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6

will be displayed to confirm the change. Holding the button down will change
the time quickly.

N ote
If you are pressing the or buttons and the display flashes the next period, it means the next period will be
pushed forward.

c. Once the required time is reached press the green button to confirm.

N ote
If the original time setting did not require adjustment press the green button to move to step ‘d’.

d. The temperature setting for period 1 on Monday (Day 1) will now be flashing. To adjust this press the or
buttons and confirm the setting again by pressing the green button.
e. The next time and temperature period will now be active. Adjust this by repeating steps b - d above until all 6 periods
are set for Monday or press the button to run the program as set, at any time.

174
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

ŠŠ You now have a choice of how to set the program for the next day:

f. i) Press the button to copy Monday’s program into Tuesday. The display will go blank apart from the ‘non flashing’
day indicator, which indicates the day copied and the ‘flashing’ target day to copy the program to. To accept this
day press the green button. To select a different target day press the button until the ‘flashing’ day indicator
is under the required day, then accept it by pressing the green button.

N ote
Once the target day is confirmed it becomes the day that is copied if the button is pressed again.

OR
g. ii) Press the 1 button to move the day indicator to Tuesday (Day 2). The program for that day can then be adjusted
by following steps b to e. Programs for the remaining days can be set in the same way, using the 1 button to move
to the next day.
To exit the programming mode select the desired operating mode by pressing the , or buttons.

N ote
To run the adjusted program select the AUTO mode.

• Disabling / Enabling Time Periods

5
The Room Unit has 6 periods each day that can be programmed, but you may not need all of these switch points for your
heating requirements. Therefore, any period from 2 to 4 can be removed from (or returned to) the heating program profile.
ŠŠ To disable or enable time periods:
a. To disable unwanted periods go to the desired period ( 2 to 6 ) using the PROGRAM or buttons to navigate,
ensure the correct period is highlighted with the flashing square symbol. Press and hold the button for at least 2
seconds and the display will indicate the period has been removed from the program.
b. To enable periods again follow the same procedure as above, navigating to the already disabled period. To enable
this period again press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds.

• Choosing the Operating Mode

The Room Unit can operate in three different modes: Automatic, Manual or Off. To set the operating mode press either of
the , or buttons. The screen indicates which mode is currently active by displaying AUTO, MAN or OFF.

AUTOMATIC ( ) mode sets the Room Unit to follow the built-in temperature program (default or personalised). Operating
the Room Unit in this mode is the best way to maintain a high level of temperature comfort whilst maximising your energy
savings.
MANUAL ( ) mode allows the Room Unit to be used without following the builtin temperature programme. The setpoint
can be adjusted from 5°C to 35°C by using the or buttons. The Room Unit will continue to maintain this temperature
until another operating mode or temperature is selected.
OFF ( ) mode sets the Room Unit to control to a minimum temperature setting of 5°C (default) that acts as a frost protec-
tion measure for your home.

175
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• During Normal Operation

ŠŠ Temperature Override
During normal operation (AUTO ( ) or MAN ( ) mode) the programmed temperature can be adjusted manually by pres-
sing the or buttons or the button. The ‘target’ temperature will be displayed and flash for 5 seconds - during this
time the or buttons can be used to modify the set value.

N ote
This temperature override is cancelled at the next programmed temperature change.

ŠŠ Temperature Enquiry
When the Room Unit is configured to control the room temperature directly it will display the current room temperature. To
review the programmed ‘target’ temperature (the temperature which the Room Unit is trying to maintain) press the button.
This ‘target’ temperature value will be displayed flashing for 5 seconds before returning to the current room temperature
value.

Using the Special Functions

ŠŠ HOLIDAY Function
The holiday function allows you to set a constant temperature (default = 10°C) for a specified number of days (from 1 - 99
days). This lets you save energy and related costs when you are away from home, but resumes normal operation on the
day of your return.
To set the Holiday function:
a. Ensure the Room Unit is running in AUTO ( ) or MAN ( ) operating modes.
b. Press the holiday button to display the holiday days counter and temperature setting, along with the holiday
indicator .
c. Press the or time buttons to set the holiday time (1 - 99 days) and press the green button to confirm.
d. Press the or buttons to set the holiday temperature (5°C - 35°C) and press the green button to confirm.
The Room Unit will now control to the new temperature for the set number of days that your home is vacant. At midnight
the holiday counter will be reduced by one until the selected number of days have passed. The Room Unit will then return
to normal operation as set by the AUTO ( ) or MAN ( ) mode. To cancel the HOLIDAY function or to exit the function at
any time press the button a second time.

• Adjusting the Time

To adjust only the time during normal operation use the or buttons to adjust the time and press the green button
again to confirm any changes.

Cooling Mode procedure (ATW-RTU-01/02/03)

If your system has been set up correctly you can use your thermostat to control the cooling. To switch the thermostat bet-
ween heating and cooling modes press the or buttons together for 5 seconds in any of the product operating modes
(AUTO, MAN or ). The text ‘COOLING’ will be displayed for a moment on the screen to indicate the cooling operation is
now active. The factory default program for cooling is specified in the table below, but this can be modified in the same way
as the default heating program:

Period 1 2 3 4 5 6
Monday to Friday Time 6:30 8:00 12:00 14:00 18:00 22:30
(Cooling)
Temperature 24°C 28°C 24°C 28°C 24°C 24°C

Period 1 2 3 4 5 6

Saturday & Sunday Time 8:00 10:00 12:00 14:00 18:00 23:00
Temperature 24°C 24°C 24°C 24°C 24°C 24°C

176
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 5  Control system

• If something happens to my heating system how can I check that the thermostat is working?
Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide. If you still need assistance after this call your installer. The thermostat should only be
opened or removed by a qualified professional to prevent possible injury from electric shock and/or damage to the product.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

Check to see if there are batteries in the battery
Batteries not installed.
compartment and the paper tab has been removed.
The Room Unit has a blank LCD
Check that the batteries have been installed in the correct
screen. Incorrect battery orientation.
orientation.
Exhausted batteries. Replace with new batteries.
The Room Unit shows a flashing Batteries are exhausted and need
Replace with new batteries.
symbol on the LCD screen. replacing.
Remove and re-insert the batteries in the Room Unit. If the
The Room Unit shows a flashing
Fault in Room Unit symbol does not clear itself in a few minutes call the
symbol on the LCD screen.
installer.
No power to heating system. Check that there is power to the heating system.

The Room Unit’s LCD display Press the button and then press the to increase the
works but the heating does not Program does not call for heat. temperature a few degrees above the current room tempe-
switch on. rature. The heating should come on after a few seconds.
Wrong electrical connection. Call the installer to check the electrical connections
Hook the Room Unit back on the wall bracket or replace the

5
The red LED on the RF Receiver RF communication lost due to the
Room Unit on the table stand in the position where RF com-
located next to heat pump con- wrong location of the Room Unit.
munication was reliable.
troller is constantly on or flashing.
RF communication fault. Call installer.

FAQ’s
• How do I change the batteries on the Room Unit when they run out?
The Room Unit constantly monitors the battery power level, which typically lasts for about 2 years before needing replaced.
When the power is running low a flashing symbol will be displayed on the screen. To change the batteries follow the
steps in the above section (‘STEP 1: Installing the Batteries’), replacing the used batteries with new ones in Step c.

N ote
While changing the batteries your program settings will be stored but you may need to adjust the time settings
to be correct.

• I want to use the table stand instead of wall mounted bracket. Where can I position the Room Unit?
It is important to keep the Room Unit in a location where reliable RF communication was proven. Advise your installer whe-
re would you like to position the Room Unit and he will check if the RF communication is reliable in the selected location(s).

N ote
As this is a wireless device certain objects could interfere with the RF signal - Leave at least 30cm distance from
any metal objects (including wall boxes) and at least 1 metre from any other electrical equipment eg. radio, TV,
PC, etc.

177
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

6. LCD user ’s interface

Index

6.1. Description of the hardware................................................................................................................. 152

6.1.1. Button definitions...................................................................................................................................... 152

6.2. Comprehensive view............................................................................................................................ 152

6.3. Description of the icons........................................................................................................................ 154

6.4. Controller configuration........................................................................................................................ 156

6.5. Unit configuration................................................................................................................................. 157

6.5.1. Operation display...................................................................................................................................... 157
6.5.2. Space heating configuration..................................................................................................................... 158
6.5.3. Space cooling configuration..................................................................................................................... 160
6.5.4. DHW......................................................................................................................................................... 162

6.6. Installer access.................................................................................................................................... 165

6.6.1. Unit configuration...................................................................................................................................... 166

6
6.6.2. System configuration................................................................................................................................ 168

179
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.1  Description of the hardware

LCD user control is the new user-friendly interface for controlling the unit. This Control uses OpenTherm Communication
that allows for remote control of unit by means of an intelligent Room thermostat.

6.1.1  Button definitions

The control’s operating mode is very simple, with 7 user-friendly buttons.

Button descriptions:
HITACHI
1 On/Off: From the comprehensive view, this switches the selec-
ted area on or off. If no area is selected, the entire unit will be
switched on or off. From other displays it will stop all units, wor-
king as an emergency stop.
2 Ok: this button is used to select items and confirm edits to
them. 3
1 4
3 4 Arrows: these allow you to navigate within the menus and OK

displays. 2
4 Return: used as a cancel button when editing an item, and
also used to go to the main menu from the general display.

6.2  Comprehensive view

Main screen is called “comprehensive view”. It provides the gene-

ral system information.
Move through this view using the arrow buttons.
“Time & Date”, “Alarm indication” and “Unit Status signals” are
displayed on all screens.
Only the following parameters can be modified on the “comprehen-
sive view” screen:
• DHW temperature
• Unit mode
• On/off circuits, DHW, swimming pool or the entire unit.
• Other values are not editable.
To edit the parameters, first select the desired parameter and
press OK button. After that, the new value can be entered using
“arrow” buttons. Confirm that the value is correct by again pressing
the OK button. The cancel button restores the previous value.
Pressing the “On/Off” button switches the “On/Off” status for all
areas (if they are available).
To change the “status” of a single area, select the desired area and
press the “On/Off” button.

180
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

 Time and date

  
Displays the current date and time information. The information
displayed may be changed on the control configuration menu.

 Alarm indication
Alarm indication will appear when an alarm is detected. The

alarm icon and alarm code will appear. 

 Control of Circuits I & II
This displays the temperature setting calculated for each circuit 
and a throughput icon indicating the percentage of the tempera-

ture setting being generated.
Pressing the ON/OFF button on one of these circuits will switch
it on or off.
When Air to water heat pump System has configured an intelli-
gent room thermostat, temperature settings for circuits I and II
may be switched between the following variables.
-- SET: Control temperature Setting
-- OTC: OTC Temperature Setting
-- ROOM: Room Temperature Setting
-- CURR: Current Room Temperature  Configuration Menu
- Unit configuration
 Unit mode
- Control configuration
This icon shows the unit’s mode of operation status. It may be
edited by pressing the OK button, and it can be switched between This icon indicates when it is possible to go to the configuration
Heating and Cooling mode. menu. If the icon is displayed, the user may return to the menu by
pressing the back button. It has different options that can be confi-

6
Electrical Heater control: gured as shown in the following pages.
-- 1 - Step 1
 Sanitary Tank Control
-- 2 - Step 2
Available options are:
-- 3 - Step 3
-- DHWT Temperature Setting
Electrical Heater DHWT control:
-- DHWT Water Temperature
-- ON
This view gives information about the DHW’s temperature setting
-- Disabled by timer and displays a temperature icon indicating the percentage of tempe-
rature the DHW will be generating.
Unit mode (Status)
It will also have an icon to show whether or not the electrical heater
-- Heat
of the DHW is working and another one that indicates whether there is
-- Cool a timer configured for the current day.
Timer enabled DHW temperature setting may be changed by pressing the OK button
above it.
 Unit status signals
Pressing the ON/OFF button over the DHW area will switch it ON
This part of the screen displays all the notification icons that offer or OFF.
general knowledge on the unit’s situation.
If anti-legionella is working, an ANTL text will appear, and the setting
Available signals are from left to right: configured on the anti-legionella menu will be displayed.
-- Installer mode indication  Swimming pool control
-- Defrost Available options are:
-- Water pumps -- SWP Temperature setting
-- Supplementary solar system -- SWP Water temperature
-- Compressor ON
This view gives information about the Swimming pool temperature
-- Swimming Pool setting and displays a temperature icon indicating the percentage of
temperature the Swimming pool will be generating.Swimming pool
-- Boiler working temperature setting may be changed by pressing the OK button
-- Tariff input above it.

-- Test Run Pressing the ON/OFF button over the Swimming pool area will
switch it ON or OFF.
-- Auto Summer Switch-Off

181
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.3  Description of the icons

Icon Name Values Explanation

OFF OFF Circuit I or II is in Demand-OFF

Circuit I or II is on Thermo-OFF

Circuit I or II is working far from the desired temperature

Circuit I or II Status

Circuit I or II is working near from the desired temperature

Circuit I or II is working on the desired temperature

ANTL ANTL Anti-legionella is activated and working

DHW is on Thermo-OFF

DHW is working far from the desired temperature

DHW Status

DHW is working near from the desired temperature

DHW is working on the desired temperature

OFF OFF Swimming pool is OFF

SWP is on thermo OFF

Swimming pool statuts SWP is working far from the desired temperature

SWP is working near from the desired temperature

SWP is working on the desired temperature

Value Displays the temperature setting of the circuit or DHW

888
OFF Circuit or DHW are stopped
Setting Temperatures
Ban icon is displayed when a timer bans the tank. This mean that there is a timer
assigned for the current day, but the current time is outside the permitted period

System is working in heating mode

Mode
System is working in cooling mode

This icon informs about pump operation.

Pump There are three available pumps on the system. Each one is numbered, and its
corresponding number is displayed below to the pump icon when it is operating

Circuit I and II step Indicates which of the 3 possible heater steps is applied on space heating circuit

DHW Heater Informs about DHW Heater operation

When DHW Heater will be banned by the timer, it will appear the banning icon on the
DHW Heater
same place where goes the DHW Heater icon.

Installer mode Informs that LCD is logedd on the installer mode that has special privileges

Swimming pool Swimming pool is enabled

Solar Auxiliary Solar system is working

182
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
6 LCD user’s interface

Icon Name Values Explanation

Compressor Compressor is enabled

Alarm Existing alarm. This icon will appear with the alarm code

Boiler Boiler system is working

Tariff When tariff signal is received, the operation restriction is applied

When the timer is configured and enabled, this icon will go with the active timer
DHW Timer
number

Defrost Defrost function is active

Test Run Informs about the activation of the “Test Run” function in the outdoor unit

Summer Switch-Off Notifies that heating is off because Summer Switch-Off is activated

This icon allows user to go to the “main menu” by pressing “Return” button.
Menu
The “comprehesive view” will appear when it’s possible to return to the menu

183
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.4  Controller configuration

Control configuration contains different configuration options for the control. Those options are explained in the following
items.

 
Time and date

Setting the time and date will show the following options:
Configuration can be switched between:
-- Complete: display will show date and time
-- Time: display will only show the time
-- Date: display will only show the date aligned to the right
-- None: hide time and date

Time format options can be switched between:

TIME AND DATE
-- 24 Hours Configuration Complete
Hour
-- 12 Hours Minute
Day Period
Time Format
Day
Month
Year
N ote
Day period option will be enabled only when Time format is
set to 12 Hours.

C aution
This configuration only affects the display. Time and date will
continue running.
Be aware that functions that depend on time and date will
affected even when the format displayed is “None”.

 
Language selection

User can set different languages in order to better understand the menu.They are selectable from the following view. There
are 5 available languages:
-- English (EN)
-- French (FR)
-- Italian (IT)
-- Spanish (ES)
-- German (DE)
Default language is English.

 
LCD Energy saving

LCD Energy saving turns off the LCD backlight in order to reduce energy consumption. It is activated when:
-- User does not touch any button for 2 minutes.
-- User presses the run/stop button for 3 seconds.
Press any button to exit this mode.

 
Screen contrast

User may specify screen contrast. This is modified in the same manner as a normal variable. Changing the variable will
also change the contrast. Pressing left or right arrows for 10 seconds will set the contrast to the default value.

184
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

6.5  Unit configuration

The following chapters explain all the items contained on the Unit configuration for the user.

N ote
Menus may be modified during configuration. Configuration will hide or display available options. For example,
if Circuit 2 is disabled, all circuit 2 options will be hidden.

6.5.1  Operation display

This is the list of operation display parameters that can be consulted. All of them are read-only. Most of these variables are
the same ones that can be consulted by 7-segment, taking information from the outdoor unit.

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units

System Operation
OFF
Cool D-OFF
Cool T-OFF
Cool ON
Heat D-OFF
Heat T-OFF
1-000 Operation Status OFF - -
Heat ON
DHW OFF
DHW ON

6
SWP OFF
SWP ON
Alarm XXX (XXX= Code number)
Unit Status
1-003 Indoor Exp. valve opening (%) - Variable value - %
1-103 Outdoor Exp. valve opening (%) - Variable value - %
1-004 Inverter Operation frequency (Hz) - Variable value - Hz
1-005 Defrosting - Variable value - -
1-006 Cause of stoppage - Variable value - -
1-010 Compressor running current (A) - Variable value - A
1-011 PCB Firmware - Variable value - -
1-012 Product spec code - Variable value - -
1-013 Mixing valve position (%) - Variable value - %
Actual Temperature
1-014 Water Inlet Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-015 Water outlet Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-115 Water outlet Tº Boiler - Variable value - ºC
1-215 Water outlet Tº C2 - Variable value - ºC
1-315 DHW Water Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-415 SWP Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-016 Gas Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-016 Liquid Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-017 Outdoor Ambient Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-117 Outdoor Ambient Average Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-217 2nd ambient Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-218 Summer Sw-Off average Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-018 Discharge Gas Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-019 Suction gas Tº - Variable value - ºC
1-020 Room Tº C1 - Variable value - ºC
1-120 Room Tº C2 - Variable value - ºC
Set Point
1-021 OTC Supply set point C1 - Variable value - ºC
1-022 OTC Supply set point C2 - Variable value - ºC
1-023 Water Tº Setting - Variable value - ºC
1-024 Room Tº Set point C1 - Variable value - ºC
1-124 Room Tº Set point C2 - Variable value - ºC
1-025 DHW Tº set point - Variable value - ºC
Alarm History

185
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.5.2  Space heating configuration

The main thing to configure for space heating is the water calcu-
lation.
The water calculation will calculate the temperature setting for
each circuit, selecting a function to assign each temperature
setting depending on the ambient temperature.
Each circuit will have its own Water Calculation type for heating.
Booth circuits may be configured as:
-- Point
-- Gradient
-- Fix HITACHI
-- None AM
PM

WATERCALCULATION
WATER CALCULATIONTºTº
C1 C1
To switch between them the variable type must be edited. Type
Type Points
Points

N ote
Setting a space heating circuit at None will not deac-
tivate it for space cooling. There are independent
circuits.
Installer may ban the possibility of switching between
water calculation modes. In that case the user will not
be able to edit the water calculation variable type.

 
Point

HITACHI
AM
PM

WATERCALCULATION
WATER CALCULATIONTºTº
C1 C1
Type
Type Points
Point is the most versatile calculation type. The user sets four po- TS1L
ints that will create line representing the function the Air to water 44
heat pump will be use to give the temperature setting according
TS1H
to the current ambient temperature. 20
TA1L TA1H
-20 20

 
Gradient

Calculate the temperature setting using a gradient configured by

HITACHI
the installer. In this view the user may configure the same varia- AM
PM

bles as in the point view, only automatically. User can only edit WATER
WATERCALCULATION
CALCULATIONTº Tº
C 1C1
the gradient variable and it will automatically set the values for Type
Type Gradient
Gradient
the other 4 variables on the chart. TS1L Gradient
Gradient
44 0.6

TS1H
20
TA1L TA1H
-20 20
N ote
The unique editable variable on that view is gradient.

186
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

 
Fix

WATER
WATERCALCULATION
CALCULATIONTºTºCC1
1
Type Fix

This calculation mode sets the circuit’s temperature setting to a

defined value, forcing the unit to maintain it.

 
None

WATER
WATERCALCULATION
CALCULATIONTº
TºCC1
1
Type None

The None option sets the circuit as disabled.

 
Variables table

Variables used in these views are displayed in the following table. 6

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units
Water calculation Type
None
Points
3-004 Water calculation Tº C1 OTC gradient 1 -
Gradient
Fix

None
Points
3-104 Water calculation Tº C2 None 1 -
Gradient
Fix

Heating OTC points Control C1

3-005 Low ambient Tº C1 -20 -20~6 1 ºC
3-006 High ambient Tº C1 20 7~25 1 ºC
3-007 Set point at low ambient Tº C1 44 (3-012) ~ (3-011) * 1 ºC
3-008 Set point at high ambient Tº C1 20 (3-012) ~ (3-011) * 1 ºC
Heating OTC points Control C2
3-105 Low ambient Tº C2 -20 -20~6 1 ºC
3-106 High ambient Tº C2 20 7~25 1 ºC
3-107 Set point at low ambient Tº C2 44 (3-112) ~ (3-111) * 1 ºC
3-108 Set point at high ambient Tº C2 20 (3-112) ~ (3-111) * 1 ºC
Heating OTC Gradient Control C1
3-009 Gradient C1 0.6 0.2~2.2 0.1 -
Heating OTC Gradient Control C2
3-109 Gradient C2 0.6 0.2~2.2 0.1 -
Heating Fixed Temperature C1
3-010 Fixed Tº C1 40 (3-012) ~ (3-011) * 1 ºC
Heating Fixed Temperature C2
3-110 Fixed Tº C2 40 (3-112) ~ (3-111) * 1 ºC

N ote
* Valves (3-(0/1)12)~(3-(0/1)11) are set by installer.

187
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.5.3  Space cooling configuration

In space cooling, the water calculation types work in the same way
as for space heating, without the gradient view. This leaves the
following water calculation types:
-- Point
-- Fix
-- None
To switch between them the variable type must be edited.

WATER
WATER CALCULATION
CALCULATION Tº1C1
Tº C
Type Points
N ote
Setting a space heating circuit at None will not deac-
tivate it for space cooling. There are independent cir-
cuits.
Installer may ban the possibility of switching between
water calculation modes. In that case the user will not
be able to edit the water calculation variable type.

 
Point

Point is the most versatile calculation type. The user sets four
points that will create line representing the function the Air to water
heat pump will use to give the temperature setting according to the WATERCALCULATION
WATER CALCULATIONTºTº
C1 C1
current ambient temperature. Type Points
Points

N ote
In case of refreshing floor application, it is important to
set the minimum water outlet temperature upper than
condensation floor temperatures (more than 16ºC)

 
Fix

WATER
WATERCALCULATION Tº C
CALCULATION Tº1C1
Type Fix

This calculation mode sets the circuit’s temperature setting to a

defined value, forcing the unit to maintain it.

188
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

 
None

WATERCALCULATION
WATER CALCULATIONTº Tº
C 1C1
Type None

The None option disables the circuit.

 
Variables table

Default values and margins will be different than for space heating. Values used in those views are displayed in the fo-
llowing table.

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Water calculation Type
None
3-013 Water calculation Tº C1 Fix Points 1 -
Fix
None
3-113 Water calculation Tº C2 None Points 1 -
Fix
Cooling OTC points Control C1 6
3-014 Low ambient Tº C1 23 17~30 1 ºC
3-015 High ambient Tº C1 32 31~45 1 ºC
3-016 Set point at low ambient Tº C1 22 (3-020) ~ (3-019) * 1 ºC
3-017 Set point at high ambient Tº C1 16 (3-020) ~ (3-019) * 1 ºC
Cooling OTC points Control C2
3-014 Low ambient Tº C2 23 17~30 1 ºC
3-015 High ambient Tº C2 32 31~45 1 ºC
3-016 Set point at low ambient Tº C2 22 (3-120) ~ (3-119) * 1 ºC
3-017 Set point at high ambient Tº C2 16 (3-120) ~ (3-119) * 1 ºC
Cooling Fixed Temperature (Circuit 1)
3-018 Fixed Tº C1 19 (3-020) ~ (3-019) * 1 ºC
Cooling Fixed Temperature (Circuit 2)
3-118 Fixed Tº C2 19 (3-120) ~ (3-119) * 1 ºC

N ote
* Valves (3-(0/1)20)~(3-(0/1)19) are set by installer.

189
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.5.4  DHW

Sanitary tank has its own configurable variables, displayed in the following table.

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
3-121 DHW status Disabled 1 -
Enabled
Standard usage
3-021 DHW Mode Standard usage 1 -
High demand
3-022 DHW Tº set-point 45 30 ~ (3-122) * 1 ºC
- DHW timer - - - -
- Anti-legionella - - - -

This menu has different sub-menus that are:

-- DHW timer: this is a programmable timer that allows banning the usage of DHW only on the assigned periods.
-- Anti-legionella: this is a configuration view designed to set the water desinfection method.
They are explained in the following chapters.

N ote
* Valve (3~1/2) is set by installer.

caution
Anti-legionella function is hidden to the user by default. Installer may display it.
Anti-legionella will set the water temperature to the setting value during the specified time. This temperature will
be dangerous to the user and could burn him or her. Installer is responsible for configuring it properly, advising
the user, and enabling the function.

190
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

 
DHW timer

When user selects configure value, another window will be displayed,as

seen in the following image.
That screen will included the following options: DHW TIMERS
DHW TIMERS
Timer
Timer Creation
-- Timer creation: this will be used to set the different programs. Timer
Creation
Timer Assignation
Assignation
Reset
Reset Timer Creation
Timer Creation
-- Timer assignation: this will be used to set different programs to
each day of the week.
-- Reset Timer creation: this will ask the user to set all days with
disabled timer.

DHW TIMER CREATION

Timer 1
Timer 2
Timer 3
The user will select between 7 Timers in the timer creation menu. Timer 4
Timer 5
Timer 6

After selecting a timer, the scren will display 6 DHW Permission Periods DHW TIMER CREATION
Timer DHW Permission 1 Enabled
to select from. Timer DHW Permission 2 Disabled
Timer DHW Permission 3 Disabled
The right column indicates whether the DHW Permission Periods are Timer DHW Permission 4 Disabled

6
Timer DHW Permission 5 Disabled
enabled or not. This can only be changed from inside the menu. Timer DHW Permission 6 Disabled

Each of these DHW Permission Periods may be configured as shown

in the following image. To enable the permission period this option must
be set to “YES”. DHW
DHWPERMISSION PERIOD
PERMISSION PERIOD 1 1
From
When permission period configuration is confirmed, it will be saved To
if the permission period is enabled. Prior to this, it will check to see if
Period Activated YES
“From” time is lower than “To” time, in which case an error message will
appear and you will return to this screen. CONFIRM

Note that if one permission period ends within another, DHW will be
allowed until the end of the period that ends the latest.

Assigning the day is done in the same way as for normal configuration.
There will be a list of all the days of the week, and the user can either
select which timer will be executed for each day, or disable the timer.
If a day’s timer is disabled, it will do nothing. If the timer is enabled, it DHW TIMER ASSIGNATION
Monday Timer 1
will be applied. Tuesday Disabled
Wednesday Timer 2
When the tank is working on a timer period, the DHW tank will be Thursday Timer 1
Timer 7
Friday
available for normal usage. If it is outside of the period, but on a day Saturday Disabled
with an assigned timer, the temperature setting will be replaced in the
comprehensive view by the ban icon, and the tank will operating under
the OFF mode.
If the user presses OFF, the temperature will read as OFF and it will be
considered a normal day without a timer.

DHW TIMER ASSIGNATION

Pressing OK the days on a week will
have the timer disabled.
Resetting timer assignation will set all the days on the timer assignation
to the disabled value. It will ask the user for confirmation. NO YES

191
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

 
Anti-legionella

User can only activate or deactivate the anti-legionella function.

Code Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
8-004 Disinfection function status Disabled - -
Enabled

This function will work If it is turned on. It will start at selected time and on the selected day (Operation interval) with the
selected temperature during the selected time.
In the comprehensive view, the text “ANTL” will appear in the tank area.

caution
Anti-legionella function is hidden to the user by default. Installer can display it.

 
Swimming pool

Swimming pool configuration parameters are displayed in the following table.

Code Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
3-032 Swimming pool status Disabled - -
Enabled
3-033 Swimming pool set point Tº 24 24~33 1 ºC

 
Optional functions

This menu will display optional functions to the user.

Code Description Default Value Range Steps Units

- Summer Switch-Off - - - -
- Tariff function - - - -

 
Summer Switch-Off

This summer switch-off function can be configured to auto mode.

Code Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
8-001 Auto Switch-Off Status Disabled - -
Enabled
8-102 Switch-Off Tº 22 10~25 1 ºC
8-103 Switching On differential Tº 0.5 0~3 0.5 ºC

 
Tariff function

The user may set variables to Tariff function on this menu.

Code Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
8-008 Tariff function status Disabled - -
Enabled
HP blocked NC
HP blocked NO
8-010 Tariff action HP blocked NC - -
DHW blocked NC
DHW blocked NO
Disabled
8-009 Boiler when TARIFF Disabled - -
Enabled
Disabled
8-011 DHW Heater when TARIFF Disabled - -
Enabled

N ote
8-009 and 8-011 only used when Tariff action selected (8-010) is HP blocked (NC/NO).

192
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

6.6  Installer access

A special user with higher access privileges can use the controller to configure the system.
This user is referred to as the Installer, and in order to access the controller as Installer, you must hold down the OK and
Return buttons for 3 seconds.

OK + RETURN

After that, the “Enter the password combination” message will appear.
The password combination for the Installer is:

Right ( ), Down ( ), Left ( ), Right ( ).

Press Ok to confirm the password.

If the correct access code is entered, the installer mode icon will appear on the notifications bar (bottom line).

Installer mode icon

Installer level access remains active for 30 minutes. After that time, it is necessary to repeat the log in process. To exit the
Installer mode and return to the unit menu, hold down the backspace for 3 seconds or go to the logout option on the menu.

N ote
The following chapters will explain the special settings the Installer can edit. It is important to understand that
the Installer can also perform all the actions available to other users.
6

193
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.6.1  Unit configuration

 
Operation display

This menu is exactly the same than in user mode.

 
General parameters

General parameters allow for the configuration of the general system variables.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

General Parameters
- RTO Room Thermostat Options
1-001 OUa Refrigerant Cycle Address 0 0~63 1 -
1-002 IUa Indoor Unit Address 0 0~63 1 -

The installer may configure the system address here so as to allow for proper configuration.

caution
OU and IU must be at the same setting as that on the unit PCB address.

The Room Thermostat Options submenu will display the following variables.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Room Thermostat Options
ON/OFF
3-002 RTT Thermostat Type ON/OFF 1 -
Intelligent
- BIN Circuit Binding - - - -
3-003 Rfact1 Compensation Factor C1 2 0~5 1 -
3-103 Rfact2 Compensation Factor C2 2 0~5 1 -
3-032 Roff Room Thermo OFF Tº 3 0~5 1 ºC
3-030 Rton Minimum ON Time (min) 6 0~15 1 Min
3-031 Rtoff Minimum OFF Time (min) 6 0~15 1 Min

194
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

Area binding
Binding is a necessary process in order to link the room thermostat with the wireless receiver and assign them to the co-
rresponding circuit on the controller.
Make sure the room thermostats are shut down before starting the binding process. They must be in the Off position.

First, reset the wireless receiver by holding down the button for 15 BINDING CIRCUIT 1
seconds. This will erase the receiver’s current configuration.
Next, prepare the wireless receiver to link it to the room thermostat CANCEL START
and unit. Press and hold the receiver button for 5 seconds.
Next, select the circuit to be linked inside the binding zone. After
selecting between the two circuits the following window will appear.

BINDING CIRCUIT 1

Pressing start will begin the binding mode in the room unit. It will
blink each second during the specified binding time. When bin- BINDING WITH CIRCUIT 1
ding is finished a success message will appear.
CANCEL

BINDING CIRCUIT 1
6
Next, activate binding mode on the room thermostat. Refer to the
thermostat manual for instructions. After activation, confirm by
pressing the OK button.
BINDING COMPLETE
After that, if binding is completed, the following message will
appear on the controller. ACCEPT

If binding fails, the “BINDING FAILURE” error message will appear.

N ote
The same process applies to circuit 2 when selected on the menu.
In summary, the binding process follows the steps below:
-- Ensure that thermostats are in the off position.
-- Press the button on the receiver for 15 seconds in order to remove the current configuration.
-- Press the button on the receiver for 5 seconds.
-- Select the circuit to be linked on the binding menu. Press the start button on the screen.
-- Start the binding mode on the thermostat. Refer to its instruction manual.
-- Press Ok button on the thermostat to confirm binding.
-- The display will show a confirmation message. If the binding is not confirmed for 30 seconds, an error message
will appear.

N ote
“Be carefull because if the power supply is stopped on the remote thermostat or his receiver, it will keep the last
temperatures, room setting and room temperature. This values will be send until the setting value will be chan-
ged. If never has read any value, it will send the OpenTherm default temperatures of 20ºC.”

195
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

6.6.2  System configuration

 
User privileges

This will define what the user may or may not do. For example, the Installer can decide whether or not the user may switch
between different water calculation types, or whether or not the user may enable or disable the anti-legionella function.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Water calculation privilege
3-999 WTP Calculation Type Selection Yes No / Yes -
3-998 ALP Anti-legionella Activation No No / Yes 1 -

 
Space heating

These are the same views as those displayed in user mode, with the addition of maximum and minimum water temperature
settings for each circuit.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

C1 Tº Range
3-011 Tmax1 Maximum Supply Tº 60 35~60(*)(**) 1 ºC
3-012 Tmin1 Minimum Supply Tº 20 20~34 1 ºC
C2 Tº Range
3-111 Tmax2 Maximum Supply Tº 60 35~60(*)(**) 1 ºC
3-112 Tmin2 Minimum Supply Tº 20 20~34 1 ºC

N ote
(*) 55ºC for RWM-2.0FSN3E
(**) 80ºC when boiler combination

 
Space cooling

These are the same views as those displayed in user mode, with the addition of maximum and minimum water temperature
settings for each circuit.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

C1 Tº Range
3-019 Tmax1 Maximum Supply Tº 22 19~22 1 ºC
3-020 Tmin1 Minimum Supply Tº 16 5~18 1 ºC
C2 Tº Range
3-119 Tmax2 Maximum Supply Tº 22 19~22 1 ºC
3-120 Tmin2 Minimum Supply Tº 16 5~18 1 ºC

 
DHW

These are the same views as those displayed in the user mode, with the addition of the following adjustable parameters.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-122 TDHWmx DHW Maximum Set Point Tº 55 40~70 1 ºC
3-024 THPOFF HP OFF Tº Differential 6 0~10 1 ºC
3-025 THPON HP ON Tº Differential 10 0~15 1 ºC
3-026 TDHWMIN DHW Minimum Time (min) 10 0~15 1 Min
3-027 TDHWMX DHW Maximum Time (min) 45 20~150 1 Min
3-028 CDHW Cycle DHW Time (hours) 1 0~24 1 Hour
3-029 DHWEH EH Waiting Time (min) 45 0~60 1 Min
3-030 SHPTs Space Priority Status OFF OFF / ON - -
3-031 SHPT Space Priority Tº -5 -20~0 1 ºC

196
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

DHW Timer
DHW Timer is the same as that displayed in user mode.

Anti-legionella
The user can only activate or de-activate it, while the Installer will have access to all configuration parameters.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

8-003 OpInt Operation Day Sunday Daily / Mon ~ Sun - Day
8-005 StTim Starting Time 01:00 (00~24) - Time
8-006 DHWSP DHW Tº Set Point 70 50~70 - ºC
8-007 KeepP Duration (min) 10 10~60 - Min

If function is turned ON (Status), it will start at selected time (Start Time) and on the selected day (Operation Interval) at the
selected temperature (Anti-legionella Set Point) for the selected amount of time (Interval Time).

C aution
Anti-legionella function is hidden by default. The Installer can choose to reveal it.

 
Swimming pool

This view is the same as that displayed in user mode.

 
Complementary heating

It will display the same parameters, with the addition of the those listed below.

CODE REF Description Default Value

Electrical Heater Configuration
Range Steps Units
6
5-006 MOT Bivalent Point for EH 0 -20~20 1 ºC
5-001 ksco Supply Set Point Offset 4 0 ~10 1 K
5-002 PB Proportional Band (ºC/100%) 6.0 0~20 0.2 ºC/100%
5-003 IRF Reset Factor (%/ºCmin) 2.5 0~20 0.1 %/ºC Min
5-004 ISWT Inter-Stage Waiting Time (min) 5 0~10 1 Min
5-005 WTEH Waiting Time for EH (min) 30 1~90 1 Min
Boiler Configuration
6-007 BB Bivalent Point for Boiler -5 -20~20 1 ºC
6-004 Bon Minimum ON Time (min) 2 1~30 1 Min
6-005 Boff Minimum OFF Time (min) 5 1~30 1 Min
6-006 WTBO Waiting Time (min) 30 1~90 1 Min
6-001 Kscob Boiler Offset Tº 4 0~10 1 ºC
6-009 BWTt Waiting Time for DHW (min) 45 0~120 5 ºC
Solar Configuration
Disabled
10-001 Sprior Status Disabled - -
Enabled
3-126 TDHWMSOL DHW SOLAR Max Time (min) 60 30~240 1 Min

N ote
In the case of the Heating + Boiler configuration (5-000), BB (6-007) will have a range of –20~20 and the contro-
ller must ensure that: BB (6-007) < 5ºC + MOT (5-006).

197
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface 

 
Mixing valve for C2

The following table lists the settings that may be edited to control circuit 2’s mixing valve.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

3-133 PBMV Proportional Band (K) 6.0 0~20 0.2 K
3-134 IRFMV Integral Reset Factor (%) 2.5 0.0~20 0.1 %
3-135 RTMV Running Time Factor (sec) 140 10~500 10 Sec

 
Water Pump

The following table lists the variables that may be configured to manage the water pump.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

7-002 PMinOff Minimum Time OFF (min) 40 0~120 10 Min
7-003 PMinOn Minimum Time ON (min) 10 0~120 10 Min
7-001 POT1 Pump Overrun Time (min) 10 0~120 5 Min
7-202 OTO Over-Tº Offset C2 5 1~10 1 ºC

 
Screed drying

SCREED DRYING
Configuration
It takes 7 days, and the Installer must configure target Circuit 1 Target Temperature:
temperatures for the available circuits in order for it to
Circuit 2 Target Temperature:
work properly.
CANCEL START

SCREED DRYING
SCREED DRYING
It is advisable to exit the Installer mode by pressing the Phase 1
Start button, as the operation takes 7 days to carry out. Pending time:
44h 20m 19s
The Screed Drying display allows user to keep track of or CANCEL
cancel the screed drying process.

SCREED DRYING
Phase 1 takes three days and phase 2 takes four. During
SCREED DRYING
these phases it will attempt to reach target temperatures
Phase 1 & 2
using different drying procedures.
Completed
EXIT

When the process is completed the following screen will

appear.

198
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 6 LCD user’s interface

 
Test Run

When outdoor test run is selected, the remote control will ask for the duration of the test, and the working mode will be the same as that
explained in the normal user chapter, only with the Installer mode icon on the notifications bar.

 
Optional Function

This will include the same parameters as those in user mode, with the addition of the following parameters.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

- SP Seizure Protection - - - -
Disabled
8-020 hsb Hydraulic Separator Status Disabled - -
Enabled

Seizure Protection
This view includes the following variables.

CODE REF Description Default Value Range Steps Units

Disabled
8-002 SeizPr Seizure Protection Status Disabled - -
Enabled
8-010 OpInt Operation Day Mon Mon ~ Sun - Day
8-011 StTim Start Time (00~24) 01:00 (00~24) - Time

These Installer parameters control the optional seizure function. They are used to enable seizure protection and set its
activation time. When this happens, follow these instructions:
• Make sure mixing valves are fully opened and then fully closed (time depends on runtime parameter).

6
• Diverting valves are switched on for 1 minute.
• Pumps are switched on for 1 minute.

Restore default settings

RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS

Press OKtotoreset
Press OK reset all settings.
all settings.
Press Canceltoto
Press Cancel notnot
taketake any action.
any action.

When “Restore Default Settings” is selected, the unit

control will ask the user to confirm.

The “No” option is selected by default. Pressing “Yes” will reset the factory settings.

199
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7. Optional functions

Index

7.1. Indoor unit............................................................................................................................................ 174

7.1.1. Floor screed drying function (circuits 1 & 2)............................................................................................. 174
7.1.2. Automatic summer switch-off................................................................................................................... 175
7.1.3. Pump and valve seizure protection.......................................................................................................... 176
7.1.4. DHW anti-legionella protection function................................................................................................... 176
7.1.5. Tariff input (electrical tariff input)............................................................................................................... 177
7.1.6. Electrical heater or boiler emergency mode............................................................................................. 178
7.1.7. Step heater for 3-phase imbalance option................................................................................................ 179
7.1.8. Hydraulic separator combination.............................................................................................................. 179
7.1.9. Secondary outdoor sensor accessory...................................................................................................... 179
7.1.10. Indoor external output signals.................................................................................................................. 180

7.2. Outdoor units........................................................................................................................................ 181

7.2.1. Available ports.......................................................................................................................................... 181
7.2.2. Configuration............................................................................................................................................ 183
7.2.3. Description of optional output signals....................................................................................................... 185

201
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1  Indoor unit

Yutaki S unit has different optional functions designed to give the user better control over the facilities that the user can
apply.

7.1.1  Floor screed drying function (circuits 1 & 2)

New air to water heat pump has a new special optional function used exclusively for the process of drying of newly applied
screed on floor heating system. This process is based on EN1264 part 4.
When the user activates the floor screed drying function, the water set point follows a predetermined schedule:

Water outlet
temperature 1 Water set-point is kept constant at 25ºC (*) for
(ºC)
3 days.
40 2 Water set-point is set to the Heating maxi-
mum supply temperature (but always limited
35
to ≤  55ºC) for 4 days.
30 3 After 7 days started the floor screed drying,
25 the water outlet temperature will return at the
assigned water temperature setting, depen-
ding on the water rule selected.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Days

Upon completion of the above sequence, the controller returns to normal operation.
All the other heating modes are overdriven except hot sanitary water. The room thermostat is disabled during this function.

CODE Description Default Value

8-000 Screed drying function c1 (OFF, ON) OFF
8-100 Screed drying function c2 (OFF; ON) OFF

N ote
• Tariff input has no effect
• Screed drying function process is showed in LCD
• (*) Unit heating working range has priority instead of 25ºC

202
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1.2  Automatic summer switch-off

At higher outside temperatures it doesn’t make sense to keep heating the building. The YUTAKI S system will switch the
heating off when the daily average outdoor temperature of the previous day rises above the Summer Switch-Off Activation
Temperature.
Variables used:

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units

8-001 Auto Summer Switch-OFF Disable Disable/Enabled - -
8-102 Summer Switch-Off Tº 22 10~25 1 ºC
8-103 Switching On differential 0.5 0~3 0.5 ºC

It will calculate the average of last 24 hours.

In the first 24 hours it will not check anything. After that it will adjust the average with the new sample and check the con-
ditions every 5 minutes.

N ote
• Deactivate space heating when checking conditions. User may activate it using on/off button, which will restart
the function and reset the average.
• The checking conditions are:

Condition Action
Average > Summer Switch-OFF Tº [8-102] HEATING OFF

7
Average < (Sum. Sw-Off Tº [8-102] – Sw.differential [8-103]) HEATING ON

N ote
• Average is an internal variable of controller
• A switching differential [8-103] is applied.
• Function must remember status (ON or OFF). When second condition is activated, status will be restored.
• When changing Summer Switch OFF Tº or switching ON differencial or Run/Stop any circuit (1&2) the average
calculation will restart.

If circuits are forced OFF, a notification icon will appear on the LCD.

203
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1.3  Pump and valve seizure protection

The pump/valve seizure protection function helps to prevent these components sticking during long periods of inactivity.
Every week the components will run for a short period.
Mixing valves are fully opened and then fully closed (time depends on runtime parameter)
• Diverting valves are switched on for 1 minute.
• Pumps are switched on for 1 minute

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units

8-002 Seizure protection (00:OFF, 01: ON) OFF - - -
8-010 Operation Day Mon Mon~Sun - Day
8-011 Start Time (00~24) 01:00 (00~24) - Time

7.1.4  DHW anti-legionella protection function

In order to help protect against Legionella in the domestic hot water system, the DHW set-point can be raised to a higher
than normal temperature. The Legionella protection only makes sense if there is a DHW electric heater to raise the DHW
temperature to this high temperature.

N ote
According to national regulation, the installer must configure this disinfection function field setting
Configuration parameters:
• Operation interval: day(s) of the week at which the domestic water should be heated
• Status: defines whether the disinfection function is turned ON (1) or OFF (0).
• Start time: time of the day at which the domestic water should be heated
• Set-point: high water temperature to be reached.
• Interval: time period defining how long the set-point temperature should be maintained.

Anti-Legionella
temperature
set-point

DHW setting
temperature

Time

CODE Description Default Value Range Steps Units

8-004 Disinfection function status Disabled Disabled / Enabled - -
8-003 Operation Interval (Mon~Sun) Sunday Daily / Mon ~Sun - day
8-005 Start Time (00~24) 01:00 (00~24) - Time
8-006 DHW set-point 70 50~70 - ºC
8-007 Keeping period 10 10~60 - min

N ote
• Tariff or DHW timer has no effect.
• When antillegionella function, it is shown in LCD (by ANTL sentence)

204
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1.5  Tariff input (electrical tariff input)

This function can be used to block the heat pump.

It allows an external tariff switch device to switch off the heat pump during peak electricity demand period.
When the system is working in combination with Boiler, the boiler will be switched ON to provide the necessary heating.

7 9 Tariff-switching
device

Tariff device

CODE Description Default Value Range

8-008 Tariff function enabled/disabled Disabled Disabled / Enabled
00:Heat pump blocked when signal is closed.
01:Heat pump blocked when signal is open.
8-010 Tariff action (00~03) 00
02:DHW blocked when signal is closed.
03:DHW blocked when signal is open.
Use boiler instead of heat pump
8-009 Disabled Disabled / Enabled
when TARIFF Mode is ON
Use DHW Heater instead of heat
8-011 Disabled Disabled / Enabled
pump when TARIFF Mode is ON

N ote
• User boiler o DHW Heater instead heat pump when Tariff Mode ON (8-009 & 8011) only has effect when tariff
7
action selected is heat pump blocked (NC or NO) (00 or 01).
• 8-009 has priority instead 8-011.
• When tariff action ON is it shown in LCD and seven segments.

205
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1.6  Electrical heater or boiler emergency mode

To use the electrical heater or boiler in the event of outdoor unit failure, apply additional setting to IU setting
• DSW4-4:ON –> Heater/Boiler Emergency enabled ON
• DSW4-4:OFF –> Heater/Boiler Emergency disabled OFF

 
Conditions for Activation
• Heating Mode is enabled
• Electric Heater or Boiler is allowed by user selection
• Water temperature (Two) < Water Temperature target (Ttwo)

 
Conditions for Disabling

When Emergency Heater or Boiler is enabled, water calculation is based on the difference between water outlet (Two) (for
Heater) or Water outlet3 (Two3) (for Boiler) and water target (Ttwo)
Conditions for disabling:
When any of Conditions a,b,c,d is fulfilled.
a. Measured outlet temp value targeted
b. Outlet water temp set at Max water range temp by installer
c. Thermo OFF by Room Thermostat
d. Indoor unit alarm

N ote
• Water pump1 (primary) will be activated with electric heater.
• Water pump3 will be activated with boiler
• If Heater emergency mode is activated, the Hot sanitary water electric heater will be activated in the same way
for emergency mode

Additional complementary disable functions:

• Step will be forced to 0 (heater and boiler OFF) in any of the following conditions. This change will occur regardless of
minimum ON time:
1 DSW4-4:OFF

N ote
When emergency operation, the signal from outdoor units has no learned, the ambient temperature is conside-
red at 10ºC (fixed) and water calculation (in case of Point or gradient) has calculated at 10ºC Outdoor temperatu-
re. It’s recommended to change to fixed water calculation when emergency mode.

206
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1.7  Step heater for 3-phase imbalance option

Only applies when power source of indoor unit is 3-phase (3N 400V 50Hz).
In order to prevent 3-phase imbalance by Heater Steps, this option will be used to switch all 3 steps at the same time.
When user allows 1-step heater mode (DSW3-3 ON), heater can only operate in one step.

3 stage ON

OFF
5 Required Load
Factor

7.1.8  Hydraulic separator combination

In some facilities, the YUTAKI S unit’s water pump is not sized for heating installation (small water pump). In this case, a
hydraulic separator or buffer tank and additional water pump (WP3) must be used to ensure proper water pump sizing.
When the boiler is configured to alternate with the heat pump, a hydraulic separator or buffer tank must be used to ensure
proper hydraulic balancing. Additional Water pump (WP3) and water sensor (Two3) are necessary for boiler combination
control.

User variables:

7
CODE Description Default Value

8-010 hsb Hydraulic Separator (Disabled, Enabled) Disabled

7.1.9  Secondary outdoor sensor accessory

Optional outside temperature sensor: an outside temperature sensor can be directly connected to the controller if the heat
pump is located in a position that is unsuitable for this measurement.
If a wired outside sensor is selected (DSW4-2 ON), use the wired outside temperature instead of the Outdoor unit outside
temperature.

N ote
For more information refer to 2nd ambient temperature sensor (ATW-2OS-01 7E549909).

207
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.1.10  Indoor external output signals

The system has four output optional signals. Signals are programmed on the indoor unit’s PCB using the CN7b. The output
connectors have four ports (CN7b) to configure four output options out of the eleven options the system has

 
Available ports

The system has the following input and output ports.

Indication Port Setting on the Indoor Unit’s PCB Remarks Output

o1 1-3 on CN7b DC 12V

o2 1-4 on CN7b DC 12V

Output

o3 1-5 on CN7b DC 12V

o4 1-6 on CN7b DC 12V

Additional HAPE accessory can be used for easy connection, for more information refer to PCB relay outputs manual

 
Configuration

Unit switches to this mode when DSW4-8 is turned ON during unit stoppage.
Available optional signals
The unit have optional signals, described in the following table:

Code Name Description Port

This signal allows control of the machine’s status at all times; it is very useful
o1 Operation signal for centralized applications. CN7b / 1-3
The signal will be enabled when Thermo ON operation
This signal allows activation of mechanisms that protect from and warn of
o2 Alarm signal possible failures in the unit. CN7b / 1-4
The signal will be enabled when the unit is in alarm (indoor or outdoor)
This signal allows control of cooling operation status. For closed valves in
o3 Cooling signal Radiators or On signal for Fan coils. CN7b / 1-5
The signal will be enabled when Cooling operation.
Thermo-OFF signal Signal is enabled when circuit 1 is operating in Demand-OFF.
o4 CN7b / 1-6
during circuit 1 The signal will be enabled when Demand OFF in circuit 1.

Component Manufacturer or specifications Remarks

OMRON mini power relay model: MY1F or
Auxiliary relay (X3) Voltage between relay terminals 12 Vdc - 75 mA
equivalent
Wire (control) Voltage 12V DC 0.5 mm²
Wire (power) Voltage 230V 2.0 mm²

208
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.2  Outdoor units

The system has the following output signals which are programmed in the PCB of the outdoor unit using connectors.
The system has the following optional functions which are programmed in the PCB of the outdoor unit.

7.2.1  Available ports

The system has the following input and output ports.

Setting of the port in the

Content Remarks Outlet
PCB of the indoor unit

1 1-2 of CN7 DC 12V

Outputs

2 1-3 of CN7 DC 12V

Connection:
The system has the following connections.

Output connections
Indication Connections

CN7

o1

7
CN7

o2

209
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

Specification of the components for a correct installation

Component Manufacturer or specifications Remarks

OMRON mini power relay model: MY1F or
Auxiliary relay (X3) Voltage between relay terminals 12 Vdc - 75 mA
equivalent
Optional part PCC-1A (capable of connecting
3P connector cable Five wires with connectors as one set
the JST XHP –3 connector)
Wire (control) Voltage 12V DC 0.5 mm²
Wire (power) Voltage 230V 2.0 mm²

N ote
• The connection of the input signal is only an example.
• Keep the CN1 and CN2 wires as short as possible.
• Do not run the wires along 230 V/400 V CA power cables Separately install them at a distance of more than
30cm. (The cables may intersect.)
• If you install the wires along a power supply wire, insert the wires in a metal conduit tube and ground one end
of the tube.
• The maximum wiring length is 70 m. If you use this function, it is recommended that you use safety devices
such as an electrical leakage breaker or a smoke detector.

210
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.2.2  Configuration

 
Available optional signals

HVRN2 and HRNME-AF units have the following signals that are described in the following table. These signals are set up
through the PCB of the outdoor unit.

• Output signals

Ind. Output signal Application Port

0 Nº setting application Nº setting -

This signal allows to pick up the machine’s operation signal. This is very useful to start up
01 Operation signal CN7
additional systems such as humidifiers, fans and other additional air-conditioning systems.
This signal picks up the machine’s alarm. This is very useful to warn that an alarm has
02 Alarm signal CN7
been tripped.
This single allows to pick up the compressor’s operation signal. It is very useful for
03 Compressor ON signal CN7
checking signals during remote-control operation and for the interlock of the outdoor unit.
This signal allows to pick up the defrosting of the unit. This is very useful to know how the
04 Defrost operation signal CN7
indoor unit is operating if there is an abnormal situation. .

N ote
Do not set same function (01~04) to multiple input port.

211
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

Programming
The optional signals are programmed through the PCB of the outdoor unit.
Setting of the optional signals
The optional signals of the outdoor unit are set up from the PCB of the outdoor unit and push switches PSW1, PSW2 and
PSW3.

Factory setting
1 1
PSW2 PSW3 Not available

Factory setting
2 2
PSW2 PSW3 Not available

Factory setting
3 3
PSW2 PSW3 Not available

Output setting 1 Factory setting

CN7, 1-2 o1 1
PSW1
SET* PSW2 PSW3

0 ~ 7
Output setting 2 Factory setting
CN7, 1-3 o2 2
PSW1
SET* PSW2 PSW3

0 ~ 7

(*) Set

212
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 7  Optional functions

7.2.3  Description of optional output signals

 
Operation signal (1)

This optional signal is used to pick up the operation signal. It can be used to turn on or off complementary units of the
air-conditioning system,such as fans, humidifiers, etc.
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in section Available ports.
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X3 is closed when an operation signal is issued.

 
Alarm signal (2)

This optional signal is used to pick up the activation of safety devices.

Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in section Available ports.
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X3 is closed when an operation signal is issued.

 
Operation signal of the compressor (3)

This optional signal is used to pick up the signal when the compressor is ON. It can be used to check how the compres-
sor is running at all times. It is very useful for locking the compressor when the fans are locked.
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in section Available ports.
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X3 is closed when an operation signal is issued.

 
Defrosting signal (4)

This optional signal is used to pick up when defrosting turns on. It is very useful to check if the indoor unit is in ther-
mo‑OFF.
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in section Available ports.
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X3 is closed when an operation signal is issued.

213
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 8 Commissioning 

8. Commissioning

Index

8.1. Preliminary check................................................................................................................................. 188

8.1.1. Checking the unit...................................................................................................................................... 188
8.1.2. Electrical checking.................................................................................................................................... 188
8.1.3. Hydraulic circuit checking......................................................................................................................... 188
8.1.4. Checking the Refrigerant circuit............................................................................................................... 189

8.2. Commissioning procedure................................................................................................................... 189

8.3. Indoor unit test run............................................................................................................................... 190

8.4. Outdoor unit test run............................................................................................................................ 191

215
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 8 Commissioning 

When installation is complete, perform commissioning according to the following procedure, and hand over the system to
the customer. Perform the commissioning of the units methodically, and check that the electrical wiring and the piping are
connected correctly.
Indoor and outdoor unit must be configured by the installer to get the prefect setting and the unit working.

8.1  Preliminary check

8.1.1  Checking the unit
• Check external appearance of the unit to look for any damage due to transportation or installation
• Does installation space carry out Hitachi installations (see Unit spaces in outdoor and indoor manual)

8.1.2  Electrical checking

D anger
Do not operate the system until all the check points have been cleared:
• Check to ensure that the electrical resistance is more than 1 MΩ, by measuring the resistance between ground
and electrical parts terminal. If not, do not operate the system until the electrical leakage is found and repaired.
Do not impress the voltage on the terminals for transmission (1 and 2, 3 and 4).
• Check to ensure that the switch on the main power source has been ON for more than 12 hours, in order to give
the oil heater time to warm the compressor.
• In three-phase unit check phase sequence connection on terminal board.
• Check the power supply voltage (±10% of the rated voltage).
• Check that field-supplied electrical components (main switches, breakers, wires, conduit connectors and wire
terminals) have been properly selected according to the electrical specifications given in the unit’s Technical
Catalogue, and check that the components comply with national and local standards.
• Do not touch any electrical components for more than three minutes after turning OFF the main switch
• Check the dip switch settings of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are connected as shown in the corres-
ponding chapter.
• Check to ensure the electrical wiring of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are connected as shown in the
chapter.
• Check to ensure the external wiring is correctly fixed. To avoid problems with vibrations, noises and cut out
wires with the plates.

8.1.3  Hydraulic circuit checking

• Check that the circuit has been properly flushed and filled with water and that the installation has been drained: the
pressure of the heating circuit must be 1.8 bar (at least 1.5 bar)
• Check for any leakage in water cycle
• Make sure the system’s internal water volume is correct (see Technical catalogue)
• Check that the hydraulic circuit’s valves are open.

D anger
Operating the system with closed valves will damage the unit.

• Make sure the water supply pressure is lower than 6 bar.

• Check to see that air purge valve is open.

N ote
During filling, the air in the circuit may not be able to be removed. Additional air purge in the installation should
be installed.
• Check to see that electrical heater is completely filled with water by operating pressure of safety valve.

216
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 8 Commissioning 

D anger
Electrical heater operation when not completely filled with water will damage the heater.

• Check to see that additional water pumps (WP2 or/and WP3) are correctly connected to terminal board.

D anger
• The minimum required water flow is 5 liters/minute (RWM-2.0(H)FSN3E), 12 liters/minute (RWM-3-6(H)FSN3E)
and 35 liters/minute (RWM 8/10(H)FSN3E). Even when water flow is lower than this (with flow switch tolerance),
alarm will be displayed on the unit.
• Remember that water connection must be accordance with local regulations.
• Water quality must comply with EU directive 98/83 EC.

8.1.4  Checking the Refrigerant circuit

• Check to ensure that the stop valves on the gas and liquid lines are fully open.
• Check that the size of the piping and the refrigerant charge comply with the applicable recommendations.
• Check the inside of the unit for refrigerant leakage. If there is a refrigerant leak, call your dealer.
• Check outdoor unit commisioning procedure manual

8.2  Commissioning procedure

This procedure is valid regardless of what options are on the module.
• When installation is complete and all necessary settings (Dip-switches in PCBs and User interface configuration) have
been carried out, close the E.BOX and place the cabinet as shown in the manual.
• Select operation mode (cooling or heating) using the User interface.
• Make a test run as shown in item Indoor unit test run.
• After rest run is completed, start the entire unit or the selected circuit by pressing the Run/Stop button.

 
Initial start-up at low outdoor ambient temperatures
• During commissioning and when water temperature is very low, it is important for the water to be heated gradually.
Additional optional function can be used for starting at low water temperature conditions:
Screed drying function: 8
-- The screed function is used exclusively for the process of drying a newly applied screed to the floor heating sys-
tem. The process is based on EN-1264 par 4.
-- When user activates screed function, the water set point follows a predetermined schedule:
ŠŠ Water set point is kept constant at 25ºC for 3 days
ŠŠ Water set-point is set to the maximum Heating supply temperature (but always limited to ≤ 55ºC) for 4 days.

D anger
Heating at lower water temperatures (approximately 10ºC to 15ºC) and lower outdoor ambient temperatures
(<10ºC) can be damaging to the heat pump when defrosting.
As a result, Heating up to 15ºC when outdoor temperature is lower than 10ºC. is performed by the Electrical Hea-
ter.

N ote
In case of Heater Forced OFF (by optional dip switch setting) these condition is not performed and heating is
performed by Heat Pump. HITACHI is not responsible for its operation.

CAUTION
It is recommended start the unit (first power ON) with heater forced OFF (DSW4-7: ON). In order to circulate water
by water pump and remove possible air into the heater (Check heater completely filled).

217
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 8 Commissioning 

8.3  Indoor unit test run

This option is not available on the menu. User may execute test
run function by pressing the OK and Down arrow keys for 3 TEST RUN
seconds. Configuration for outdoor unit test run

After that combination, the remote control will ask about the
Duration:
duration of this test.
Note that test run mode will be the same than unit mode selec- CANCEL START
ted on the global view.
Select unit mode, heating or cooling, before starting test run.

TEST RUN
The duration will be between 00:30 and 12:00 hours. Pending time: 44h 20m 19s CANCEL
Operation display parameters
System Operation
Unit Status
After pressing start, Outdoor unit will begin the test run. Actual temperatures
Set-point
During the execution of this test, the following screen will be
displayed.

When test run is set on the outdoor unit, the test run icon will
appear on the notifications bar. TEST RUN
Test Run Completed EXIT
Operation display parameters
System Operation
When test run finishes the following screen will appear. Unit Status
Actual temperatures
Set-point

Pressing the Exit key will take the user to the comprehensive
view.

218
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 8 Commissioning 

8.4  Outdoor unit test run

The test run procedure from the outdoor unit side is shown below. You can set this DIP switch while the power source is
ON.

 
Setting of dip switch (before shipment)

DSW1
1 Cooling: Pin 1 ON
2 Heating: Pin 1, 2 ON
3 Cooling intermediate season: Pin 1, 3 ON
4 Heating intermediate season: Pin 1, 2, 3 ON
5 Manual compressor OFF: Pin 1~4 ON

C aution
• Do not touch any other electrical components while you are setting the switches on the PCB.
• Do not attach or detach the service access panel when the power source for the outdoor unit is ON and the
outdoor unit is operating.
• Set all the DIP switches of DSW1 to OFF after completing the test run.

Dip switch seting Operation Remarks

1. Setting operation mode
• Make sure that the indoor units start
to operate in accord with the test run
(a) Cooling:
of the outdoor unit.
Set DSW1-1 ON • If you start the test run from the
outdoor unit and you stop the test
• The indoor unit automa- run from the remote control switch,
tically starts to operate the test run function of the remote
when the test run of the control switch is cancelled. However,
(b) Heating outdoor unit is set. the test run function of the outdoor
SET DSW1-1 and 2 ON • You can perform the ON/ unit is not cancelled.
OFF operation from the • If the more than one indoor unit is
Test run remote control switch or
the DSW1-1 of the outdoor
unit.
connected with one remote control
switch, all the units start the test run
at the same time. Therefore, turn
8
(c) Cooling intermediate • Continuous operation du- OFF the power source so that the
season: indoor units do not perform the test
ring 2 hours is performed
Set DSW1-1 and 3 ON without the Thermo-OFF run. If this is the case, the TEST
condition. RUN indication of the remote con-
trol switch may flicker. This is not
abnormal.
• The setting of DSW1 is not required
(d) Heating intermediate for the test run from the remote
season:
control switch.
Set DSW1-1, 2 and 3 ON
• When DSW1-4 is ON
during the compressor
operation, the compressor
stops operating immedia-
2. Forced stoppage of
Manual compressor: tely and the indoor unit is
• Do not turn ON and OFF the com-
OFF of under the Thermo-OFF
compressor pressor frequently
condition.
Set DSW1-1 ON
• When DSW1-4 is OFF, the
compressor starts to ope-
rate after the cancellation
of the 3-minute guard.

219
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9. Electrical checks of the main parts

Index

9.1. Inverter................................................................................................................................................. 194

9.1.1. Specifications of inverter.......................................................................................................................... 194
9.1.2. Inverter time chart..................................................................................................................................... 196
9.1.3. Protective function.................................................................................................................................... 197
9.1.4. Overload control....................................................................................................................................... 198

9.2. Thermistor............................................................................................................................................ 199

9.3. Electronic expansion valve................................................................................................................... 202

9.3.1. Electronic expansion valve for the outdoor unit........................................................................................ 202
9.3.2. Electronic expansion valve for the indoor unit.......................................................................................... 203

9.4. High pressure protection device........................................................................................................... 204

9.5. Noise filter (NF).................................................................................................................................... 205

9.5.1. Noise filter for 1~...................................................................................................................................... 205
9.5.2. Noise filter for 3N~.................................................................................................................................... 206

9.6. Capacitor (CB1, CB2).......................................................................................................................... 206

9.7. Reactor (DCL)...................................................................................................................................... 207

9.7.1. Reactor (DCL) for 1~ ............................................................................................................................... 207
9.7.2. Reactor (DCL) for 3N~ ............................................................................................................................ 207

9.8. Scroll compressor................................................................................................................................ 208

221
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.1  Inverter
9.1.1  Specifications of inverter

Aplicable model RAS-2HVRN2 RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF

RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF
(3N~ 400V+10% 50Hz)
Aplicable power source 1~ 230V+10% 50Hz
RAS-(8-10)HRNME
(3N~ 380-415V+10% 50Hz)
Input current 10.5A RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF: 15-30A RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF: 6-25A
Control method Vector control
Range output frequency 31-115Hz 20-115HZ
Accuracy of frequency 0,01 Hz at applicable frequency range
Conditions Conditions:

1 Power source voltage AC220/240V 1 Power source voltage

2 Non-loading (free output) AC380/415V
3 Ammeter type volt-meter (X1.1) 2 Non-loading (free output)
3 Ammeter type volt-meter (X1.1)

Output / characteristics

Soft start stop 0.1, 0.5, 1, 3 Hz/s (4 steps) 0.125, 0.5, 1, 2 Hz/s (4 steps) 0.125~3.00 Hz/s
Protection function
Excessive low voltage at a voltage
Excessive high or Excessive low voltage at a voltage is lower than 194V DC is lower than 350V DC
low voltage for in-
verter Excessive high voltage at a voltage is higher than 420V DC Excessive high voltage at a voltage
is higher than 750V DC
Stoppage at a current of com-
pressor smaller than 1.5A.
Stoppage at a current of compressor smaller than 1.5A.
When the frequency is 6 to
When the frequency is 15 to 18Hz after starting.
10Hz after starting.
Cause of abnormality:
Abnormality of cu- Cause of abnormality:
rrent sensor (0A de- Failure of current sensor
Failure of current sensor
tection)
Failure of IPM/DIP-IPM/ ISPM
Failure of IPM
Failure of compressor / fan motor
Failure of compressor / fan
motor Disconnected wiring
Disconnected wiring

222
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

Protection function RAS-2HVRN2 RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF

(1)
Detecting current is more than
150% of the rated current.
Rated
Rated current
Current (2)
x 150%
x 150% Rated current
Rated (4) x 150%
Rated current
Current Rated current
x 105%
x 105% x 105%

Overcurrent protection for 10µs 50ms 30s Time

Time Time
inverter

*) Internal protection IPM

1 hort-circuit trip of arm *)

S
2 Instantaneous overcurrent trip *)
3 Instantaneous overcurrent trip
4 Electronic thermal trip
Condition is maintained longer than 30 seconds or accumulated longer than 3 minutes during 10 minutes
sampling time.

IPM has four protection function for self-protection..

Protection of transistor
1 S ome of the output terminals between "U" and "V", "V" and "W", "W" and "U" has a short-circuit.
module 2 Running current reaches the maximum rated current.
3 Abnormal temperature is measured by internal thermistor.
4 Control voltage decreases abnormally.
Overload control as a current greater than (rated current X105%).
Overload control
Overload control release at a current smaller than (rated current X 88%).
Fin temperature increase The unit is stopped when the fin temperature is higher than 80ºC (1~) 100°C (3N~).

Earth detection The unit is stopped when the compressor is earthing.

223
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.1.2  Inverter time chart

Main circuit power

source Frequency

LOW
Frequency
All bit 1 All bit 1 operation
HIGH

Frequency instruction

Output voltage

Soft start-stop
(frequency)

The changing speed

dependes on the
outer setting

Failure signal

Output

Activation of protection
device

Transmit error Protection

30 sec. activation
10 sec.

Overload signal

Activation
recovery

Charged indication

224
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.1.3  Protective function

1 Excessive high or low voltage for inverter

a. Level of detection
ŠŠ When the voltage of direct current is greater than (A) V, abnormalities are detected.
ŠŠ When the voltage of direct current is smaller than (B) V, abnormalities are detected.

Power supply 400V, 50Hz / 380-415V, 50Hz 230V, 50Hz

(A) 750 440
(B) 350 194

b. Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and transmit the signal code of stoppage
cause to PCB1.
c. Cancellation of protection function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is cancelled when a stopping order is given or main power sour-
ce is cut off.

2 Abnormality of current sensor

a. Level of detection
When current of the inverter compressor decreases lower than 0.5A during the inverter compressor frequency
between 15Hz and 18Hz, an abnormality is detected.
b. Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped, and transmit the signal code of stoppage
cause to PCB1.
c. Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is cancelled when a stopping order is issued or main power
source is cut off.

3 Overcurrent protection for inverter

a. Level of detection
When the current detected by current sensor reaches 150% of the rated current, overcurrent is detected. (Instan-
taneous overcurrent)

9
When the current detected by current sensor exceeds 105% of the rated current continuously for 30 seconds or
for 3.5 minutes in total during a 10 minutes period, overcurrent is detected. (Electric thermal relay)
b. Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and transmit the signal code of stoppage
cause to PCB1.
c. Cancellation of protection function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled by stopping order is issued or main power source is
cut off.

225
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

4 Protection of IPM/DIP-IPM/ISPM
a. Level of detection
When some of the output terminals between “U” and “V”, “V” and “W”, “W” and “U” of IPM/dip IPM/ISPM are short-
circuited, an abnormality is detected.
When the running current of IPM/DIP-IPM/ISPM reaches (maximum rated current x 105%), an abnormality is de-
tected.
When an internal temperature is measured by internal thermistor of IPM, an abnormality is detected.
When the control voltage of IPM/DIP-IPM/ISPM decreases, an abnormality is detected.
b. Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and the signal code of stoppage cause is
transmitted to PCB1.
c. Cancellation of protection function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled when a stopping order is issued or main power sour-
ce is cut off.

5 Fin temperature increase

a. Level of detection
When the temperature of internal thermistor exceeds more than 100 ºC, an abnormality is detected.
b. Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and the signal code of stoppage cause is
transmitted to PCB1.
c. Cancellation of protection function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled when a stopping order is issued or main power sour-
ce is cut off.

6 Earth detection
a. Level of detection
When the starting current of the compressor reaches 80% of the overcurrent protection value, an abnormality is
detected.
b. Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter compressor is stopped and the signal code of stoppage cause is
transmitted to PCB1.
c. Cancellation of protection function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is canceled when a stopping order is issued or main power sour-
ce is cut off.

9.1.4  Overload control

a. Level of detection
When the output current exceeds 105% of the maximum output current, an abnormality is detected.
b. Function
An overload signal is issued when output current exceeds 105% of the maximum output current, and the frequen-
cy decreases.
For 10 seconds after the output current decreases lower than 88% of the rated current, the operation is performed
with the compressor frequency limited to the upper level frequency when the output current decreases lower than
88% of the rated one.
However, if the frequency order is smaller than the maximum value, the operation is performed according to the
order.
c. Cancellation of protection function
After the operation described in the above item b. is performed for 10 seconds, this control is canceled.

226
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.2  Thermistor
Thermistors for the outdoor unit

Thermistor for
outdoor ambient
temperature
(THM7)

Thermistor for dis-

charge gas tempe-
rature (THM9)

Thermistor for
evaporating tempe-
rature (THM8)

Thermistors for the indoor unit

Thermistor for water outlet

PHEX temperature (THMWOHP)

Thermistor for refrigerant gas

temperature (THMG)
9
Thermistor for water outlet
temperature (THMWO)

Thermistor for water inlet

temperature (THMWI)

Thermistor for refrigerant

liquid temperature (THML)

227
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

 
Thermistor for upper part temperature of compressor

(For prevention of discharge gas overheating)

a. A thermistor for the upper part temperature of the compressor is installed to prevent discharge gas from overhea-
ting.
If discharge gas temperature increases excessively lubricating oil deterioration occurs and lubricating properties
deteriorate, resulting in short compressor life.
b. If discharge gas temperature increases excessively, compressor temperature increases. At the worst, compressor
motor winding will be burnt out.
c. When the upper part temperature of compressor increases during heating operation, the unit is controlled accor-
ding to the following method
ŠŠ An electronic expansion valve of outdoor units is (are) opened to return the liquid refrigerant to the compressor
through the accumulator, decreasing compressor temperature.
ŠŠ If the compressor upper part temperature increases exceeding 132ºC even if an electronic expansion valve
opens, the compressor is stopped, in order to protect the compressor.
ŠŠ In cooling operation, the above function is also available.

200

200
Resistance value of thermistor (kΩ)

R25 = 200kΩ

B = 3920k

100
72.3

14.2 5.3
0
25 30 100 132 150

Temperature (ºC)

Resistance characteristics of thermistor for

discharge gas overheating protection

d. If compressor upper part temperature increases excessively, the protection control is activated and the compres-
sor is stopped according to the following method.

Operation Upper part temperature of compressor Defecting period

Over 132ºC 10 minutes (continuously)
Cooling
Over 140ºC 5 seconds (continuously)
Over 132ºC 10 minutes (continuously)
Heating
Over 140ºC 5 seconds (continuously)
Defrosting Over 132ºC 5 seconds (continuously)

228
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

 
Thermistor for outdoor ambient temperature

The thermistor resistance characteristics are shown in the next figure.

Thermistor characteristics

90
80
70
Thermistor resis- 60
tance (KΩ)
50
40
30
20
10
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Ambient temperature (ºC)

 
Thermistor for evaporating temperature of outdoor unit in heating operation (for defrosting)

Thermistor characteristics

90
80
70
Thermistor resis- 60
tance (KΩ)
50
40
30
20
10
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Ambient temperature (ºC)

9

229
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.3  Electronic expansion valve

9.3.1  Electronic expansion valve for the outdoor unit

Micro-computer

Pulse signal Pulse motor

2-Phase permanent magnetic pulse motor

Control 0 to 500 pulse by 1 pulse

Refrigerant flow control

Needle
Precise control

Items Specifications
Applicable to the models For the main cycle of: RAS-(4-10)H(V)RNM(E)
Type UKV(10.0 USRT) series/UKV (5.0USRT) series for MVB
Refrigerant R410A
Working temperature range -30°C ~ 65°C (operation time of the coil: less than 50%)
Mounting direction Drive shaft in vertical direction within an angle of 45° as maximum
Flow direction Reversible
Drive method 4-Phase canned motor method
Rated voltage DC12V±1.8V
83PPS (pulse width at ON: 36mm sec, OFF: 60mm sec)
Drive condition
1,2 phase excitation
Coil resistance (each phase) 46Ω ± 10% (at 20°C)

ON
OFF

Wiring
Wiring diagram, drive circuit and acti- diagram
vation mode Drive
circuit Close
Valve
Open
Activation

230
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.3.2  Electronic expansion valve for the indoor unit

Micro-computer
Pulse
Pulsemotor
Motor
Pulse signal

2-Phase permanent magnetic pulse motor Gear

Gear

Control 0 to 2000 pulse by 1 pulse

Output
Outputshaft
Shaft

Lock
LocknutNut
Bellows
Bellows
Refrigerant flow control
Valve
Valve
Precise control
Valve
Valvesheet
Valve
Valvebody
Body Sheet

Items Specifications
Type EDM type
Refrigerant R410A
Working temperature range -30°C ~ 70°C (with coils which are not electrified)
Mounting direction Drive shaft in vertical direction, motor upside and 90° in four direction
Flow direction Reversible
Drive method 4-phase pulse motor
Voltage rate DC12V±1.2V
100Ω ± 250PPS (pulse width over 3mm)
Drive condition
2 phase excitation
Coil resistance (each phase) 150Ω ± 10% (at 20°C)

Procedure
9
Phase

Valve Wiring
Wiring diagram, drive circuit and activation diagram
activation
mode

Close
Drive
Open
circuit
Activation mode

231
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.4  High pressure protection device

If the discharge pressure is excessively high, the compressor and the component parts of the refrigeration cycle can be
damaged. Therefore, in case that the discharge pressure is higher than 4.15MPa (R410A), the protection control is acti-
vated and the compressor is stopped.

Upper cover

Electrical box

Brazing Presure switch for

control (PSC)

Rear cover

Discharge pipe

Brazing
High pressure
switch (PSH)

1 F or controlling the high pressure not to increase excessively during heating operation, the gas by-pass circuit and the
air volume of the outdoor fan is controlled automatically.
2 The gas by-pass circuit, which is composed of the solenoid valve and the capillary tube for flow adjustment, control the
high pressure not to increase excessively by leading the high pressure gas to the low pressure side.

Gas by-pass circuit

Solenoid
Capilary tube
valve

232
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.5  Noise filter (NF)

The noise filter decreases the leakage of noise made by the inverter to the power supply side. Terminals indicated with
“LOAD” are connected to the inverter side and terminals indicated with “LINE” to the power supply side.

9.5.1  Noise filter for 1~

RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF (230V 50Hz)

Items Specifications
Model LFB-14930-3M
Rated current AC230V 30 A
Permissible temperature range. -25 ºC to 85 ºC

Load
Line

Circuit diagram

233
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.5.2  Noise filter for 3N~

RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF (400V 50Hz)

Items Specifications
Model 4LFB-16830-2FA
Rated current AC415V 27A
Permissible temperature range -25ºC to 85ºC

Load
Line
Circuit diagram HRNM(E)

9.6  Capacitor (CB1, CB2)

This part is used for changing the alternative current to the direct current for the inverter. Connect two capacitor in line and
used.

RAS-(4~6)HRNME-AF (400V/50Hz)

Items Specifications
Models LNX2G472MSEAHE
Capacity of static electricity 4700μF
Rated voltage 400 VDC
Permissible temperature range -25ºC to 95ºC

234
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.7  Reactor (DCL)

This part is used for changing the alternative current to the direct current for the inverter.

9.7.1  Reactor (DCL) for 1~

RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF (230V 50Hz)

Items Specifications
Character 0.59 mH±15 (at 1 kHz)
Rated current 30 A
DC Resistance 26 mΩ (at 20 °C)
Permissible temperature range -20ºC to 60ºC

9.7.2  Reactor (DCL) for 3N~

RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF (400V 50Hz)

Items Specifications
Character 1.0 mH+10 (at 1 kHz)
Rated current 30 A
Direct resistance 22.8 mΩ+20 (at 20 °C)
Permissible temperature range -20 ºC to 60 ºC

235
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 9 Electrical checks of
the main parts 

9.8  Scroll compressor

 
Reliable mechanism for low vibrating and low sound

1. The rotating direction is definite.

2. The pressure inside of the chamber is high pressure, and the surface temperature of the chamber is 60 °C to 110 °C.

 
Principle of compression

1. The gas is inhaled from the inlet port at the outer frame
of the fixed scroll.

2. The gas inside of the compression space is compres-

sed toward the center of the scroll.

3. The compression space is minimum at the center of the

scroll, and the gas compressed at the maximum is dischar-
ged from the outlet port of at the center of the scroll.

4. The above procedures (suction compression dischar-

ge) is repeated continuously.

Gas
Rotating scroll

Compression
space

Fixed scroll Suction procedure

Discharge process
Compression process

236
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

10. Spare parts

Index

10.1. Outdoor units........................................................................................................................................ 210

10.1.1. RAS-2HVRN2........................................................................................................................................... 210
10.1.2. RAS-3HVRNME-AF.................................................................................................................................. 212
10.1.3. RAS-(4-6)HVRNME-AF............................................................................................................................ 215
10.1.4. RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF.............................................................................................................................. 218
10.1.5. RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF............................................................................................................................. 221

10.2. Indoor units.......................................................................................................................................... 224

10

237
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

10.1  Outdoor units

10.1.1  RAS-2HVRN2

 
Cycle, structural and electrical parts

U38

U48

U34B
U40

U82
U15C
U15A
U71

U32B
U70
U21B
U21A
U79
U89
U01A
U78
U51 U81

U01B U15B
U28 U32A

U34A
U27B

U27A

Spare Parts Document: EPN-200702

238
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

No. Part name Remarks

U01A Pressure SW High pressure
U01B Pressure SW For control
U15A Thermistor TA (Ambient)
U15B Thermistor TE (Evaporation)
U15C Thermistor TD (Discharge)
U21A Expansion valve —
U21B Coil for expansion valve —
U27A Stop valve Gas line
U27B Stop valve Liquid line
U28 Check joint —
U32A Vibration absorber —
U32B Vibration absorber —
U34A Air grille Outlet
U34B Air grille Inlet
U38 Piping set —
U40 Condenser assembly —
U48 Electrical box assembly —
U51 Propeller fan —
U70 Compressor —
U71 Motor —
U78 Oil heater —
U79 Four-way valve assembly —
U81 Coil for 4-way valve —
U82 Transformer —
U89 Accumulator —

10

239
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

10.1.2  RAS-3HVRNME-AF

 
Cycle and structural parts

Spare Parts Document: EPN-201005

240
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

 
Electrical parts

10

Spare Parts Document: EPN-201005

241
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

Cycle and structural parts Electrical parts

No. Part name Remarks No. Part name Remarks

U00A Terminal board U71A Fan motor 74W
U00B THM support D U72 MG SW
U01A Pressure SW Protection U78 Oil heater 30W
U01B Pressure SW Control U79 4 way valve
U04 Fuse 40A U81 Coil for 4 way valve
U15A Thermistor Air U82A Transformer
U15B Thermistor Piping U98A Service cover S assy Assembly
U15C Thermistor Compressor U98B Rear cover S assy Assembly
U16 Noise filter 30A U98C Upper cover assy Assembly
U17 Inverter fin assy DIP-IPM (17A) U98D Shroud S
U21A Expansion valve U98E S cover B
U21B EXPV coil U98F Pipe cover B
U27A S valve 3/8 Liquid
U27B S valve 5/8 Gas
U28 Check JA
U30A Strainer
U30B Strainer
U30C Silencer
U32A VP-RUBBER 2
U32B VP-RUBBER 1
U34A Front protector net Outlet
U34B Protector net S assy Inlet
U40 Condenser Assembly
U51 Propeller fan
U58 Accumulator
U65A Holder
U65B Spacer

242
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

10.1.3  RAS-(4-6)HVRNME-AF

 
Cycle and structural parts

10

Spare Parts Document: EPN-201005

243
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

 
Electrical parts

Spare Parts Document: EPN-201005

244
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

Cycle and structural parts Electrical parts

No. Part name Remarks No. Part name Remarks

U00A Terminal board U70 Compressor
U01A Pressure SW Protection U71A Fan motor 74W
U01B Pressure Sw Control U71B Fan motor 74W
U04 Fuse 40A, 5/6 HP 50A U72 MG SW
U15A Thermistor Air U77A Solenoid valve
U15B Thermistor Piping U77B Coil for solenoide valve
U15C Thermistor Compressor U78 Oil heater 40W
U16 Noise filter 30A U79 4 way valve
U17 Inverter fin assy DIP-IPM (17A) 576 (25A) U81 Coil for 4 way valve
U21A Expansion valve U82A Transformer
U21B EXPV Coil U85A Printed circuit board PCB main (PO052 assy)
U27A S valve 3/8 Liquid U98A Service cover L assy Assembly
U27B S valve 5/8 Gas U98B Rear cover S assy Assembly
U28 Check JA U98C Upper cover assy Assembly
U30A Strainer U98D Shroud L
U30B Strainer U98E S cover B
U32A VP-RUBBER 2 U98F Pipe cover B
U32B VP-RUBBER 1
U34A Front protector net Outlet
U34B Protector net L assy Inlet
U40 Condenser Assembly
U40 Condenser Assembly
U51 Propeller fan
U58 L-Tank
U65A Holder
U65B Spacer

10

245
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

10.1.4  RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF

 
Cycle and structural parts

Spare Parts Document: EPN-201005

246
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

 
Electrical parts

10

Spare Parts Document: EPN-201005

247
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

Cycle and structural parts Electrical parts

No. Part name Remarks No. Part name Remarks

U00A Terminal board U70 Compressor

U01A Pressure SW Protection U71A Fan motor 74W

U01B Pressure Sw Control U71B Fan motor 74W

U04 Fuse 20A U72 MG SW

U14 Capacitor 2700µf U74A Resistor

U15A Thermistor Air U74B Resistor

U15C Thermistor Compressor U77A Solenoid valve

U16 Noise filter 30A U77B Coil for solenoide valve

U17 Inverter module ISPM U78 Oil heater 40W

U21A Expansion valve U79 4 way valve

U21B EXPV coil U81 Coil for 4 way valve

U27A S valve 3/8 Liquid U82A Transformer

U27B S valve 5/8 Gas U82B Reactor

U28 Check JA U85A Printed circuit board PCB main (PO052 assy)

U30A Strainer PCB2 for motor 1(PO024

U85B Printed circuit board
assy)
U30B Strainer
PCB2 for motor 2 (PO024
U32A VP-RUBBER 2 U85C Printed circuit board
assy)
U32B VP-RUBBER 1 U85D RPP relay Reversing phase protection
U34A Front protector net Outlet U98A Service cover L assy Assembly
U34B Protector net L assy Inlet U98C Upper cover assy Assembly
U40 Condenser Assembly U98D Shroud L
U51 Propeller fan U98E S cover B
U58 L-Tank U98F Pipe cover B
U65A Holder
U65B Spacer

248
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

LOCATION OF SPARE PARTS IN THE UNIT

MODEL: RAS-8HRNM
10.1.5  RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF
LOCATION OF SPARE PARTS IN THE UNIT RAS-10HRNM
MODEL: RAS-8HRNM
RAS-12HRNM
 
Cycle and structural parts
RAS-10HRNM
RAS-12HRNM

U77B U77E
U77B U77E
U81
U42 U30D
U81 U79
U42 U30D
U01B U79
U01B U55
U40A U01A
U01A U55
U40A
U01C
U01C
U77B U77A U30C
U77B U77A U30C U30B
U30B

U28 U28

U27A U27A
U27B U77C
U27B U77C
U21A U21A
U21B U21B
U77D U77D
U30A U30A

U15A
U15A
U51
U51

U71B
U15B
U71B
U15B

U40B

U40B
U71A U15C
U34
U58
U51 U71A U70 U15C
U34
U58
U51 U70
U32B

U32A
U78
U32B

U32A
U78
10
U98A

U98A

U34
U98B

Spare Parts Document: SPN-200617

U34

D-RAS-8HRNM-H/I/P, D-RAS-10HRNM-H/I/P, D-RAS-12HRNM-H/I/P U98B

- 10 -

D-RAS-8HRNM-H/I/P, D-RAS-10HRNM-H/I/P, D-RAS-12HRNM-H/I/P

249
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012 - 10 -
 U14A
ELECTRICAL EQ
10  Spare parts

 
Electrical parts
<3φ 380-415V/50Hz,
U65D
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
MODEL: MODEL: RAS-8HRNM
RAS-8HRNM U17
RAS-10HRNM
RAS-10HRNM
RAS-12HRNM
RAS-12HRNM
U85A
<3φ 380-415V/50Hz, 3 φ 380V/60Hz>
<3φ 380-415V/50Hz, 3 φ 380V/60Hz> U15D

U74A U74A

View from Q

View from P
View from P U65C
U14A
U14A
U
Q
U74B U82A U65A
U74B U82A
P
P U65B
U18 U65B
U18 U85C U85E
U14A
U14A U16B
U85D

U72
U72 U04

U65D U82B
MODEL: RAS-8HRNM U65D
U74C U85B
U14B U74C
RAS-10HRNM
U17 U16A
RAS-12HRNM U17

U85A
U15D
U85A
U15D
D-RAS-8HRNM-H/I, D-RAS-10HRNM-H/I, D-RAS-12HRNM

- 11 -

View from Q
View from P U65C
View from Q
U14A
U65C
U65A
Q Q
U65A
U82A U65A
Q
U65A
U65B
U65B
U65B
U18 U85C U85E
U65B
U16B
U14A U85D U85C U85E
U16B
U85D
U04
U72

U04
U82B
U85B
U14B
U65D U74C U82B
U16A
U85B
U14B U65C

U16A
U65C

D-RAS-8HRNM-H/I,
Spare Parts Document: SPN-200617 D-RAS-10HRNM-H/I, D-RAS-12HRNM-H/I
U85A
- 11 -
D-RAS-8HRNM-H/I, D-RAS-10HRNM-H/I, D-RAS-12HRNM-H/I

- 11 -

View from Q 250

SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
5C
 10  Spare parts

Cycle and structural parts

No. Part name Remarks No. Part name Remarks

U01A Pressure Sw High pressure U65B Plastic material
U01B Pressure Sw For control U65C Plastic material
U01C Pressure Sw Low pressure U65D Plastic material
U04 Fuse 40A - 60A U70 Compressor
U14A Capacitor 4700µF U71A Motor
U14B Capacitor 7µF U71B Motor
U15A Thermistor U72 Mag. contactor
U15B Thermistor U74A Resistor
U15C Thermistor U74B Resistor
U15D Thermistor U74C Resistor
U16A Noise filter U77A Solenoid valve
U16B Noise filter U77B Solenoid valve
U17 Transistor module U77C Solenoid valve
U18 Diode module U77D Solenoid valve
U21A Exp. valve coil for U77E Solenoid valve
U21B Exp. valve U78 Oil heater
U27A Stop valve U79 Four-way valve ass’y
U27B Stop valve U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U28 Check joint U82A Reactor
U30A Strainer U82B Transformer
U30B Strainer U85A Printed circuit board
U30C Strainer U85A Printed circuit board For inverter P
U30D Strainer U85B Printed circuit board Fan control
U32A Vibration absorber U85C Printed circuit board For control
U32B Vibration absorber U85D Printed circuit board Fan control
U34 Air grille Air outlet U85E Printed circuit board Phase detection
U40A Condenser assembly U98A Cabinet panel
U40B Condenser assembly U98B Cabinet panel
U42 Check valve
U51 Propeller fan
U55 Oil separator ass’y
U58 L-tank ass’y
U65A Plastic material

10

251
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

10.2  Indoor units

 
Cycle and structural parts

RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E

11 (2x) 31 12 (1x)

32 3 2 35 34 1 25 4

20

28

11

PUMP AND HEATER

CONNECTIONS
27

19

(2x) 11 5

30 21

31 24

29 22

26

31 23

10
7-1
7-5 7-2 33
7-3 8
7-4
7-7
7-6
7-8 7
7-10

7-9

12

EXP VESSEL
CONNECTION

15 16

18

17

14
13-2
13
SIDE VIEW 13-1

Spare Part Document: EPN-201010

252
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

RWM-(8/10)(H)FSN3E

11 (2x) 31 12 (1x)

35 1 25 4
32 3 2

34

20

28

11

PUMP AND HEATER

CONNECTIONS
27

19

(2x) 11 5

30 21

31 24

29 22

26

31 23 10
33
8
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-7
7-10 7

7-9

12

EXP VESSEL
CONNECTION 15 16
10
18

17
14
13-2
13

SIDE VIEW 13-1

Spare Part Document: EPN-201010

253
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

 
Electrical parts

RWM-(2.0-6.0)(H)FSN3E

18 19

PCB1
PCN8 PCN7 PCN6

YA YE2 Y20A Y20B YE1 3

TR1
Y52CS Y52C

R14

R13

PCN5
PC4
R12

PC3
R11

YPR

PCN4
PC7
R15
RS2
PC6 PC5

PC8
C17 R16

PCN10
C15

PC9
PCN11
C18
IC6 R17
C14
1 R10

PC1
Y20L
RS1 C13 R9
YRS

TR2

PC2
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 C12

DSA

PCN1
EF2

EF1
C16
R113 SEG1 SEG2 LED6 RSW1 RSW2

CN13
R88 6 5 4 6 5 4
R87

3 2

3 2
8 7

8 7
C11
R110 R86 1 0 9 1 0 9
LED5
R85

CN12
R84 6 5 4 6 5 4
C10

SSW
R83

3 2

3 2
8 7

8 7
R82 1 0 9 1 0 9
R81 RSW3 RSW4 Z1 Z4
SEG3 SEG4 SEG5

PCN2
R107
CN11

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PSW2 PSW1
C9 DSW2 DSW3 DSW4
Z2 Z3

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DSW1 DSW5

PCN3B

PCN3A
C8 IC3 IC5

REG4

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CN6

35
LED8

T SWP
REG3
IC4 C19

34
CN10A
C4
REG2 C1 REG1

33
CN5

C20 DM4 DM1

T AMB2
PC10 ZD9 DM5

32
IC2

CN10B
R137
CN4

OSC

REG7
C21
R135
DM8 DM6
DSW6

31

T WO2
LED7 1 2 C5
C2 C6
CN3

Z5 C7

30
DM7
IC7
CN14 CN15

29
R2
R3

T WO3
CN9 CN7 CN8 CN1 CN2 REG6 REG8 REG9

28

T DHWT
14

27

out
26

Solar
25
10

EH DHWT
24
23
NK8 NK6

22
2

Boiler
NK7 NK5
CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4

21
(N)
PCB2
PC4

20
C30

WPIII
R4
CN8
CN16

M
17

(L)
C29 PC3

19
R3

4
CN7
CN15

IC3

(L)
C28 PC2
R2

18
CN6

WPII
2 1

M
(N)
C27 PC1
CN14

R1

17
CN5

IC2 IC4 4 3

(O)

Vmix
M
CN13

6 5
16
PCN1
Y1

14 13 (C)
15
CN12

IC1 IC5

Earth
A2 A1
PCN2
Y2

14
14
(L)
CN11

52P
Y3

13

DHWT SWP
PCN3

M
(N)
PCN7

PCN5

PCN6
CN10

12

M
(L)
PCN4
Y4

NK 9 NK4
CN9

11

in
Solar

NK3
10

PCN9 PCN8

14
€ TARIFF
9

SWP IN
8

8
7

NK 10 NK 1 NK 2
THMT
6

B
6

ON/OFF
5

A
5
4

THMT
4

INTEL
3

AR3 AR2 AR1

2

OUTDOOR
2

UNIT
1

TB2
9
MP

EF1
N

15
L3
T

EF2
6
L2
S

EF3
L1
R

11
EF4 TB1

7 5 8 16

E-Box plate

2 1

13

Spare Part Document: EPN-201010

254
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

RWM-(8/10)(H)FSN3E

18 19

PCB1
PCN8 PCN7 PCN6

YA YE2 Y20A Y20B YE1

3
TR1
Y52CS Y52C

R14

R13

PCN5
PC4
R12

PC3
R11

YPR

PCN4
PC7
R15
RS2
PC6 PC5

PC8
C17 R16

PCN10
C15

PC9
PCN11
C18
IC6 R17
C14
1 R10

PC1
Y20L
RS1 C13 R9
YRS

TR2

PC2
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 C12

DSA

PCN1
EF2

EF1
C16
R113 SEG1 SEG2 LED6 RSW1 RSW2

CN13
R88 6 5 4 6 5 4
R87

3 2

3 2
8 7

8 7
C11
R110 R86 1 0 9 1 0 9
LED5
R85
CN12

R84 6 5 4 6 5 4
C10

SSW
R83

3 2

3 2
8 7

8 7
R82 1 0 9 1 0 9
R81 RSW3 RSW4 Z1 Z4
SEG3 SEG4 SEG5

PCN2
R107
CN11

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PSW2 PSW1
C9 DSW2 DSW3 DSW4
Z2 Z3

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DSW1 DSW5

PCN3B

PCN3A
C8 IC3 IC5

REG4

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CN6

35
LED8

T SWP
REG3
IC4 C19

34
CN10A
C4
REG2 C1 REG1

33
CN5

C20 DM4 DM1

T AMB2
PC10 ZD9 DM5

32
IC2

CN10B
R137
CN4

OSC

REG7
C21
R135

DM8 DM6
DSW6

31

T WO2
LED7 1 2 C5
C2 C6
CN3

Z5 C7

30
DM7
IC7
CN14 CN15

29
R2
R3

T WO3
20 CN9 CN7 CN8 CN1 CN2 REG6 REG8 REG9
14

28

T DHWT
27

out
26

Solar
CN401

25
CN402
10
PCB3

EH DHWT
24
CN403

23
NK8 NK6

22
2

Boiler
NK7 NK5
CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4

21
(N)
PCB2
PC4

20
C30

WPIII
R4
CN8
CN16

M
4 17

(L)
C29 PC3

19
R3
CN7
CN15

IC3

(L)
C28 PC2
R2

18
CN6

WPII
2 1

M
(N)
C27 PC1
CN14

R1
17
CN5

IC2 IC4 4 3 (O)

Vmix
M
CN13

6 5
16
PCN1
Y1

(C)

14 13
15
CN12

IC1 IC5
Earth
A2 A1
14
PCN2
Y2

14
(L)
CN11

52P
Y3

13

DHWT SWP
PCN3

M
(N)
PCN7

PCN5

PCN6
CN10

12

M
(L)
PCN4
Y4

NK 9 NK4
CN9

11

in
Solar

NK3
10

PCN9 PCN8

14
€ TARIFF
9

SWP IN
8

8
7

NK 10 NK 1 NK 2
THMT
6

B
6

ON/OFF
5

A
5
4

THMT
4

INTEL
3

AR3 AR2 AR1

2

OUTDOOR
2

UNIT
1

TB2
9
15
MP

EF1
N
L3
T

6 EF2
L2
S

EF3
L1
R

11
EF4 TB1

10
7 5 8 16

E-Box plate

20 2 1

13

Spare Part Document: EPN-201010

255
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 10  Spare parts

Cycle and structural parts

No. Description Remarks No. Description Remarks

1 Electric Heater Assy Gaskets 11 not included 14 Screw For cover assy fixing
2 Air Purge For cover assy fixing
15 Nylon washer
(material: nylon)
3 Security Valve
For cover assy fixing
RWM-(2.0-6.0)FSN3E: 6L 16 Washer
(material: steel)
4 Expansion Vessel RWM-(8.0/10.0): 10L
Gasket 12 not included Shutdown valve
17
(1-1/4")
Gaskets 11 and pump insulation
5 Pump 18 Clamp For installer wiring
19 not included
6 Flow Switch 19 Pump insulation Only insulation around the pump
7 PHEX Unit Assembly (from 7-1 to 7-10) For security valve drain connec-
20 Union
tion
7-1 Plate HEX
21 Thermistor Assy THM G (Gas)
7-2 Expansion Valve
22 Thermistor Assy THM L (Liquid)
7-3 Strainer
23 Thermistor Assy THM WI (Water In)
7-4 Water Strainer
24 Thermistor Assy THM WO (Water Out)
7-5 Union Liquid connection
25 Thermistor Assy THM WOHP (Water Out PHEX)
7-6 Union Gas connection
26 Pump Pipe Assy 1
7-7 Flare Nut Liquid connection
27 Pump Pipe Assy 2
7-8 Flare Nut Gas connection
Vinyl tube (diameter 16mm - 1
7-9 Union Vessel connection 28 Drain pipe
meter length)
7-10 Union Water connection
29 P-Spring For liquid THM fixing
8 Manometer
30 P-Spring For gas THM fixing
9 Pressure Switch
31 P-Spring For water THM fixing
10 LCD Control
32 Wall Support
For electric heater and pump
11 Gasket 33 Control Support
connections
Thermal cut-off thermostat for
12 Gasket For expansion vessel connection 34 Thermostat
Electric heater
Assembly (screws and washers
13 Cover Assy. 35 Thermostat cap Protector cap for thermostat 34
not included)
Assembly
13-1 LCD Cover
(LCD Cover + Shaft + Washers)
13-2 Magnet

Electrical parts

No. Part Name Remarks No. Part Name Remarks

1 PCB1 11 Terminal board 2
2 PCB2 12 Terminal board 1
3 Transformer 13 Spacer
4 Magnetic contactor 16 A 14 Spark killer Before serial number 4HE87914
5 Fuse 3,15 A 15 Clamp
RWM-(2.0/3.0)FSN3E: 6A 16 Rubber bush
6 Fuse RWM-(4.0-6.0)FSN3E: 12A
Electrical wiring Assembly
RWM-(8.0/10.0): 16A 17
diagram (Components + Harness)
7 Fuse holder
18 E-Box cover Assy (Plate + Labels)
8 Fuse holder
Only plate (without components)
9 Magnetic contactor 12 A 19 E-Box subAssy
before serial number 4HE87914
10 Terminal board Before serial number 4HE87914 19 E-Box subAssy Only plate (without components)

256
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11 . Servicing

Index

11.1. Outdoor unit......................................................................................................................................... 230

11.1.1. RAS-2HVRN2........................................................................................................................................... 230
11.1.2. RAS-3HVRNME-AF.................................................................................................................................. 237
11.1.3. RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF.......................................................................................................................... 248
11.1.4. RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF............................................................................................................................. 264

11.2. Indoor unit............................................................................................................................................ 280

11.2.1. Removing service cover........................................................................................................................... 280
11.2.2. Replacing electrical components.............................................................................................................. 281
11.2.3. Replacing hydraulic components.............................................................................................................. 286
11.2.4. Replacing refrigerant parts....................................................................................................................... 294

11

257
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.1  Outdoor unit

11.1.1  RAS-2HVRN2

 
Removing pipe cover

Follow the procedure below to remove main parts and com-

ponents. For mounting follow the reverse procedure of re-
moval.
Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the atmosphere for a
long period to avoid moisture or dust entering into the cycle.
Be sure to replace parts immediately after removing. Seal
the refrigerant cycle when left unattached for a long period.
Remove pipe cover downward after removing one (1) screw.

No. Part
1 Pipe cover 1

 
Removing front cover

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see

1
on page 258.
Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper co-
ver.

No. Part
1 Upper cover

To remove the front cover remove eight (8) fixing screws

and three (3) left nails.

No. Part
1
1 Pipe cover
2 Nails

258
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing outdoor fan

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see

on page 258.
Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper co-
ver.
Remove the front cover following Removing front cover, see
on page 258.
To remove the propeller fan remove the cap nut which fixes
the propeller fan onto the motor shaft.

No. Part
1 Cap nut
2 Propeller fan

NOTE
• Use a puller when the propeller fan and motor shaft
are fixed too tightly.
• The cap nut is left thread. For removal turn to the
reverse direction to the propeller fan.
Remove the electrical box cover.

No. Part
1 Electrical box cover

Remove the fan motor connector (CN24) inserted into the

PCB in the electrical box.
Remove the fan motor lead wire fixed onto the motor clamp
using a cord band.
Remove four (4) screws which fixes the motor.

No. Part
1 Cord band
2 Fan motor lead wire
3 Four (4) screws
4 Fan motor

NOTE
• To mount the motor be sure to place the lead wire outlet downward.
11
• Fix the motor lead wire onto the motor clamp using a cord band as before to avoid obstructing the propeller
fan.
• Mounting the propeller fan:
• Insert the skidding protection part of the fan boss matching with the motor shaft notch; tighten the nut after
the shaft screw fully comes out. (Tightening Torque 3.0 Nm).
• Connect the motor lead wire to the electrical box PCB. (To connect insert into the connector (CN24) on the
PCB).

259
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing the compressor

NOTE
• Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the atmosphere for a long period to avoid moisture or dust into the cycle.
Be sure to replace the compressor immediately after removing. Seal to the suction and discharge pipes when
the refrigerant cycle is left unattached for a prolonged time.
• Remove the cap of new compressor right before the replacement. Before mounting the compressor seal the
suction and discharge pipes with a tape to protect the compressor from dust. Remove the tape at pipe con-
nection.
• To connect wiring at reassembling ensure that the compressor terminal numbers and wiring mark band codes
are matched. Incorrect wiring numbers may result in inverse rotation and damage the compressor.
Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see
on page 395.
When the outdoor unit is installed close to a wall move the 1
unit from the wall removing the refrigerant piping.
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint.
Remove the front cover following Removing front cover, see
on page 395.
Remove seven (7) fixing screws and remove the side cover.
Open the soundproof cover wrapped around the compres- 2
sor and remove the terminal box cover of the compressor 3
body. Disconnect the compressor wires in the terminal box
and remove the thermistor on top of the compressor.
4
No. Part
1 Electrical box
6
2 Heat exchanger
3 Compressor-top thermistor 5

4 Compressor wiring
5 Terminal cover
6 Side cover Soundproof cover

2
Check the wiring color and layout when disconnecting. Con- 3
1
necting wires in wrong order at reassembling may result in 4
compressor damage.
5
No. Part
Compressor-Top Thermistor Mount onto Terminal
1
Cover with Metal Fitting
2 Yellow
3 White 6
4 Red
5 Terminal cover
6 M5 nut

Remove the suction and discharge pipes from the compres-

sor.
Be sure to separate the blazing burner flame sufficiently
from the wires and electrical components around the bra-
zed part in order to avoid burning.

No. Part
1 Blazing discharge pipe
2 Blazing suction pipe

260
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Remove push nuts A and B which fixes the compressor. Lift 3

the compressor and remove from the unit body. (C in the
figure does not have a push nut). 2
1 1
Check if the Faston terminal has any abnormality when re-
placing the compressor. (Ensure the pull out force greater 1 2
than 20 N). If the Faston terminal is identified faulty replace
to a new one. 5

Ensure the fixture of the lead wires.

No. Part
1 Compressor 4
2 Accumulator 6
3
3 Push nut 4
4 Vibration-proof rubber 3 7
1
5 Two push nut
7
6 Three vibration-proof
1 rubber
7 Accumulator
5

2
6

 
Removing high pressure switch and pressure
switch for control

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see

on page 395.
Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper co-
ver.
Remove the front cover following Removing front cover, see
on page 395.
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint.
Disconnect the Faston Terminals.
Remove the high pressure switch and the pressure switch
for control from the brazed part of discharge piping. 11
No. Part
1 High pressure switch
2 Pressure switch for control
3 Brazing

261
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing four-way valve coil

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see

on page 395.
Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper cover.
Remove the front cover following Removing front cover, see
on page 395.
Remove the electrical box cover.
Disconnect the PCN6 connector on the control PCB of the
electrical box.

No. Part
1 PCN6 connector (green)
1 2
3
Remove one (1) fixing screw to remove the 4-way valve coil.

No. Part
1 4-way valve
2 4-way valve coil
3 Screw

NOTE
DO NOT touch electrical components while the LED1 (Red) is ON to avoid electrical shock. Wait until the LED
turns off.

 
Removing electronic expansion valve coil

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see

on page 395.
Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper cover.
Remove the front cover following Removing front cover, see
on page 395.
Remove the electrical box cover.
Remove the CN5A connector on the control PCB of the elec-
trical box.
Hold and disconnect the coil of the expansion valve.The ex-
pansion valve coil is equipped with a lock mechanism.Ensu-
re that the coil is locked when replacing.

No. Part
1 One terminal cover screw
2 Side cover
3 Seven side cover screws
4 Three front cover screws

No. Part
1 Expansion valve coil
2 Expansion valve body

NOTE
DO NOT touch electrical components while the LED1 (Red) is ON to avoid electrical shock. Wait until the LED
turns off.

262
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing electrical components

Removing Electrical Box

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see
on page 395.
Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper co-
ver.
Remove the electrical box cover.
Remove one (1) fixing screw and remove the terminal co-
ver.
Disconnect all the wiring connected to the control PCB.
Remove two (2) screws which fix the electrical box.
Pull up and remove the electrical box.

No. Part
1 Electrical box cover
2 Two screws

Removing Display PCB

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see
on page 395.
Remove one (1) fixing screw and remove the terminal co- 1
ver.
Disconnect all the wiring connected to the display PCB.
Hold the upper part of four (4) holders with long nose pliers
and remove the display PCB.
2
No. Part
1 Display PCB (PWB2)
2 Terminal cover
3
3 Long nose pliers
4 Display PCB
4
5 Holder
5

NOTE
DO NOT touch electrical components on the PCB. Pay attention not to bend or apply much force onto PCB in order
to avoid PCB failure.
11
NOTE
• To connect wiring at reassembling ensure that the terminal numbers and wiring mark band codes are matched.
Incorrect wiring may result in malfunction or damage of electrical components.
• Different dip switch setting shall be applied for each model when the electrical box is replaced; See chapter 8
Troubleshooting.
• Pay attention not to clamp any wiring between plates or electrical components when closing electrical box
cover or front cover at reassembling.

263
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Removing other electrical components 1

Remove the pipe cover following Removing pipe cover, see

on page 395. 2

Remove three (3) fixing screws and remove the upper co-
ver.
Remove the electrical box cover. 3

Removing Electrical Components.

Remove the fixing screw and remove the reactor.
4
To mount components be sure to match the wiring connec- 5
tion with the mark band codes.

1
6

No. Part
1 Electrical box cover
3
2 Partition plate
3 Fuse
4 Electrical box
4
5 Reactor
5
6 See the note

NOTE
• The PCB cannot be removed from the electrical box. To replace PCB the entire electrical box must be replaced.
• DO NOT touch electrical components while the LED1 (Red) is ON to avoid electrical shock. Wait until the LED
turns off.

264
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.1.2  RAS-3HVRNME-AF

 
Removing service cover

No. Part
1 Screws

Remove the main parts according to the following proce-

dures:
Remove the five (5) fixing screws.
Slide the service cover downward and remove it.
Pay attention of not falling off the service cover.

N ote
• To reassemble perform the procedures in reverse.
• To prevent contamination of the refrigerant with 1
water or foreign particles, do not expose open to at-
mosphere for long periods.
• If necessary, seal pipe ends using caps or tape.

 
Removing air outlet grille

No. Part
1 Air outlet grille
2 Shroud

Remove the four (4) fixing screws.

Lift the air outlet grille holding the lower parts.
Release the extruded hook of the air outlet grille from the
shroud.

1 2
 
Removing upper cover

No. Part
1 Screws
1

11
Remove the eight (8) fixing screws.
Lift the upper cover upwards.

265
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing outdoor fan motor

No. Part
1
1 Upper cover

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving service cover in this chapter.
Remove the air outlet grille according to the section Remo-
ving air outlet grille in this chapter.
Remove the upper cover according to the section Remo-
ving upper cover in this chapter.
Disassemble the fan blade by removing the cap nuts and
washers fixing the fan blade onto the motor shaft.

No. Part
1 Fan motor 2
2 Fan motor lead wire
3 Motor clamp 3

Remove the fan motor connector from the PCN202 at the

electrical box.
Cut off the cable tie that fixes the lead wire of the fan motor.
Remove the four (4) screws that fix the motor to the motor
clamp.
Fix the motor wire with the cable tie or the cord clamp. If not,
1
it may cause the disconnection of the fan motor’s lead wire.
In order to avoid cutting edges, mount the rubber bush at
the partition plate when inserting the motor wire through it.
If not, it may cause the disconnection to the fan motor’s
lead wire.

Fan components and technical features

Power supply 1~ 230V 50Hz
DPI IPM
DC fan motor PCN202
CN202
Screw for motor fixing M5 Screw with spacer x 4

1 2
No. Part
1 Motor clamp
Motor clamp and wiring fixing position 2 Fan motor lead wire
3 DC fan motor 3
4 Cable tie 4

N ote
• When assembling the motor, ensure the cables section directly downwards. Fix the protection tube edge end
downwards to ensure water from keeping inside it.
• Fix the motor wires onto the motor clamp with a cable tie to prevent them from collisioning the fun blades.
• Assembling the fan blade: Insert the skidding protection part of fan boss in accordance with the cutting part
of the motor shaft, and fix the screw after dismounting the screwed part of the shaft. (Tightening Torque of 20
N.m).
• When connecting the motor wire, check to ensure that the colors of the connectors on the PCN202 are mat-
ched with the wires.
• Fix the air outlet grille firmly to the shroud.

266
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing the compressor

No. Part
1 Upper cover 1
2 Rear panel
3 PCB
4 Check joint 2
5 Rear pipe cover
6 Valve stay 3

Remove the service cover and the lower part of the service
panel according to the section Removing service cover and
the section Removing lower part of service panel and rear 4
panel. In case that the outdoor unit is installed close to a
wall closely, sepparate first the outdoor unit from the wall.
Collect the refrigerant from the liquid stop valve, the gas
stop valve and the check joint at the piping. 5
6
Open the sound insulation cover wrapped around the com-
pressor and remove the terminal box cover at the compres-
sor fixed by one (1) screw. Disconnect the compressor wires
in the terminal box and remove the sound insulation cover.
Remove the rubber cap and the thermistor on the top of the
compressor.
Remove the crankcase heater. (Oil heater on the lower Direction to remove the cover
case).

No. Part
1
1 Sound-proof cover
2 Cut part
3 Oil heater

N ote
Check and take note of each terminal number and in-
dications for its correct connection at the reasembling
process. If wires are connected in incorrect order, it will 2
lead to a compressor failure.

11

267
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

No. Part
1 2
1 Thermistor holder
2 Holder
3
3 Td Thermistor 5 4
4 Thermistor fixing plate
5 Rubber cap Th Thermistor
6 Compressor

No. Part
1 Indication of terminal number
1
2 Terminal box cover
3 Compressor wires

No. Part Details for compressor terminals

1 Compressor wires (3 wires)

2 Fix it with screw

2
1

N ote
• The compressor is connected by brazing. Check to ensure whether there are flammable things around or not
when using a burner for pipe connections. If you do not´, oil existing pipe inside may ignite.
• Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the atmosphere for a long period in order to avoid water and foreign
particles entering into the refrigerant cycle. After removing the compressor, replace it quickly. If it is exposed
to the ambiance for a long period, seal both suction and discharge pipes.
• Remove the cap for the compressor just before replacing the compressor. Before assembling the compressor,
seal the suction pipe and discharge pipe with tape to protect the compressor interior from foreign particles.
Remove the tape when connecting the pipes.
• Match the terminal No. with the mark band No. when reassembling. If the wiring is connected incorrectly, the
compressor may be damaged due to reverse rotation.
• If there is a clearance between the oil heater and the compressor due to wire overlapping, excessive heat is
generated there. Then the oil heater is failed due to overheating. When mounting the reassembled oil heater,
this point should be taken into account.
• If the oil heater lead wire is caught on the spring, the lead wire may be cut due to vibration. When reassembling,
attention should be paid to the lead wire.

CAUTION
All compressor pipes must be brazed to be connected to the refrigerant circuit. Ensure that all the sourrounding
is free of flammable objects and liquids when performing piping brazing work.

268
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Remove the suction pipe and the discharge pipe from the
compressor. Isolate the wires and electrical components to
protect them from the burner flame when brazing the con-
nection pipes.

No. Part 1 Cover pipes with wet cloth

1 Suction pipe
2 Discharge pipe

Remove the two (2) nuts fixing the compressor and remove
the compressor from the unit by lifting it. Slightly incline it
forward and lift.

For brazing the compressor connection pipes, first cool

down the compresor piping side covering it with wet clooth.
Then brazing material will not enter into the compressor.
If the brazing material enters the compressor, it will cause
compressor failures.

Fixation of the compressor to the bottom plate

Compressor position 1 2 3 4 See compressor position table below

Vibration-proof rubber 1    
Vibration-proof rubber 2   – –

Nut   – –

No. Part
1 Nut and washer 1
3
2 Vibration-Proof rubber 1
3 Vibration-Proof rubber 2

Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of the indicated

2
removing procedures.
• Tighten the screws (U, V and W) for compressor wires
with 2.5 N.m.
• Fix the lead wire firmly.
• Attach the oil heater firmly to the compressor and fix it
with the spring.

11
N ote
Fix the lead wire for the compressor firmly using a cable tie to aviod contacting the metal sheet sharp edges and
the high temperature piping.

269
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Opening electrical box (P-mounting plate)

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo- 1

ving the service cover in this chapter.
Remove the six (6) screws fixing the electrical box. Open
the P-mounting plate by rotating it to the left.

No. Part
1 2 Screws
2 P-Mounting plate
1

danger
1
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
2
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON
in order to avoid an electrical shock.

270
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing reversing valve coil

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate according to the section Ope-
ning electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in this chapter.

danger 1
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate. 2

• Do not touch the electrical components when

LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON 3
in order to avoid an electrical shock.

Remove the connectors on the control PCB of the electrical

box.
Remove the reversing valve coil by removing the screw
fixing the coil.

No. Part
1 Reversing valve coil
2 Screw
3 To PCN6 on PCB1

 
Removing expansion valve coil

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate according to the section Ope-
ning electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in this chapter.

danger
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON

11
in order to avoid an electrical shock.
Remove the CN5A connector on the control PCB of the
electrical box.
Hold the expansion valve coil and slightly rotate, then pull it
up. Refer to the figure below to replace the electrical valve.
The lock mechanism is equipped with the expansion valve
coil. Check to ensure that the expansion valve coil is locked.
1
No. Part
1 Electronic expansion valve coil

271
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing reversing valve

Remove the service cover and the rear service panel accor-
ding to the section Removing Service Cover and the section
Removing lower part of service panel and rear service pa-
nel in this chapter. 1

Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the

2
section Removing compressor.
4
Remove the reversing valve coil according to the section
Removing reversing valve coil.
3 1
Remove one (1) fixing screw for the valve-mounting plate.
3
Remove the stop valve at the gas side from the valve-
1
mounting plate by removing the two (2) screws.
Remove the reversing valve assemblies from the 4 brazed
parts where it is fixed. Remove the brazing of the reversing
valve and the stop valve at the gas using a blowtorch. Cool 1
down the piping side covering it with wet cloth, in order to
avoid brazing material entering the reversing valve. Protect 5
the connecting wires and pipe insulation from the brazing
frame.
Remove the reversing valves from its assemblies 4 brazed
parts .
Perform the brazing with a blowtorchto remove and reas-
semble the reversing valve by cooling the pipes first with
wet cloth in order to avoid brazing material entering the re-
versing valve. 6

Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing pro- 2

cedures contained in this chapter. When SFV is removed,
fix it according to the section Removing the Reversing Valve
and the Solenoid Valve contained in this chapter.

No. Part
1 Brazing
2 Reversing valve
3 Screw
4 Mounting plate
5 Compressor
6 Cover by wet cloth

272
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing expansion valve

Remove the service cover and rear service panel accor-

ding to the section Removing Service Cover and the section
Removing Lower Part of Service Panel and Rear Service 1
Panel.
2
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the
section Removing Compressor.
Remove the coils according to the section Removing Elec-
tronic Expansion Valve Coil.
Remove the brazing as shown in the figure below.
• Electronic Expansion Valve (EV0): 2 brazing parts.
• Perform the brazing to remove and reassemble the
electronic expansion valve by cooling with wet cloth.
• Protect the connecting wires and pipe insulation from
brazing flame.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing pro-
cedures.

No. Part
1 Expansion valve (EV0)
2 Brazing part

 
Removing solenoid valve

Remove the service cover and the rear service panel according to the sections Removing Service Cover and Removing
lower part of service panel and rear panel, described in this chapter.
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the section Removing compressor in this chapter.
Remove the solenoid valve coil according to the section Removing coils for reversing valve and solenoid valve in this
chapter.
Remove the brazing and flare nuts. Using a blowtorch and previously cooling the pipe side with wet cloth in order to avoid
brazing material entering the reversing valve.
Perform the brazing to remove and reassemble the solenoid valve.
Protect the connecting wires and pipe insulation from the brazing flame.
Remove the flare nuts with two spanners to avoid twisting.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing order of removing procedures.

11

273
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing electrical components

danger
• Do not touch the electrical components of the PCB directly.
• When handling the PCB, take care of components. Do not apply excesive force to them, in order to avoid da-
maging the motherboard and failures.

Remove the service cover according to section Removing

1
service cover in this chapter.
• Disconnect all the connectors in the PCB.
• Remove the PCB by sliding four (4) holders in the arrow
direction. 2
• Remove the PCB for power distribution of the compres-
sor and the motor.
• To remove the PCB, slide de four (4) holders in the
arrow direction.

No. Part
1 Holder (4 pcs.)
Ma
2 PCB1 for control MC
2 MO
Mar
3 Transformer MC
EF1
4 Terminal board U Surface V Surface
MOF
CM
Electrical Box EF1
RV
U W SEG1
SK1
CMC
MV
CN5A CN14 CN15 PCN10 PCN13 PCN9 PCN8 L12 N2
PCB1 RVR
TB1

PCN7
Removing the relay PCB
ON
Y52C
DSW6
Back Side of 1 2

+
Y20A

PCN6
V MV
Surface U
TF1
+
ON
LED2 DSW1 Y21
NF 1
1 2 3 4

THM9
SW1 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
YCH

PCN5
+

+
+
RSW1

THM8
ON ON TP1
TB1,2
PC
• Remove the service cover according to the section Re-
456
91

78
23
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0
DSW3 DSW4
LED1
+

PCN2
ON
THM7 DSW2

+
1 2 3 4 5 6

TF1
EFR
CN2

EFR1
EFS1
moving Service Cover in this chapter. +
PCN1

PCB
LED3
CN6

CN11
CN8
Y5
ON

1 2

DSW5
DCL
NF 3
EFR
Y2
• Disconnect all the wires connected to the relay PCB. TF1
TB1 YY52C
2
CMC YY21C
0V 220V 240V

EF 1
L2
L11 N1 YTH
20A
L1 N
1 2

FUSE
CAPACITY
YTH
CH
50A
THM
TH
THM
PSH
3 4 THM
PSC
W Surface PSH
DC
PSC
W Surface DIP
DCL
U Surface DIP-IPM R NF
Surface
RY1

V DCL1 DIP-I
+

JP12
HY-200-101

PSW
R116 R115

CMC
Electrical Box ~ ~
JP11
DM1

U Surface NF1
DM2
D15
J1

DIP-IPM R
V Surface
+ -
RY1
17B35740A

PSW
RY2 C112
-
PV051-1

C108
Z1

DCL1
R65
+

S JP12
HY-200-101

JP6

PSW
R116 R115
JP4

U W Box
Electrical CMC DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE JP5
SEG1
R66

~ ~
JP11

SK1
DM1

PSW
Q203

CN5A CN14 CN15 L12 N2

R112

DM2
R1

PCN10 PCN9 PCN8

Lot No.

PCN13
D15

PCB1
R111
J1
R67

~ ~ CP20
R89

R2
+ -
C33
CP21
PCN7

DM3 R3
17B35740A

PSW
C112
CP14

RY2

DCL2
R96
-

QN2

R117

T
QN1
Y52C
PV051-1

CP19
C108

+ -
Z1

JP2

R28
R65

ON
DSW6
S
Back Side of
JP6
QP1

R29

R48

DS
R46 JP4
R118
R27

1 2

U
+

Y20A DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE

W
PCN6

Q204

V
JP5
SEG1
R66

CP22

Surface U
C110
F
+

ON
SK1

PSW
DSW1
JP3

Q203

L12 N2
JP1

CN5A
LED2 CN14 CN15
NF 1
R112

PCN13 Y21PCN9
R1

PCN10 PCN8
Lot No.

1 2 3 4

PCB1
R111
R67

~ ~
JP8

LED201

CP20
RD ê‘

R89
CP28

JP14 R2
THM9

C33
PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
CP21
PCN7

DM3 R3
SW1 CN4 CN1
CP14

YCH
DCL2
R96

DS
QN2 R40
PCN5

1 WH 1 WH
D13
R110

R117
JP7
+

T
+

QN1
R39JP2

Y52C
PCN401

R7

CP19

RSW1
D25

+ -
C44

CP13

R28
1
D21
D20

D22
D18
D24

8
R59

ON R35
BK

DSW6 TP1
Back Side of
CP27

R53
CP1
CP3

QP1
IC9

R29

R48

DSW
D8
D3
D12
D11
D23

ON ON
THM8

456 R46 R118

R27

1 2
1

91
4

IC5
D19
78
+

Y20A
R58

5
23

4
1
PCN6

Q204

R54

V
CP2
C40

CP23
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0
Q201

CP22

C25
PC209

C24

R34

Surface U
R93
DSW4
C110

DSW3
IC6 JP3
F
+

ON
21

R26

R43
R303

DSW1 LED1
CP5
JP1
CP29

LED2
+

R304

NF 1
C50
CP25
PCN2

Y21
R86

CP26

DS
1 2 3 4 ON
RD
THM7

R22

1 DSW2
C51
JP8

LED201
RD ê‘
CN207 PCN401
+

CP28

CP18

R109

2 3 4 5 6 JP14 C52
THM9

PSW1 PSW2 PSW3

CP24

60

41
IC8

SW1 YCH
PC208
CN4 CN1
R113

R17

DSW
1
PCN5

WH WH
8
R211 PC207

R114

CB3

1 1
D13
R110

JP7
61
+

40
+

C104
C30 1

R40
R39
R7

RSW1
26
D25

C44

CP13
1
1

D21
D20CP4 D3

D22
D18
D24 R18
IC1

8
R59
CN2

R35
BK

TP1
4

CP27

ZD5

R53
CP1
CP3
IC9
CN206

R16
+

C4
D8 C2

D12
D11 R20
D23

ON ON
THM8

W
EFR1
EFS1

456
1

91 C38
4
X1

IC5
D19
78

Q202

R58

5
23

DS
1

C39 R54
CP2
C40

CP23
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 C203
C12

R25
80

0
Q201

C25
21
PC209 1

C24

C47 R34
+

R93
R214

DSW3 DSW4
IC6
WH

21

R26

PCN1
C206

LED3
R43
1

R210
R303

820

CP5
LED1
CP29CP30

1
+

R304

C50
CP25
PCN2

R86
CN6

CP26

DSW
CP11

CN11 ON
ZD4
CP8

C6
RD
CN2 1
THM7

R22

JP10
1 DSW2
V
C51
CP6

CP9
CN207
+

CP18

R109

CN8 2 3 4 5 6 C52
ON
1

D7
CP24

60

41
IC8

CP128

PC208
DSW1
2

R113

R17
C5
1

CP7
CP10

1 2
GN

R211 PC207

R114

CB3
3

61

40

C104
C30

DCL
26

DS
R24

R23
1
1

C11
R87
R88

YE
IC1
OFF

ON

LED202

DSW5
C102
CN2

CP4

C53

WU
4

ZD5
CN206

R18
R16

R15
CB2
+

C4
EFR1
EFS1

C38
X1

CP15
Q202

ZD3

DSW
C39
C2

R20

C203 C101
C12

R25
IC4
80

21

C47
+

R214

D6
WH

PCN1
C206

LED3
1

R210

C54
20

D5
1

G
1
CN6

CP11

CN11
ZD4
CP8

C6
CP30
CN2

NF 3
R14
C10 D7

JP10

V
CP6

CP9

CN8
O

ON R30 R301

DS
22
1

CP12
DSW1
1

C5

C21

D2
CP7
CP10 R88

1 2

TF1
GN

ZD2
3

HT2

DCL DSW
R24

R23
PC204

C11
R87

YE
OFF

ON

LED202

DSW5
C102
ê¬
BL

C53

U
R13
C55
C100

R15
CB2
C105
CP15
C202

ZD3
PC206

TB1
1
CN204

C101
IC4

C109

JP9
L1

D6

CB1

SW
C54
PC205

D5
G
I

HT1

NF 3
R14
C10
C16
1

R30 R301

DSW
PC201

D14

22
Z2
C19

D9
C21

D2

TF1
ZD2

C208
CP17

HT2
PC202
CN203

PC204

IC3

CMC
PCN202 PCN201
0V 220V 240V

ê¬

S
BL

C17

CN202 RD CN201
R13
C55
C100

WH
1 RD 1 WH
PC203

R205

C105
C202

CH
C D
PC206

TB1
D10
1

1
CN204
1

C109

JP9
C201

L1
BK

CP16

1 1
CB1

1 1

SW1
PC205

1 1
HT1

C16
1

EF 1
PC201

D14

Z2
C19

D9

L11 N1
C208
CP17

DS
PC202
CN203

IC3

CMC
PCN202 PCN201
0V 220V 240V

S
C17

CN202 RD CN201 WH
L2 1 RD 1 WH
PC203

R205

CH
C D
L1 N D10

1 2
1

C201
BK

CP16

1 1
1 1 1 1

FUSE NF 2
EF 1 CAPACITY
50A L1
L2
N
1 2
L11 N1
G
DS
FUSE NF 2
CAPACITY
50A G

274
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing “W” electrical components surface

Remove the service cover according to the section Removing service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate by rotating 90 degrees to the left according to the section Opening electrical box (P-Mounting
Plate) in this chapter.
Use a screw driver to push and release the plastic holders retaining the “W” electrical components surface

danger
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W” surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON in order to
avoid an electrical shock.
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When reassembling, the terminals have to be connected to the
correct numbers. If incorrectly connected, malfunctions or damages will occur.
• In case of replacing control PCB, set all the dip switches as the same position before replacing. If not, mal-
function may occur. Refer to the manual attached with the service PCB.
• Do not apply strong force to the electric components and PCBs to avoid damage.

N ote
Check to ensure that the electrical wires will not be caught between the assembled electrical components and the
mounting plates when the “W” electrical components surface is reassembled.

 
Removing other electrical components

Remove the service cover according to the section Removing service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate by rotating it to the left according to the section Opening electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in
this chapter.
Check to ensure the LED201 (Red) of the inverter PCB is off when opening P-mounting plate.
Remove other electrical components according to the procedure below, and the figures on Chapter 9.

danger
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W” surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON in order to
avoid an electrical shock.
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When reassembling, the terminals have to be connected to the
correct numbers. If incorrectly connected, malfunctions or damages will occur.

N ote
• Disconnect all the wires connected with the smoothing capacitor (CB, CB1, CB2, CA).
• The wire has polar characters. Identify the wire mark band and the indication on the smoothing capacitor when
wire connecting.
11
• Remove the two (2) screws fixing the smoothing capacitor and remove the smoothing capacitor.
• Disconnect all the wires connecting with the magnetic contactor (CMC1).
• Remove the two (2) screws fixing the magnetic contactor and remove the magnetic contactor.
• Remove the four (4) screws fixing the reactor and remove the reactor (DCL).
• Disconnect all the wires connected with the noise filter (NF1).
• Remove the noise filter by clamping the top of the holder (6 portions) with a pincher.

275
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.1.3  RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF

 
Removing service cover

Remove the main parts according to the following proce-

dures.

N ote
• To reassemble perform the procedures in reverse.
• To prevent contamination of the refrigerant with wa-
ter or foreign particles, do not expose open to atmo-
sphere for long periods.
• If necessary, seal pipe ends using caps or tape.
1

Remove the four (4) fixing screws.

Slide the service cover downward and remove it.
Pay attention of not falling off the service cover.

No. Part 2
1 Service cover
2 Screws

 
Removing air outlet grille

Remove the eight (8) fixing screws.

Lift the air outlet grille holding the lower parts.
Release the extruded hook of the air outlet grille from the
shroud.

No. Part 2
1 Air outlet grille 1
2 Shroud

276
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing upper cover

Remove all the screws fixing the upper cover, both on the
front and back of the machine.
1
Lift the upper cover upwards.

No. Part
1 Upper cover
2 Screws

 Removing the lower part of service panel and

rear panel

Remove the five (5) fixing screws at the lower part of the
service panel and remove the lower part of the service pa-
nel by pulling towards the front side. Remove the upper 1
cover according to section “Removing upper cover” in this
chapter.

N ote
The length of fixing scews for the outdoor temperature
thermistor is different than all other screws in the ma-
chine, as an assembly poka-yoke.

No. Part 3
1 Rear panel
2 Screws
3 The lower part of service panel 2

11

277
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Removing outdoor fan motor

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-
ving service cover in this chapter.
1
Remove the air outlet grille according to the section Remo-
ving air outlet grille in this chapter.
Remove the upper cover according to the section Remo-
ving upper cover in this chapter.
Disassembly the fan blade by removing the cap nuts and
washers fixing the fan blade onto the motor shaft.
If the fan blade get stuck when trying to remove it, use a
puller to disassembly the fan.

No. Part
1 Upper cover
2 Fan motor lead wire
3 Motor clamp
2
4 Fan motor

Fan components and technical features

1~ 230V 50Hz
Power supply
3N~ 400V 50Hz
DIP IPM
DC fan motor UP PCN202
CN202
Fan motor
DIP IPM
DC fan motor DOWN PCN201
CN201
DC Fan Motor UP M4 Screw with spacer x 4
Screw for motor fixing
DC Fan Motor DOWN M4 Screw with spacer x 4
1 2

No. Part
1 Motor clamp 3
2 Fan motor lead wire 5
Motor clamp and wiring fixing position
3 DC fan motor UP
4 DC fan motor DOWN
5 Cable tie 4

278
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Remove the fan motor connector from the PCN202 and

PCN203 at the electrical box.
• Cut off the cable tie that fixes the lead wire of the fan
motor.
• Remove the four (4) screws that fix the motor to the mo-
tor clamp.
Fix the motor wire with the cable tie or the cord clamp. If not,
it may cause the disconnection of the fan motor’s lead wire.
2
In order to avoid cutting edges, mount the rubber bush at 1
the partition plate when inserting the motor wire through it. 3
If not, it may cause the disconnection to the fan motor’s
lead wire.

No. Part
1 Partition plate
2 Rubber bush
3 Cord holder or cable tie

Install DC motor to this position facing down the trap

N ote
• When assembling the motor, ensure the cables section directly downwards. Fix the protection tube edge end
downwards to ensure water from keeping inside it.
• Fix the motor wires onto the motor clamp with a cable tie to prevent them from collisioning the fun blades.
• Assembling the fan blade: Insert the skidding protection part of fan boss in accordance with the cutting part
of the motor shaft, and fix the screw after dismounting the screwed part of the shaft. (Tightening Torque of
20 N.m)
• When connecting the motor wire, check to ensure that the colors of the connectors on the PCN201 and PCN202
are matched with the wires.
• Fix the air outlet grille firmly to the shroud.

11

279
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing the compressor

Remove the service cover and the lower part of the service
panel according to the section Removing service cover and
the section Removing lower part of service panel and rear
panel. In case that the outdoor unit is installed close to a
wall closely, sepparate first the outdoor unit from the wall.
Collect the refrigerant from the liquid stop valve, the gas
stop valve and the check joint at the piping. 1
Open the sound insulation cover wrapped around the com-
pressor and remove the terminal box cover at the compres-
sor fixed by one (1) screw. Disconnect the compressor wires
in the terminal box and remove the sound insulation cover.
Remove the rubber cap and the thermistor on the top of the 2
compressor.
Remove the crankcase heater.(Oil heater on the lower
3
case).

No. Part
4
1 Upper cover
2 Rear panel
3 Check joint
4 Valve stay
5
5 Rear pipe cover
6 Lower part of service panel 6

No. Part
Direction to remove the cover
1 Sound-proof cover
2 Cut part
3 Oil heater 1

N ote
Check and take note of each terminal number and in-
dications for its correct connection at the reasembling
process. If wires are connected in incorrect order, it will
lead to a compressor failure.

No. Part 1 2
1 Thermistor holder
2 Holder
3
3 Td Thermistor
5 4
4 Thermistor fixing plate
5 Rubber cap Th Thermistor
6 Compressor

280
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

No. Part
1 Indication of terminal number
1
2 Terminal box cover
3 Compressor wires

No. Part Details for compressor terminals

1 Compressor wires (3 wires)
2 Fix it with screw

2
1

N ote
• The compressor is connected by brazing. Check to ensure whether there are flammable things around or not
when using a burner for pipe connections. If you do not´, oil existing pipe inside may ignite.
• Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the atmosphere for a long period in order to avoid water and foreign
particles entering into the refrigerant cycle. After removing the compressor, replace it quickly. If it is exposed
to the ambiance for a long period, seal both suction and discharge pipes.
• Remove the cap for the compressor just before replacing the compressor. Before assembling the compressor,
seal the suction pipe and discharge pipe with tape to protect the compressor interior from foreign particles.
Remove the tape when connecting the pipes.
• Match the terminal No. with the mark band No. when reassembling. If the wiring is connected incorrectly, the
compressor may be damaged due to reverse rotation.
• If there is a clearance between the oil heater and the compressor due to wire overlapping, excessive heat is
generated there. Then the oil heater is failed due to overheating. When mounting the reassembled oil heater,
this point should be taken into account.
• If the oil heater lead wire is caught on the spring, the lead wire may be cut due to vibration. When reassembling,
attention should be paid to the lead wire.

CAUTION
11
All compressor pipes must be brazed to be connected to the refrigerant circuit. Ensure that all the sourrounding
is free of flammable objects and liquids when performing piping brazing work.

281
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Remove the suction pipe and the discharge pipe from the
compressor. Isolate the wires and electrical components to
protect them from the burner flame when brazing the con-
nection pipes. 1

No. Part
1 Suction pipe
2
2 Discharge pipe

Remove the two (2) nuts fixing the compressor and remove
the compressor from the unit by lifting it. Slightly incline it
forward and lift.
Cover pipes with wet cloth
For brazing the compressor connection pipes, first cool
down the compresor piping side covering it with wet clooth.
Then brazing material will not enter into the compressor.
If the brazing material enters the compressor, it will cause
compressor failures.

Fixation of the compressor to the bottom plate

See compressor position table below
Compressor position 1 2 3 4

Vibration-proof rubber 1    
Vibration-proof rubber 2   – –

Nut   – –

No. Part
1 Nut and washer
2 Vibration-Proof rubber 1
1
3 Vibration-Proof rubber 2 3

Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of the indicated

2
removing procedures.
• Tighten the screws (U, V and W) for compressor wires
with 2.5 N.m.
• Fix the lead wire firmly.
• Attach the oil heater firmly to the compressor and fix it
with the spring.

N ote
Fix the lead wire for the compressor firmly using a cable tie to aviod contacting the metal sheet sharp edges and
the high temperature piping.

282
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 Removing high pressure switch and control

pressure switch

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo- 1

ving service cover in this chapter. 2

Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the

section Removing the compressor in this chapter.
Disconnect the fasten terminals from the pressure switches.
3
• Cut the high pressure switch and control pressure switch
from the brazing neck using a burner.

No. Part
1 PCB
2 Upper cover
3 Rear cover

1
No. Part
1 Brazing
2 Discharge pipe

No. Part
1 Pressure switch for control
2 High pressure switch
1

11

283
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Opening electrical box (P-mounting plate)

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving the service cover in this chapter.
Remove the six (6) screws fixing the electrical box. Open
the P-mounting plate by rotating it 90 degrees to the left.

No. Part
1 2 Screws
2 P-Mounting plate
1

DANGER
1
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON
in order to avoid an electrical shock. 1

284
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing the coils for the reversing and solenoid valves (SVA1, SVA2 and SVF)
Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-
ving service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate according to the section Ope-
ning electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in this chapter.

1
2
note
• Do not touch the electrical components when the
LED201 (Red), located on surface “W” PCB is ON in
order to avoid electrical shock.
• Remove the connectors on the control PCB of the
electrical box.
• Remove the reversing valve coil by removing the
screw fixing the coil. 3

No. Part
1 PCB
2 Upper cover
3 Rear cover

No. Part RAS-(4-6)HVRNME-AF RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF

1 PCN7 (SVA) Solenoid valve 1
2 PCN6 (RVR) Reversing valve coil 2
1
2

2 1
No. Part
1 Reversing valve coil
2 SVA

11

285
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing expansion valve coil

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving service cover. 1
Open the P-mounting plate according to the section Ope-
ning electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in this chapter.

DANGER
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON
in order to avoid an electrical shock.
Remove the CN5A connector on the control PCB of the
electrical box.
Hold the expansion valve coil and slightly rotate, then pull it
up. Refer to the figure below to replace the electrical valve.
The lock mechanism is equipped with the expansion valve
coil. Check to ensure that the expansion valve coil is locked.

No. Part
1 Electronic expansion valve coil

286
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Removing reversing valve

Remove the service cover and the rear service panel accor-
ding to the section Removing Service Cover and the section
Removing lower part of service panel and rear service pa-
nel in this chapter.
1
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the
section Removing compressor. 2
Remove the reversing valve coil according to the section
5
Removing reversing valve coil.
Remove one (1) fixing screw for the valve-mounting plate. 3 1

Remove the stop valve at the gas side from the valve- 3
mounting plate by removing the two (2) screws.
1
Remove the reversing valve assemblies from the 4 brazed
parts where it is fixed. Remove the brazing of the reversing
valve and the stop valve at the gas using a blowtorch. Cool
down the piping side covering it with wet cloth, in order to 1
avoid brazing material entering the reversing valve. Protect
the connecting wires and pipe insulation from the brazing 4
frame.
Remove the reversing valves from its assemblies 4 brazed
parts .
Perform the brazing with a blowtorchto remove and reas-
6
semble the reversing valve by cooling the pipes first with
wet cloth in order to avoid brazing material entering the re- 2
versing valve.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing pro-
cedures contained in this chapter. When SFV is removed,
fix it according to the section Removing the Reversing Valve
and the Solenoid Valve contained in this chapter.

No. Part
1 Brazing
2 Reversing valve
3 Screw
4 Compressor
5 Mounting plate
6 Cover by wet cloth

11

287
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing expansion valve

Remove the service cover and rear service panel accor-

ding to the section Removing Service Cover and the section
Removing Lower Part of Service Panel and Rear Service 1
Panel.
2
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the
section Removing Compressor.
Remove the coils according to the section Removing Elec-
tronic Expansion Valve Coil.
Remove the brazing as shown in the figure below.
• Electronic Expansion Valve (EV0): 2 brazing parts.
• Perform the brazing to remove and reassemble the
electronic expansion valve by cooling with wet cloth.
• Protect the connecting wires and pipe insulation from
brazing flame.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing pro-
cedures.

No. Part
1 Expansion valve (EV0)
2 Brazing part

 
Removing solenoid valve

Remove the service cover and the rear service panel according to the sections Removing Service Cover and Removing
lower part of service panel and rear panel, described in this chapter.
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the section Removing compressor in this chapter.
Remove the solenoid valve coil according to the section Removing coils for reversing valve and solenoid valve in this
chapter.
Remove the brazing and flare nuts as shown. Using a blowtorch and previously cooling the pipe side with wet cloth in order
to avoid brazing material entering the reversing valve.
Perform the brazing to remove and reassemble the solenoid valve.
Protect the connecting wires and pipe insulation from the brazing flame.
Remove the flare nuts with two spanners to avoid twisting.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing procedures.

288
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing electrical components

DANGER
• Do not touch the electrical components of the PCB directly.
• When handling the PCB, take care of components. Do not apply excesive force to them, in order to avoid da-
maging the motherboard and failures

Remove the service cover according to section Removing

1
service cover in this chapter.
• Disconnect all the connectors in the PCB.
• Remove the PCB by sliding four (4) holders in the arrow
direction. 2
• Remove the PCB for power distribution of the compres-
sor and the motor.
• To remove the PCB, slide de four (4) holders in the
arrow direction.

No. Part
1 Holder (4 pcs.) Ma
MC
2 PCB1 for control 2 MO
Mar
MC
EF1
3 Transformer U Surface
Electrical Box
V Surface MO
CM
4 Terminal board EF1
RVR
U W CN5A CN14 CN15
SEG1
PCN10 PCN13
SK1
PCN9 PCN8 L12 N2 CMC
MV
PCB1

PCN7
Back Side of
ON

1 2
DSW6
Y52C
RVR
TB1,

+
Y20A

PCN6
V Surface U

+
ON
LED2 DSW1 Y21
NF 1 MV
1 2 3 4

TF1
Removing the relay PCB

THM9
SW1 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
YCH

PCN5
+

+
+
RSW1
ON ON TP1

THM8
456
91

78
TB1,

23
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

PCB
0
DSW3 DSW4
LED1

PCN2
ON

THM7
DSW2

+
1 2 3 4 5 6

TF1
• Remove the service cover according to the section Re-
CN2
EFR

EFR1
EFS1
+
LED3 PCN1

CN6
CN11

PCB
CN8 ON

Y 52
1 2

DSW5
DCL
moving Service Cover in this chapter. TF1
NF 3 EFR
Y 21
TB1 YY 5220
• Disconnect all the wires connected to the relay PCB. CMC YY 21C
0V 220V 240V

EF 1
L1
L2
N
1 2
L11 N1
YTHM
20
FUSE
CAPACITY
50A
YTHM
CH

THM
THM
THM
3 4 PSH
THM
PSC
W Surface PSH
DCL
PSC
W Surface DIP
DCL
U Surface DIP-IPM R NF1
Surface
RY1

V DCL1 DIP-
+

JP12
HY-200-101

PSW
R116 R115

CMC
Electrical Box ~ ~
JP11
DM1

Surface NF1
DM2

D15
J1
U V Surface
+
DIP-IPM R -
RY1
17B35740A

PSW
RY2 C112
-
PV051-1

C108
Z1

DCL1
R65
+

S JP12
HY-200-101

JP6

PSW
R116 R115
JP4

U W
Electrical Box CMC DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE JP5
SEG1
R66

~ ~
JP11

SK1
DM1

PSW
Q203

CN5A CN14 CN15 L12 N2

R112

DM2
R1

PCN10 PCN9 PCN8

Lot No.

PCN13
D15
J1

PCB1
R111
R67

~ ~ CP20
R89

R2
+ -
C33
CP21
PCN7

DM3 R3
17B35740A

PSW
C112
CP14

RY2

DCL2
R96
-

QN2

R117

T
QN1
Y52C
PV051-1

CP19
C108

+ -
Z1

JP2

R28
R65

ON
DSW6
S
Back Side of
JP6
QP1

R29

R48

DS
R46 JP4
R118
R27

1 2

U
+

Y20A DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE

W
PCN6

Q204

V
JP5
SEG1
R66
CP22

Surface U
C110
F
+

ON
SK1

PSW
DSW1
JP3

Q203

L12 N2
JP1

LED2 CN5A1 CN14 CN15

NF 1
R112

Y21 PCN9
R1

PCN10 PCN8
Lot No.

2 3 4
PCN13
PCB1
R111
R67

~ ~
JP8

LED201

CP20
RD ê‘

R89
CP28

JP14 R2
THM9

C33
PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
CP21
PCN7

DM3 R3
SW1 CN4 CN1
CP14

YCH
DCL2
R96

DS
QN2
PCN5

1 WH 1 WH
D13
R110

R117
JP7
+

T
+

QN1
R40
R39

Y52C
PCN401

R7

CP19

RSW1
D25

+ -
C44

CP13
JP2

R28
1
D21
D20

D22
D18
D24

8
R59

ON R35
BK

DSW6 TP1
Back Side of
CP27

R53
CP1
CP3

QP1
IC9

R29

R48

DSW
D8
D3
D12
D11
D23

ON ON
THM8

456 R46 R118

R27

1 2
1

91
4

IC5
D19
78
+

Y20A
R58

5
23

4
1
PCN6

Q204

R54

V
CP2
C40

CP23
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0
Q201

CP22

C25
PC209

C24

R34

Surface U
R93
DSW4
C110

DSW3
IC6 JP1
F
+

ON
21

R26

R43
R303

DSW1 LED1
CP5
JP3
CP29

LED2
+

R304

NF 1
C50
CP25
PCN2

Y21
R86

CP26

DS
1 2 3 4 ON
RD
THM7

R22

1 DSW2
C51

JP8

LED201
RD ê‘
CN207
+

CP28

CP18

R109

2 3 4 5 6 JP14 C52
THM9

PSW1 PSW2 PSW3

CP24

60

41
IC8

SW1 YCH
PC208
CN4 CN1
R113

R17

DSW
1
PCN5

WH WH
8
R211 PC207

R114

CB3

1 1
D13
R110

JP7
61
+

40
+

C104 R59
C30

R40
R39
PCN401

R7

RSW1
26
D25

C44

CP13
1
1

1
D21
D20

D22
D18
D24
IC1

8
CN2

R35
BK

CP4

TP1
4

CP27

ZD5

R53
CP1
CP3
IC9
CN206

R18
R16
+

C4
D8 R20
D3
D12
D11
D23

ON ON
THM8

W
EFR1
EFS1

456
1

91 C38
4
X1

IC5
D19
78

Q202

R58

5
23

DS
1

C39
C2

R54
CP2
C40

CP23
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 C203
C12

R25
80

0
Q201

C25
21
PC209

C24

C47 R34
+

R93
R214

DSW3 DSW4
IC6
WH

21

R26

PCN1
C206

LED3
R43
1

R210
R303

8
20

CP5
LED1
CP29

1
+

R304

C50 C51
1

CP25
PCN2

R86
CN6

CP26

DSW
CP11

CN11 ON
ZD4
CP8

C6
CP30
RD
CN2
THM7

R22

JP10
DSW2
V
CP6

CP9
CN207GN
+

CP18

R109

CN8 1 2 3 4 5 6 C52
ON
1

D7
CP24 CP10

60

41
IC8
CP12

PC208
DSW1
1

R113

R17
C5
1

CP7

1 2
8
R211 PC207

R114

CB3
3

61

40

C104
C30

DCL
26

DS
R24

R23
1
1

C11
R87 5
R88

YE
IC1
OFF

ON

LED202

DSW5
C102
CN2

CP4

C53

UW
4

ZD5
CN206

R18
R16

R15
CB2
+

C4
EFR1
EFS1

C38
X1

CP15
Q202

ZD3

DSW
C39
C2

R20

C203 C101
C12

R25
IC4
80

21

C47
+

R214

D6
WH

PCN1
C206

LED3
1

R210

C54
20

D5
1G
1
CN6

CP11

CN11
ZD4
CP8

C6
CP30
CN2

NF 3
R14
C10

JP10

V
CP6

CP9

CN8
O

ON R30 R301

DS
22
1

D7
CP12
DSW1
1

C5

C21

D2
CP7
CP10

1 2

TF1
GN

ZD2
3

HT2

DCL DSW
R24

R23
PC204

C11
R87
R88

YE
OFF

ON

LED202

DSW5
C102
ê¬
BL

C53

U
R13 CP15
C55
C100

R15
CB2
C105
C202

ZD3
PC206

TB1
1
CN204

C101
IC4

C109

JP9
L1

D6

CB1

SW
C54
PC205

D5
G
I

HT1

NF 3
R14
C10
C16
1

R30 R301

DSW
PC201

D14

22
Z2
C19

D9
C21

D2

TF1
ZD2

C208
CP17

HT2
PC202
CN203

PC204

IC3

CMC
PCN202 PCN201
0V 220V 240V

ê¬

S
BL

C17

CN202 RD CN201
R13
C55
C100

WH
1 RD 1 WH
PC203

R205

C105
C202

CH
C D
PC206

TB1
D10
1

1
CN204
1

C109

JP9
C201

L1
BK

CP16

1 1
CB1

1 1

SW
PC205

1 1
HT1

C16
1

EF 1
PC201

D14

Z2
C19

D9

L11 N1
C208
CP17

DS
PC202
CN203

IC3

CMC
PCN202 PCN201
0V 220V 240V

S
C17

CN202 RD CN201 WH
L2 1 RD 1 WH
PC203

R205

CH
C D
L1 N D10

1 2
1

C201
BK

CP16

1 1
1 1 1 1

FUSE NF 2
EF 1 CAPACITY
50A L1
L2
N
1 2
L11 N1
G
DS
FUSE NF 2
CAPACITY
50A G

11

289
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing “W” electrical components surface
Remove the service cover according to the section Remo- RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF
ving service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate by rotating 90 degrees to the left
according to the section Opening electrical box (P-Mounting
Plate) in this chapter.
Use a screw driver to push and release the plastic holders
retaining the “W” electrical components surface.
1

DANGER
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON 2 3
in order to avoid an electrical shock.
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When
reassembling, the terminals have to be connected
to the correct numbers. If incorrectly connected,
malfunctions or damages will occur.
• In case of replacing control PCB, set all the dip swit-
ches as the same position before replacing. If not,
malfunction may occur. Refer to the manual atta-
ched with the service PCB.
• Do not apply strong force to the electric compo-
nents and PCBs to avoid damage.

note
Check to ensure that the electrical wires will not be
caught between the assembled electrical components
and the mounting plates when the “W” electrical com-
ponents surface is reassembled.

No. Part
1 PCB1 for control
2 Transformer
3 Terminal board

290
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Removing other electrical components

Remove the service cover according to the section Removing service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate by rotating it 90 degrees to the left according to the section Opening electrical box (P-Mounting
Plate) in this chapter.
Check to ensure the LED201 (Red) of the inverter PCB is off when opening P-mounting plate.
Remove other electrical components according to the procedure below.

DANGER
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W” surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON in order to
avoid an electrical shock.
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When reassembling, the terminals have to be connected to the
correct numbers . If incorrectly connected, malfunctions or damages will occur.

note
• Disconnect all the wires connected with the smoothing capacitor (CB, CB1, CB2, CA).
• The wire has polar characters. Identify the wire mark band and the indication on the smoothing capacitor when
wire connecting.
• Remove the two (2) screws fixing the smoothing capacitor and remove the smoothing capacitor.
• Disconnect all the wires connecting with the magnetic contactor (CMC1).
• Remove the two (2) screws fixing the magnetic contactor and remove the magnetic contactor.
• Remove the four (4) screws fixing the reactor and remove the reactor (DCL).
• Disconnect all the wires connected with the noise filter (NF1).
• Remove the noise filter by clamping the top of the holder (6 portions) with a pincher.

11

291
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.1.4  RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

 
Removing service cover

Remove the main parts according to the following proce-

dures.

note
• To reassemble perform the procedures in reverse.
• To prevent contamination of the refrigerant with 1
water or foreign particles, do not expose open to at-
mosphere for long periods.
• If necessary, seal pipe ends using caps or tape.
Remove the four (4) fixing screws.
Slide the service cover downward and remove it.
Pay attention of not falling off the service cover.

No. Part
1 Service cover

 
Removing air outlet grille

Remove the eight (8) fixing screws.

Lift the air outlet grille holding the lower parts.
Release the extruded hook of the air outlet grille from the
shroud.
1
No. Part
1 Air outlet grille
2 Shroud

 
Removing upper cover

Remove the eleven (11) screws fixing the upper cover

Lift the upper cover upwards.
1
No. Part
1 Upper cover

292
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 Removing the lower part of service panel and

rear panel

Remove the five (5) fixing screws at the lower part of the
service panel and remove the lower part of the service pa-
nel by pulling towards the front side. Remove the upper
cover according to section Removing upper cover in this
chapter. 1

No. Part
1 Rear panel
2 The lower part of service panel

note
The length of fixing scews for the outdoor temperature 2
thermistor is different than all other screws in the ma-
chine, as an assembly poka-yoke.

 
Removing outdoor fan motor
1
Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-
ving service cover in this chapter.
Remove the air outlet grille according to the section Remo-
ving air outlet grille in this chapter.
Remove the upper cover according to the section Remo-
ving upper cover in this chapter.
Disassembly the fan blade by removing the cap nuts and
washers fixing the fan blade onto the motor shaft.
If the fan blade get stuck when trying to remove it, use a
puller to disassembly the fan.
2
No. Part
1 Upper cover 3
2 Fan motor lead wire
3 Motor clamp
4 Fan motor

11

293
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Fan components and technical features

Power supply 3N~ 380-415V 50Hz
PCB5
DC fan motor PCN203
Fan motor comp.No. CN201
PCB3
AC fan motor
PCN404 (White)
DC Fan Motor M6 Screw with spacer x 4
Screw for motor fixing
AC Fan Motor M8 Screw x 4
1 2
No. Part
1 Motor clamp
2 Fan motor lead wire 4
Motor clamp and wiring fixing position 3
3 Cable tie
4 DC fan motor 5
5 AC fan motor

Remove the fan motor connector from the PCB3 and PCB5
at the electrical box.
• Cut off the cable tie that fixes the lead wire of the fan
motor.
• Remove the four (4) screws that fix the motor to the mo-
tor clamp. 3
1
Fix the motor wire with the cable tie or the cord clamp. If not,
it may cause the disconnection of the fan motor’s lead wire. 2
In order to avoid cutting edges, mount the rubber bush at
the partition plate when inserting the motor wire through it.
If not, it may cause the disconnection to the fan motor’s
lead wire.

No. Part
1 Partition plate
2 Cord holder or cable tie Install DC motor to this position
3 Rubber bush facing down the trap

note
• When assembling the motor, ensure the cables section directly downwards. Fix the protection tube edge end
downwards to ensure water from keeping inside it
• Fix the motor wires onto the motor clamp with a cable tie to prevent them from collisioning the fun blades.
• Assembling the fan blade: Insert the skidding protection part of fan boss in accordance with the cutting part
of the motor shaft, and fix the screw after dismounting the screwed part of the shaft. (Tightening Torque of 20
N.m)
• When connecting the motor wire, check to ensure that the colors of the connectors on the PCB3 and PCB5 are
matched with the wires.
• Fix the air outlet grille firmly to the shroud.

294
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing the compressor

Remove the service cover and the lower part of the service panel according to the section Removing service cover and
the section Removing lower part of service panel and rear panel. In case that the outdoor unit is installed close to a wall
closely, sepparate first the outdoor unit from the wall.
Collect the refrigerant from the liquid stop valve, the gas stop valve and the check joint at the piping.
Open the sound insulation cover wrapped around the compressor and remove the terminal box cover at the compressor
fixed by one (1) screw. Disconnect the compressor wires in the terminal box and remove the sound insulation cover.

note
Check and take note of each terminal number and indications for its correct connection at the reasembling pro-
cess. If wires are connected in incorrect order, it will lead to a compressor failure.

Remove the rubber cap and the thermistor on the top of the
compressor. 1
Remove the crankcase heater (Oil heater on the lower
case).

No. Part
2
1 Upper cover
2 Rear panel
7 3
3 Check joint
4 Crankcase heater
4
5 Rear pipe cover
6 Lower part of service panel
5
7 Valve stay

No. Part
1 Sound-proof cover
Direction to remove the cover
2 Cut part
3 Oil heater
1

2
11
3

295
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

No. Part
1
1 Thermistor holder 2

2 Holder
3 Td Thermistor
4 Thermistor fixing plate 3
5 4
5 Rubber cap Th Thermistor
6 Compressor

No. Part
1 Indication of terminal number
2 Terminal box cover 1

3 Compressor wires

No. Part Details for compressor

1 Compressor wires (3 wires) terminals
2 Fix it with screw

2
1

note
• The compressor is connected by brazing. Check to ensure whether there are flammable things around or not
when using a burner for pipe connections. If you do not´, oil existing pipe inside may ignite.
• Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the atmosphere for a long period in order to avoid water and foreign
particles entering into the refrigerant cycle. After removing the compressor, replace it quickly. If it is exposed
to the ambiance for a long period, seal both suction and discharge pipes.
• Remove the cap for the compressor just before replacing the compressor. Before assembling the compressor,
seal the suction pipe and discharge pipe with tape to protect the compressor interior from foreign particles.
Remove the tape when connecting the pipes.
• Match the terminal No. with the mark band No. when reassembling. If the wiring is connected incorrectly, the
compressor may be damaged due to reverse rotation.
• If there is a clearance between the oil heater and the compressor due to wire overlapping, excessive heat is
generated there. Then the oil heater is failed due to overheating. When mounting the reassembled oil heater,
this point should be taken into account.
• If the oil heater lead wire is caught on the spring, the lead wire may be cut due to vibration. When reassembling,
attention should be paid to the lead wire.

CAUTION
All compressor pipes must be brazed to be connected to the refrigerant circuit. Ensure that all the sourrounding
is free of flammable objects and liquids when performing piping brazing work.

296
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Remove the suction pipe and the discharge pipe from the
compressor. Isolate the wires and electrical components to
1
protect them from the burner flame when brazing the con-
nection pipes.

No. Part
2
1 Suction pipe
2 Discharge pipe

Remove the two (2) nuts fixing the compressor and remove
the compressor from the unit by lifting it. Slightly incline it Cover pipes with wet cloth
forward and lift.
For brazing the compressor connection pipes, first cool
down the compresor piping side covering it with wet clooth.
Then brazing material will not enter into the compressor.
If the brazing material enters the compressor, it will cause
compressor failures.

Fixation of the compressor to the bottom plate

Compressor position 1 2 3 4
See compressor position table below
Vibration-proof rubber 1    
Vibration-proof rubber 2   – –

Nut   – –

No. Part
1 Nut and washer
2 Vibration-Proof rubber 1
3 Vibration-Proof rubber 2 1
3

Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of the indicated

removing procedures.
2
• Tighten the screws (U, V and W) for compressor wires
with 2.5 N.m.
• Fix the lead wire firmly.
• Attach the oil heater firmly to the compressor and fix it
with the spring.

note
Fix the lead wire for the compressor firmly using a cable tie to aviod contacting the metal sheet sharp edges and
the high temperature piping.
11

297
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 Removing high pressure switch and control

pressure switch

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving service cover in this chapter. 1

Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the

section Removing the compressor in this chapter. 4

Disconnect the fasten terminals from the pressure switches.

• Cut the high pressure switch (63H1) and control pressu-
re switch (63H2) from the brazing neck using a burner. 2

No. Part
1 Upper cover 5
2 Rear cover 3
3 Pressure switch for control (63L)
4 Electrical box
5 Brazing
6
6 Discharge pipe

No. Part
1 High pressure switch (63H1)
2 Pressure switch for control (63H2)

 
Opening electrical box (P-mounting plate)
1 2
Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-
ving the service cover in this chapter.
• Remove the six (6) screws fixing the electrical box. Open
the P-mounting plate by rotating it 90 degrees to the left.

No. Part
1
1 Upper cover 2

2 P-Mounting plate
3 2 Screws

3
danger
3
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W” 3
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON
in order to avoid an electrical shock.

298
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 Removing the coils for the reversing and

solenoid valves (SVA1, SVA2 and SVF)

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo- 1

ving service cover in this chapter.
3
Open the P-mounting plate according to the section Ope-
ning electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in this chapter.

No. Part
1 Upper cover
2 Rear cover
3 Electrical box 2

No. Part
1 SVA2
2 SVF
3 Reversing valve coil
4 SVA1

1 2 3 4

3N~ 380-415V 50Hz

No. Part
1 PCN7 (SVA2)
2 PCN6 (RVR) 1
3 PCN402 (SVA1, SVF) 2

11
3

note
• Do not touch the electrical components when the LED201 (Red), located on “W” surface PCB is ON in order to
avoid electrical shock.
• Remove the connectors on the control PCB of the electrical box.
• Remove the reversing valve coil by removing the screw fixing the coil.

299
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing expansion valve coil

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo- 1

ving service cover.
Open the P-mounting plate according to the section Ope-
ning electrical box (P-Mounting Plate) in this chapter.

danger
• Check that the LED201 (red) located on the “W”
surface PCB is OFF when opening the P-mounting
plate.
• Do not touch the electrical components when
LED201 (Red) located on the “W” surface PCB is ON
in order to avoid an electrical shock.
Remove the CN5A connector on the control PCB of the
electrical box.
Hold the expansion valve coil and slightly rotate, then pull it
up. Refer to the figure below to replace the electrical valve.
The lock mechanism is equipped with the expansion valve
coil. Check to ensure that the expansion valve coil is locked.

No. Part
1 Electronic expansion valve coil

300
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing reversing valve

Remove the service cover and the rear service panel accor-
ding to the section Removing Service Cover and the section 1
Removing lower part of service panel and rear service pa-
nel in this chapter. 2
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the 4
section Removing compressor.
Remove the reversing valve coil according to the section 3 1
Removing reversing valve coil.
3
Remove one (1) fixing screw for the valve-mounting plate. 1
Remove the stop valve at the gas side from the valve-
mounting plate by removing the two (2) screws.
Remove the reversing valve assemblies from the 4 brazed
1
parts where it is fixed. Remove the brazing of the reversing
valve and the stop valve at the gas using a blowtorch. Cool 5
down the piping side covering it with wet cloth, in order to
avoid brazing material entering the reversing valve. Protect
the connecting wires and pipe insulation from the brazing
frame.
Remove the reversing valves from its assemblies 4 brazed 6
parts .
2
Perform the brazing with a blowtorchto remove and reas-
semble the reversing valve by cooling the pipes first with
wet cloth in order to avoid brazing material entering the re-
versing valve.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing pro-
cedures contained in this chapter. When SFV is removed,
fix it according to the section Removing the Reversing Valve
and the Solenoid Valve contained in this chapter.

No. Part
1 Brazing
2 Reversing valve
3 Screw
4 Mounting plate
5 Compressor
6 Cover by wet cloth

11

301
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing expansion valve

Remove the service cover and rear service panel accor-

ding to the section Removing Service Cover and the section 1
Removing Lower Part of Service Panel and Rear Service
Panel. 2
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the
section Removing Compressor.
Remove the coils according to the section Removing Elec-
tronic Expansion Valve Coil.
Remove the brazing as shown in the figure below.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EV0): 2 brazing parts.
Perform the brazing to remove and reassemble the electro-
nic expansion valve by cooling with wet cloth.
Protect the connecting wires and pipe insulation from bra-
zing flame.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing pro-
cedures.

No. Part
1 Expansion valve (EV0)
2 Brazing part

302
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing solenoid valve

Remove the service cover and the rear service panel according to the sections Removing Service Cover and Removing
lower part of service panel and rear panel, described in this chapter .
Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the section Removing compressor in this chapter.
Remove the solenoid valve coil according to the section Removing coils for reversing valve and solenoid valve (SVA1,
SVA2 and SVF) in this chapter.
Remove the brazing and flare nuts as shown in the figure below. Using a blowtorch and previously cooling the pipe side
with wet cloth in order to avoid brazing material entering the reversing valve.
-- Solenoid Valve (SVA1): 2 brazing parts
-- Solenoid Valve (SVA2): 2 brazing parts
-- Solenoid Valve (SVF): 2 brazing coils
Perform the brazing to remove and reassemble the solenoid valve.
Protect the connecting wires and pipe insulation from the brazing flame.
Remove the flare nuts with two spanners to avoid twisting.
Reassemble the parts in the reverse order of removing order of removing procedures.
Fix the solenoid valve SVF as shown in the figure below.

Pipe insulation
1
Attach capillary tube with
pipe insulation closely. S-Pipe

Fix by cable tie

Wind butil sheet around

strainer and capillary tube
1

No. Part
1 Brazing
2 Flare connection
11

303
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing electrical components

danger
• Do not touch the electrical components.
• When handling the PCB1, take care not to use excessive force to avoid damage.

Remove the service cover according to section Removing 3N~ 380-415V 50Hz
service cover in this chapter.
1
-- Disconnect all the connectors in the PCB.
-- Remove the PCB by sliding four (4) holders in the 2
arrow direction.
-- Remove the PCB for power distribution of the com-
pressor and the motor.

No. Part
1 PCB3
2 PCB1 for control
3 Transformer
4 Terminal board
5 PCB5

5 4

Removing the relay PCB

-- Remove the service cover according to the section
Removing Service Cover in this chapter.
-- Disconnect all the wires connected to the relay PCB.

No. Part
1
1 Holder (4 pcs.)
2 PCB 1 for control

2
note
• Do NOT touch the electrical components of the PCB.
• Do NOT apply strong force to the electrical compo-
nents and PCBs to avoid failure.

304
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing inverter components

danger
• Do not touch the electrical parts when LED201 (Red) on the PCB2 is lit to prevent from an electrical shock.
• When replacing the transistor module (IPM) and diode module (DM) on heat radiation fin, slightly apply the
heat conducting silicon grease (Manufacture: Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd, Product No.: G-746) over the fin
contact surface.
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When reassembling, the terminals have to be connected to the
correct numbers . If incorrectly connected, malfunctions or damages will occur.
• Correctly insert two wires of U and V phases for the power cable of inverter compressor into the current sen-
sor, CTU and CTV on PCB2. Connect Phase U power cable with the current sensor Phase U (CTU) and Phase
V power line with current sensor Phase V (CTV). If connected incorrectly, malfunction or electrical component
damage will occur.
• When mounting PCB and the sheet metal part for PCB, pay attention not to clamp the electrical wiring together.
• Screws, bushes and collars are used for fixing inverter PCB. Check to ensure that the bushes and collars are
used for PCB remounting. If not used, it may cause malfunction.
• In case of replacing control PCB, set all the dip switches as the same position before replacing. If not, mal-
function may occur. Refer to the manual attached with the service PCB.
• Do not apply strong force to the electric components and PCBs to avoid damage.
• Do NOT touch the electrical components when the LED201 (Red) is ON to avoid electrical shock.

Remove the service cover according to the section Remo-

ving service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate by rotating 90 degrees to the left
according to the section Opening electrical box (P-Mounting
Plate) in this chapter.

Removing the PCB2

1
Check to ensure that the LED201 (Red) of the PCB2 is OFF.
After removing the three (3) M3 fixing screws, remove the 2
bushes and the collars from the PCB2. When reassembling 7
the components, attach those bushes and collars.

No. Part
1 Middle part of holder
2 Holder
3 Collar
4 PCB3
5 Bush
3
6 Screw (M3)
7 PCB

11
4

6 5

note
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When reassembling, the terminals have to be connected to the
correct numbers . If incorrectly connected, malfunctions or damages will occur.
• Check to ensure that the electrical wires will not be caught between the assembled electrical components and
the mounting plates when the PCB2 is reassembled.

305
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

Removing diode module and transistor module

danger
Do NOT touch the electrical components when the
LED201 (Red) on PCB2 is ON to avoid electrical shock.
Check to ensure that the LED201 (Red) of the PCB2 is off.
Disconnect all the wirings connected to the diode module as Diode module
shown in the figure: 1
-- Disconnect the wirings of the terminals +, - , U, V, W
on the diode module.
-- Remove the two (2) screws fixing the diode module. 2
-- Remove the diode module from the electrical box. 2

No. Part
1 5 Screws (M5)
2 Fixing screw (M5)

Disconnect all the wirings connected to the transistor modu-

le as shown in the figure:
-- Disconnect the wirings of connector CN2, CN206
and CN207.
-- Disconnect the wirings from P, N, U, V, W on the
transistor module.
-- Remove the three (4) screws fixing the PCB2 and
then remove the PCB2 from the transistor module.
-- Remove the four (4) fixing screws on the transistor
module. PCB2 and transistor module
CN3
-- Remove the transistor module from the electrical 2
box. PCN302

No. Part PCN301

1 Screw (M5) 3
2 Screws for PCB2 (M3)
3 Fixing screws for transistor module (M4)
1
3
3
note
• The correct position of the marks on the PCB2 is LED201
upside down when being assembled. 2
1
• Identify the terminal Nos. with the mark band Nos.
when reassembling. If incorrectly connected, mal-
function or damage will occur.
• Check to ensure that the electrical wires will not
be caught between the mounting electrical compo-
nents and the mounting plates when the PCB2 is
remounted.
• Apply silicon grease evenly on the whole rear side
of the diode module and the transistor module when
mounting. Silicon grease is available as a field-su-
pplied accessory.

306
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Removing other electrical components

danger
Do NOT touch the electrical components when the LED201 (Red) on PCB2 is ON to avoid electrical shock.
Remove the service cover according to the section Removing service cover in this chapter.
Open the P-mounting plate by rotating it 90 degrees to the left according to the section Opening electrical box (P-Mounting
Plate) in this chapter.
Check to ensure the LED201 (Red) of the inverter PCB is off when opening P-mounting plate.
Remove other electrical components according to the procedure below, and the figures on Removing service cover in this
chapter.

note
• Disconnect all the wires connected with the smoothing capacitor (CB, CB1, CB2, CA).
• The wire has polar characters. Identify the wire mark band and the indication on the smoothing capacitor when
wire connecting.
• Remove the two (2) screws fixing the smoothing capacitor and remove the smoothing capacitor.
• Disconnect all the wires connecting with the magnetic contactor (CMC1).
• Remove the two (2) screws fixing the magnetic contactor and remove the magnetic contactor.
• Remove the four (4) screws fixing the reactor and remove the reactor (DCL).
• Disconnect all the wires connected with the noise filter (NF1).
• Identify the terminal numbers with mark band. When reassembling, the terminals have to be connected to the
correct numbers . If incorrectly connected, malfunctions or damages will occur.

11

307
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.2  Indoor unit

CAUTION
• Before performing any of the service operations described in this chapter, turn all the main switches off and place se-
curity lockers or convenient warning indicators in order to prevent them from turning on accidentally.
• In case of blocked or sticked parts, use appropriated tools and eventually lubricants to release them.
• In case of sharped edged parts, as covers, use security gloves to avoid getting injured.
• When performing brazing work, besides security gloves it is a must to wear convenient eye protection.

11.2.1  Removing service cover

1 First, open the user’s interface service cover.

2 Unscrew the two screws with the nylon washers bet-
ween the screw and the cover.
3 Slide the service cover upward and remove it turning it
from your left side.

CAUTION
• Take care, do not damage the LCD when removing
the service cover.
• Pay attention of no falling off the service cover.
• Take care when removing service cover; the parts
inside the unit could be hot.

note
Check cover assembling label sticked on the Electrical
Box for reference or Chapter Cover assembly for reverse
instruction.

308
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.2.2  Replacing electrical components

danger
• Disconnect the Yutaki S from the power supply before touching any of the parts. Do not touch the electrical
box before disconnecting it in order to avoid an electrical shock.
• When handling the electrical box, take care of components. Do not apply excessive force to them, in order to
avoid damaging the electrical components.

 
Removing electrical box components

1 Remove electrical box cover, for accessing to the elec-

trical components (x4 screws).
Electrical box components

Item Part name Remarks

Printed circuit board
1 Main printed circuit board for control of the unit.
(PCB1)
Printed circuit board Secondary printed circuit board for additional
2
(PCB2) control signals.
3 Transformers (TR1/TR2) Current transformer.
Electrical heater Heater contactors for the control step and cut
4
contactors (AR1/2/3) off system.
5 Pump contactor (52P) Water pump contactor.
6 Noise filters (NK1~9) Noise filter for PCB current peak protection.
Electrical heater fuses
7 Fuses for electrical heater protection.
(EF1/2/3)
8 Water pump fuse (EF4) Fuse for water pump protection.
9 Terminal Board 1 (TB1) Terminal board for power supply.
Terminal board for indoor/outdoor communica-
10 Terminal Board 2 (TB2) tion and Intelligent room thermostat and acces-
sory devices.

 
Replace electrical box

1 Remove Electrical box cover, for accessing to the electrical components (x4 screws).
2 Removing Electrical box:
• Step 1: Disconnect all external devices from Terminal
Board
• Step 2: Disconnect all internal unit devices inside elec-
trical box:
-- Step 2a (Indoor unit devices 1)

11
ŠŠ Electrical Heater power connection:
Disconnect AR2-2 wire
Disconnect AR3-2 wire
Disconnect AR3-4 wire
Disconnect TB1-N wire

309
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

-- Step 2b (Indoor unit devices 2)

ŠŠ Water flow switch wire (CN25)
ŠŠ Water pressure switch wire (CN24)
ŠŠ Electrical heater thermal fuse wire (CN23)
ŠŠ Electrical heater surface thermostat wire (THe)
ŠŠ Water pump wire (CN23)

-- Step 2c (Indoor unit sensors)

ŠŠ Water inlet sensor (THMWI) (CN9)
ŠŠ Water outlet sensor HP (THMWOHP)(CN14)
ŠŠ Water outlet sensor (THMWO)(CN13)
ŠŠ Refrigerant liquid sensor (THML)(CN11)
ŠŠ Refrigerant gas sensor (THMG)(CN12)

-- Step 2d (Expansion valve and LCD Controller)

ŠŠ Expansion valve wires (CN7A) (*1)
ŠŠ LCD Controller wire (CN1 of LCD Controller) (*2)

note
(*1): 8/10HP: Disconnect CN402 & CN403 from
PCB3.
(*2): Check Replace LCD controller instruction.

• Step 3: After disconnecting all internal devices from the electrical box, remove electrical box as shown:

-- Step 3a (Remove fixed screws)

ŠŠ Remove internal electrical box fixation screws
(x3) (in the left side)

-- Step 3b (Remove wires)

ŠŠ Turn Electrical box and removes all cables from
the packing glands.

310
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

-- Step 3c (Remove hinges screws)

ŠŠ Remove x6 hinges screws on the right side of
electrical box. *

note
* Pay attention to avoid Electrical box falling down
when removing screws.

3 Assembly new electrical box by perform the procedure

above in reverse way.

 
Replacing thermistors (THMWO, THMWOHP,
THMWI, THML, THMG)

danger
Disconnect the Yutaki S from the power supply before
touching any of the parts. Do not touch the electrical
box before disconnecting it in order to avoid an elec-
trical shock.
When handling the electrical box, take care of compo-
nents. Do not apply excessive force to them, in order to
avoid damaging the electrical components and failures.
To disconnect these components properly from the Thermistor for water
outlet PHEX tempe-
PCB, see the Electrical wiring diagram chapter of this ma- rature (THMWOHP)
nual.
Cover the thermistors with the cork tape or pipe insu-
lation according to each location. Both materials are
factory supplied. Replace them if damaged during the
servicing.
Thermistor for refrige-
1 Remove service cover. rant gas temperature
2 Remove the electrical box cover. (THMG)

3 Disconnect these components properly from the con-

nector of PCB 2: Thermistor for water
outlet temperature
THMWO --> CN13 (THMWO)

THMWOHP --> CN14

Thermistor for water
THMWI --> CN9 inlet temperature
(THMWI)
THML --> CN11
THMG --> CN12 Thermistor for refrige-
4 Remove the wire sensor from the electrical box. rant liquid temperature
(THML)
5 Remove the pipe insulation of thermistor.
6 Remove special clamp that is attached with copper pipe
and sensor.
11
CAUTION
In case of P-Spring deforming, it needs to be replaced.

311
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

7 Install new thermistor using P-Spring and Butyl Sheet as shown in the following drawing:
Replacing water thermistor Replacing water thermistor

Refrigerant pipe
Liquid/Gas
thermistor P-Sprint
Water piping Water THMG
Refrigerant
thermistor Pipe THML
Liquid/Gas pipe
THMWO piping thermistor
THMWI
THMWOHP
Butyl
Use two P-Springs for Butyl Butyl sheet
each water piping THM sheet sheet
located as shown. Then
cover with butyl sheet
THM Vinyl must be
covered with Butyl sheet

8 Install thermistor wire by perform the process in reverse.

 
Replacing LCD controller

note
To disconnect this component properly from the Electrical Box, see the Electrical wiring diagram chapter of this
manual.

CAUTION
• Pay attention do not touch the micro and other components on LCD controller PCB. (This is malfunction pro-
tection by static electricity).
• Pay attention do not disconnect the flat cable between LCD Buttons and LCD PCB.

1 Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit

bracket from the front section as indicated.

2 Disconnect connector CN1

3 Replace LCD controller by a new one.

312
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Replace electrical heater safety surface thermostat (THe)

note
To disconnect this component properly from the Electrical box, see the Electrical wiring diagram chapter of this
manual.
1 Remove service cover.
2 Disconnect the safety thermostat (THe) by pulling
upwards the faston connections.

3 Open the insulation carefully over the fixing nuts (both

sides).

4 Remove x2 nuts (M3) by using box spanner.

5 Install the Surface thermostat by using thermic paste on the contact surface.

note
Be sure that the contact surface of the new thermostat is completely joined with the heater surface.

6 Tighten the nuts with box spanner.

7 Cover the surface thermostat with the insulation remove
in point 2.

11
8 Connect again the faston connections in to a new sur-
face thermostat and cover it by using cap attached with
the wire.

note
Ensure a perfect insulation inside Surface thermostat,
in case of not good insulation can be a dangerous by
condensing water in to the top of the heater.

313
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

11.2.3  Replacing hydraulic components

danger
• Disconnect the Yutaki S from the power supply before touching any of the parts. Do not touch the electrical
box before disconnecting it in order to avoid an electrical shock.
• Wait minimum 10 minutes or more from all power supplies have been turned OFF.
• In case of replacing Hydraulic parts, drain water from the unit its needed. Close Shutdown valves and open
the drain valves.

 
Replace water flow switch (WFS)

note
To disconnect this component properly from the Electrical box, see the Electrical wiring diagram chapter of this
manual.
1 Remove service cover.
2 Remove the electrical box cover.
3 Disconnect the water flow switch (WTS) from electrical
box by disconnect CN25 connector.

4 Unscrew the flow switch nut.

5 Install the new one by performing the procedures above

in reverse way.

note
• Be sure of the position of the flow switch. The arrow
has to look down to indicate the correct flow direc-
tion.
Flow Sw
• Be careful, do not lose the gasket of the Water Flow. direction
• Check the gasket. If it is defective, replace by a new
one.

314
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Replace low water pressure switch (LWPS)

note
To disconnect this component properly from the Electrical box, see the Electrical wiring diagram chapter of this
manual.

1 Remove service cover.

2 Disconnect the low water pressure switch (LWPS by pu-
lling upwards the faston connections.

3 Unscrew the low water pressure switch (LWPS).

4 Install the new one by performing the procedures above

in reverse way.

note
• Be sure the faston connections of low water pressu-
re switch (LWPS).
• Connect low water pressure wires into 1-2 sockets.
• Cover free socked by using an empty faston.

11
• Apply Teflon to the thread of Union before assem-
bling.

315
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

 
Replace water pump (WP1)

note
To disconnect this component properly from the electrical box, see the Electrical wiring diagram chapter of this
manual.
1 Remove service cover.
2 Disconnect the water pump 1 by CN22 connector.

3 Unscrew the both water piping nuts that fixing the water
pump.

4 Install the new one by performing the procedures above

Pump
in reverse way. Direction

note
• Be sure of the position of the water pump
• Be careful, do not lose the gaskets of the water
pump.
• Check the gaskets. If it is defective, replace by a
new ones.
• Remember to put pump insulation before pump ins-
tallation.

 
Replace manometer

1 Remove service cover.

2 Open electrical box, unscrews fixing nuts and turn left.
3 Remove clamps which attach the Manometer capillary
pipe with steel plate.

316
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

4 Unscrew manometer capillary joint from the water pipe.

5 Press two rings of the manometer rear side and remove

it passing the capillary through the hole of the LCD con-
troller support.

6 Install the new one by performing the procedures above

in reverse way.

note
Be sure of the position of the manometer.
Apply teflon to the thread of union before assembling.

 
Replace safety valve

1 Remove service cover.

2 Remove clamp that are attached with safety valve and
drain pipe.

3 Unscrew safety valve from the top of Electrical heater. 11

317
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

4 Unscrew union pipe from safety valve.

Union
5 Install the new one by performing the procedures above pipe Safety
valve
in reverse way.

note Final location of the draining hole must

be into the indicated angle area (90º)
• Be sure of the position of the safety valve.
• Apply teflon to the thread of unions before assem-
bling. Drain pipe
Clamp

Safety valve & union

 
Replace air purger

1 Remove service cover

2 Disconnect drain hose of the air purger as shown in the
drawing:

3 Unscrew air purger from the top of the electrical heater.

318
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

4 Unscrew fitting of air purger. Final location of the draining hole must
5 Install the new one by performing the procedures above be into the indicated angle area (90º)
in reverse way.

Drain hose

note
Be sure of the position of the air purge:

Air purge

 
Replace electrical heater

1 Remove service cover.

2 Remove electrical box cover.
3 Disconnect electrical heater device inside electrical box.
-- 3a (Indoor unit devices 1)
ŠŠ Electrical Heater power connection:
Disconnect AR2-2 wire
Disconnect AR3-2 wire
Disconnect AR3-4 wire
Disconnect TB1-N wire
-- 3b (Indoor unit devices 2)
ŠŠ Electrical heater thermal fuse wire (CN23)
ŠŠ Electrical heater surface thermostat wire (THe)
from the faston connections.

4 Turn electrical box and removes all cables from the pac-
king glands.

11
5 Unscrew the two water piping nuts connect to the elec-
trical heater.

Water piping nuts

319
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

6 Unscrew safety valve as shown in section Replace safe-

ty valve.
7 Unscrew air purger shown in section Replace air purger.
8 Unscrew the four screws fixing the electrical heater.

9 Install the new one by performing the procedures above

in reverse way.

note
• Check safety valve notes when disassembling/assembling.
• Check air purger notes when disassembling/assembling.
• Be careful do not lose the gaskets of the water pump.
• Check the gaskets, if it is defective, replace by a new ones.
• After assembling electrical heater, check that the electrical heater is completely filled with water by operating
pressure of safety valve.

 
Replace water strainer
• In case of maintenance (cleaning) or replacing mesh:
The water strainer should be clear or replaced as appropria-
te for system condition.
1 Remove service cover.
2 Unscrew (3) water strainer as shown.

3 Replace or clean the mesh.

Mesh
Gas Tap
4 Install water strainer by performing the procedures abo-
ve in reverse way.

note
Check the gasket, it is recommended to replace by a
new one.

320
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

• In case of replacing water strainer entire.

1 Remove service cover.
2 Remove insulation of water strainer pipes.

3 Remove brazing from the two places, and then remove

water strainer.

Brazing
 
Replace expansion vessel

1 Remove service cover.

2 Remover electrical box cover.
3 Turn electrical box by removing screws.
4 Closes shut down valves and open the drain valves.
Drain water from the bottom side of the expansion vessel by
unscrewing the lower place.

Fix NUT

Drain CAP

5 Unscrew the copper pipe connected to the pressure

gage from expansion vessel.

6 Unscrew (3) nuts on the bottom for the expansion ves-

sel.
11
note
Be sure that the expansion vessel is being subjected
all the time.

321
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

7 Install new one by performing the procedures above in Expansion vessel connection
reverse way.

note Gasket (2)

• Be careful do not lose the gasket of the expansion
vessel.
• Check the gasket (2), if it is defective, replace by a
new one.

11.2.4  Replacing refrigerant parts

danger
• Disconnect the Yutaki S from the power supply before touching any of the parts. Do not touch the electrical
box before disconnecting it in order to avoid an electrical shock.
• Wait minimum 10 minutes or more from all power supplies have been turned OFF.

note
• In case of replacing Refrigerant parts, in some cases drain water from the unit it is needed. Close the shutdown
valves and open the drain valves.
• In case of replacing refrigerant parts, collect refrigerant to the outdoor unit by pump down procedure.
• All refrigerant parts are connected by brazing. Check to ensure whether there are flammable things around or
not when using a burner for pipe connections, if not, oil existing pipe inside may ignite.
• Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the atmosphere for a long period in order to avoid mixing the water and
foreign particles into the refrigerant cycle. After removing refrigerant parts, replace it quickly. If exposed for a
long period, seal the liquid pipe and gas pipe.

 
Replace expansion valve

1 Remove service cover.

2 Remove the CN26 connector on the expansion valve
control.
3 The butyl sheet is adhered around the piping of the heat
exchanger, the electronic expansion valve and the inlet
piping and outlet piping of the electronic expansion val-
ve. Remove the butyl sheet of the surface of the piping,
the coil part of the expansion valve and the part of the
valve body.
In case of replacing mixing valve motor (drive part):
4 Prepare two spanners. Hold the part of the valve body
with one spanner and loosen the lock nut with another
spanner by turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
5 Turn the lock nut by a few turns. Then, the drive part
separates from the screw and can be removed.
6 Prepare the new drive part for replacement (servicing
part) with the position of the driver (drive screw) already
adjusted.

note
During replacement work, pay attention to the sepa-
ration part and prevent the dust, foreign particle, etc.
from entering into the separation part. (The sensitive
part of the valve is its mechanical system.)Do not da-
mage the junction part of the valve with the tools.

322
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

7 Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold them with
their axes matching and attach the lock nut to the screw
part of the valve body.
8 Tighten the lock nut with spanner after tightening lightly
by hand. The tightening torque must be within the range
of: 12 N•m – 15 N•m.
9 After the replacement, attach the electronic expansion
valve in the reverse procedures for removing. Apply the
butyl sheet firmly.

note
Do not apply great forces, such as the rotating torque
and the bending load, to the motor by holding the motor
by hand when you are tightening the lock nut. Although
the direction of the eccentric part of the motor is as-
sembled with the eccentric part of the motor directed
toward the counter direction of the fittings for piping at
the valve body, the alteration of this direction does not
affect the open/close function of the valve.
Therefore, the adjustment of the direction of the motor
part is not required if the position of the motor is moved
toward the rotating direction after the replacement, as
shown in the figure. However, make sure that the direc- Brazing
tion of the motor for the coil of the electronic expansion
valve does not touch other piping and the side plate of
the electrical box.
In case of In case of replacing mixing valve
10 Remove brazing from the two places, and then remove
expansion valve.
11 Install new one by performing the procedures above in
reverse way.

 
Replace plate heat exchanger

In case of remove plate heat exchanger and components.

1 Remove service cover.
2 Remover electrical box cover.
3 Turn electrical box by removing screws.
4 Remove manometer by perform procedure Replace ma-
nometer.
5 Remove LCD controller by perform procedure Replace
LCD controller.
6 Remove LCD control support by unscrewing nuts.

11
7 Remove drain stay by unscrew nuts.
8 Remove water band and refrigerant band.

323
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

9 Remove low water pressure switch (LWPS) by perform

procedure Replace low water pressure switch.
10 Unscrew the copper pipe connected to the pressure
gage from expansion vessel.

11 Remove refrigerant liquid thermistor (THML) from pipe

by perform procedure Replace thermistors.
12 Remove refrigerant gas thermistor (THMG) from pipe by
perform procedure Replace thermistors.
13 Remove water inlet thermistor (THMWI) from pipe by per-
form procedure Replace thermistors.
14 Remove water outlet plate heat exchanger thermistor
(THMWOHP) from pipe by perform procedure Replace
thermistors.
15 Disconnect expansion valve connection (CN26).
16 Unscrew the water piping nut connect to the electrical
heater.

Water piping
nut
17 Unscrew the two nuts holding the plate heat exchanger.

Screw nuts

324
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 11  Servicing

18 Remove plate heat exchanger with water and refrigerant

pipes and expansion valve.
19 Install new one by performing the procedures above in
reverse way.

note
• Be careful do not lose the gaskets.
• Check the gaskets, if it is defective, replace by a
new ones.
In case on remove only the heat exchanger.
1 Remove service cover.
2 Remover electrical box cover.
3 Turn electrical box by removing screws.
4 Remove manometer by perform procedure Replace ma-
nometer.
5 Remove LCD controller by perform procedure Replace
LCD controller.
6 Remove LCD control control support by unscrew nuts.

7 Remove Refrigerant liquid thermistor (THML) from pipe

by perform procedure Replace thermistors.
8 Remove brazing from the four places (refrigerant side
and water side).

Brazing

Brazing

9 Unscrew the two nuts holding the plate heat exchanger.

11
Screw nuts

10 Remove plate heat exchanger .

11 Install new one by performing the procedures above in
reverse way.

325
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

12. Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g

Index

12.1. Troubleshooting procedure.................................................................................................................. 300

12.1.1. Alarm code............................................................................................................................................... 300
12.1.2. Troubleshooting by alarm code................................................................................................................ 303
12.1.3. Troubleshooting in check mode................................................................................................................ 370
12.1.4. Troubleshooting using the 7 segment display (outdoor unit).................................................................... 371
12.1.5. Procedure of checking other main parts................................................................................................... 377

12

327
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

12.1  Troubleshooting procedure

12.1.1  Alarm code

Alarm Code Indication on Remote Control Switch:

Alarm indication Alarm code

 
Alarm code table

Retry
Alarm
stop Origin Detail of abnormality Main cause
code
code
Activation of outdoor unit protection device
02 - Outdoor High pressure interrupting device activated
(Except for Alarm Codes 41, 42)
Outdoor fuse meltdown, indoor/outdoor connection wiring
03 - Outdoor Transmission error
(breaking, wiring error, etc.)
Control PCB – Inverter PCB connection wiring
04 - Outdoor Inverter transmission abnormality
(breaking, wiring error, etc.)
05 - Outdoor Power phase detection abnormality Power source wiring open phase in indoor units
Outdoor PCB abnormality, inverter PCB abnormality, DM,
06 18 Outdoor Undervoltage, overvoltage
CB abnormality
Abnormal decrease of discharge gas superheat Excessive refrigerant, expansion valve open-locked,
07 16 Outdoor
degree fan motor locked
Shortage or leakage of refrigerant, piping clogging,
08 15 Outdoor Compressor-top Temperature over-increase
fan motor locked

11 - Indoor Water inlet thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector

12 - Indoor Water outlet thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
Indoor liquid pipe temperature thermistor abnor-
13 - Indoor Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
mality
Indoor gas pipe temperature thermistor abnor-
14 - Indoor Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
mality
15 - Indoor Water outlet C2 thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
16 - Indoor Water DHWT thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
17 - Indoor Auxiliary thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
18 - Indoor Water outlet boiler thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
19 - Indoor Water outlet HP thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
Compressor-Top temperature thermistor abnor-
20 - Outdoor Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
mality
22 - Outdoor Outdoor temperature thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
Outdoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
24 - Outdoor Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
abnormality
Outdoor/Indoor unit capacity setting error, indoor total
31 - Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor combination setting error
capacity excessively large/small

328
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Retry
Alarm
stop Origin Detail of abnormality Main cause
code
code
Indoor units with the same number in a refrigerant piping
35 - Outdoor Indoor unit number setting error
system
38 - Outdoor Outdoor protection detection circuit abnormality Outdoor PCB abnormality, error in wiring to outdoor PCB
Outdoor heat exchanger clogging/short circuit, broken
41 - Outdoor Cooling overload
outdoor fan motor
Outdoor heat exchanger clogging/short circuit, expansion
42 - Outdoor Heating overload
valve close-locked
Shortage or leakage of refrigerant, piping clogging,
47 15 Outdoor Suction pressure decrease prevention activated
expansion valve close-locked, fan motor locked
Error in CT wiring, outdoor PCB abnormality, inverter PCB
51 17 Outdoor Inverter current sensor abnormality
abnormality
Cycle abnormality, inverter PCB abnormality, DM abnor-
48 17 Outdoor Overload operation protection activation
mality, heat exchanger clogging, etc.
Compressor, ISPM abnormality, heat exchanger clogging,
53 17 Outdoor Inverter module error
etc.
Fin thermistor abnormality, heat exchanger clogging, fan
54 17 Outdoor Inverter fin temperature abnormality
motor abnormality
55 18 Outdoor Inverter non-operation Inverter not operating or broken
59 - Outdoor Inverter fin temperature thermistor abnormality Loose, disconnected, broken or short-circuited connector
b1 - Outdoor Error in address/refrigerant system setting Address/refrigerant system setting over 64
Alarm to notify damage to compressor occurs 3 times
EE - Outdoor Compressor factor alarm
within 6 hours
Water pressure or water flow is not detected in the
70 P-70 Indoor Hydraulic alarm
hydraulic cycle
71 - Indoor Water pump feedback
72 - Indoor Thermostat heater alarm High temperature is detected in electric heater T>75ºC
Mixing overheating limit protection for mixed
73 - Indoor Circuit 2 supply temperature > target temperature + offset
circuit.
74 P-74 Indoor Unit overheating limit protection Two > Tmax +5K
Freeze protection by cold water inlet, outlet
75 - Indoor
temperature detection
Freeze protection stop by indoor liquid tempera-
76 - Indoor Tl or Tg < -20ºC for 30 seconds (Only heating mode)
ture thermistor
No Opentherm communication for a continuous period of
77 - Indoor Opentherm communication failure
1 minute.
No communication for 1 hour with one or two RF recei-
78 - Indoor RF Communication failure
vers which are bound to the RF-Bridge.
Indoor No concordance between indoor and outdoor unit capa-
79 - Unit capacity setting error
-outdoor cities
No H-link communication for a continuous period of 1 mi-
Indoor-
80 - LCD H-link transmission error nute between indoor and LCD user control by connection
LCD
wiring (breaking, wiring error, etc.)

12

329
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Cause of compressor stop

When the compressor stops due any of the factors below, Stop Reason Code (d1 Code) is sent to Indoor Unit.
The Code will be overridden when another Code is sent before it.

Stop
Reason Stop Factors 52C Process
Code
02 Alarm OFF
03 Freeze protection ON
05 Momentary power failure detection in Outdoor Unit OFF
Outdoor temperature at cooling lower than -5 °C
ON
(Outdoor temperature -15 °C at annual cooling setting)
07
Outdoor air temperature and indoor suction temperature for heating (Overload condition) ON
Stop due to outdoor heating temp. lower than -20 °C (Low temp. condition) ON
10 Demand (external input) ON
Discharge pressure increase prevention for cooling and heating ON
13
Discharge pressure increase prevention for cooling and heating by control of former refrigerant piping ON

Gas shortage detection (detected by pipe temperature: gas shortage detection I) OFF
15 Gas shortage detection (detected by compressor-top temperature: gas shortage detection II) OFF
Compressor-top overheating OFF
16 Abnormal decrease of discharge gas superheat degree ON
17 Inverter trip (Instantaneous overcurrent, Electronic thermal activation, Current sensor abnormality) OFF
18 Inverter trip (Inverter undervoltage, Overvoltage, Transmission error, Microcomputer reset) OFF
19 Prevention Control for expansion valve opening deviance OFF
21 Simultaneous Twin, Triple, Quad forced Thermo OFF (other unit at Thermo OFF) ON
22 Outdoor unit Heat Start Control OFF
24 Energy saving mode Thermo OFF ON

330
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

12.1.2  Troubleshooting by alarm code

Alarm code
2 Activation of the safety device in the outdoor unit

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is indicated when one of safety devices is activated during compressor running.


Does No Is the voltage No Is the pro- No
CMC1 ON 240V or 220V exis- tective device
ting at the #1 to #3 of PCN9 Faulty PCB1
when starting? still operating?
during Y52C is ON?

Yes Yes
Yes

Does Is the
protective Yes
CMC1 turn
ON for more than device still ope- Faulty PCB1
3 seconds? rating?

Yes No

No Is the Yes
Normal PCB1 CMC1 coil Faulty CMC1
broken?

Yes

Check activation of the following safety devices and the power

source wiring.
Remove the cause after checking.  Check item
(1) High pressure switch
Connector No. Pin No.
(PSH: 4.15MPa (41.5 kgf/cm²G)) PCN9 #1 to #3

(2) Is the power source line reverse phase or open phase?

If the wiring is incorrect, perform the wiring correctly again.

12

331
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check the heat

Remove the dust or
exchanger for dust
the clogging
or for clogging

Check the air filter

Remove the dust
for dust

Insufficient air flow to the

heat exchanger Check for any obs-
(outdoor heat exchanger tacles at the inlet
Remove the obstacles
during the cooling process or or the outlet of the
indoor heat exchanger during heat exchanger
the heating process)
Check the
Secure service area
service area

Check the speed

(outdoor fan: Replace the fan motor
cooling/indoor fan: if faulty
heating)

Disconnected of the Fix the looseness or

connector reconnect the connector
Malfunction of the
expansion valve
Fully closed and Replace the
Activation of locked expansion valve
the high-pres-
sure switch
Calculate the Reduce the heat load or use
due to the
heat load a bigger unit
excessively
high discharge
pressure Check for hot air
near the ceiling Provide good circulation
(heating)
Excessively high temperature
air to the indoor unit Check for short-
Remove the
circuited air
short-circuited air
(heating)

Check for other

Remove the heat source
heat source

Measure the
discharge pressure.
Faulty pres- Replace the pressure switch
Check the continui-
sure switch if faulty
ty after the decrea-
se of the pressure
Faulty high-
pressure
switch Measure the
Insufficient Fix the looseness.
resistance using the
contacting Replace the connector
tester

Incorrect Check the

Repair the connections
connection connections

332
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check for clogging Remove the clogging

Check the connect

wiring and the Replace the connector
connectors

Check the
Faulty or malfunction of operation sound Replace the coil
the expansion valve from the coil

Check the dischar-

Replace the thermistor
ge gas thermistor

Check the
attaching state of
Reattach the thermistor
Activation of the discharge gas
the high-pres- thermistor
sure switch
due to the
Faulty gas bypass Replace the gas bypass so-
excessively Check for clogging
solenoid valve lenoid valve
high discharge
pressure
Check the cycle Charge the refrigerant
Overcharged refrigerant
operation temp. correctly

Check the air

Mixture of the non-condensa- Recharge the refrigerant after
temperature and
te gas in the refrigerant cycle the vacuum pumping
the pressure

Clogging of the
Check for clogging Remove the clogging
discharge piping

Liquid line stop valve or gas

Check the stop
line stop valve is not in Fully open the stop valves
valves
operation

Clogging of the check valve Check for clogging Replace the check valve

12

333
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
3 Abnormal transmission between the indoor units and the outdoor unit

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The
unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is displayed when an abnormal operation is maintained for three minutes after the normal transmis-
sion between the indoor units and the outdoor unit. Also, an abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds
after the micro-computer is automatically reset. The alarm is displayed when the abnormal transmission is main-
tained for 30 seconds from the starting of the outdoor unit.
-- Investigate the cause of the overcurrent and take the necessary action when the fuses are blown out or the
breaker for the outdoor unit is activated.

(Refer to the next page)

334
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

*1)
No
Is DSW5-1P
Set it correctly
(terminal resistance on
PCB1) ON?
Yes
Is the voltage
No No Check the fuses of the
Is LED1 (red) on between the termi-
PCB1 ON? nal “1” and “3” of PCB1 outdoor unit power
220V or 240V? *2) supply

Yes Yes
Is connector Yes
(PCN2, CN1) for the Plug PNC2 and CN11
Remove CN8 of PCB1
transformer loosened? correctly

Yes
Is the fuse for Yes
Is LED2 (green) Yes Replace the fuse

Outdoor unit
PCB1 blown out?
on PCB1 ON?

No No

Is LED3 (yellow) Faulty PCB1

on PCB1 flickering No
more than once in 10
seconds?

Yes
PCB1: Outdoor unit printed circuit board
Connect CN8 of PCB1
PCB1’: Indoor unit printed circuit board

Is PCB1’ setting No
non-pole operating? Set correctly

Yes
Is LED3 (yellow)
Is LED3 on Yes Yes
ON, even if CN2 of
PCB1’ ON? Faulty PCB1
PCB1’ is removed?

No
Check other indoor
Is LED 3 units
(yellow) on PCB1’ Check the wiring between the
flickering more than once in outdoor unit and the indoor unit or
Indoor unit

10 seconds? the fuse (EF1) for PCB1

Does the refrige-

ration system setting
between DSW4+RSW1 on Set correctly
PCB1 and DSW5+RSW2
on PCB1’ match?

Faulty PCB1

*1) In case that terminal resistance (DSW5-1P) is OFF when H-Link II connection is performed.
• Set the terminal resistance to ON when CN8 is removed.
12
• Set the terminal resistance to OFF when CN8 is reconnected.
*2) Check item

Power supply Faston terminal

1~ 230V 50Hz
Between 1 and 3 of PCN1 on PCB
3N~ 400V 50Hz

335
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Measure the voltage

Power failure or no power supply Supply the power
using the tester

Check the insulation Remove the short circuit and

Short circuit between wires
material for breaks replace the fuse

Measure the insulation Remove the short circuit to

Short-circuited wire to ground
Blown out fuse resistance ground and replace the fuse
for the power
source or ac- Measure the resistance
tivation of the Replace the comp.
Faulty comp. motor between the wires and
outdoor unit and the fuse
the insulation resistance
breaker

Measure the resistance

Replace the outdoor unit fan
Faulty outdoor unit fan motor between the wires and
motor and the fuse
the insulation resistance

Check the insulation Remove the short circuit and

Short circuit between wires
material for breaks replace the fuse

Blown out fuse Short circuit of the control Measure the insulation Remove the short circuit and
for circuit (to ground) resistance replace the fuse
control circuit
or activation Faulty solenoid coil for the magne- Measure the Replace the magnetic switch
of outdoor unit tic switch for the comp. motor resistance of coil and the fuse
breaker
Measure the resistance
Failure of the outdoor unit Replace the outdoor unit fan
between the wires and
fan motor motor and fuse
the insulation resistance

Measure input voltage

Faulty transformer (PCB1 output voltage) Replace transformer
*1)

Disconnected Between outdoor unit and indoor Check the continuity

wires insuffi- unit of the wires. Check for Replacing wires repairing and
cient contacting looseness of the con- tightening the screws and the
or incorrect Power source wiring for the outdo- nection screws. Check correct wiring
connection or unit the terminal nos.

Faulty PCB Disconnected wires to PCB Check the connections Correctly connect the wires
(outdoor unit,
indoor unit) Faulty PCB - Replace PCB if faulty

Check the continuity

Disconnected wire; insufficient Replacing wires, repairing and
and the looseness of
contacting tightening the screws
connection screws
Incorrect wiring

Incorrect wiring Check the terminal nos Correctly connect the wires

*1)
PCB1 output voltage Voltage
Vcc 12 - GND2 12VDC
Vcc 05 - GND1 5 VDC
Vcc 15 - GND1 15 VDC
Vcc 24 - GND1 24 VDC
Vcc 12T - GND1 12 VDC

336
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
4 Abnormal transmission between inverter and Outdoor PCB1 (RAS-2HVRN2)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is displayed when the abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds after the normal transmission
between the outdoor unit PCB1 and IPM. Also, the abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds after the
micro-computer is automatically reset. The alarm is displayed when the abnormal transmission is maintained for
30 seconds from the starting of the outdoor unit.

Is power fuse No
In case fuse blown,
(EFR1, EFS1) of
replace electrical box.
PCB1 normal?

Yes
NOTE
Turn ON the power supply Investigate the cause of fuse blown

LED2 is ON or OFF
Is LED2 (green) Faulty PCB1 or faulty
on PCB1 ON/OFF/ DC fan motor
flashing flashing?

flashing

PCB1 is normal

12

337
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

4
Abnormal transmission between inverter PCB2 and outdoor PCB1
Alarm code
(RAS-(3-6)H(V)RNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is displayed when the abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds after the normal transmission
between the outdoor unit PCB1 and inverter PCB2. Also, the abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds
after the micro-computer is automatically reset. The alarm is displayed when the abnormal transmission is main-
tained for 30 seconds from the starting of the outdoor unit.

Is power fuse for No

outdoor unit (EF1 or Replace fuse if blown
EF2) normal?

Yes
NOTE
Turn ON the power supply Investigate the cause of fuse blown

Is LED2 (green) LED2 is ON or OFF

Faulty PCB2 or faulty
on PCB2 ON/OFF
DC fan motor
flashing?
Flashing

PCB2 is normal?

PCB1: Inverter PCB

Inverter DIP IPM RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF
Inverter ISPM RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF

338
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

4
Abnormal transmission between Inverter PCB2 and outdoor PCB1
Alarm code
(RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is displayed when the abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds after the normal transmission
between the outdoor unit PCB1 and PCB2. Also, the abnormal operation is maintained for 30 seconds after the
micro-computer is automatically reset. The alarm is displayed when the abnormal transmission is maintained for
30 seconds from the starting of the outdoor unit.

Is power fuse for No

outdoor unit (EF1 or Replace fuse if blown
EF2) normal?

Yes
NOTE
Disconnect CN6 of PCB1 Investigate the cause of fuse blown

Is LED2 (green) No
on PCB1 flashing? Faulty PCB1

Yes

Reconnect CN6 of PCB1

Faulty PCB2

No Disconnecting or
Is LED2 (green) insufficient contact of
on PCB1 flashing? the wiring between
PCB2 and PCB1.
Yes

Does flashing No Faulty PCB1

speed become faster Faulty PCB2
than before?
Disconnecting or
Yes insufficient contact of
the wiring between
PCB2 is normal. PCB2 and PCB1.
Check the wiring again

PCB1: Control PCB in outdoor unit

PCB2: Inverter PCB
Inverter IPM RAS-(8-10)HRNME-AF

12

339
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Between control PCB1, PCB2 and Check the continuity

Disconnected FANM of wires.
wires, insuffi- Replacing wires, repairing,
Check for looseness of
cient contacting tightening screws and
the connection screws.
or incorrect incorrect wiring
Power source wiring for the outdo- Check the connection
connection
or unit No.

Check the Repair the wiring

Faulty PCB Disconnected wires to PCB
connections connections
(PCB1 for the
control, PCB2
for the
inverter) Faulty PCB - Replace PCB if faulty

Check the continuity.

Disconnected wires; insufficient Replacing wires, repairing,
Check for looseness of
contacting tightening screws
connection screws
Incorrect wiring

Check the Correctly connect

Incorrect wiring
connection nos. the wires

340
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
5 Code abnormal operation of picking up phase signal

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is displayed when the main power source phase is reversely connected or one phase is not connected.

Single phase
Yes
and 3 phases
Correctly connect each
(Is there any phase which is phase of the power source
not connected)? PCB1 is normal

No

Reverse phase connection Yes

Correctly connect each
(Only 3 phases unit) PCB1 is normal phase of the power source

No
Faulty PCB1 or other cause
(see below)

RAS-(2-6)(HVRN2/HVRNME-AF) RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF

Voltage for unit Voltage for unit

to be suspended to be suspended
Running voltage: Running voltage:
207 to 253V 342 to 456V

Setting voltage: Setting voltage:

Less than 187V Less than 323V

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check it according to Replacing wires, repair, tighte-

Reverse or single phase
Activation of the electrical wiring ning screws or correct wiring
reverse phase
sensor in the

12
outdoor unit
Faulty outdoor unit PCB - Replace PCB if faulty

341
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
6 Excessively low voltage or excessively high voltage for the inverter (RAS-2HVRN2)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
• The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is displayed when the voltage of IPM is insufficient and the alarm has three occurrences in 30
minutes. If the number of occurrences is smaller than two, the retry operation is performed. The alarm code “06.”
Means fan controller Abnormal Operation.

Restart the operation

No
Is the power
supply voltage 230V Check the wiring and
±10%? the cable capacity

Yes
No
Is the voltage
over 187V during
operation?

Yes
Does the Yes
voltage fall during
operation by operation of
other apparatus?
Frequency can increa-
No se higher than 60 Hz

Yes How is Compressor stops

Does LED353 the compres- Faulty PCB1.
on PCB1 ON after immediately Replace electrical box
sor operation? (lower than 20 Hz)
RY1 is ON?
Compressor stops
No when frequency increa-
ses (Approx. 20 Hz to
60 Hz)
No
Is connection
correctly between Connect correctly
PCB1 and ACL?

Yes

Faulty PCB1.
Replace electrical box

342
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

6
Excessively low voltage or excessively high voltage for the inverter
Alarm code
(RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is displayed when the voltage between terminal “P” and “N” of Dip IPM is insufficient and the
alarm has three occurrences in 30 minutes. If the number of occurrences is smaller than two, the retry operation
is performed. The alarm code “06” means fan controller Abnormal Operation.

Restart the operation

No
Is the power
supply voltage 230V Check the wiring and
±10%? the cable capacity

Yes
No
Is the voltage
over 187V during
operation?

Yes
Does the Yes
voltage fall during
the operation because of
the operation of other
apparatus?
Frequency can increa-
No se higher than 60 Hz
Does LED201
Yes How is Compressor stops
on Dip IPM ON after Faulty Dip IPM.
the compres- immediately
compressor’s electromag- Replace it
sor operation? (lower than 20 Hz)
netic switches (CMC)
turn ON?
Compressor stops
No when frequency
increases (Approx. 20
Is connection Hz to 60 Hz)
correctly between No
DipIPM and capacitors Connect correctly
(CB1 and CB2), DCL or
CMC?
Be extremely carefull because of the high voltage
Yes
Yes Faulty
Is the DC
voltage over 230V? Check capacitors (CB1, 2) Replace the capacitors
Capacitors have high voltage.
Be extremely carefull *1)
Normal

Faulty Dip IPM

Replace it
No
Check the wiring, Dip

12
IPM and capacitors
(CB1,2) *2).
In case the wiring is co-
rrect, replace Dip IPM

*1) If the capacitor has a high voltage, perform the high-voltage discharge procedure. Refer to Procedure of checking
other main parts.
*2) Checking procedures of the diode module are displayed in item Procedure of checking other main parts.

343
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
6 Excessively low voltage or excessively high voltage for the inverter (RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is displayed when the voltage between terminal “P” and “N” of ISPM is insufficient and the alarm
has three occurrences in 30 minutes. If the number of occurrences is smaller than two, the retry operation is
performed. The alarm code “06” means fan controller abnormal operation.

Restart the operation

No
Is the power
supply voltage 400V Check the wiring and
±10%? the cable capacity

Yes
No
Is the voltage
over 340V during
operation?

Yes
Does the Yes
voltage fall during
the operation because of
the operation of other
apparatus?
Frequency can increa-
No se higher than 60 Hz

Yes How is Compressor stops

Does LED201 the compres- Faulty ISPM.
on ISPM is ON? immediately Replace ISPM
sor operation? (lower than 30 Hz)

Compressor stops
No when frequency increa-
ses (Approx. 30 Hz to
Is connection 60 Hz)
correctly between No
ISPM and reactor (PCL) Connect correctly
with capacitors (CB1,2)
or CMC?
Be extremely carefull because of the high voltage
Yes
Yes Faulty
Is the DC
voltage over 460V? Check capacitors (CB1, 2) Replace the capacitors
Capacitors have high voltage.
Be extremely carefull *1)
Normal

Faulty ISPM
Replace ISPM
No
Check the wiring, ISPM
and capacitors (CB1,2)
*2).
In case the wiring is
correct, replace ISPM

*1) If the capacitor has a high voltage, perform the high-voltage discharge procedure. Refer to Procedure of checking
other main parts.
*2) Checking procedures of the diode module are displayed in item Procedure of checking other main parts.
*3) DC voltage measuring position:
ISPM “P” terminal to “+” terminal of tester, “N” terminal to “–” terminal of tester measuring position: DC 1000V.

344
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

6
Excessively low voltage or excessively high voltage for the inverter
Alarm code
(RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is displayed when the voltage between terminal “P” and “N” of ISPM is insufficient and the alarm
has three occurrences in 30 minutes. If the number of occurrences is smaller than two, the retry operation is
performed. The alarm code “6”means fan controller abnormal operation.

Restart the operation

Is the power No
supply voltage 380V Check the wiring and
±10% or 415V ±10%? the cable capacity

Yes
No
Is the voltage
over 323V during
operation?

Yes
Does the Yes
voltage fall during
the operation because of
the operation of other
apparatus?
Frequency can increa-
No se higher than 60 Hz
Does LED021
on PCB2 ON after Yes How is Compressor stops
the compres- Faulty PCB2.
compressor’s electromag- immediately
sor operation? Replace it
netic switches (CMC) turn (lower than 20 Hz)
ON?
Compressor stops
No when frequency increa-
ses (Approx. 20 Hz to
60 Hz)
Is connection co- No
rrectly between IPM Connect correctly
and capacitors (CB1 and
CB2), DCL or CMC?
Be extremely carefull because of the high voltage Loose wiring,
Yes change of color

Is the DC Yes Faulty

voltage over 460V? *3) Check capacitors (CB1, 2) Replace the capacitors
Capacitors have high voltage.
Be extremely carefull *1)
Normal

Faulty PCB2.Replace it
No
Check the wiring,
PCB2 and capacitors
CB *2)
In case the wiring is
correct, replace PCB2 12
• *1) If the capacitor has a high voltage, perform the high-voltage discharge procedure. Refer to section Proce-
dure of checking other main parts.
• *2) Checking procedures of the diode module are displayed in item Procedure of checking other main parts.
• *3) DC voltage measuring position:
ISPM “P” terminal “+” terminal of tester, “N” terminal to “–” terminal of tester measuring position: DC 1000V.

345
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
7 Decrease of Discharge Gas Superheat

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
This alarm code is indicated as follows:
-- The temperature on the top of the compressor is less than the target and also the I.U. expansion valve opening
is under 300pls at cooling operation for 30 minutes.
-- The temperature on the top of compressor is less than the target and also the O.U. expansion valve opening is
under 70 pls at heating operation for 30 minutes.
-- The compressor is stopped and then the retry operation is performed after 30 minutes.

No
Is the thermistor
on top of compressor Faulty thermistor
normal?
Yes
No
Is the thermistor
installed correctly on Install it correctly
the compressor?
Yes
Is it at cooling or Heating
heating mode when Heating operation
the alarm has occurred?

Cooling Yes

Cooling operation
Yes
Check the I.U. expansion valve opening and the Check the O.U. expansion valve opening and the
temperature on the top of the compressor by the temperature on the top of the compressor by the
outdoor unit PCB. outdoor unit PCB.
No
No O.U. expansion valve
I.U. expansion valve
opening <300pls opening <70pls

Yes No

No Is the temperature on the Is the temperature on the

top of compressor less than esti- top of compressor less than esti-
mated condensation temp.? mated condensation temp.?

Yes Yes

No Are the connectors for the indoor

expansion valve connected properly?
Plug the connectors
properly - Connector on I.U. PCB for ex. valve
- Junction connector for ex. valve
Yes
No
Is the outdoor fan normal? Replace fan motor
I.U.: Indoor Unit Yes
No
Is the refrigerant corectly charged? Charge correct
O.U.: Outdoor Unit refrigerant volume
Yes
No
Check the ex valve.
Is gas leaking?
Or remove the cause
Yes of discharge air short-
Repair leaks of gas. circuit at indoor and
outdoor units.
Correctly charge refrigerant.

346
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check refrigerant
Refrigerant cycle is different from
cycle and the electrical Repair wiring
the electrical system
system

Overcharged refrigerant Measure pressure Correctly charge refrigerant

Check expansion val-

ve. Refer to Checking Replace expansion valve if
Faulty Expansion Valve
procedure for the elec- faulty.
tronic expansion valve

Replace PCB and

Fault Replace PCB if faulty
Decrease of check operation
discharge gas
superheat Faulty PCB
Disconnected
wires for expan- Check connections Repair wiring connections
sion valve control

Fault Measure resistance Replace thermistor if faulty

Faulty
discharge Incorrect Check mounting state
Correctly mount thermistor
gas mounting See Alarm Code 08
thermistor

Remove looseness,
Incorrect
Check connections replace connector or repair
connection
connections.

12

347
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
8 Excessively high discharge gas temperature at the top of compressor

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- The alarm appears during cooling operation when the compressor-top thermistor remains at Tdc1 or above for
10 minutes, or at Tdc2 or above for 5 seconds.
-- The alarm appears during heating operation when the compressor-top thermistor remains at Tdh1 or above for
10 minutes, or at Tdh2 or above for 5 seconds.

Tdc: Discharge gas temperature of the thermistor on the top of the compressor for cooling operation.
Tdh: Discharge gas temperature of the thermistor on the top of the compressor for heating operation.

Outdoor capacity Tdc1 Tdc2 Tdh1 Tdh2

RAS-2HVRN2 and RAS-3HVRNME-AF 115 125 115 125
RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF 127 140 120 140

No
Is the thermistor Compressor-top thermistor
THM9 on top of com- Faulty thermistor (THM9)
pressor normal? No
Yes
No
Is the thermistor
THM9 installed co- Install it correctly
rrectly on the compressor?

Yes

Is gas leaking? Correctly charge

refrigerant

Yes Repair leaks of gas.

Correctly charge refrigerant.

Thermistor for high discharge

gas temperature at the top of
compressor chamber (TH9)
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Temperature (ºC)
Thermistor resistance characteristics

348
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
11 Water inlet Temperature (Twi) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 18.2 kΩ)
during the cooling process or the heating process.

No
Is THMwi
connected to (intake) Connect it
CN9 on PCB2?
Yes
No
Is resistance
Faulty thermistor
of THMwi between
(Change it)
0.24kΩ and 18.2kΩ?
Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of Check correct position
THMwi between 100ºC and of THMwi and correct it
-80ºC?

Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Thermistor characteristics Thermistor for water

outlet PHEX tempera-
ture (THMWOHP)
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Thermistor for refri-

gerant gas tempera-
ture (THMG)

12
Thermistor for water
outlet temperature
(THMWO)

Thermistor for water

inlet temperature
(THMWI)

Temperature (ºC)
Thermistor for refrigerant liquid
temperature (THML)

349
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
12 Water outlet Temperature (Two) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 18.2 kΩ)
during the cooling process or the heating process.

No
Is THMwo
connected to (intake) Connect it
CN13 on PCB2?
Yes
No
Is resistance
of THMwo between Faulty thermistor
0.24kΩ and 18.2kΩ? (Change it)

Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of Check correct position of
THMwo between 100ºC and THMwo and correct it
-80ºC?

Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Thermistor characteristics Thermistor for water

outlet PHEX tempera-
ture (THMWOHP)
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Thermistor for refri-

gerant gas tempera-
ture (THMG)

Thermistor for water

outlet temperature
(THMWO)

Thermistor for water

inlet temperature
(THMWI)

Temperature (ºC)
Thermistor for refrigerant liquid
temperature (THML)

350
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
13 Indoor liquid pipe Temperature (Tl) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 840 kΩ)
during the cooling process or the heating process.

No
Is THML
connected to (intake) Connect it
CN11 of PCB2?
Yes
No
Is resistance of
Faulty thermistor
THML between 0.24 kΩ
(Change it)
and 840 kΩ?
Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of THML Check correct position of
between 100ºC and -80ºC? THML and correct it

Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Measuring the thermistor resistance value:

Thermistor characteristics Thermistor for water

outlet PHEX tempera-
ture (THMWOHP)
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

12
Thermistor for refri-
gerant gas tempera-
ture (THMG)

Thermistor for water

outlet temperature
(THMWO)

Thermistor for water

inlet temperature
(THMWI)

Temperature (ºC)
Thermistor for refrigerant liquid
temperature (THML)

351
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
14 Indoor gas pipe Temperature (Tg) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 840 kΩ)
during the cooling process or the heating process.

No
Is THMG
connected to (intake) Connect it
CN12 of PCB2?
Yes
No
Is resistance of
Faulty thermistor
THMG between 0.24kΩ
(Change it)
and 840kΩ?
Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of THMG Check correct position of
between 100ºC and -80ºC? THMG and correct it

Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Measuring the thermistor resistance value:

Thermistor characteristics Thermistor for water

outlet PHEX tempera-
ture (THMWOHP)
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Thermistor for refri-

gerant gas tempera-
ture (THMG)

Thermistor for water

outlet temperature
(THMWO)

Thermistor for water

inlet temperature
(THMWI)

Temperature (ºC)
Thermistor for refrigerant liquid
temperature (THML)

352
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
15 Water outlet circuit 2 (mix circ.) Temperature (Two2) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 18.2 kΩ)
during the cooling process or the heating process and circuit 2 enabled.

Is THMwo2 No
connected to (intake)
terminals 30 & 31 of TB2? Connect it

Yes
Are the wires
between terminal
board 2 and PCB2
connected correctly?

No Wiring check, repair

CN16-1-TB2-30
PCB2 TB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN16-2-TB2-31 wiring

No
Is resistance
of THMwo2 between Faulty thermistor
0.24kΩ and 18.2kΩ? (Change it)

Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of Check correct position of
THMwo2 between 100ºC THMwo2 and correct it
and -80ºC?
Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Thermistor characteristics

12
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Temperature (ºC)

353
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
16 Domestic Hot Water Temperature (TDHW) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 1.11 kΩ) or cut (greater than 220.6 kΩ)
when DHWT is enabled.

Is THMdhwt No
connected to (intake)
terminals 27 & 28 of TB2? Connect it

Yes
Are the wires
between terminal
board 2 and PCB2
connected correctly?

No Wiring check, repair

CN10-2-TB2-27
PCB2 TB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN15-1-TB2-28 wiring

No
Is resistance of
THMdhwt between Faulty thermistor
1.11kΩ and 220.6kΩ? (Change it)

Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of Check correct position of
THMdhwt between 100ºC THMdhwt and correct it
and -20ºC?
Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

N ote
DHW Water sensor is the same as Yutaki system controller.

354
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Temp (ºC) Resist (Ω) Temp (ºC) Resist (Ω) Temp (ºC) Resist (Ω) Temp (ºC) Resist (Ω) Temp (ºC) Resist (Ω) Temp (ºC) Resist (Ω)
-20.0 220600 1.0 66515 22.0 23032 43.0 8983 64.0 3877 85.0 1824
-19.0 207607 2.0 63046 23.0 21967 44.0 8612 65.0 3734 86.0 1763
-18.0 195459 3.0 59777 24.0 20958 45.0 8258 66.0 3596 87.0 1705
-17.0 184096 4.0 46697 25.0 20000 46.0 7920 67.0 3464 88.0 1648
-16.0 173463 5.0 53793 26.0 19089 47.0 7598 68.0 3338 89.0 1594
-15.0 163508 6.0 51055 27.0 18224 48.0 7291 69.0 3216 90.0 1542
-14.0 154185 7.0 48472 28.0 17404 49.0 6998 70.0 3100 91.0 1491
-13.0 145450 8.0 46034 29.0 16624 50.0 6718 71.0 2989 92.0 1443
-12.0 137262 9.0 43733 30.0 15884 51.0 6450 72.0 2882 93.0 1396
-11.0 129583 10.0 41560 31.0 15180 52.0 6195 73.0 2779 94.0 1351
-10.0 122380 11.0 39500 32.0 14511 53.0 5951 74.0 2681 95.0 1308
-9.0 115575 12.0 37553 33.0 13875 54.0 5718 75.0 2587 96.0 1266
-8.0 109189 13.0 35714 34.0 13270 55.0 5495 76.0 2496 97.0 1226
-7.0 103194 14.0 33975 35.0 12695 56.0 5282 77.0 2409 98.0 1187
-6.0 97564 15.0 32331 36.0 12148 57.0 5078 78.0 2325 99.0 1150
-5.0 92274 16.0 30775 37.0 11627 58.0 4883 79.0 2245 100.0 1114
-4.0 87303 17.0 29303 38.0 11131 59.0 4696 80.0 2168
-3.0 82628 18.0 27909 39.0 10659 60.0 4518 81.0 2094
-2.0 78232 19.0 26590 40.0 10210 61.0 4347 82.0 2022
-1.0 74094 20.0 25340 41.0 9781 62.0 4184 83.0 1954
0.0 70200 21.0 24155 42.0 9373 63.0 4027 84.0 1888

12

355
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
17 Swimming pool (THMSWP) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the sensor is abnormality when SWIMMING POOL is enabled.

Is ATW-SPS-01 No
connected to (intake)
terminals 34(+) &35 (-) of Connect it
TB2?

(+) – TB2-34(+)
ATW-SPS-01 TB2
(-) – TB2--35(-)

Yes

Is resistance No
inside ATW-SPS-01 Faulty device
between 92.16kΩ and Repair harness
(Change ATW-SPS-01)
119.40kΩ?
Yes
No Yes
Is the current of Is the
ATW-SPS-01 output current 0mA? Check Harness connection
between 4-20 mA? between TB2-34/35 and
PCB Connection (check
Yes No Electrical wiring diagram)
No Datas: Resistance value
Is the temperatu-
Check correct 220Ω Power supply to
re of THMswp bet-
position of ATW-SPS-01 (+) 12Vcc
ween 50ºC and -30ºC?
THMswp and Is all correctly?
correct it
Yes Yes

Faulty PCB1 Faulty device

(Change ATW-SPS-01)

356
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Table 1 - Temperature/resistance relationship, R0 = 100.00 Ω

Resistance at the temperature t901ºC Ω

t901ºC t901ºC
0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9
-200 18.52 -200
-190 22.83 22.40 21.97 21.54 21.11 20.68 20.25 19.82 19.38 18.95 -190
-180 27.10 26.67 26.24 25.82 25.39 24.97 24.54 24.11 23.68 23.25 -180
-170 31.34 30.91 30.49 30.07 29.64 29.22 28.80 28.37 27.95 27.52 -170
-160 35.54 35.12 34.70 34.28 33.86 33.44 33.02 32.60 32.18 31.76 -160
-150 39.72 39.31 38.89 38.47 38.05 37.64 37.22 36.80 36.38 35.96 -150
-140 43.88 43.46 43.05 42.63 42.22 41.80 41.39 40.97 40.56 40.14 -140
-130 48.00 47.59 47.18 46.77 46.36 45.94 45.53 45.12 44.70 44.29 -130
-120 52.11 51.70 51.29 50.88 50.47 50.06 49.65 49.24 48.83 48.42 -120
-110 56.19 55.79 55.38 54.97 54.56 54.15 53.75 53.34 52.93 52.52 -110
-100 60.26 59.85 59.44 59.04 58.63 58.23 57.82 57.41 57.01 56.60 -100

-90 64.30 63.90 63.49 63.09 62.68 62.28 61.88 61.47 61.07 60.66 -90
-80 68.33 67.92 67.52 67.12 66.72 66.31 65.91 65.51 65.11 64.70 -80
-70 72.33 71.93 71.53 71.13 70.73 70.33 69.93 69.53 69.13 68.73 -70
-60 76.33 75.93 75.53 75.13 74.73 74.33 73.93 73.53 73.13 72.73 -60
-50 80.31 79.91 79.51 79.11 78.72 78.32 77.92 77.52 77.12 76.73 -50
-40 84.27 83.87 83.48 83.08 82.69 82.29 81.89 81.50 81.10 80.70 -40
-30 88.22 87.83 87.43 87.04 86.64 86.25 85.85 85.46 85.06 84.67 -30
-20 92.16 91.77 91.37 90.98 90.59 90.19 89.80 89.40 89.01 88.62 -20
-10 96.09 95.69 95.30 94.91 94.52 94.12 93.73 93.34 92.95 92.55 -10
0 100.00 99.61 99.22 98.83 98.44 98.04 97.65 97.26 96.87 96.48 0

t 901ºC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t901ºC
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51 0
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.85 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40 10
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.29 20
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 114.00 114.38 114.77 115.15 30
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.86 118.24 118.63 119.01 40
50 119.40 119.78 120.17 120.55 120.94 121.32 121.71 122.09 122.47 122.86 50
60 123.24 123.63 124.01 124.39 124.78 125.16 125.54 125.93 126.31 126.69 60
70 127.08 127.46 127.84 128.22 128.61 128.99 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.52 70
80 130.90 131.28 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.57 133.95 134.33 80
90 134.71 135.09 135.47 135.85 136.23 136.61 136.99 137.37 137.75 138.13 90

100 138.51 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.40 140.78 141.16 141.54 141.91 100
110 142.29 142.67 143.05 143.43 143.80 144.18 144.56 144.94 145.31 145.69 110
120 146.07 146.44 146.82 147.20 147.57 147.95 148.33 148.70 149.08 149.46 120
130 149.83 150.21 150.58 150.96 151.33 151.71 152.08 152.46 152.83 153.21 130
140 153.58 153.96 154.33 154.71 155.08 155.46 155.83 156.20 156.58 156.95 140
150 157.33 157.70 158.07 158.45 158.82 159.19 159.56 159.94 160.31 160.68 150
160 161.05 161.43 161.80 162.17 162.54 162.91 163.29 163.66 164.03 164.40 160
170 164.77 165.14 165.51 165.89 166.26 166.63 167.00 167.37 167.74 168.11 170
180 168.48 168.85 169.22 169.59 169.96 170.33 170.70 171.07 171.43 171.80 180
190 172.17 172.54 172.91 173.28 173.65 174.02 174.38 174.75 175.12 175.49 190

200 175.86 176.22 176.59 176.96 177.33 177.69 178.06 178.43 178.79 179.16 200
210 179.53 179.89 180.26 180.63 180.99 181.36 181.72 182.09 182.46 182.82 210
220 183.19 183.55 183.92 184.28 184.65 185.01 185.38 185.74 186.11 186.47 220
230 186.84 187.20 187.56 187.93 188.29 188.66 189.02 189.38 189.75 190.11 230

12
240 190.47 190.84 191.20 191.56 191.92 192.29 192.65 193.01 193.37 193.74 240
250 194.10 194.46 194.82 195.18 195.55 195.91 196.27 196.63 196.99 197.35 250
260 197.71 198.07 198.43 198.79 199.15 199.51 199.87 200.23 200.59 200.95 260
270 201.31 201.67 202.03 202.39 202.75 203.11 203.47 203.83 204.19 204.55 270
280 104.90 205.26 205.62 205.98 206.34 206.70 207.05 207.41 207.77 208.13 280
290 208.48 208.84 209.20 209.56 209.91 210.27 210.63 210.98 211.34 211.70 290

300 212.05 212.41 212.76 213.12 213.48 213.83 214.19 214.54 214.90 215.25 300
310 215.61 215.96 216.32 216.67 217.03 217.38 217.74 218.09 218.44 218.80 310
320 219.15 219.51 219.86 220.21 220.57 220.92 221.27 221.63 221.98 222.33 320

357
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
18 Water outlet 3 (boiler circ.) Temperature (Two3) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 18.2 kΩ)
when boiler enabled.

Is THMwo3 No
connected to (intake)
terminals 29 & 29 of TB2? Connect it

Yes
Are the wires
between terminal
board 2 and PCB2
connected correctly?

No Wiring check, repair

CN15-1-TB2-28
PCB2 TB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN15-3-TB2-29 wiring

No
Is resistance
of THMwo3 between Faulty thermistor
0.24kΩ and 18.2kΩ? (Change it)

Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of Check correct position of
THMwo3 between 100ºC THMwo3 and correct it
and -80ºC?
Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Thermistor characteristics
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Temperature (ºC)

358
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
19 Water outlet HP (After Heat Exchanger) Temperature (TwoHP) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 kΩ) or cut (greater than 18.2 kΩ)
during the cooling process or the heating process.

Is THMwohp No
connected to (intake)
CN14 of TB2? Connect it

Yes
No
Is resistance of
THMwohp between Faulty thermistor
0.24kΩ and 18.2kΩ? (Change it)

Yes
Are the
connectors between
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1 No
Wiring check, repair
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 breaking of wire, wrong
CN6-CN3 wiring

CN2-CN4
Yes
Is the No
temperature of Check correct position of
THMwohp between 100ºC THMwohp and correct it
and -80ºC?
Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2

(Check PCBs)

Thermistor characteristics

Thermistor for water

outlet PHEX tempera-
ture (THMWOHP)
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Thermistor for refri-

gerant gas tempera-
ture (THMG)

12
Thermistor for water
outlet temperature
(THMWO)

Temperature (ºC) Thermistor for water

inlet temperature
(THMWI)

Thermistor for refrigerant liquid

temperature (THML)

359
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
20 Abnormality of Thermistor for Discharge Gas Temperature (Compressor Thermistor)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 1 kΩ) or cut (greater than 6 MΩ) during
the cooling or heating operation.

Thermistor on Top
Compressor-top
No of compressor
Is the thermistor thermistor (THM9)
connected to THM9 of Connect it
PCB?

Yes
Is the resistande No
of THM9 between 1kΩ Faulty thermistor
and 6kΩ?

Yes

Faulty PCB

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Fault Check resistance Replace thermistor if faulty

Faulty top of
compressor
thermistor
Incorrect connection Check wiring to PCB1 Repair wiring and connections

Replace PCB1 and

Faulty PCB1 Replace PCB1 if faulty
check operation

Temperature (ºC) Resistance (kΩ) Temperature (ºC) Resistance (kΩ) Temperature (ºC) Resistance (kΩ)
0 640.44 45 87.74 90 18.17
5 500.66 50 72.32 95 15.55
10 394.16 55 59.97 100 13.35
15 312.41 60 49.96 105 11.50
20 249.20 65 41.79 110 9.93
25 200.00 70 35.11 115 8.60
30 161.45 75 29.61 120 7.47
35 131.06 80 25.07 125 6.51
40 106.96 85 21.31

The resistance value have fudge factor (+10%).

360
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
21 2nd ambient temperature sensor (THMAMB2) Thermistor Abnormality

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when the sensor is abnormality when 2ND ambient sensor option is enabled.

Is ATW-2OS-01 No
connected to (intake)
terminals 32(+) &33 (-) of Connect it
TB2?

(+) – TB2-32(+)
ATW-2OS-01 TB2
(-) – TB2--33(-)

Yes

Is resistance No
inside ATW-2OS-01 Faulty device
between 92.16kΩ and Repair harness
(Change ATW-2OS-01)
119.40kΩ?
Yes
No Yes
Is the current of Is the
ATW-2OS-01 output current 0mA? Check Harness connection
between 4-20 mA? between TB2-32/33 and
PCB Connection (check
Yes No Electrical wiring diagram)
Is the temperature No Datas: Resistance value
of THMamb2 between Check correct 220Ω Power supply to
50ºC and -30ºC? position of ATW-2OS-01 (+) 12Vcc
THMamb2 and Is all correctly?
Yes correct it
Yes
Faulty PCB1
Faulty device
(Change ATW-2OS-01)

12

361
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Table 1 - Temperature/resistance relationship, R0 = 100.00 Ω

Resistance at the temperature t901ºC Ω

t901ºC t901ºC
0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9
-200 18.52 -200
-190 22.83 22.40 21.97 21.54 21.11 20.68 20.25 19.82 19.38 18.95 -190
-180 27.10 26.67 26.24 25.82 25.39 24.97 24.54 24.11 23.68 23.25 -180
-170 31.34 30.91 30.49 30.07 29.64 29.22 28.80 28.37 27.95 27.52 -170
-160 35.54 35.12 34.70 34.28 33.86 33.44 33.02 32.60 32.18 31.76 -160
-150 39.72 39.31 38.89 38.47 38.05 37.64 37.22 36.80 36.38 35.96 -150
-140 43.88 43.46 43.05 42.63 42.22 41.80 41.39 40.97 40.56 40.14 -140
-130 48.00 47.59 47.18 46.77 46.36 45.94 45.53 45.12 44.70 44.29 -130
-120 52.11 51.70 51.29 50.88 50.47 50.06 49.65 49.24 48.83 48.42 -120
-110 56.19 55.79 55.38 54.97 54.56 54.15 53.75 53.34 52.93 52.52 -110
-100 60.26 59.85 59.44 59.04 58.63 58.23 57.82 57.41 57.01 56.60 -100

-90 64.30 63.90 63.49 63.09 62.68 62.28 61.88 61.47 61.07 60.66 -90
-80 68.33 67.92 67.52 67.12 66.72 66.31 65.91 65.51 65.11 64.70 -80
-70 72.33 71.93 71.53 71.13 70.73 70.33 69.93 69.53 69.13 68.73 -70
-60 76.33 75.93 75.53 75.13 74.73 74.33 73.93 73.53 73.13 72.73 -60
-50 80.31 79.91 79.51 79.11 78.72 78.32 77.92 77.52 77.12 76.73 -50
-40 84.27 83.87 83.48 83.08 82.69 82.29 81.89 81.50 81.10 80.70 -40
-30 88.22 87.83 87.43 87.04 86.64 86.25 85.85 85.46 85.06 84.67 -30
-20 92.16 91.77 91.37 90.98 90.59 90.19 89.80 89.40 89.01 88.62 -20
-10 96.09 95.69 95.30 94.91 94.52 94.12 93.73 93.34 92.95 92.55 -10
0 100.00 99.61 99.22 98.83 98.44 98.04 97.65 97.26 96.87 96.48 0

t 901ºC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t901ºC
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51 0
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.85 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40 10
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.29 20
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 114.00 114.38 114.77 115.15 30
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.86 118.24 118.63 119.01 40
50 119.40 119.78 120.17 120.55 120.94 121.32 121.71 122.09 122.47 122.86 50
60 123.24 123.63 124.01 124.39 124.78 125.16 125.54 125.93 126.31 126.69 60
70 127.08 127.46 127.84 128.22 128.61 128.99 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.52 70
80 130.90 131.28 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.57 133.95 134.33 80
90 134.71 135.09 135.47 135.85 136.23 136.61 136.99 137.37 137.75 138.13 90

100 138.51 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.40 140.78 141.16 141.54 141.91 100
110 142.29 142.67 143.05 143.43 143.80 144.18 144.56 144.94 145.31 145.69 110
120 146.07 146.44 146.82 147.20 147.57 147.95 148.33 148.70 149.08 149.46 120
130 149.83 150.21 150.58 150.96 151.33 151.71 152.08 152.46 152.83 153.21 130
140 153.58 153.96 154.33 154.71 155.08 155.46 155.83 156.20 156.58 156.95 140
150 157.33 157.70 158.07 158.45 158.82 159.19 159.56 159.94 160.31 160.68 150
160 161.05 161.43 161.80 162.17 162.54 162.91 163.29 163.66 164.03 164.40 160
170 164.77 165.14 165.51 165.89 166.26 166.63 167.00 167.37 167.74 168.11 170
180 168.48 168.85 169.22 169.59 169.96 170.33 170.70 171.07 171.43 171.80 180
190 172.17 172.54 172.91 173.28 173.65 174.02 174.38 174.75 175.12 175.49 190

200 175.86 176.22 176.59 176.96 177.33 177.69 178.06 178.43 178.79 179.16 200
210 179.53 179.89 180.26 180.63 180.99 181.36 181.72 182.09 182.46 182.82 210
220 183.19 183.55 183.92 184.28 184.65 185.01 185.38 185.74 186.11 186.47 220
230 186.84 187.20 187.56 187.93 188.29 188.66 189.02 189.38 189.75 190.11 230
240 190.47 190.84 191.20 191.56 191.92 192.29 192.65 193.01 193.37 193.74 240
250 194.10 194.46 194.82 195.18 195.55 195.91 196.27 196.63 196.99 197.35 250
260 197.71 198.07 198.43 198.79 199.15 199.51 199.87 200.23 200.59 200.95 260
270 201.31 201.67 202.03 202.39 202.75 203.11 203.47 203.83 204.19 204.55 270
280 104.90 205.26 205.62 205.98 206.34 206.70 207.05 207.41 207.77 208.13 280
290 208.48 208.84 209.20 209.56 209.91 210.27 210.63 210.98 211.34 211.70 290

300 212.05 212.41 212.76 213.12 213.48 213.83 214.19 214.54 214.90 215.25 300
310 215.61 215.96 216.32 216.67 217.03 217.38 217.74 218.09 218.44 218.80 310
320 219.15 219.51 219.86 220.21 220.57 220.92 221.27 221.63 221.98 222.33 320

362
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

22
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the outdoor temperature (outdoor unit ambient
Alarm code
thermistor)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.2 kΩ) or cut (greater than 500 kΩ)
during the operation. However, this alarm occurs during the test run mode only. In the case that the thermistor is
abnormal during the operation, the operation continues based on the assumption that the outdoor temperature
is 35 °C (cooling) / 6 °C (heating).

No Outdoor temperature thermistor

Is the thermistor THM7
(TA) connected to PCB1? Connect it

Yes

No
Is the resistance of
THM7 between 0.24 kΩ Faulty thermistor
and 500 kΩ?

Yes

Faulty PCB1

Thermistor characteristics
90
80
70 Outdoor unit
ambient
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

60 thermistor
50
40
30
20
10
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (ºC)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Fault Check resistance Replace thermistor if faulty

Faulty ther-
mistor for the
outdoor unit
ambient
Incorrect connection Check wiring to PCB1 Repair wiring and connections 12
Replace PCB1 and
Faulty PCB1 Replace PCB if faulty
check operation

363
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

24
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the evaporating temperature during the heating
Alarm code
process (outdoor unit)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB. If you find an abnormal operation
of the thermistor, check all the thermistors as shown below.
-- The evaporating thermistor during the heating process is attached to the heat exchanger as shown in the figure
below. If this thermistor is faulty, such as short-circuit (less than 0,2kΩ) or cut (more than 840kΩ) during eight
minutes continuously, this alarm is displayed. The position is indicated below.
No
Is the thermistor THM8 (Te)
connected to PCB1? Connect it

Yes

No
Is the resistance of THM7
between 0.2 kΩ and 500 kΩ? Faulty thermistor
Thermistor

Yes (Evaporating
temperature
Faulty PCB1 for outdoor
unit)

Thermistor characteristics
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

Air Temperature (ºC)

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Faulty thermis- Fault Check resistance Replace thermistor if faulty

tor for the
evaporating
temperature
during heating Repair the wiring and the
Incorrect connection Check wiring to PCB1
connections

Replace PCB1 and

Faulty PCB1 Replace PCB1 if faulty
check the operation

364
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
31 Incorrect capacity setting or combined capacity between indoor units and outdoor unit

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is indicated when the total indoor unit capacity is not equal to the combined outdoor unit capacity.
Outdoor unit capacity setting is not correct.

No
Is DSW3 on the outdoor unit
PCB1 set correctly? Set the capacity for PCB1.

Yes

No
Is DSW3 on the outdoor unit
PCB set correctly? Set the capacity for PCB.

Yes

Total capacity of the indoor

unit(s) is wrong.

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check combination of
Correctly set
Incorrect capacity setting of indoor unit indoor units and capa-
dip switch, DSW3.
city setting on PCB.

Check capacity setting Correctly set

Incorrect capacity setting of outdoor unit
on outdoor unit PCB. dip switch, DSW3.

NOTES
• In case of H-LINK system, this alarm code is indicated when the refrigerant system setting on the outdoor
unit PCB and indoor unit PCB are incorrectly set.
• In this case, set correctly refering to the section Setting of DIP switches and RSW switches after turning OFF
main switch.

12

365
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
35 Incorrect indoor number setting

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is indicated 3 minutes after power is supplied to the outdoor unit when the indoor unit no. con-
nected to the outdoor unit is duplicated by setting of RSW.

NOTES
• In case of H-LINK system, this alarm code is indicated when the refrigerant system setting on the outdoor unit
PCB and the indoor unit PCB are incorrectly set.
• In this case, set correctly refering to the section Setting of DIP switches and RSW switches after turning OFF
main switch.

366
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
38 Abnormality of Protective Circuit for Protection (Outdoor Unit) (RAS-2HVRN2)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- The alarm code appears if approx. DC12V is supplied to the DIP-IPM connector (see table below) when the in-
verter operation is commanded (after five seconds following activation of the remote control switch).
Place the tester as shown in the diagram below to check the connector of PCN401. The connector shall remain inserted.
DC12V will constantly be detected and disturb the diagnosis if the connector of PCN401 is pulled out.
Place [+] of tester to Pin #1
Yes
DC 12V detected? Check wiring other of PCN401 and [-] to Pin #3
than on DIP-IPM
*1)
No
Voltage detected DIP-
IPM is normal Faulty DIP-IPM
Replace E-box

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check DIP-IPM by
Faulty DIP-IPM Replace DIP-IPM
seft-checking

*1): This alarm (Alarm Code: 38) may appear when the operation is started, if the Faston terminal of the high pressure
switch (63H1) is improperly connected or damaged (open-circuit fault). See also Alarm Code: 02 Activation of Outdoor Unit
Protection Device.

12

367
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
38 Abnormality of protective circuit for protection (outdoor unit) (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
--  This alarm code is indicated when AC 220V or 240V is supplied to voltage PCN9#1 and #3 on PCB1 in the
outdoor unit during CMC is opened.

Is 220VAC or 240VAC No
applied PCN9#1 and #3 Faulty PCB1
during stoppage?

Yes, PCB is normal

Check wiring
N14 CN15 PCN10 PCN13 PCN8
connection except SEG1
PCB1 PCN9

Y52C

DSW1 Y20A

PSW2 Y21
PSW3
PSW1
YCH

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Check PCB1 by
Faulty PCB1 Replace PCB1
seft-checking

368
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
41 Cooling Overload (High pressure switch will be activated) (RAS-2HVRN2)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- Abnormality indication will appear when the protection device is activated during compressor operation at cooling,
with the outdoor unit evaporation temperature higher than 55°C and the compressor-top temperature higher than
95°C.

[Detected (Approx. 15 V)]

Voltage bet-
RY1 turns No ween pins #1 No Protec- No No
PCN401
ON at operation and #3 of DIP-IPM tion device correctly
startup? Compressor connector PCN401 remains activa- connected?
operates? approx. 0V at ope- ted?
Yes ration startup?
Yes
Yes Yes
Check DIP-IPM
No connector wiring
Does RY1
remains ON for
Faulty DIP-IPM
more than three
seconds?
Yes

Check the temperature of the following places with the remote

control switch in checking mode.
Check the temperature of [1] compressor top temperature and
[2] outdoor unit evaporation (piping). Examine the cause and
address the problem if the measurements surpass the preset
temperature:
1 Compressor top temperature: 95ºC or less
2 Outdoor unit evaporation (piping) temperature: 55ºC or less

Thermistor characteristics
90
80
70
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
12
Ambient Temperature (ºC)

369
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
41 Cooling overload (high pressure switch will be activated) (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is indicated when the protection device is activated at following condition. Evaporation tempera-
ture of outdoor unit higher than 55 degree and top of compressor temperature higher than 95 degree.

No Is the No No
voltage bet- Is protection
Is CMC ON? device
ween PCN9#1 and #3 Faulty PCB1
220V/240V? activated?
Yes
Yes Yes

No
Is CMC ON
> 3 seconds? Faulty PCB1

Yes

Check the temperature of the following places with the remote

control switch in checking mode.
Check the temperature of [1] compressor top temperature and
[2] outdoor unit evaporation (piping). Examine the cause and
address the problem if the measurements surpass the preset
temperature:
1 Compressor top temperature: 95ºC or less
2 Outdoor unit evaporation (piping) temperature: 55ºC or less

Thermistor characteristics
90
80
70
Thermistor resistance (kΩ)

60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (ºC)

370
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Clogging of heat
Remove clogging
exchanger?

Check for dust on

Remove dust
air filter
Insufficient air flow to heat
exchanger of outdoor unit Check the service
Secure service space
space

Check for speed:

Outdoor fan: cooling Replace fan motor if faulty
Indoor fan: heating

Check for hot air near

Make good circulation
the ceiling

Excessively high temperature air to Check for short

Remove short circuited air
outdoor unit heat exchanger circuited air

Check for other heat

Remove heat source
source

Faulty pressu- Check for short

Remove short-circuited air
re switch circuited air
Activation of Faulty high
Insufficient Check for other heat
high pressure pressure Remove heat source
contacting source
switch due to switch
excessively
high discharge Incorrect
Check connections Repair connections
pressure during connection
cooling
operation Check cycle operating
Overcharged refrigerant Charge refrigerant correctly
temperature

Mixture of non-condensable Check ambient tempe- Recharge refrigerant after

gas in refrigerant cycle rature and pressure vacuum pumping

Clogging of discharge piping Check for clogging Remove clogging

Check for clogging Remove clogging

Check connecting wiring

Replace connector
and connectors

Check discharge gas

Faulty or malfunction of Replace coil
thermistor
expansion valve
Check discharge gas
Replace thermistor
thermistor

Check attaching state of

discharge gas Reattach thermistor
thermistor

Liquid line stop valve or gas line

Check stop valves Fully open stop valve

12
stop valve are not in operation

Locking up outdoor unit Check expansion valve Replace outdoor

expansion valve closure actuation expansion valve

NOTE
This alarm code is indicated when the outdoor unit protective device is activated by high discharge pressure du-
ring cooling operation. Accordingly, when this alarm code is indicated, there is high possibility of high pressure
switch actuation and the above troubleshooting actions are based on such cases.

371
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
42 Heating Overload (High pressure switch will be activated) (RAS-2HVRN2)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- Abnormality indication will appear when the protection device is activated during compressor operation at hea-
ting, with the indoor unit liquid refrigerant (piping) temperature higher than 55 °C and the compressor-top tempe-
rature higher than 95 °C.

[Detected (Approx. 15 V)]

Voltage bet-
RY1 turns No ween pins #1 No Protec- No Yes
PCN401
ON at operation and #3 of DIP-IPM tion device correctly
startup? Compressor connector PCN401 remains activa- connected?
operates? approx. 0V at ope- ted?
Yes ration startup?
No
Yes Yes

Check DIP-IPM
Does RY1 No connector wiring
remains ON for
more than three Faulty DIP-IPM
seconds?
Yes

Check the temperature of the following places with the remote control
switch in checking mode.
Check the temperature of [1] compressor top temperature and [2] indoor
unit liquid refrigerant (piping) temperature. Examine the cause and address
the problem if the measurements surpass the preset temperature.
1 Compressor top temperature: 95ºC or less
2 Indoor unit liquid refrigerant (piping) temperature: 55ºC or less

372
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
42 Heating overload (high pressure switch will be activate) (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is indicated when the protection device is activated at following condition. Indoor unit liquid refri-
gerant (piping) temperature higher than 55 ºC and top of compressor temperature higher than 95 ºC.

No Is the No No
voltage bet- Is protection
Is CMC ON? device
ween PCN9#1 and #3 Faulty PCB1
220V/240V? activated?
Yes
Yes Yes

No
Is CMC ON
more than Faulty PCB1
3 seconds?
Yes

Check the temperature of the following places with the remote control
switch in checking mode.
Check the temperature of [1] compressor top temperature and [2] indoor
unit liquid refrigerant (piping) temperature. Examine the cause and address
the problem if the measurements surpass the preset temperature.
1 Compressor top temperature: 95ºC or less
2 Indoor unit liquid refrigerant (piping) temperature: 55ºC or less

12

373
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Clogging of water
Water strainer maintenance
strainer

Insufficient water flow to Check for any obstacle

indoor unit heat exchanger at inlet or outlet of Remove it
heat exchanger

Check water pump Replace water pump

Measure discharge
Faulty
pressure.
pressure Replace it if faulty.
Check continuity after
switch
decreasing of pressure.
Faulty high
pressure
Insufficient Measure resistance Repair looseness.
switch
contacting by tester Replace connector.

Incorrect
Check connections Repair connections.
connection

Check decreasing air

flow volume at pressure Replace thermistor for evapo-
Faulty of outdoor fan control
switch for control rating temperature if faulty.
activative.
Activation of
high pressure
Check activated
switch due to Faulty of pressure switch Replace it if pressure switch
pressure and
excessively for control for control is faulty.
connecting wire.
high discharge
pressure during
heating Check cycle operating
Overcharged refrigerant Charge refrigerant correctly.
operation temperature.

Mixture of non-condensable gas in Check ambient tempe- Recharge refrigerant after

refrigerant cycle rature and pressure. vacuum pumping.

Clogging of discharge piping Check for clogging. Remove clogging.

Check for clogging. Remove clogging.

Check connecting wiring

Replace connector.
and connectors.

Check operating sound

Faulty or malfunction of Replace coil.
from coil.
expansion valve
Check discharge gas
Replace thermistor.
thermistor.

Check attaching state of

discharge Reattach thermistor.
gas thermistor.

Liquid line stop valve or gas line

Check stop valves. Fully open stop valve.
stop valve are not in operation

NOTE
This alarm code is indicated when the outdoor unit protective device is activated by high discharge pressure du-
ring heating operation. Accordingly, when this alarm code is indicated, there is high possibility of high pressure
switch actuation and the above troubleshooting actions are based on such cases.

374
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Activation to protect system from excessively low suction pressure

Alarm code
47 (protection from vacuum operation)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- In the case that the evaporating temperature (Cooling: liquid refrigerant piping temperature of indoor unit, hea-
ting: evaporating temperature of outdoor unit) is lower than -37 ºC (250~350 kΩ) and the thermistor on top of
compressor is higher than 90 ºC for 3 minutes, retry operation is performed 3 minutes after compressor stoppage.
However, when the state occurs more than 3 times including 3 in one hour, this alarm code is indicated.

Is the thermistor No
THM8 of outdoor unit Connect it
connected to PCB1?

Yes

Is the thermis- No
tor THML of indoor
Connect it
unit connected to PCB
(CN11)?
Yes
Is resistance of
THML and THM8 bet-
ween 0.24kΩ and 500kΩ? Faulty thermistor

Yes
No
Is gas leaking? Recharge refrigerant

Yes

Repair leaks of gas

12

375
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)

Faulty freeze
protection. Fault Check resistance Replace thermistor if faulty
Thermistor of
indoor unit.
Evaporating
thermistor of Incorrect connection Check wiring to PCB Repair wiring and connections
outdoor unit.

Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB (outdoor unit, indoor unit) Replace PCB if faulty
check operation

Liquid line stop valve is not open

Check stop valve Fully open stop valve
before operation

Check for clogging Remove clogging

Check connecting
Replace connector
wiring and connectors

Faulty or malfunction of Check operating sound

Replace coil
Excessively expansion valve from coil
low suction
pressure
(in vacuum) Check discharge gas
Replace thermistor
thermistor

Check attaching state of

discharge Reattach thermistor
gas thermistor

Check each temperatu- Charge refrigerant after va-

re and pressure cuum pumping
Refrigerant leakage
Correctly charge refrigerant
Check gas leakage part
after repairing gas leakage

Faulty outdoor Measure coil resistance

Replace outdoor fan
fan at heating Faulty outdoor fan motor and insulating
motor if faulty
operation resistance

376
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
48 Activation Protection Against Instantaneous Overcurrent of Inverter (RAS-2HVRN2)

Compressor stops O.U.:Outdoor Unit

Turn OFF power I.U.:Indoor Unit
immediately and disconnect U,
V, W from compressor No Is there any No
Restart terminals. cause of ins-
tantaneous voltage Check the compressor
operation.
Turn ON #1 of DSW1 on PCB2 decrease?
(IPM or dipIPM) and restart.
Yes Check the power
Compres- Does it trip?
sor stops
source capacity.
Yes, it tips
after few
minutes Replace the
electrical box.
No
Is the supply voltage AC 230V ±10%?

Yes

No
Is voltage higher than 170V during operation?

Check the capacity and wiring

Yes
of the power source.
No
Is voltage higher than 170V at any time?

Yes
No
Is the compressor running current as same as rated
current?

Yes
No
Is cranck
case heater ON? Restart operation after
main switch ON

Yes Is refrigerant Yes

overcharged? Charge refrigerant
correctly.

No
Yes
Is expansion valve of I.U locked
in cooling operation? Replace expansion
Is expansion valve of O.U locked in valve
heating operation?
No
Check the compressor.
No
Yes
Is the discharge Check the stop valve
pressure high? and expansion valve

12
Check the clogging of
the heat exchanger

Check the fan motor

377
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
48 Overcurrent protection activation (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)

Turn OFF power

and disconnect U,
Restart Yes No Is there any No
V, W from compressor
operation. terminals. cause of ins-
tantaneous voltage Check the compressor
Does it trip soon? Turn ON #1 of DSW1 on PCB2 decrease?
(IPM or dipIPM) and restart.
It trips immediately Yes Check the power
Does it trip? *1)
source capacity.
It trips after a certain period Yes, it tips
Replace the PCB2
In case of 400V 50Hz: (IPM or dipIPM). *1)
Is the power supply voltage 400V ±10%?
No
In case of 380-415V/50Hz
Is the power supply voltage 380V ±10% or 415V ±10%?
In case of 230V/50Hz:
Is the power supply voltage 230V ±10%?
Yes

In case of 400V 50Hz:

Is the power supply voltage 340V during operation? No
In case of 380-415V/50Hz:
Is the power supply voltage 323V during operation?
In case of 230V/50Hz:
Is the power supply voltage 187V during operation?
Check the capacity and wiring
Yes of the power source.
No
Is it 170V (single phase) or 340V (3 phases) or
more during operation when other devices are operating?

Yes
No
Is the compressor running current the same as
rated current?

Yes
No
Is current
applying to crank- Restart operation after
case heater? applying current.

Is refrigerant Yes
Yes
charged Charge refrigerant
excessively? correctly.

Is lock of indoor expansion valve

opened at cooling operation? Yes
Restart expansion
Is lock of outdoor expansion valve valve.
opened at heating operation?

No
Check the compressor.

Yes
Is pressure Check the stop valves
excessively high? and expansion valve.
Check for clogging at
heat exchanger.

Check the fan.

*1) Perform the high voltage discharge work by referring to the item Procedure of checking other main parts before chec-
king and replacing the inverter PCB.

378
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
51 Abnormality of current sensor (RAS-2HVRN2)

• “RUN” light flashes and “ALARM” is indicated on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, alarm code and the unit code is alternately indicated on the set temperature section, and the alarm
code is indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is indicated when the below condition is activated 3 times including 3 in 30 minutes. Retry ope-
ration is performed up to the occurrence of 2 times.
-- Condition of activation:
ŠŠ When the frequency of compressor is maintained at 6 to 10Hz (3HP) after compressor is started, one of the
absolute value of running current at each phase is less than 1.5A (including 1.5A).

Restart the operation

Compressor stops Faulty PCB1 and replace

immediately (nearly 18Hz) Electrical Box

How is compressor ope-

ration when restarted?

Compressor is not operated.

P7 is displayed. *1)

No
Is the coil resistance of
the comp. normal? Replace the compressor.

Yes

Check the PCB1.

Replace electrical box. (3HP)

*1) P17 is shown at 7-segment on the outdoor unit PCB.

12

379
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
51 Abnormal operation of the current transformer (0A detection) (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm code is indicated when the below condition is activated 3 times including 3 in 30 minutes. Retry ope-
ration is performed up to the occurrence of 2 times.
-- Condition of activation:
ŠŠ When the frequency of compressor is maintained at 15 to 18Hz after compressor is started, one of the abso-
lute value of running current at each phase is less than 1.5A (including 1.5A).

Restart the operation Power wiring of the comp. is

not through CT.
Pass the wires through CT

Compressor stops immedia- Faulty PCB2.

tely (nearly 18Hz) Replace PCB2 *2)
How is the compressor
operation when you restart
the compressor?

Compressor does not operate

P7 is displayed *1)

No
Is the coil resistance of
the comp. normal? Replace the compressor

Yes

Is output of ISPM, IPM or Yes

dipIPM correct?
Replace PCB2
Or is the voltage between
U-V, V-W and W-U?
No

Replace dip IPM, IPM if faulty

*1) P7 is shown at 7-segment on the outdoor unit PCB.

*2) Perform the high voltage discharge work by referring to the item Procedure of checking other main parts before chec-
king and replacing the inverter parts.

380
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
53 Transistor module protection activation (RAS-2HVRN2)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- This alarm is displayed when the inverter PCB or DIP-IPM module detects the abnormal operation 7 times or
more than 7 times in 30 minutes. The retry operation is performed six times.
Conditions:
The abnormal current to the inverter PCB or DIP-IPM, such as short-circuited, grounded, overcurrent or control voltage
decrease.

Turn off power of inverter components, Check the compressor.

disconnect U, V, W from compressor No
(If there is a short-circuit
terminals. Turn ON pin 1 of DSW1 on PCB1. between phase lines or groun-
Does it trip? *2) ded from any phase, replace
the compressor.)

Yes

Yes
Is the heat exchanger of outdoor
unit clogged? Remove clogging.

No
Replace the electrical box

12

381
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

53
Protection activation of IPM or DipIPM and PCB2 (RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF and
Alarm code
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- IPM or Dip IPM and PCB2 have detecting function of abnormality.
ŠŠ This alarm is indicated when the transistor module detect the abnormality 7 times in 30 minutes including 7.
Retry operation is performed up to the occurrence of 6 times.
Conditions:
Abnormal current to the transistor module such as
Short circuited or grounded
or
Abnormal temperature of the IPM or Dip IPM and PCB2
or
Control voltage decrease

Turn off power, disconnect U, V, W No Check the compressor.

from compressor terminals and restart.
(If there is a short-circuit
Does the protecting function activate? *3) between phase lines, replace
the compressor.)
Yes

Faulty Good
Check the IPM or Dip IPM.
Check the PCB2 Replace IPM or Dip IPM
*1) *2)

Good Faulty
Replace IPM and PCB2

No Coat the silicon grease to all

Is the silicon grease coated all over
the touched face between the
between the IPM or Dip IPM and the
IPM and the radiated fin fully.
radiated fin?
*4)

Yes

Yes
Is the heat exchanger of outdoor
unit clogged? Remove clogging.

No
Replace the PCB2

*1) Perform the high voltage discharge work by referring to the item Procedure of checking other main parts before
checking and replacing the inverter components.
*2) Regarding replacing or checking method for inverter components, refer to Procedure of checking other main parts.
*3) Turn ON the Nº 1 switch of the dip switch DSW1 on PCB2 when restarting with disconnecting the terminals of the
compressor. After troubleshooting, turn OFF the Nº 1 switch of the dip switch DSW1 on PCB2.
*4) Use the silicon grease.

NOTE
When alarm code “53” is indicated, the outdoor fan motor (DC motor) ensure that DC fan motor is checked according to
the item Procedure of checking other main parts.

382
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
53 Activation for protecting the ISPM (RAS-(4-6)HRNME-AF)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- ISPM has a detection function of the abnormal operation. This alarm is displayed when the ISPM module detects
the abnormal operation 7 times or more than 7 times in 30 minutes. The retry operation is performed six times.
Conditions:
The abnormal current to the ISPM, such as short-circuited, grounded, overcurrent or control voltage decrease.

Turn off power, disconnect U, V, W No Check the compressor.

from compressor terminals and restart.
(If there is a short-circuit bet-
Does the protecting function activate? *2) ween phase lines, replace the
compressor)
Yes

Faulty
Check the transistor module.
Replace the transistor module
*1)

Good

Replace IPM and PCB2

Loosen
Is the fixed screw on ISPM
loosened? Tighten the screw correctly.

Yes

Yes
Is the fixed screw on ISPM
loosened? Remove clogging.

No
Replace the ISPM

*1) Regarding replacing or checking method for the ISPM refer to item Procedure of checking other main parts.
*2) Set the #1 pin of DIP switch DSW1 on ISPM to ON when you are restarting with the terminals of the compressor
disconnected. After the troubleshooting, set the #1 pin of DIP switch DSW1 on ISPM to OFF.

12

383
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
54 Increase in the inverter fin temperature

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- If the alarm code “51” or “54” occurs three times within 30 minutes, the alarm code which occurred for the third
time is displayed. The retry operation is performed twice.
Conditions:
When the temperature of the thermistor for inverter fin excess 100 ºC (RAS-(3-6)HVRNME-AF), 80 ºC (RAS-(4-10)
HRNME-AF) 3 times in 30 minutes, this alarm is indicated and the operation is stopped. In the case the occurrence is
smaller than 2 times, retry is performed.

Yes No
Restart the operation. Is thermistor
short circuit or Replace the dipIPM, ISPM,
Does it trip soon? faulty? IPM. *1

No

Yes

Replace the thermistor

Yes
Is the heat exchanger of the
outdoor unit clogged? Remove the clogging

No
Faulty PCB2 or thermistor.
Replace it.

*1) Perform the high voltage discharge work by referring to the item Procedure of checking other main parts before chec-
king and replacing the inverter components.

384
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
55 IPM or PCB2 abnormality

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- In case that the abnormality of alarm code 55 occurs four times within 30 minutes, the alarm code of abnormality
occurred for the fourth time is indicated. Retry operation is performed up to third time of abnormality occurrence.

Conditions:
When the transmitting abnormality occurs between dipIPM (or IPM) and PCB2), this alarm is indicated and the operation
is stopped.

Troubleshooting:
Replace the PCB2.

12

385
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
57 Abnormality of fan motor protection (DC fan motor)

• The RUN LED flickers and “ALARM” is displayed on the remote control switch.
• The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section. The unit
number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
-- The fan motor stops when the revolution output from the fan motor is 20 rpm (RAS-2HVRN2) or 10 rpm (RAS-(3-
10)H(V)RNME-AF) or lower during 30 seconds (RAS-2HVRN2) or 10 seconds (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF) after
the fan motor activation.
-- The alarm is indicated when the abnormality is repeated 4 times within 5 minutes (RAS-2HVRN2) or 10 times
within 30 minutes (RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF) after the first detection.

Restart operation

Yes
Does the Check fuse EF4
motor run? Check for correct wiring

No
Alarm code is not indicated
Yes
Does the fan
stop by the foreign Removed the foreign matter
matter?
No

Check to remove the connector connection of RAS-2HVRN2: CN24 (on PCB1)

RAS-(3-10)H(V)RNME-AF: CN15 (on PCB1) and CN201, CN202, PCN201, PCN203 (on PCB5).

Faulty
Are the
connectors Connect it correctly
abnormal?

Good
Restart operation

Yes
Does the
motor run? This is normal

No

Replace the fan motor

Restart operation

Yes
Does the This is normal
motor run?
No
Alarm code is not indicated
Replace the PCB1

NOTE
In the case that the fan motor does not run even the PCB1 is replaced, replace PCB5
Check to ensure that DC Fan Motor is checked according to the item Procedure of checking other main parts.

386
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
EE Compressor protection

This alarm code is displayed when one of the following alarms occurs three times within six hours. If the outdoor unit ope-
rates continuously without removing the cause of the alarm, the compressor may be seriously damaged.

Alarm code Content of abnormality

02 Tripping of protection device in outdoor unit

07 Decrease in discharge gas superheat

08 Increase in discharge gas temperature

41 Cooling overload

42 Heating overload

47 Low pressure decrease protection activating

NOTE
You can check these alarms using the check mode 1. Follow the action that is indicated in each alarm chart. You
can clear these alarms only by turning OFF the main switch to the system. However, you must pay careful atten-
tion before starting, because there is a possibility of causing serious damages to the compressors.

12

387
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
70 Hydraulic alarm

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when there is a flow or pressure failure (water flow too low) (water pressure to low).

Restart operation

No No
Voltage in Check fuse EF4
Is water pump
water pump1?
1 running? Check for correct wiring
Yes
Yes

Faulty water pump1

No
Are the all water circuit Open it
valves completely open?
Yes

No
Are the water
filters clean? Clean it

Yes

< 1 bar
Check the manometer to
make sure there is sufficient Charge water
water pressure
> 1.5 bar
• See Unit installation chapter
P70 protection
Check to make sure there is • See Water pump configuration chapter
sufficient water flow • Make sure there is no air in the system
No P70 protection • Check to make sure the expansion vessel is not broken
No
Check continuity in water Faulty water flow switch
flow switch (Replace it)
(when water pump is ON)
Yes

No
Check continuity in water
Faulty water pressure switch
pressure switch (when water
(Replace it)
pump is ON)
Yes

Faulty PCB1 (Check PCB)

Contact your local leader.

Alarm control procedure:

-- Perform retry operation for 6 minutes the first time (Seven-segment shows P70) and keep Outdoor and Indoor Unit
running (except Electrical Heater). After 6 minutes have passed (P70), Switch Stop status OFF for Outdoor and
Indoor Units

388
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
71 No feed back signal from water pump

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when pump1 operation feedback signal is OFF while pump interlock is ON.

Is the voltage No No
Is thermal
between connector
relay for pump1
PCN4-1 and PCN4-3 on Check the Pump Lock
(52P) activated?
PCB1 at 220-240V?

Yes Check thermal

Yes
relay for pump

Check PCB1 Check wiring aroung pump1

and thermal relay for pump

12

389
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
72 Thermostat Heater Alarm

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when electrical heater’s thermal protection is open (>75ºC).

Is the electri- Yes

cal heater Reset the thermal
thermostat (THe) protector by
open? pressing reset
button
No

Check the reset button on Yes

Yes
the thermal protector. If Check Electrical Has the
button is ON a pre-set (and Heater thermal Thermal fuse Contact your local dealer
there is continuity between fuse blown?
terminals), but the Electrical
Heater continues OFF. No

Have the Yes

Electrical fuses Replace fuses
(EF1/2/3) blown?

No

Contact your local dealer

Alarm control procedure:

-- Switch OFF Outdoor and Indoor Units
-- Electrical Heater Disabled
-- Water pumps continue running up to water <55ºC.

390
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
73 Mixing Overheating Limit Protection for mixed circuit (Only if Circuit 2 is enabled)

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when temperature of circuit 2 (mixed circuit) is 5ºC more than maximum water outlet
installer configuration for circuit 2.

Is the water outlet Yes

circuit 2 (THMwo2) 1
temperature > Maximum Check that the contactors of the electrical heater
water outlet circuit 2 is not short circuited
temperature +5?

No 2
Check that the outlet water circuit 2 temperatures
is giving the correct reading

3
Check mixing station (water pump, mixing valve
position)

4
Contact your local dealer

Faulty PCB1 (Check PCB)

Contact your local dealer

12

391
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
74 Unit Overheating Limit Protection

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when temperature of the unit is 5ºC more than maximum water outlet installer configu-
ration for circuit 2 or 5ºC more than maximum water outlet by unit operating range.

Yes 1
Is the water outlet
temperature (THMwo) > Check to make sure the electrical heater’s
Maximum water outlet +5? contactors are not short circuited

No
2
Check to make sure the outlet water temperature
is giving the correct reading

Refer to Alarm 70 procedures

4
Check to make sure the unit is operating within
operating range (refer to Operating range chapter)

5
Contact your local dealer

Faulty PCB1 (Check PCB)

Contact your local dealer

Alarm control procedure:

-- Perform retry operation for 90 seconds the first time (Seven-segment shows P74) and keep Outdoor and indoor
unit running (except Electrical Heater). After 90 seconds have passed (P74), Switch Stop status OFF for Outdoor
and Indoor Units.
ŠŠ Switch water pump1 to OFF (if water outlet < 55ºC).
ŠŠ Mixing valve closed.

392
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
75 Freeze Protection by Cold water inlet, outlet temperature detection

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when temperature the unit is less than 2ºC or 5ºC lower than maximum water outlet
installer configuration (cooling) during operation.
Due to low water:

Is the water outlet Yes

temperature (THMwo) 1
< 2ºC or < Maximum water Refer to Alarm 70 procedures
outlet temperature -5?

2
No Check to make sure the outlet water temperature
is giving the correct position

3
Check to make sure the unit is operating within
operating range (refer to Operating range chapter)

4
Are the
connectors between Contact your local dealer
PCB1 and PCB2 connected
correctly?

CN9-CN1
No
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 Wiring check, repair breaking of wire, wrong wiring
CN6-CN3
CN2-CN4
Yes
Are thermistors No
THMwo & THMwohp
correct? (Refer to Alarms Check THMwohp and replace it
12/19 procedures)

Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2 (Check PCBs)

Due to low refrigerant:

Are thermistors
No
THMg & THM1 co-
rrect? (Refer to Alarms Check THMg or THM1 and replace it
13/14 procedures)

Yes

Yes
Due to
refrigerant shortage? Contact your local dealer

No
12
Faulty PCB1 or PCB2
Contact your local dealer
(Check PCBs)

Alarm control procedure:

-- Switch OFF Outdoor and Indoor Units

393
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
76 Freeze Protection Stop by indoor liquid temperature thermistor

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when refrigerant temperature of the indoor unit is lower than -20ºC for 30 seconds.

Is the water Yes

1
refrigerant tempe-
rature (THML and THMg) Refer to Alarm 70 procedures
measured correctly?
2
No Check that the refrigerant thermistors
(THML & THMg) are positioned correctly
3
Check to make sure the unit is operating within
operating range (refer to Operating range chapter)
4
Check for shortage of refrigerant gas leakage

5
Clogging of plate heat exchanger

6
Clogging of expansion valve and strainer
7

Check valve malfunction

8
Expansion valve malfunction

9
Make sure that the water volume of the installation
Are the is above minimum required for the unit
connectors between (Refer to Installation water charge chapter)
PCB1 and PCB2 connected 10
correctly? Contact your local dealer

CN9-CN1
No
CN5-CN2
PCB1 PCB2 Wiring check, repair breaking of wire, wrong wiring
CN6-CN3
CN2-CN4
Yes
Are thermistors No
THMg & THMl
correct? (Refer to Alarms Check THMg or THMI and replace it
13/14 procedures)

Yes

Faulty PCB1 or PCB2 (Check PCBs) Contact your local dealer

394
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
77 Opentherm communication failure (Only with intelligent thermostat accessory)

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when there is no Opentherm communication for a continuous period of 1 minute.

Are the
connections between
PCB1 and RF Receiver
connected correctly?

LCD TB RF Receiver No
CN1-3 TB2-3 RF-1 Wiring check, repair breaking of wire, wrong wiring
CN1-4 TB2-4 RF-2

Yes

Faulty LCD or RF Receiver Contact your local dealer

(Check it)

Alarm control procedure

The control will continue in normal operation with the following fixed Opentherm values:
-- Circuit 1: Uses the last received Room Set-point. The Room temperature is assumed to be equal to the Room
Set-point.
-- Circuit 2: Uses the last received Room Set-point. The Room temperature is assumed to be equal to the Room
Set-point.
-- Control will not obey the thermostat time programme and OFF function.

NOTE
For more information refer to Room unit installation guide.

12

395
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
78 RF communication failure (Only with intelligent thermostat accessory)

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when there is no communication for 1 hour with one or two Room thermostat devices
that are bound to the RF-bridge.

Symptom
Possible Cause Remedy
(Fault Message)

Make sure that the 8:Su parameter

value is set correctly. Reset the RF
The Room Unit and
The RF Receiver does not Receiver by pressing and holding
RF Receiver are not bound or the
react to setpoint changes on the the push button for 15 seconds.
installer parameter 8:Su has not
Room Unit Then follow the binding / rebinding
been set correctly
procedure as described in section
4. Binding/ Rebinding Procedure

Incorrect or incomplete
Repeat the binding procedure
binding procedure
After the binding procedure the
red LED continues to flash on
the RF Receiver Repeat the binding procedure kee-
Incorrect position of the ping approx 1m distance between
Room Unit during binding the RF Receiver and the Room
Unit

The RF Receiver receives no RF

-
messages from the Room Unit

The red LED is on the Re-locate the Room Unit following

RF signal is blocked due to wrong
RF Receiver instructions in section 2. Installing
location of the Room Unit
(Communication loss) the System MMI Pack

Room Unit batteries Replace batteries in

are exhausted the Room Unit

Alarm control procedure:

The control will continue in normal operation with the following fixed Opentherm values:
-- Circuit 1: Uses the last received Room Set-point. The Room temperature is assumed to be equal to the Room
Set-point
-- Circuit 2: Uses the last received Room Set-point. The Room temperature is assumed to be equal to the Room
Set-point
-- Control will not obey the thermostat time programme and OFF function

NOTE
For more information refer to Room unit installation and user’s guide.

396
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
79 Incorrect capacity setting

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when there is no concordance between indoor outdoor unit capacity.

Are the capacity

concordance between No
indoor and outdoor correct? Turn power OFF and set DIP
(Refer to Dip-switch setting switches correctly
chapter)

Yes

Faulty PCB1 (Check it) Contact your local dealer

12

397
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Alarm code
80 H-Link communication failure between Indoor and LCD User interface

• The alarm code is displayed on the LCD User interface.

• The alarm code is displayed on the seven segments of the indoor unit PCB.
• This alarm code is displayed when there is no communication for 3 minutes between Indoor PCB1 and LCD User
interface.

Are the
connections between
PCB1 and LCD User
interface correctly
connected?

LCD TB PCB1
CN1-1 TB2-1 CN1-2
CN1-2 TB2-2 CN1-3 No
Wiring check, repair breaking of wire,
CN1-3 TB2-3
wrong wiring
CN1-4 TB2-4
CN1-5 CN15-1
CN1-6 CN15-2
Yes

Is the same No
indoor outdoor
address between PCB1 Set the same address
(indoor unit) and LCD
User interface?
Yes

Faulty LCD or PCB1

Contact your local dealer
(Check it)

Alarm control procedure:

-- Switch OFF Outdoor and Indoor Units.

12.1.3  Troubleshooting in check mode

Refer to chapter 6 User interface.

398
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

12.1.4  Troubleshooting using the 7 segment display (outdoor unit)

 
Simple checking by 7-segment display

Turn ON indoor unit connected to During auto-addressing, the following items can be checked using
1
the outdoor unit the outdoor unit’s on-board 7-segment LED display:

1 Disconnection of power supply to the indoor unit.

2 Turn ON the outdoor unit 2 Reverse connection of the operating line between the outdoor
and indoor units.
3 Duplication of indoor unit number.

3 Auto-addressing starts

Outdoor unit, circuit board, PCB1

 
Checking method by 7-segment display

Operating conditions and each part of refrigeration cycle can be checked by 7-segment and push switches (PSW) on the
PCB in the outdoor unit. During checking data, do not touch the electric parts except for the indicated switches because
220-240V is applied to them. Pay attention not to contact the tools with electrical parts. If contacted, electrical parts will be
damaged.

Y52C • To start checking, press PSW2 switch for more than three seconds.
Y21 • To proceed checking, press the PSW2 switch.

8 8
Y20B FAN1 • To back to the previous item, press the PSW3 switch.
• To cancel this checking, press the PSW2 switch for more than 3
Y20A YCH seconds.

FAN2 PSH

Manual
8.8. defrost

SEG1 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3

12

399
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Item Indication data

Item Check In- In-
Contents
No. dic. dic.
Total capacity of indoor unit connected 01 CP 22 00~96
Input/output state of outdoor micro- Indicates only for the segments corresponding to the equipment in
computer
02 SC  the figure. (See figure above)
Alarm code for abnormal stoppage of
compressor
03 AC 08 Alarm code on compressor

30~115 ( Hz)
Inverter order frequency to compressor 04 HI 74 In case that frequency is higher than 100Hz, the last two digits flicker
30~115 ( Hz)
Indoor order frequency to compressor 05 H2 74 In case that frequency is higher than 100Hz, last two digits flicker
00~100 (%)
Air flow ratio 06 Fo 80 In case that air flow ratio is 100%, “00” flashes
00~100 (%)
Outdoor unit expansion valve opening 07 Eo 30 In case that expansion valve opening is 100%, “00” flashes
00~142 (ºC)
Temperature at the top of compressor 08 d 02 In case that temperature is higher than 100ºC, the last two digits flash
Evaporating temperature at heating 09 E 2 -19~80ºC

Ambient air temperature 10 o -3 -19~80ºC

Cause of stoppage at inverter 11 i 1 (See table at the next page)

Control information 12 F 20 Internal information of outdoor unit PCB

Control information 13 A1 12 Internal information of outdoor unit PCB

Inverter secondary current 14 A2 20 00~199 (A)

Outdoor unit address 15 nA 00 00~15

In case of twin/triple/quad-type unit,
00~100 (%)
the information of 2nd to the 4th indo-
Indoor unit expansion valve opening 16 EA 20 In case that opening is or units is indicated repeatedly.
100%. “00” flashes
The right character of the indication
Liquid pipe temperature of indoor unit represents the indoor unit setting No.
(freeze protection)
17 LA 05 -19~127 (ºC)
Single: A
Indoor unit intake air temperature 18 iA 28 -19~127 (ºC) Twin: A, b
Triple: A, b, c
Indoor unit discharge air temperature 19 oA 20 -19~127 (ºC)
Quad: A, b, c, d
Cause of indoor unit stoppage 20 dA 05 (See table at the next page)

400
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Cause of inverter stoppage (11) Cause of indoor unit stoppage (20)

Indication Contents Indication Contents

1 IPM, ISPM, dipIPM error 00 Operation OFF, Power OFF

2 Instantaneous over current 01 Thermo-OFF

3 Inverter fin thermistor protection activation 02 Alarm

4 Electronic thermal activation 03 Freeze protection overheating protection

5 Inverter voltage decrease 05 Instantaneous power failure at outdoor unit

6 Over voltage 06 Instantaneous power failure at indoor unit

Stoppage of cooling operation due to low outdoor air

7 Abnormal transmission
temperature
8 Abnormal current detection 07 Stoppage of heating operation due to high outdoor air
temperature
9 Instantaneous power failure detection
10 Demand thermo OFF
11 Reset of micro-computer for inverter
13 Retry for Pd increase prevention
12 Earth fault detection from compressor
15 Vacuum/discharge gas temperature increase retry
13 Open phase detection
16 Retry due to discharge gas SUPERHEAT decrease
14 Inverter malfunction
IPM error retry, instantaneous over current of inverter
15 Inverter malfunction 17 retry, electronic thermal activation of inverter retry, abnor-
mal current sensor of inverter retry
16 Inverter malfunction Retry due to inverter voltage decrease
18
17 Transmission error Retry due to Inverter Overvoltage

18 Abnormal current detection 19 Other retry

Forced thermo-OFF
19 Abnormal protective device
22 (During compressor pre-heating)

24 Thermo-OFF during energy saving operation mode

NOTE
To finish checking: press the PSW2 switch for
more than 3 seconds

Cancelation of Forced Thermo OFF

Turn ON the power source and wait for more than 30 seconds. Then press PSW1 and PSW3 simultaneously for more
than 3 seconds.
Forced thermo-OFF (indoor unit error code 22) will be cancelled.
However, this function may damage the compressor, use only on inevitable occasion.

12

401
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Cause of inverter stoppage

Remark
Cause of stoppage for
Code Cause Indication during
corresponding unit Alarm code
retry
Automatic stoppage of transistor module

1 (IPM, ISPM, dipIPM Error) 17 P7 53

(Over current, decrease voltage, short circuit protection)

2 Instantaneous over current 17 P7 48

3 Abnormal inverter fin thermistor 17 P7 54
4 Electronic thermal activation 17 P7 48
5 Inverter voltage decrease 18 P8 06
6 Over voltage 18 P8 06
7 Abnormal inverter transmission 18 - -
8 Abnormal current detection 17 P7 51
9 Instantaneous power failure detection 18 - -
11 Reset of micro-computer for inverter 18 - -
12 Earth fault detection from compressor (Only starting) 17 P7 53
13 Abnormal power source phase (Open phase) 18 - -
1b Inverter PCB abnormality 18 P8 55
17 Abnormal transmission 18 P8 55
18 Abnormal current detection - - 02
19 Abnormal protective device - - 38
20
~ Other factors 18 - -
b3

402
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Protection control code on 7-segment display

1 Protection control code is displayed on 7-segment when a protection control is activated.

2 Protection control code is displayed while function is working, and goes out when released.
3 When several protection control are activated, code number with higher priority will be indicated (see below for the
priority order).
a. Higher priority is given to protection control related to frequency control than the other. Priority order:
ŠŠ High-pressure increase protection
ŠŠ Over current protection
ŠŠ Cold draft protection
ŠŠ Low-pressure ratio control at cooling operation
b. In relation to retry control, the latest retrial will be indicated unless a protection control related to frequency control
is indicated.

Code Protection control

P 0 Low-pressure ratio control at cooling operation

P 1 High-pressure ratio control at heating operation

P 2 High-pressure increase protection

P 3 Over current protection

P 4 IPM fin temperature increase protection

P 5 Discharge gas temperature increase protection

P 6 Frost formation protection

P 9 Unbalance power source detecting

P A Current demand control

P b Low-pressure decrease protection

P C Cold draft protection

-- Retry indication continues for 30 minutes unless a protection control is indicated.

-- Retry indication disappears if the stop signal comes from all rooms.
Code Protection control

P 7
Inverter retry
P 8

NOTE
The protection control code being indicated on 7‑segment display is changed to an alarm code when the abnormal
operation occurs. Also, the same alarm code is indicated on the remote control switch.

12

403
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Activating condition of protection control code

For following the conditions as the temperature change, etc., the control of frequency, etc. is performed to prevent the
abnormal conditions by the protection control. The activating conditions of protection control are shown in the table below.

Code Protection control Activating condition Remarks

Low-pressure ratio control at Compression ratio ε < 2.2
P0 cooling operation => frequency increase
ε = (Pd+0.1)/(Ps+0.1)

High-pressure ratio control at Compression ratio ε > 7.5

P1 heating operation => frequency decrease
ε = (Pd+0.1)/(Ps+0.1)

High pressure switch for control is activated

P2 High-pressure increase protection
=> frequency decrease
Inverter output current > (*1)A
P3 Over current protection
=> frequency decrease
Inverter fin temperature
DipIPM, ISPM or IPM temperature RAS-(4-10)HRNME-AF > 100 ºC
P4 increase protection RAS-(3-6)HVRNME > 80 ºC
=> Frequency decrease
Temperature at the top of compressor is high
Discharge gas temperature => frequency decrease
P5 increase protection Temperature at the top of compressor > 107ºC
=> indicate P5
TL ≤ 2ºC Over 3 minutes TL: liquid piping, temperature of
P6 Frost formation protection
=> Frequency decrease indoor unit
Inverter output current > 13A (380A)
P9 Unbalance power source detecting
=> frequency decrease
Inverter output current > (*2)A
PA Current demand control
=> frequency decrease
In case of demand control setting

Low pressure switch for control is activated

Pb Low-pressure decrease protection
=> frequency decrease
ε = (Pd+0.1)/(Ps+0.1)
PC Cold draft protection TO ≤ 10ºC and ε ≥ 2.6 => frequency decrease
TO: outlet temperature of indoor unit
Automatic stoppage of transistor module, acti- When activating 3 times in 30 minu-
P7 Inverter retry vation of electronic thermal or abnormal current tes, “48”, “51”, “53” or “54” alarm is
sensor indicated.
Insufficient/excessive voltage at inverter When activating 3 times in 30 minu-
P8 Inverter retry
Circuit or PCB connector part tes, “06” or “55” alarm is indicated.

NOTEs
• During protection control (except during alarm stoppage), the protection control code is indicated.
• The protection control code is indicated during protection control and turns off when canceling the protection
control.
• After retry control, the condition of monitoring is continued for 30 minutes.
• The maximum value (*1) and (*2) are as follows:

(*1) 380 – 415V 220 – 240V (*2) HP 380 – 415V 220 – 240V
HP Demand
4 5 3 4 5 4 5 3 4 5
setting
Current (A) 8.0 12.0 16.0 16.0 24.0
100% 4.0 5.5 11.5 13.0 17.0
Current
75% 3.0 4.0 8.5 10.0 13.0
(A)
50% 2.0 2.0 5.5 6.5 8.5

404
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

12.1.5  Procedure of checking other main parts

1 High voltage discharge work for replacing parts

D A N ger
Perform this high voltage discharge work to avoid an electric shock

Procedure:
a. Turn OFF the main switches and wait for three minutes. Check to ensure that no high voltage exists. If LED201 is
ON after start-up and LED201 is OFF after turning OFF power source, the voltage will decrease lower than DC50V.
b. Connect connecting wires to an electrical soldering iron.
c. Connect the wires to terminals, P and N on IPM. => Discharging is started, resulting in hot soldering iron. Pay at-
tention not to short-circuit between terminal P and N.

Plug

Electrical soldering iron

Connecting wires
Transistor module

d. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes and measure the voltage once again. Check to ensure that no voltage is charged.

2 Checking method of transistor module Outer appearance and internal circuit of transistor module

Drive circuit

Drive circuit

Drive circuit

Drive circuit

Drive circuit

12

405
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

Remove all the terminals of the transistor module before check. If items (a) to (d) are performing and the results are satis-
factory, the transistor module is normal. Measure it under 1kΩ range of a tester.
Do NOT use a digital tester.

a. By touching the + side of the tester to the P terminal

of transistor module and the - side of tester to U,
V and W of transistor module, measure the resis-
tance. If all the resistances are from 1 to 5kΩ, it is
normal.

b. By touching the - side of the tester to the P terminal

of transistor module and the + side of tester to U, V
and W of transistor module, measure the resistan-
ce. If all the resistances are greater than 100kΩ, it
is normal.

c. By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal

of transistor module and the + side of tester to U,
V and W of transistor module, measure the resis-
tance. If all the resistances are from 1 to 5kΩ, it is
normal.

d. By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal

of transistor module and the - side of tester to U, V
and W of transistor module, measure the resistan-
ce. If all the resistances are greater than 100kΩ, it
is normal.

406
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

3 Checking method of diode module Outer appearance and internal circuit of diode module

If items (a) to (d) are performing and the results are satisfactory, the diode module is normal.
Measure it under 1kΩ range of a tester. Do NOT use a digital tester.
a. By touching the + side of the tester to the + terminal of
diode module and the - side of tester to the ~ terminals
(3 NOs.) of the diode module, measure the resistance.
If all the resistances are from 5 to 50kΩ, it is normal.

b. By touching the - side of the tester to the + terminal of

diode module and the + side of tester to the ~ terminals
(3 NOs.) of the diode module, measure the resistance.
If all the resistances are greater than 500kΩ, it is nor-
mal.

c. By touching the - side of the tester to the - terminal of

diode module and the + side of tester to the ~ terminals
(3 NOs.) of the diode module, measure the resistance.
If all the resistances are from 5 to 50kΩ, it is normal.

d. By touching the + side of the tester to the - terminal of

diode module and the - side of tester to the ~ terminals
(3 NOs.) of the diode module, measure the resistance.
If all the resistances are greater than 500kΩ, it is nor-
mal.
12

407
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Fault diagnosis procedure

Fault diagnosis of DC fan motor. About fan motor fault diagnosis:

When ISPM/DIP-IPM is faulty and alarm 53 appears, the fan motor may also be damaged. After replacing the new ISPM/
DIP-IPM, ISPM/DIP-IPM will be damaged again if it operates with a damaged fan motor. Check also if the fan motor is not
damaged when IPM/DIP-IPM is replaced.

caution
• Turn OFF main power before start working.
• Working and checking with the power ON may disturb correct diagnosis and may result in failure.

Models with DC motor(s) Nº of motors

RAS-2HVRN2
1 Piece
RAS-3HVRNME-AF
RAS-(4-10)H(V)RNME-AF
2 Pieces
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF

Procedure in case of error diagnosis

1 Remove fan motor connectors from the control PCB, ISPM or DIP-IPM and turn the fan motor shaft by hand.

Normal Fan motor shaft turns smoothly

Faulty No continuous rotary torque movement felt when turning the motor by hand. This occurs because the
internal magnet of the fan motor breaks the movement when the internal electronic circuit of the fan
motor has a short-circuit fault.
2 Measure the fan motor resistance:

Measurement procedure
1 Remove the fan motor connector from the control PCB, ISPM or DIP-IPM.
2 Connect the black test lead of the tester to the black wire pin of the fan motor connector.
3 Connect the red test lead to the wire connector pin to be checked.
Results
Normal Observed values will be close to the normal values in the table below.
Faulty Obbserved values will be deviated from the normal values in the table below. (Generally, an open-
circuit fault shows ∞, and a short-circuit fault shows several Ω - kΩ).
Internal electronic circuit fault of the fan motor including short-circuit and breakage can be checked.

Wire color for checking (Normal value)

Model Motor model
Red-black White-black Yellow-black Blue-black
FPD10U4OS-902 or
RAS-2HVRN2 13.5 - 14.4kΩ 1MΩ or greater 225-226kΩ 1MΩ or greater
DAJ12-55V71
RAS-4H(V)RNME-AF (upper)
SIC-65FV-D840-1 1MΩ or greater 26-50kΩ 168-312kΩ 1MΩ or greater
RAS-(4-6)H(V)RNME-AF (lower)
RAS-3HVRNME-AF
SIC-68FV-D851-7 1MΩ or greater 42-78kΩ 168-312kΩ 1MΩ or greater
RAS-(5/6)HVRNME-AF (upper)
RAS-(8/10)HRNME-AF SIC-81FV-D8138-1 1MΩ or greater 42 - 78kΩ 168-312kΩ 1MΩ or greater

Values are shown for referential purpose. While actual values may vary depending on the type of the tester, any tester can
be used to determine any short-circuit or breakage based on ∞ or several Ω or 0 Ω or ∞.

408
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Checking procedure for the ISPM

Remove all the terminals of the ISPM before check. Rectification parts of internal circuit of ISPM (common)

If items (a) to (h) are performed and the results are satisfactory, ISPM is
normal. Measure it under 1 kΩ range of a tester.

caution
• Perform the high voltage discharge procedure as described
• Do not use a digital tester.
a. By touching the + side of the tester to the P1 terminal of ISPM and the -
side of the tester to R and S of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the
resistances are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal.

b. By touching the - side of the tester to the P1 terminal of ISPM and the +
side of the tester to R and S of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the
resistances are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal.

c. By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal of ISPM and the +
side of the tester to R and S of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the
resistances are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal.

d. By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal of ISPM and the -
side of the tester to R and S of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all the
resistances are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal.

e. By touching the + side of the tester to the P terminal of ISPM and the -
side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all
the resistances are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal.

f. By touching the - side of the tester to the P terminal of ISPM and the +
side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all
the resistances are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal.

g. By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal of ISPM and the +
side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all

12
the resistances are more than 100 kΩ, it is normal.

h. By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal of ISPM and the -
side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM, measure the resistance. If all
the resistances are more than 1 kΩ, it is normal.

409
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Checking procedure for the electronic expansion valve

Indoor unit electronic expansion valve Outdoor unit electronic expansion valve

Locked with fully closed Check the liquid pipe temperature during the It is abnormal if the liquid pipe pressu-
heating process. It is abnormal if the temperatu- re does not increase during the cooling
re does not increase. process.

Locked with slightly open It is abnormal under the following condition: It is abnormal if the liquid pipe pressure
does not increase and the outlet tempe-
The temperature of the freeze protection ther-
rature of the expansion valve decreases
mistor becomes lower than the suction air tem-
after the cooling process starts.
perature when the unit which is under chechink
Locked with fully open stops and the other units are under the cooling It is abnormal under the following con-
process. ditions: after the heating process for
more than 30 minutes, the discharge
gas temperature of the compressor is
Electronic expansion valve
not 10°C higher than the condensing
Freeze protection thermistor temperature and there is no other faults,
such as an excessive charge of refrige-
rant and others.

410
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

 
Checking procedure for the compressor

Check list on compressor

Client:___________________________ Model: __________________________ Date: ______________________

Serial No.: _______________________ Production date: __________________ Checker: ___________________

No. Check item Check method Result Remarks

1. Is wire of thermistor correctly connected by
viewing?
Is THM9 correctly connected?
1 2. Check to ensure the 7-segment indication of
THM9: discharge gas thermistor Td when compressor is operating.
Td: temperature of THM9
1. Check to ensure that thermistor on the top of
compressor is correctly mounted by viewing?
2 Is thermistor THM9 disconnected? 2. Check to ensure that actually measured tem-
perature is the same as the indication during
check mode.
3 Is current sensor faulty? 1. Check to ensure that indication A1 and A2 are
0 during compressor stopping.
Is current sensing part on PCB2
4 2. Check to ensure that indication A1 and A2 are
faulty?
not 0 during compressor running.
Is the direction of current sensor
5 Check the direction => by viewing.
(CTU, CTV) reverse?
Are power source wires, U and
6 V inserted correctly into current Check to ensure that wires are correctly inserted
sensor?
Is expansion valve (MV1) correctly Check to ensure that MV1 to CN5A is correctly
7
connected? connected
Is exp. valve coil (MV1) correctly Check to ensure that each coil is correctly moun-
8
connected? ted on the valve.
Are the refrigeration cycle and Check to ensure that refrigerant is flowing into
9 electrical wiring system incorrectly indoor units by operating one refrigerating cycle
connected? only from the outdoor unit.
Check the following by the check mode of outdo-
or units.
Is opening of expansion valve 1. Liquid pipe temperature (TL) < Control informa-
10
completely closed (locked)? tion B2 during cooling operation
2. Liquid pipe temperature (TL) > Control informa-
tion B2 during heating operation
Are the contacts for compressor Check the surface of each contact (L1, L2 and
12
magnetic switch CMC1 faulty? L3) by viewing.
Check to ensure that voltage imbalance is smaller
Is there any voltage abnormality than 3%.
13
among L1-L2, L2‑L3 and L3-L1? Please note that power source voltage must be

14
Is the compressor oil acidified
during compressor motor burning?
within 380V or 220V+10%.

Check to ensure that the oil color is not black.

12

411
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
 12  Troubleshooting

• Additional Information for “CHECK LIST ON COMPRESSOR”

Check item Additional information (mechanism of the compressor failure)

The liquid refrigerant return volume to the compressor is controlled by the discharge gas temperature
Td when compressor is operating. If Td thermistor is disconnected, the liquid refrigerant return volume
1&2 will become small by detecting the temperature even if the actual discharge gas temperature is high.
Therefore, this abnormal overheating by detecting the temperature operation will result in insulation
failure of the motor winding.
Overcurrent control (operating frequency control) is performed by detecting current by the PCB2.
3&4 In this case, winding insulation failure will occur, since control is not available in spite of actually high
current.
The current sensor checks phase and adjusts output electrical wave in addition to the above mentioned
5&6 items. If fault occurs, the output electrical wave becomes unstable giving stress to the motor winding,
resulting in winding insulation failure.
During a cooling operation, SH is controlled by MV of each indoor units.
During a heating operation, Td is controlled by MV1.
7 &8
If expansion valves are incorrectly connected, correct control is not available, resulting in compressor
seizure depending on liquid refrigerant returning conditions or motor winding insulation failure depen-
ding on overheating conditions.
If the refrigeration cycle and electrical system are incorrectly connected, abnormally low suction pres-
9 sure operation is maintained or abnormally high discharge pressure operation is maintained, resulting
in giving stress to the compressor, since their correct control is not available.
If the expansion valve and electrical system are incorrectly connected, abnormally low suction pressure
10 operation is maintained or abnormally high discharge pressure operation is maintained, resulting in
giving stress to the compressor, since their correct control is not available.
11 The compressor may be locked due to the liquid return operation during the cooling operation.
In the case that the contacting resistance becomes big, voltage imbalance among each phase will cau-
12
se abnormal overcurrent.
In this case, overcurrent will occur, efficiency will decrease or the motor winding will be excessively
13
heated.
14 In the case, it will result in motor burning or compressor seizure.

412
SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012
Hitachi Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A.
Ronda Shimizu, 1 - Políg. Ind. Can Torrella
08233 Vacarisses (Barcelona) España

Hitachi certifies that our products have met EU consumer safety,

health and environmental requirements.

Hitachi Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A. is certified with:

ISO 9001 of AENOR, Spain for its Quality Management accordance
with the standard
ISO 14001 of AENOR Spain for its Environmental Management
systems accordance with the standard.

Hitachi air conditioning products are manufactured according to:

ISO 9001 of JQA, Japan for its Quality Management accordance with
the standard
ISO 14001 of JACO, Japan for its Environmental Management
accordance with the standard.

HITACHI participates in the Eurovent Certification Programme; the

certified data of certified models are listed in the Eurovent Certification
Online Directory (www.eurovent-certification.com).

SMGB0070 rev.2 - 04/2012 Printed in Spain